JP7342778B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

For example, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a lottery process based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and if the lottery result is a specific result, a predetermined benefit is given to the player. (For example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2004-81853

Here, there is still room for improvement in gaming machines such as those exemplified above in terms of game effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably perform game effects.

The present invention
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
an attachment determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
Granting a benefit that allows the player to receive a benefit based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being a granting response result in which the special information to be determined corresponds to the granting information. means and
A game repeat operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means that the game repeat operation is terminated once in the game round. a game cycle control means for controlling a predetermined notification means so that the game cycle operation is performed;
a suspension notification means for making a reservation notification using the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means so that the player can at least recognize the number of pending games before execution;
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, information corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information is subject to the provision determination, rather than the special information being subject to the provision determination. a means for identifying a destination at a previous timing;
a specific mode means capable of making the notification mode of the suspension notification different from the normal mode based on the specific result of the destination specifying means;
Equipped with
In the specific mode, a plurality of types of modes are set such that the degree of expectation for the grant corresponding result is different,
Means for determining which of the plurality of types of modes should be used as the notification mode of the suspension notification based on the identification result of the destination specifying means;
means for storing in a predetermined storage area predetermined information that can specify which of the plurality of types of modes the suspension notification is in the specific mode;
Equipped with
In a situation where the notification mode of the predetermined suspension notification is set to the specific mode in the first effect state, the second notification in which the suspension notification or the suspension notification in the specific mode is not executed for at least the predetermined suspension notification. It is configured so that it can be in a performance state,
After the end of the second effect state, at least the predetermined suspension notification is determined based on the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage area without making the determination based on the identification result of the destination specifying means. Means for causing suspension notification to be performed in the same notification mode as the notification mode before entering the second performance state among the plurality of types of modes;
Equipped with
The present invention is characterized in that it is configured such that the transition from the first performance state to the second performance state can be executed during execution of a game round.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably perform a game performance.

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in one embodiment. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine developed. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine developed. It is a front view showing the structure of a game board. (a) is a schematic diagram of the second operating port when it is in a closed state, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the second operating port when it is in an open state. (a) is a sectional view of the variable winning device in the closed state, and (b) is a sectional view of the first variable winning device in the open state. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is a figure for explaining the display content on the display screen of a pattern display device. It is a figure for explaining the display content on the display screen of a pattern display device. It is a figure for explaining the display content on the display screen of a pattern display device. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning/losing lottery and the like. It is a figure showing an example of a validity table. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the jackpot type table for the first special symbol, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the jackpot type table for the second special symbol. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table for a jackpot, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table for a loss. 3 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing in the MPU of the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart showing the winning process for the operating port. It is a flowchart which shows information acquisition processing. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing. It is a flowchart showing game time control processing. 3 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuation start processing. 7 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a variable display time. It is a flowchart showing gaming state transition processing. It is a flowchart showing the big prize opening opening/closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the time of the end of opening/closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows pending prefetch processing. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the production control device and its peripheral equipment. It is a flow chart which shows production setting processing in MPU of a production control device. 12 is a flowchart illustrating pending command handling processing. It is a figure showing the composition of a storage area for reservation. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a suspension notice performance, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining suspension change points during a game round. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for a pending notice. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining production mode. It is a diagram showing an example of a final display mode lottery table. It is a figure showing an example of a performance scenario lottery table. (a) is a flowchart showing the first execution process of a pending notice, and (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of a display mode storage area. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a change suggestion performance. (a) is a flowchart showing processing corresponding to commands at the time of shift, and (b) is a diagram for explaining shift processing of a pending image. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special figure fluctuation display. It is a flowchart which shows processing for production mode switching. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a setting process for returning with advance notice. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 2nd execution of a suspension notice. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 3rd execution of a suspension notice. It is a flowchart which shows the process for promotion of a pending notice. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for promotion determination. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for reservation. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for reservation. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for reservation. 12 is a flowchart illustrating pending command handling processing according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows processing for production mode switching. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd setting process for a reservation notice. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special figure fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for reservation. It is a flow chart which shows processing for production mode switching concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for return determination. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for reservation. It is a figure which shows an example of the variable display time table based on 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for a pending notice. It is a diagram showing an example of a final display mode lottery table. It is a diagram showing an example of a final display mode lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for opening/closing execution modes. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a setting process for returning with advance notice. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for return determination. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for reservation. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for reservation. (a) is a flowchart showing information acquisition processing according to the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing suspension command setting processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating pending command handling processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st pending prefetch process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for opening/closing execution modes. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd pending prefetching process. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a setting process for returning with advance notice. It is a figure which shows an example of an upper limit display mode table. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for reservation. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for reservation. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration according to a sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing in MPU of a performance control device. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating a process for restoring a pending notice. 3 is a flowchart illustrating display mode setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special figure fluctuation display. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 4th execution of a suspension notice. It is a flowchart which shows the process for promotion of a pending notice. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for reservation. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for reservation. (a) is a flowchart showing main processing according to the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows production setting processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating display mode setting processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for reservation. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for reservation. It is a flowchart which shows the production mode switching process based on 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows mode switching determination processing. It is a figure which shows the aspect of switching restriction of a production mode. It is a figure which shows the switching aspect of the production mode based on 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows processing for production mode switching. 12 is a flowchart illustrating pending command handling processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd setting process for a reservation notice. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image for reservation.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10 seen from the front side, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 developed. In addition, in FIG. 2, the configuration within the gaming area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

The outer frame 11 is constructed by connecting plate materials on four sides, and has a rectangular frame shape. By attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall. Note that the outer frame 11 is not an essential component of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in an island facility of a game parlor.

The gaming machine main body 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 in an openable and closable state. Specifically, an upper supporting metal fitting 17 is fixed to the connecting portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a lower support fitting 17 is fixed to the connecting portion of the lower frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11. A side support fitting 18 is provided. These upper support metal fittings 17 and lower support metal fittings 18 constitute a support mechanism, and the support mechanism allows the gaming machine main body 12 to rotate on the left side with respect to the outer frame 11 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to rotate forward of the pachinko machine 10 with the right side as the rotation tip side (see FIGS. 2 and 3).

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit disposed behind the inner frame 13. 15. Note that an inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, when viewed from the front, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation tip side.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip end when viewed from the front. In addition, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated rearward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip end when viewed from the front. (see Figure 3).

Next, the front door frame 14 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a frame body 20 made of synthetic resin whose outer shape is almost the same as the outer frame 11, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. There is. A generally elliptical window 21 is formed in the center of the frame 20 so that almost the entire area of the game area PE, which will be described later, can be viewed from the front. It is closed from the back side of the front door frame 14.

The glass unit 22 includes a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder that holds the glass panels 23. The glass holder is formed with a partition section that partitions the holding area of the glass panel 23 into front and rear sections, and both glass panels 23 face each other in the front and rear directions with the partition section in between. In other words, by securing a predetermined gap between both glass panels 23, interference between the glass panels 23 is avoided, and the gaming area PE is covered twice from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the glass panels 23. It is in a state.

Note that it is not always necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be individually attached to the frame 20. Furthermore, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more. However, from the viewpoint of improving safety and crime prevention, it is preferable to employ a plurality of glass panels and to make these glass panels face each other front and back with a predetermined gap in between. Incidentally, it is also possible to use a transparent synthetic resin panel member in place of the glass panel.

As shown in FIG. 1, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window portion 21). For example, a lamp section (annular illumination section) 26 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED is provided along the periphery of the window section 21 . The lamp section 26 lights up or flashes in response to changes in the gaming state, such as when hitting a jackpot or reaching a predetermined reach. In addition, an error display lamp section 27 is provided at the center of the lamp section 26 and at the top of the pachinko machine 10, which lights up in the event of a predetermined error, and furthermore, on the left and right sides of the error display lamp section 27, prize ball lamps that light up while prize balls are being paid out are provided. A section 28 is provided. Further, a speaker section 29 is provided at a position close to the left and right prize ball lamp sections 28, which outputs sound effects and the like according to the game state.

Below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulge portion 31 and a lower bulge portion 32 that bulge toward the front are vertically arranged in parallel. An upper tray 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge 31, and a lower tray 34 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge 32. The upper tray 33 has a function of temporarily storing game balls put out from a payout device described later, and guiding them to the game ball firing mechanism side described later while arranging them in a line. Further, the lower tray 34 has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 33.

Further, on the upper surface of the upper bulging portion 31, there is provided an effect operation section 36 (specifically, a push operation button) that is manually operated by the player. For example, by manually operating the performance operation unit 36 in accordance with a suggestion displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, which will be described later, the performance content on the display screen G etc. changes to a predetermined performance content corresponding to the same operation. Become.

A game ball firing handle 41 is provided on the right side of the lower bulging portion 32 so as to protrude toward the front side. By operating the game ball firing handle 41, a game ball is fired from a game ball firing mechanism which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 2, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back side of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is molded from synthetic resin, and has a front door-side upper plate passage communicating with the upper plate 33 and a front door-side lower plate passage communicating with the lower plate 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a socket part that protrudes rearward and is open upward is formed in the upper corner thereof, and by partitioning the socket part into left and right sides by a partition wall, the entrance of the upper tray passage on the front door side is formed. section and an entrance section of the front door side lower plate passage are formed into sections. Game balls entering the upper tray passage on the front door side are guided to the upper tray 33, and game balls entering the lower tray passage on the front door side are guided to the lower tray 34.

On the rear side of the front door frame 14 on the rotation base end side, protruding shafts are provided at the upper and lower ends thereof. These protruding shafts constitute an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13. Further, as shown in FIG. 2, on the rear side of the front door frame 14, a plurality of hook fittings 49 are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction, as shown in FIG. These hooks 49 constitute a locking mechanism for the inner frame 13.

Next, the inner frame 13 will be explained in detail based on FIGS. 2 and 3. The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 50 having a substantially rectangular outer shape like the outer frame 11. The height of the resin base 50 is set to be slightly smaller than the height of the outer frame 11. Further, the resin base 50 is arranged close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the resin base 50. A curtain plate is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close this gap. The curtain board is arranged below the resin base 50 (specifically, its lower end), and when the inner frame 13 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the resin base 50 rests on the curtain board. .

Support fittings 51 and 52 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the front surface of the resin base 50 on the rotation base end side. The support fittings 51 and 52 have shaft holes formed therein, and by inserting the protruding shafts of the front door frame 14 into these shaft holes, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13. ing.

Insertion holes for inserting hook fittings 49 provided on the back side of the front door frame 14 are provided on the front side of the resin base 50 on the rotation tip side. In this pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 3, a locking device 55 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is arranged hidden behind the inner frame 13. Therefore, the front door frame 14 is locked with respect to the inner frame 13 so that the front door frame 14 cannot be opened by locking the hook fitting 49 with the locking device 55 (specifically, the front door hook receiving member) through the insertion hole. Further, the locking device 55 has a plurality of inner frame hook members 57 extending toward the rear of the inner frame 13. When these inner frame hook members 57 are caught on the hook receiving members 19 of the outer frame 11, the game machine main body 12 is locked in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 11.

A cylinder lock 58 for unlocking the locking device 55 is installed at the lower right corner of the resin base 50. The cylinder lock 58 is integrated into the locking device 55, and when the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 58 is turned clockwise, the front door frame 14 is unlocked from the inner frame 13, and the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 58 is turned to the right. The locking device 55 is configured so that when the key is turned to the left, the inner frame 13 is unlocked from the outer frame 11.

A generally elliptical window hole 54 is formed in the center of the resin base 50, and the window hole 54 is closed from the rear by a game board 60 mounted on the resin base 50. The game board 60 includes a wooden plywood and a sheet material covering the front surface of the plywood, and the front surface thereof is exposed to the front side of the resin base 50 through the window hole 54. In this exposed portion, that is, on the front side of the game board 60, a game area PE is formed in which the game balls flow down. Note that the game board 60 is not limited to being made of wood, but may also be made of synthetic resin.

Hereinafter, the game board 60 (particularly the various configurations arranged in the game area PE) will be explained based on FIG. 4. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 60.

The game board 60 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings that pass through the game board 60 in its thickness direction (back and forth direction). Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 61, a first operating opening 62, a second operating opening 63, a through gate 64, a variable winning device 65, a variable display unit 67, and the like.

When a ball enters the general winning opening 61, variable winning device 65, first operating opening 62, and second operating opening 63, it is detected by the winning sensor (detection sensor), and based on the detection result, a predetermined number of balls are entered. Benefits such as payout of prize balls are given to the player. In this case, when a ball enters the general winning hole 61, 10 game balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the variable winning device 65, 15 game balls are paid out. is executed. Furthermore, when a ball enters the first operating port 62, three game balls are put out, and when a ball enters the second operating port 63, one game ball is put out. is executed. Incidentally, even if a ball enters the through gate 64, the game ball is not put out.

Note that the number of these prize balls is arbitrary; for example, the number of prize balls related to the first operating port 62 and the number of prize balls related to the second operating port 63 may be the same, or the number of prize balls related to the second operating port 63 may be the same. The number of prize balls related to this may be larger than the number of prize balls related to the first operating port 62. Further, the number of prize balls related to the variable winning device 65 may be the same as or smaller than the number of prize balls related to other operating ports or the like. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out when a ball enters the through gate 64.

An out port 68 is provided at the bottom of the game board 60, and game balls that have not entered the various ball entry sections are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 68. Here, entering the ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and includes not only the manner in which the game ball is ejected from the gaming area PE after passing through the opening, but also the manner in which the game ball passes through the opening. It also includes a mode in which it is not later ejected from the game area PE. However, in the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish the ball entering the out port 68 from the ball entering the general winning port 61, the operating ports 62, 63, the variable winning device 65, or the through gate 64, Also expressed as winning a prize.

In addition, a large number of nails 69 are planted on the game board 60 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling path of the game balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged. The flow of game balls is diversified by various configurations such as these nails 69 and windmills, and adjustments are made so that winnings in the above-mentioned general prize opening 61 etc. occur with a moderate probability.

At the center of the game board 60, the variable display unit 67 is arranged. The variable display unit 67 is installed on the back side of the game board 60 (FIG. 3), and the display screen G can be viewed through an opening provided in the center of the game board 60. A frame-shaped center frame 76 is attached to the front surface of the game board 60 so as to correspond to the peripheral edge of the opening.

The center frame 76 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board 60, and the gap between the front surface of the center frame 76 and the glass unit 22 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. This prevents the game balls flowing down the game area PE from flowing into the inner area of the center frame 76 and coming into contact with the display screen G. In addition, the center frame 76 disperses the flow paths of the game balls in the game area PE to the left and right, forming a left route passing through the left side of the center frame 76 and a right route passing through the right side.

Whether the game ball flows down (passes) the left route or the right route is determined by the amount of rotational operation of the game ball launch handle 41, that is, the launch force of the game ball. Since the fired game ball enters the game area PE from the upper left side of the game board 60, the stronger the firing force of the game ball, the easier the game ball will flow down the right route.

Specifically, when the player performs a rotational operation of the game ball firing handle 41 as a first firing operation with a rotational operation amount in a first range that is greater than or equal to a predetermined rotational amount and less than a reference rotational amount, the fired game ball When the ball flows down the left route and the player performs a rotation operation of the game ball launch handle 41 with a rotation operation amount in the second range that is greater than or equal to the reference rotation amount as a second launch operation, the fired game ball Flow down the right route. The predetermined amount of rotation is the amount of rotation operation that allows the fired game ball to pass through the guide rail 100 (described later) and enter the game area PE, and the reference amount of rotation is the amount of rotation operation that allows the launched game ball to pass through the guide rail 100 (described later) and enter the game area PE. This is the amount of rotational operation to fire the game ball with an attainable firing force.

A first operating port 62 that is open upward is arranged below the center frame 76 (variable display unit 67). The first operating port 62 is located at the left and right center of the game board 60, but a game component such as a nail 69 is provided to prevent a game ball flowing down the right route from entering the first operating port 62. That is, only game balls flowing down the left route can enter the first operating port 62 to win. Therefore, when a player aims to win a prize at the first operating port 62, he or she plays the game by shooting the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left route. The first operating port 62 is provided with a first operating port winning sensor 62a (FIG. 7), and the game ball that has won in the first operating port 62 is detected by the winning sensor 62a.

A second operating port 63 is arranged on the right side of the center frame 76 (variable display unit 67). The configuration of the second operating port 63 will be explained with reference to FIG. 5.

The second actuating port 63 is provided with a general electric accessory 63a (variable receiving means) as a guide piece (support piece) consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. Specifically, the pair of movable pieces supported so as to be rotatable in the left-right direction are arranged so as to sandwich the opening serving as the second operating port 63 from both left and right sides.

By rotating each movable piece, the closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) shown in FIG. 5(a) and the open state (support state or guide state) shown in FIG. 5(b) are achieved. It is possible to switch to. Specifically, a protrusion 63d is provided at the upper part of the second operating port 63 so as to protrude forward, and when the movable piece is in the upright position as shown in FIG. 5(a), The gap between each movable piece and the protrusion 63d becomes less than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball is prevented from flowing into the second operating port 63. On the other hand, when the movable piece rotates to be inclined outward as shown in FIG. 5(b), an opening large enough to allow the game ball to pass through is formed between it and the protrusion 63d. , the game ball is allowed to flow into the second operating port 63. The second operating port 63 is provided with a second operating port winning sensor 63c, and the game ball that has won in the second operating port 63 is detected by the winning sensor 63c.

Moreover, the general electric accessory 63a is provided with a drive part 63b that drives each movable piece. Each movable piece is switched between an open state (tilted position) and a closed state (erected position) by being driven by the driving portion 63b through a link mechanism (not shown). Incidentally, the first actuating port 62 is not provided with a general electrical accessory (opening/closing structure).

Note that in the above configuration, when the second operating port 63 is in the closed state, winning is not possible, but it may be configured to allow winning. That is, although it is possible to win a prize through the second operating port 63 when the opening is in the closed state, it may be configured such that winning is more difficult (it becomes difficult to win) than in the open state. In short, it is sufficient that the ease of entering the second operating port 63 is different between the open state and the closed state, and the degree of closing or opening is arbitrary. In addition, the configuration of the utility appliance 63a is not limited to the above, and for example, the movable piece rotates back and forth or slides back and forth or left and right to open and close the second operating port 63. It may be something that does.

As shown in FIG. 4, a through gate 64 is arranged above (upstream side) of the second operating port 63 in the right route. The through gate 64 has a through hole (not shown) that penetrates in the vertical direction, and the game ball that enters the through gate 64 passes through the through gate 64 and flows down the game area PE again. Therefore, the game ball that enters the through gate 64 can also enter the second operating port 63. The through gate 64 is provided with a through prize sensor 64a (FIG. 7), and the game ball that has won the through gate 64 is detected by the prize winning sensor 64a.

The through gate 64 serves as a trigger for opening the general electric accessory 63a provided at the second operating port 63. Specifically, an internal lottery is held when a prize is won in the through gate 64, and when the result of the internal lottery becomes an opening result (support winning), the utility power utility object 63a is changed from a closed state to an open state, Thereafter, an accessory opening/closing game (support execution mode) for returning to the closed state is executed.

In the right route, a variable prize winning device 65 is arranged below (downstream side) the second operating port 63. The configuration of the variable prize winning device 65 will be explained with reference to FIG.

The variable winning device 65 includes a large winning opening 65a that opens forward, and an opening/closing door 65b that opens and closes the large winning opening 65a. The big prize opening 65a has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is large enough to allow a plurality of game balls to win at the same time. The grand prize opening 65a communicates with a guide passage 65e provided on the back side of the game board 60, and is configured so that all game balls that have entered the grand prize opening 65a are guided to the guiding passage 65e. A winning sensor 65c for the big winning hole is provided in the guide passage 65e, and the game ball that has won the big winning hole 65a is detected by the winning sensor 65c.

Further, the variable winning device 65 is provided with a drive section 65d that drives the opening/closing door 65b. The opening/closing door 65b is driven by the drive unit 65d through a link mechanism (not shown), so that a closed state in which no game ball can enter the grand prize opening 65a (FIG. 6(a)) and a closed state in which no game ball can enter the grand prize opening 65a are established. The state is switched to an open state (FIG. 6(b)) in which prizes can be won. Specifically, the opening/closing door 65b is normally in a closed state, and is switched to an open state when a transition to the opening/closing execution mode (jackpot game) is won in an internal lottery.

The opening/closing execution mode is a mode to which the player enters when a jackpot is won. The opening/closing execution mode will be described in detail later. The opening mode of the variable prize winning device 65 is variable, with the passage of a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) or the winning of a predetermined number of prizes (e.g., 10) as one round in the case of a jackpot, and multiple rounds (e.g., 10 rounds) as the upper limit. There is a mode in which the winning device 65 is repeatedly opened.

In addition, in the above-mentioned structure, when it is in the closed state, it is not possible to win a prize in the grand prize opening 65a, but it may be configured to allow a prize to be won. That is, although it is possible to win the big prize opening 65a when it is in the closed state, it may be configured such that it is more difficult to win (it becomes difficult to win) than when it is in the open state. In short, it is sufficient that the ease of entering the big prize opening 65a is different between the open state and the closed state, and the degree of closing or opening is arbitrary.

Here, only the game ball flowing down the right route can win the second operating port 63, the through gate 64, and the variable prize winning device 65. Therefore, when a player aims to win a prize in the second operating port 63, through gate 64, or variable prize winning device 65, the player plays the game by shooting the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right route.

As shown in FIG. 4, a main display unit 81 is provided below the variable winning device 65. The main display unit 81 is arranged along the lower outer edge of the game area PE, and protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board 60. On the front side of the main display unit 81, there are provided a special figure display section 43 and a regular figure display section 44 on which predetermined patterns and the like are displayed. Each of these display sections 43 and 44 is visible from the front through the glass unit 22 of the front door frame 14. Note that the gap between the front surface of the main display unit 81 and the glass unit 22 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball is prevented from passing in front of the main display unit 81, and the visibility of the various display sections 43 and 44 is ensured.

The special figure display section 43 includes a first special figure display section AS that displays the lottery results based on winnings to the first operating port 62, and a first special drawing display section AS that displays the lottery results based on winnings to the second operating port 63. A second special symbol display section BS for displaying the lottery results is provided.

In the first special figure display section AS, a variable display of symbols is performed using a prize winning to the first operating port 62 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, a symbol is displayed based on a winning to the first operating port 62. The results of the internal lottery will be clearly displayed. If the result of the internal lottery based on the prize entered into the first operation port 62 is a winning result corresponding to a jackpot, the variable display is stopped on the first special symbol display section AS, and a predetermined pattern is displayed as the stop result. After being displayed, the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the second special figure display section BS, a variable display of symbols is performed using a prize winning to the second operating port 63 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, a symbol is displayed based on a winning to the second operating port 63. The results of the internal lottery will be clearly displayed. If the result of the internal lottery based on the prize entered into the second actuating port 63 is a winning result corresponding to a jackpot, the variable display is stopped on the second special symbol display section BS, and a predetermined pattern is displayed as the stopping result. After being displayed, the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the following, in order to distinguish between the symbols that are displayed in a variable manner when a winning is made to the first operating port 62 and the symbols that are displayed in a variable manner that is triggered by a winning that is made to the second operating port 63, the former is referred to as the first special symbol. Alternatively, it is called the first special pattern, and the latter is sometimes called the second special pattern or the second special pattern.

Here, based on winning to either of the actuating ports 62, 63, a variable display is started in the corresponding special figure display section AS, BS, and a predetermined stop result is displayed until the above-mentioned variable display is stopped. corresponds to one game time on the special figure display sections AS and BS. However, one game round is not limited to the above content, for example, a single display area is provided, and even if a winning occurs in either of the operating ports 62, 63, that single display area is displayed. In a configuration in which a variable display is performed in a display area, one gaming session is the time from when the variable display starts in the single display area until the variable display is stopped while displaying a predetermined stop result. shall be.

Further, the main display unit 81 is provided with a special figure reservation number display section AM. The number of times a game ball enters the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 is reserved up to four times, and the special figure reservation number display section AM shows the first special figure (first actuation port 63). The number of reservations for the opening 62) and the number of reservations for the second special figure (second operation opening 63) can be displayed separately.

The general figure display section 44 is a display section for clearly indicating the result of an internal lottery conducted based on winnings in the through gate 64. In this case, in the general figure display section 44, the winning pattern in the through gate 64 is used as a trigger to display the symbols in a variable manner, and as a result of the stoppage of the variable display, an internal lottery is performed based on the winning in the through gate 64. The results are clearly displayed. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning through gate 64 is a winning result that corresponds to the transition to the support state in which the general public utility object 63a is opened, a predetermined stop result will be displayed on the general public figure display section 44. is displayed and the fluctuation display is stopped, then it moves to the support state. Note that the symbols that are displayed in a variable manner upon winning the through gate 64 are sometimes referred to as ordinary symbols or common symbols.

Here, based on the winning in the through gate 64, a variable display is started on the display section 44 for ordinary figures, a predetermined stop result is displayed, and until the above-mentioned variable display is stopped, the display section 44 for ordinary figures This corresponds to one game time in . In the following, in order to distinguish between the game times on the normal pattern display section 44 and the game times on the special pattern display sections AS and BS, the former may be referred to as a normal pattern game period, and the latter may be referred to as a special pattern game period.

Further, the display section 44 for ordinary figures is provided with a reserved number display section FM for ordinary figures. The number of times a game ball enters the through gate 64 can be held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held general drawings (through gate 64) can be displayed on the normal drawing holding number display section FM. .

The special figure display section 43 and the regular figure display section 44 are configured by a segment display device having a plurality of segments, but are not limited to this, and may be configured by other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device. It's okay.

In addition, although not shown, the main display unit 81 is provided with a round display section for clearly indicating the number of rounds in the opening/closing execution mode. The round display section starts displaying the number of rounds when or when the opening/closing execution mode is started. This display continues without changing the display content while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, and ends when or when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Next, the variable display unit 67 will be explained. The variable display unit 67 is provided with a symbol display device 75 that variably displays (or variably displays or switches) a symbol, which is a type of symbol.

The symbol display device 75 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device to be described later. Note that the symbol display device 75 is not limited to being a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

On the symbol display device 75, symbols are displayed side by side, for example, at the top, middle, and bottom, and these symbols are scrolled in the left-right direction so as to be displayed variably. In this case, the variable display on the symbol display device 75 is started based on the winning of the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63. That is, when a variable display is performed on the special figure display section 43, a variable display is also performed on the symbol display device 75 accordingly. When the variable winning device 65 shifts to the jackpot game state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the variable winning device 65 is in the open state, the symbol display device 75 stops displaying a predetermined symbol combination on a preset active line. .

Further, on the symbol display device 75, a pending display corresponding to the first special symbol display section AS and the second special symbol display section BS is performed. In this hold display, a predetermined hold image is displayed, and the number of displayed images indicates the number of hold images of each operating port 63, 64. Note that the number of reservations is not limited to that shown by the above-mentioned reservation image, and may be indicated by a numerical display. In addition, it is not limited to the symbol display device 75, and for example, a display section provided on the game board 60 separately from the symbol display device 75 (a display section separate from each pending number display section AM, FM of the main display unit 81). Alternatively, the configuration may include a light emitting section (reservation lamp section) or the like.

The configuration of the inner frame 13 will be explained with reference to FIG. 2 again. A game ball firing mechanism 110 is provided below the mounting area of the game board 60 on the resin base 50. The game ball firing mechanism 110 fires game balls toward the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball firing handle 41. The game ball launch mechanism 110 includes a solenoid 111 that launches a game ball placed at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail 112 that defines the launch direction of the game ball launched by the solenoid 111, and a game ball that launches the game ball at the launch standby position. The main components include a ball feeding device 113 that supplies the ball, and a base plate 114 on which the various components 111 to 113 are attached. The base plate 114 is fixed to the resin base 50, so that the game ball firing mechanism 110 is integrated with the resin base 50.

The firing rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in an obliquely inclined state so as to be inclined upward toward the game board 60 side. A ball stopper is provided at a position near the downstream end (that is, the lower end) of the firing rail 112 for stopping the game balls supplied from the ball feeding device 113 at the above-mentioned firing standby position. The solenoid 111 is arranged at a position further downstream than the ball stopper.

The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power source and a launch control device, which will be described later. The output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the expansion and contraction direction based on the output of the electric signal from the power supply and the firing control device, so that the game ball placed in the firing standby position is moved to the game board 60 side, more specifically, the game ball It is launched toward the guide rail 100 attached to the board 60.

As shown in FIG. 4, the guide rail 100 divides the gaming area PE so that the outer shape of the gaming area PE is approximately circular. Further, the guide rail 100 consists of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 that are arranged to face each other with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a single guide path 103 is defined by both rails 101 and 102. It is formed. The guide passage 103 has an entrance portion open to the tip side (diagonally downward) of the launch rail 112, and an exit portion located above the game area PE. The game ball fired based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the firing rail 112 → the guide rail 100 (entrance part → exit part).

In addition, on the forward side of the exit part of the game board 60, more specifically, near the tip of the inner rail 101, a return prevention member 106 is attached to prevent the game balls that have reached the game area PE from returning to the guide path 103. This prevents the game ball that has reached the game area PE first from hindering the launch of the subsequent game ball.

As shown in FIG. 2, the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112 are arranged such that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip end portion of the launch rail 112 diagonally face each other across the lower edge of the game board 60. . That is, both of the rails 100 and 112 are arranged such that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 are shifted from side to side near the lower edge of the game board 60. This allows both rails 100 and 112 to approach the lower edge of the game board 60, while forming a gap at a predetermined interval between the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the firing rail 112.

A foul ball passage 46 is provided below the gap thus formed. The foul ball passage 46 is integrally formed with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If the game balls fired from the game ball launch mechanism 110 do not reach the game area PE and return inside the guide path 103 as foul balls, those foul balls will enter the foul ball path 46 through the above-mentioned gap. becomes. The foul ball passage 46 communicates with the lower tray passage on the front door side, and the game balls that have entered the foul ball passage 46 are discharged to the lower tray 34. As a result, the foul ball is returned to the player while interference between the foul ball and the next game ball to be fired is suppressed.

In the resin base 50, a through hole is formed on the left side of the firing rail 112 (specifically, on the side supporting the front door frame 14) that penetrates the resin base 50 in the front and back direction, and a passage forming member is inserted into this through hole. 121 are arranged. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the resin base 50 and has a main body side upper plate passage and a main body side lower plate passage. The upstream sides of the main body side upper tray passage and the main body side lower tray passage communicate with a game ball distribution section to be described later. Further, a socket portion of a passage forming unit 45 attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted below the passage forming member 121, and a front door side upper tray passage is arranged below the main body side upper tray passage. A front door side upper plate passage is arranged below the main body side lower plate passage.

An opening/closing member 124 for opening and closing the main body side upper plate passage and the main body side lower plate passage is attached below the passage forming member 121 in the resin base 50. The opening/closing member 124 is rotatably supported in the front-rear direction by a support shaft provided at its lower end, and further includes a biasing member that biases the opening/closing member 124 to a forward position that closes the main body side upper plate passage and the main body side lower plate passage. It is provided. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13, the opening/closing member 124 rises as shown in the figure and closes the main body side upper tray passage and the main body side lower tray passage. Thereby, when the front door frame 14 is opened with game balls stored in the main body side upper tray passage or the main body side lower tray passage, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of the stored balls falling out. On the other hand, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening/closing member 124 is pushed open by the socket provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14 against the urging force. In this state, the main body side upper plate passage and the front door side upper plate passage are in communication, and the main body side lower plate passage and the front door side lower plate passage are in communication.

Next, the back structure of the inner frame 13 (resin base 50 and game board 60) will be explained based on FIG.

Bearing fittings 132 are arranged vertically in parallel on the rotation base end side of the back surface of the resin base 50. Bearing parts are formed in the bearing fitting 132 at vertically spaced intervals, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing parts.

A plurality of locking metal fittings are provided on the back surface of the resin base 50, and the game board 60 is attached to the resin base 50 by these locking metal fittings. Here, the configuration of the back side of the game board 60 will be explained.

A display control device is attached to the variable display unit 67 arranged in the center of the game board 60 so as to cover the variable display unit 67 from behind (not shown). A production control device unit 142 is mounted behind the display control device so as to overlap with the display control device. The production control device unit 142 is configured to include a production control device 143 and a mounting base 144, and the production control device 143 is mounted on the mounting base 144.

The production control device 143 includes a production control board that controls audio, lamp displays, and the display control device according to instructions from a main control device to be described later, and the production control board includes a board box 145 made of a transparent resin material or the like. It is housed and configured.

On the back side of the game board 60, as shown in FIG. 3, a collection board 150 is provided below the variable display unit 67. The gathering board 150 is provided with a game ball collection mechanism that collects game balls that have won into various winning holes, a detection mechanism that detects the entry of game balls into various winning holes, and the like.

To explain the game ball collection mechanism, the collection board 150 is provided with collection passages that individually correspond to various ball entry parts such as the general prize opening 61. These recovery passages descend from the ball entry portions along the back side of the game board 60, and define the falling paths of the game balls. Each collection path joins near the lower end of the game board 60, and all the game balls that have passed through the ball entry part such as the general prize opening 61 gather at the bottom of the game board 60 via the collection path. Become. The exit portion of each collection path is open downward, and a discharge path is provided on the forward side (specifically, below the game board 60). The game balls gathered below the game board 60 by the collection path are led out to the discharge path. It should be noted that the out port 68 similarly communicates with the discharge passage, and game balls that have not won in any of the winning ports are also led out to the discharge passage through the out port 68.

To explain the detection mechanism, the collection board 150 is provided with winning sensors (detection sensors) that individually correspond to various ball entry parts such as the general winning opening 61. These various winning sensors are placed in the middle of each collection path that connects to the ball entry section such as the general winning opening 61, and are used to detect game balls when the falling path of the game ball is defined in the collection path. Detect passage. That is, when the game ball passes through a detection area provided in the middle of each collection path, entry of the ball into the ball entry opening, such as the general prize winning opening 61, is detected. The winning sensor is composed of, for example, a magnetic sensor that detects changes in the magnetic field that occur when a game ball passes through a detection area.

These various winning sensors are electrically connected to a main controller unit 160 (more specifically, the main controller) provided on the back side of the game board 60, and detection signals from these winning sensors are sent to the main controller unit 160. The configuration is such that it is output as follows. The main controller unit 160 and its associated configuration will be described below.

The main controller unit 160 is mounted on the game board 60 so as to cover the collection board 150 from the rear side, and is composed of a synthetic resin mounting base 161 and a main controller 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. has been done. The main control device 162 is equipped with a main control board having a function (main control circuit) that controls the main control of the game, and the main control board is housed in a board box 163 made of a transparent resin material or the like. There is.

The board box 163 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are unopenably connected by a sealing portion serving as a sealing means, thereby sealing the board box 163. A plurality of sealing parts are provided on the long sides of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

Any configuration can be applied to the sealing part as long as it connects the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner; It is intended to be irrevocably bound. The sealing process performed by the sealing section is to prevent unauthorized opening after the seal has been sealed, and even if unauthorized opening occurs, it will be possible to detect this situation early and easily. It is possible to perform the sealing process again later. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking pawl into at least one elongated hole among the plurality of sealing parts. When opening the board box 163, such as when a problem occurs with the housed main control board or when inspecting the main control board, the connecting part between the sealing part in which the locking claw is inserted and another sealing part is removed. disconnect. As a result, the box base and box cover of the board box 163 are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, if the sealing process is to be performed again, insert the locking claw into the long hole of the other sealing part. If a history indicating that the board box 163 has been opened is left in the board box 163, it can be easily discovered by looking at the board box 163 that the board box 163 has been opened in an unauthorized manner.

A plurality of coupling pieces are provided on one short side of the board box 163 so as to protrude laterally. These joining pieces have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of pieces to be joined formed on the mounting base 161, and the sealing process is performed between the board box 163 and the mounting base 161 by the joining pieces and the joined pieces. be exposed.

Next, the back pack unit 15 will be explained based on FIGS. 2 and 3.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is covered from the rear by a back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201, to which a dispensing mechanism section 202, a discharge passage board 203, and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached.

The back pack 201 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIG. 3, it includes a base part 211 to which the payout mechanism part 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover part 212 that protrudes toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. and has. The protective cover portion 212 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the top surface are closed, and only the bottom surface is open, and has a size sufficient to at least surround the variable display unit 67.

An external output terminal 213 is provided on the upper right side of the base portion 211. The external output terminal 213 is provided with various output terminals, and various signals are outputted to the hall computer HC (management control device) on the gaming hall side through these output terminals. In addition, a pair of upper and lower latching pins are provided on the right end of the base portion 211 when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the latching pins are inserted into a bearing fitting 132 (specifically, a bearing portion) provided on the inner frame 13. By doing so, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13. Further, a fastener for fastening to a fastened hole provided in the inner frame 13 is provided at the rotating tip of the base portion 211, and by fitting the fastening tool into the fastened hole. A back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13.

The dispensing mechanism section 202 is disposed on the base section 211 so as to bypass the protective cover section 212. The payout mechanism section 202 is provided with a tank 221 which is disposed at the top of the back pack 201 and opens upward, and the tank 221 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall. Ru. A tank rail that slopes gently toward the downstream side is connected to the lower part of the tank 221, and a case rail that extends in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail. A dispensing device 222 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail. The game balls put out by the payout device 222 are supplied to the game ball distribution section provided in the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 222.

The game ball distribution section has a function of distributing the game balls paid out from the payout device 222 to either the upper tray 33, the lower tray 34, or the discharge passage described later, and the inner opening is located on the main body side described above. It is formed so that it communicates with the upper plate 33 via the upper plate passage and the front door side upper plate passage, and the outer opening communicates with the lower plate 34 via the main body side lower plate passage and the front door side lower plate passage. .

As shown in FIG. 3, a discharge passage board 203 and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the lower end of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end in the front and rear directions. A discharge passageway that is open to the rear is formed on the surface of the discharge passage board 203 facing the control device assembly unit 204 , and the open portion of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 204 . The discharge passage is formed to discharge game balls to the island equipment of the game hall, etc., and the game balls led to the discharge passage from the above-mentioned collection passage etc. are delivered to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by passing through the discharge passage. be discharged.

The control device assembly unit 204 has a horizontally elongated mounting base, and the dispensing control device 181 and the power supply and firing control device 191 are mounted on the mounting base. The payout control device 181 and the power source and launch control device 191 are arranged one on top of the other so that the payout control device 181 is located at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

In the payout control device 181, a payout control board for controlling the payout device 222 is housed in a board box, and a state return switch provided on the payout control board projects outside the board box. For example, when a state recovery switch is pressed when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing device 222, the ball jam is cleared.

The power supply and launch control device 191 has a power supply and launch control board housed in a board box, and the board generates and outputs a predetermined power required by various control devices, and furthermore, the power supply and launch control board is housed in a board box, and the board generates and outputs a predetermined power required for various control devices, etc., and also allows the player to launch game balls. The launch of the game ball is controlled by operating the handle 41.

The power supply and launch control device 191 is provided with a power failure monitoring unit (power failure monitoring circuit) 315 that monitors the power source and detects the occurrence of a power outage state such as a power outage. This pachinko machine 10 has a memory retention function for various data, so that even in the event of a power outage, the state at the time of the power outage is retained, and when the power is restored, it can be restored to the state at the time of the power outage. It has become. For example, when the power is shut off in a normal procedure, such as when a game hall is closed, the state before the shutoff is stored and retained. Further, the power supply and launch control device 191 is provided with a RAM erase switch. If you turn on the power while holding down the RAM erase switch, the RAM data will be initialized.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagram of FIG. 7.

An MPU 312 is mounted on the main control board 311 of the main control device 162 . The MPU 312 includes a ROM 313 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 312, and a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 313. A certain RAM 314, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are built in.

The RAM 314 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data using the power supply and backup voltage from the launch control device 191 even after a power outage occurs, and the RAM 314 temporarily stores various data. A backup area is provided separately from the storage area. The backup area is an area for storing the stack pointer at the time of power cutoff, the values of each register, I/O, etc. when a power cutoff occurs. At the time of recovery from a power outage state (at the time of power restoration), the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power outage based on the information in the backup area.

Note that in the configuration shown in FIG. 7, the ROM 313 and RAM 314 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 312, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which each of them is integrated into chips may be used. This also applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 162.

The MPU 312 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A payout control device 181 and a power supply and firing control device 191 are connected to the input side of the MPU 312. Furthermore, various sensors are connected to the input side of the MPU 312. The various sensors include a general winning opening 61, a first operating opening 62, a second operating opening 63, a through gate 64, a winning sensor 61a for the general winning opening that detects winnings to the variable winning device 65, and a winning sensor 61a for the first operating opening. A sensor 62a, a winning sensor 63c for the second operating opening, a winning sensor 64a for through, a winning sensor 65c for the big winning opening, etc. are provided. The MPU 312 performs winning determination (ball entry determination) for each ball entry portion based on the detection results of these various sensors 61a, 62a, 63c, 364a, and 65c. Furthermore, the MPU 312 executes various lottery drawings based on winnings in the first operating port 62, the second operating port 63, and the through gate 64.

A payout control device 181, an effect control device 143, etc. are connected to the output side of the MPU 312. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 181 based on a winning determination result for a winning ball entry portion corresponding to the paying out of a prize ball.

Various commands such as a fluctuation start command, a type command, a fluctuation end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output to the production control device 143. In this case, the command information storage area 313e of the ROM 313 is referred to when outputting these various commands. Details of these various commands will be explained later. Note that each of the above commands is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as the information of the predetermined number of bytes.

Moreover, the output side of the MPU 312 is connected to a drive section 63b for the common electric accessory 63a and a drive section 65d for the variable winning device 65 as various drive sections. The main control board 311 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 312 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits. Specifically, when the transition to the opening/closing execution mode occurs, the MPU 312 executes drive control of the driving unit 65d so that the opening/closing door 65b of the variable prize winning device 65 is driven. Further, when the transition to the support state occurs, the MPU 312 performs drive control of the drive unit 63b so that each movable piece of the general electric utility object 63a is driven. Furthermore, in each special figure game round, display control of the first special figure display section AS or the second special figure display section BS in the special figure display section 43 is executed. In addition, during the normal figure game round, display control of the normal figure display section 44 is executed.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned external output terminal 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 312, and through this external output terminal 213, information regarding ball entry into various ball entry sections and lottery results such as jackpots is sent to the hall computer HC. Output. This makes it possible to grasp the status of the pachinko machine 10 on the hall computer HC.

The power supply and firing control device 191 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, necessary operating power is generated for the main control board 311, payout control device 181, etc., and the generated operating power is supplied.

The power supply and launch control device 191 is provided with a power outage monitoring section 315, and the power outage monitoring section 315 monitors the stable 24 volt DC voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 191. The power outage monitoring unit 315 determines that a power outage (power cutoff) has occurred when the output voltage from the power supply and launch control device 191 becomes less than 22 volts, and sends a power outage signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable output to the interrupt terminal). As a result, the main controller 162 recognizes the occurrence of a power outage, immediately executes the NMI interrupt process, and further executes the power outage process based on this. By the way, the power supply and launch control device 191 is provided with a power supply section such as a backup capacitor for use in case of power outage, and when a power outage occurs or the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF, the Power for memory retention is supplied to the RAM 314 of the main control device 162 from the power supply unit. Further, the power supply and firing control device 191 is responsible for controlling the firing of the game ball firing mechanism 110, and the game ball firing mechanism 110 is driven when predetermined firing conditions are met.

The payout control device 181 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 222 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

The production control device 143 controls the driving of the lamp sections 26 to 28 and the speaker section 29 provided in the front door frame 14, and controls the display control device 350, based on various commands input from the main control device 162. It is something to do. The display control device 350 executes display control of the symbol display device 75 based on commands input from the production control device 143. In this case, in the production control device 143, based on various commands input from the main control device 162, the variable display time of the symbols on the symbol display device 75 and the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed are determined, Determine whether or not a reach event will occur and the content of the reach effect.

Here, the display contents of the symbol display device 75 will be explained based on FIGS. 8 to 10.

As shown in Figures 8(a) to (j), the pattern, which is a type of pattern, consists of nine types of main patterns, each numbered from ``1'' to ``9'', and a shell-shaped pattern. It is composed of sub-designs. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as octopuses are numbered from "1" to "9" to form the main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 9A, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are set on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75: an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is composed of main symbols and sub-symbols arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper pattern row Z1, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1". A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged on the top, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and it is composed of 20 symbols. Then, on the display screen G, the symbols of each of these symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a cyclically scrolling manner in a predetermined direction. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9(b), on the display screen G, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols (3×3) are stopped and displayed. It is now possible to do so.

Five effective lines are set on the display screen G, namely, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a lower right line L4, and an upper right line L5. Then, the variable display stops in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2, and with a combination of symbols with the same number attached to any active line formed, all symbol rows Z1 When the fluctuation display of ~Z3 ends, a jackpot video is displayed as the occurrence of a normal 4R jackpot result or a 10R probability variable jackpot result, which will be described later.

In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and when a 10R guaranteed variable jackpot result occurs, the same specific symbols The combination will stop displaying. In addition, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols", and if a large 4R winning result usually occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols will stop. Is displayed.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the variable display of each symbol row with reference to FIG. 10. When a game round is started, first, high-speed fluctuating display is started for all symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is difficult or impossible to recognize which symbol row is being displayed in a variable manner. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 10(a), the fluctuating display mode of the upper symbol row Z1 is switched from a high-speed fluctuating display to a slow fluctuating display in which the player can recognize the fluctuating symbols. Then, as shown in FIG. 10(b), when the fluctuating display of the upper symbol row Z1 ends, the fluctuating display mode of the lower symbol row Z3 is switched from the high-speed fluctuating display to the low-speed fluctuating display. Then, as shown in FIG. 10(c), the variable display of the lower symbol row Z3 ends. After the variation of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed, a stop display period is provided in which the stop display is maintained and stands by for a predetermined period.

By the way, in the gaming machine, when the symbols are stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 75, the symbols in the final stop row (the middle symbol row Z2 in this embodiment) are not suddenly stopped, but are gradually displayed while reducing the fluctuating display speed. Generally, it is stopped at In this case, if it is configured to start stopping the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 (final stop row) at the start of the stop display on the special symbol display section 43, the deceleration time until the symbols stop on the symbol display device 75 will be reduced. Accordingly, the time during which the symbol remains stationary is shortened, resulting in a substantial shortening of the stationary display time.

Therefore, before starting the stop display on the special figure display section 43, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 including the final stop row are stopped (temporarily stopped), and then the stop display on the special figure display section 43 is stopped. It is configured to cause the temporarily stopped symbol to be permanently stopped (determined display) in accordance with the start timing of . The display mode of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 during the temporary stop is different from that during the final display. For example, at least one of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 moves gently back and forth, or at least a part of a character such as an octopus (FIG. 8) forming the main symbol or the sub symbol moves. In other words, the temporary stop is performed in such a way that although the symbol appears to be stopped at first glance, it remains in an incomplete stopped state (stopped display). On the other hand, the confirmed display is performed so that the character is completely stopped without any slight reciprocating movements or movements of the character.

In addition, the temporary stop display of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 starts with the stop result corresponding to the result of the win/fail lottery or the type of jackpot, and then shifts to the final display as it is, as well as the temporary stop display that does not correspond to the result of the win/fail lottery or the type of jackpot. After the result is once stopped and displayed, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed again, and then changed to a stop result that corresponds to the result of the winning lottery, etc., and then the display may shift to a final display.

By the way, in the special figure game round executed on the special figure display section 43, the symbols are not temporarily stopped and displayed, but the symbols that have been fluctuated are suddenly stopped as the fluctuating display time elapses, and the state (pictures) (stop display) is maintained until the fixed display time has elapsed. In other words, the stop display of the picture on the special figure display section 43 becomes a fixed display as it is. This also applies to the normal pattern game round executed on the normal pattern display section 44.

Note that the manner in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display device 75 is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and is arbitrary, and may include the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variable display of symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, The combination of symbols corresponding to jackpots and misses can be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 9(b), a hold display section 200 is provided at the bottom of the display screen G for displaying a number of hold images corresponding to the number of hold times of the game before execution. By viewing the display unit 200, the player can recognize the number of reservations. In the reservation display section 200, a first reservation display area Ga corresponding to the first special figure and a second reservation display area Gb corresponding to the second special figure are set.

In the first holding display area Ga, unit holding display areas Ga1 to Ga4 of the same number as the maximum holding number when game balls enter the first operating opening 62 are displayed in sections so as to be arranged side by side in the left and right direction. There is. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first operating port 62, the maximum number of balls to be held is four, and correspondingly, the first unit holding display area Ga includes a first unit holding display area Ga1, a first unit holding display area Ga1, a first unit holding display area Ga1, a first unit holding display area Ga1, A 2-unit pending display area Ga2, a 3rd unit pending display area Ga3, and a 4th unit pending display area Ga4 are set.

For example, if the number of reservations is one when a game ball enters the first operating port 62, a predetermined reservation image is displayed only in the first unit reservation display area Ga1, and the game ball enters the first operating port 62. If the number of reservations is 4 when winning 62, a predetermined reservation image is displayed in all of the first unit reservation display area Ga1 to fourth unit reservation display area Ga4.

In addition, in the second holding display area Gb, unit holding display areas Gb1 to Gb4 of the same number as the maximum holding number when game balls enter the second operating opening 63 are displayed in sections so that they are arranged in parallel in the left and right direction. has been done. Specifically, when a game ball enters the second operating port 63, the maximum number of balls to be held is four, and correspondingly, the second holding display area Gb has a first unit holding display area Gb1, a first unit holding display area Gb1, a first unit holding display area Gb1, a first unit holding display area Gb1, A 2 unit pending display area Gb2, a 3rd unit pending display area Gb3, and a 4th unit pending display area Gb4 are set.

For example, if the number of reservations when a game ball enters the second operating port 63 is one, a predetermined reservation image is displayed only in the first unit reservation display area Gb1, and the game ball enters the second operating port 63. If the number of reservations is 4 when winning 63, a predetermined reservation image is displayed in all of the first unit reservation display area Gb1 to the fourth unit reservation display area Gb4.

Further, an execution display area D is set to be sandwiched between the first hold display area Ga and the second hold display area Gb. In the execution display area D, a pending image corresponding to the game round to be executed (currently being executed) is displayed. For example, when a game round ends and the next game round starts, the first unit hold display area Ga1 of the first hold display area Ga or the first unit hold display area Gb1 of the second hold display area Gb. The displayed pending image is moved and displayed in the execution display area D. This allows the player to recognize that the game session that was on hold will be played.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings in MPU 312 of main controller 162>
Next, the electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings in the MPU 312 of the main control device 162 will be described using FIG. 11.

During the game, the MPU 312 uses various counter information to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, setting of the display on the special symbol display section 43, display setting of the regular symbol display section 44, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, the initial value settings of the jackpot random number counter C1 used in the lottery to generate a jackpot, the jackpot type counter C2 used to determine the jackpot type such as a variable jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, and the jackpot random number counter C1 are set. A random number initial value counter CINI used for this, and a variation type counter CS that determines the variation display time in each special figure display section AS, BS in the special figure display section 43 are used. Furthermore, a random number counter C3 per ordinary figure is used to determine whether or not the ordinary electricity accessory 63a of the second actuating port 63 is to be placed in a support state (open state).

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 314a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 314. In the lottery counter buffer 314a, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired information storage when a winning occurs in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63. The ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b as a means.

The holding ball storage area 314b includes a holding area RE consisting of a first special figure holding area Ra and a second special figure holding area Rb, and an execution area AE. The reservation areas Ra and Rb each include a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, and the lottery counter Numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and fluctuation type counter CS stored in the buffer 314a is stored as pending information in one of the areas. Note that the pending information corresponds to special information.

In this case, in the first area to the fourth area, if winnings to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 occur multiple times in a row, the first area → second area → third area → Each piece of numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the fourth area. By providing each of the four areas in this manner, a maximum of four winning histories of game balls entered into the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 can be stored on hold. In addition, a total reservation number storage area is provided in the reservation ball storage area 314b, and the total reservation number storage area stores the number of winning history of the first operation port 62 or the second operation port 63. Information for identifying is stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area of the reservation area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display section 43, and is an area for moving each value stored in the first area of the reservation area RE. Based on various numerical information stored in the area AE, judgments of validity and the like are performed.

In detail about each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 199, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 199). In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 199). The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated regularly and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314 at the timing when a game ball enters the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63. More specifically, when the game ball enters the first operating port 62, it is stored in the first special figure holding area Ra of the RAM 314, and when the game ball enters the second operating port 63, the second special figure is stored in the RAM 314. storage area Rb.

The value of the random number that results in a jackpot is stored as a win/fail table (win/fail information group) in a win/fail table storage area 313a as a win/fail information group storage means in the ROM 313. Here, the contents of the validity table will be explained using FIG. 12.

In the win/fail table, address information consisting of binary number information and jackpot numerical value information also consisting of binary number information are set in a one-to-one correspondence. Specifically, the address information is expressed in decimal numbers and is set to five types from "1" to "5", and the jackpot numerical information is expressed in decimal numbers as "7", "17", and "27". , "37", and "47" are set, and these address information and jackpot numerical information are associated on a one-to-one basis. The numerical value of each jackpot numerical information is included in the numerical range of "0" to "199" of the random number information that can be updated in the jackpot random number counter C1.

Here, in this pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery modes in the win/fail lottery means. The number of jackpot numerical information referred to in the low probability mode and the number of jackpot numerical information referred to in the high probability mode are different, and the former is smaller than the latter. Specifically, in the low probability mode, only the jackpot numerical information whose address information is "1" is referenced during the lottery, and in the high probability mode, the jackpot numerical information corresponding to all address information is referenced during the lottery. Referenced. In other words, in the low probability mode, there is one piece of numerical information that results in a jackpot, and in the high probability mode, there are five pieces of numerical information, which is more than in the low probability mode. As a result, the probability of winning a jackpot in the low probability mode is 1/200, while the probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability mode is 1/40, and the probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode. The probability of winning is higher. In each lottery mode, the lottery result is a loss unless the random number value is a jackpot. Note that the number and value of random numbers for winning are arbitrary as long as the winning probability is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is for distributing the type when a jackpot occurs, and is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). It has become. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314 at the timing when a game ball enters the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63. More specifically, when the game ball enters the first operating port 62, it is stored in the first special figure holding area Ra of the RAM 314, and when the game ball enters the second operating port 63, the second special figure is stored in the RAM 314. storage area Rb.

The destinations to which game results are allocated to the jackpot type counter C2 are stored in the type table storage area 313b of the ROM 313 as a jackpot type table. Here, the jackpot type table will be explained with reference to FIG. 13.

As the jackpot type table, a jackpot type table for the first special pattern (FIG. 13(a)) and a jackpot type table for the second special pattern (FIG. 13(b)) are set. When a jackpot is achieved based on a winning at the first operating port 62, the jackpot type table for the first special symbol is referred to, and when a jackpot is achieved based on a winning at the second operating port 63, the jackpot type table for the first special symbol is referred to. The jackpot type table for 2 special figures is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 13(a), in the first special figure jackpot type table, 4R probability variable jackpot result and 4R normal jackpot result are set as selectable jackpot types. In each of these jackpot results, the number of round games to be executed is four. Here, the round game is a game in which variable winning control is executed at least once, in which the variable winning device 65 is changed from a closed state to an open state, and then changed to a closed state. In this embodiment, the variable winning control is configured to be executed once for each round game.

The 4R variable probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode is set to the high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and the support mode in the general utility accessory 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to the high frequency support mode. It is. In this case, the high probability mode and high frequency support mode are continued until the next jackpot occurs (until the next opening/closing execution mode is started). Incidentally, while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode, and the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, when compared in a situation where game balls continue to be launched in the same manner to the game area PE, the frequency of winnings to the second operating port 63 increases. The driving mode of the general electric utility object 63a is controlled so that the height is relatively high or low. Specifically, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the random number lottery using the random number counter C3 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. The number of openings of the accessory 63a is also greater in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode, and the time period for one opening is also longer in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize at the second operating port 63 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize is higher in the first operating port 62 than in the second operating port 63, but in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning is higher in the first operating port 62 than in the second operating port 63. The probability of winning the prize in the mouth 63 increases. When a winning occurs in the second operating port 63, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls he has too much. It can be carried out.

Note that the configuration for realizing the high-frequency support mode is not limited to the one described above. For example, after making the winning probability of the general lottery lottery equal in both modes, the configuration for realizing the high-frequency support mode is It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the number of times the accessory 63a is opened and the length of time each opening is given preferential treatment compared to the low-frequency support mode. In short, it is sufficient that the frequency of winnings to the second operating port 63 per unit time is higher than in the low frequency support mode, and any one of the following conditions or any arbitrary condition among the lottery of common figures, the number of openings, and the opening time is sufficient. A configuration may be adopted in which the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are set by differentiating the combination conditions.

The 4R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and the support mode in the utility power accessory 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to the high frequency support mode. It is. In this case, the high-frequency support mode continues until the number of times the game is executed after the opening/closing execution mode reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, 100 times). If the upper limit number of times is reached, the high-frequency support mode ends, and the support mode switches to the low-frequency support mode while the lottery mode remains the low-probability mode. That is, the game enters a gaming state (normal gaming state) in which the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode.

In this embodiment, "0" to "64" of the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to 4R probability variable jackpot results, and "65" to "99" correspond to 4R normal jackpot results. That is, the probability of being allocated to the 4R probability variable jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being allocated to the 4R normal jackpot result is set to 35%.

As shown in FIG. 13(b), in the jackpot type table for the second special figure, 10R probability variable jackpot result and 4R normal jackpot result are set as selectable jackpot types. The 10R probability-variable jackpot result is one in which the number of round games to be executed is 10. In addition, for the 10R probability variable jackpot result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode is set to the high probability mode, and the support mode in the general utility accessory 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to the high frequency support mode. It was a jackpot result. In this case, the high probability mode and high frequency support mode are continued until the next jackpot occurs.

Note that the 4R normal jackpot result set in the jackpot type table for the second special symbol is the same as the 4R normal jackpot result set in the jackpot type for the first special symbol. In other words, when a 4R normal jackpot result is triggered by winning the second operating port 63, the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode, the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode. This state continues until the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, 100 times).

In this embodiment, "0" to "64" of the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to 10R probability variable jackpot results, and "65" to "99" correspond to 4R normal jackpot results. That is, the probability of being allocated to a 10R probability variable jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being allocated to a 4R normal jackpot result is set to 35%.

In this way, the probability of being assigned to a probability-variable jackpot result is the same for both the type table of the first special figure display section and the type table of the second special figure display section. However, when a variable probability jackpot result is selected, the type table in the second special figure display section shows a 16R jackpot result, while the type table in the first special figure display section is set to show a 4R jackpot result. has been done. In other words, if the winning result is a variable jackpot based on winning the second operating port 63, the number of rounds in the opening/closing execution mode will be lower than if the winning result is variable jackpot based on winning the first operating port 62. As a result, it is possible to expect more game balls to be paid out. That is, a game in which a game ball is placed in the second operating port 63 is more advantageous for the player than a game in which a game ball is placed in the first operating port 62.

As described above, there is a clear difference in the advantages for the player between the first operating port 62 and the second operating port 63. Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting to win a prize in the second operating port 63 of the first operating port 62 and the second operating port 63. Players pay more attention to the high-frequency support mode in which the frequency of winning is increased.

In addition, the jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine the stop result of the symbols to be stopped and displayed on each special figure display section AS, BS when the result of the lottery based on winnings to the operating ports 62 and 63 becomes a jackpot. is also used. The stop result is determined by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of the ROM 313. In the stop result table, a plurality of data of stop results (jackpot symbols stopped and displayed on each special symbol display section AS, BS) in the case of a jackpot are set in correspondence with the value of the jackpot type counter C2, When determining the stop result, data corresponding to the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is read out of the plurality of stop result data. Here, since the same jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine the stop result and the jackpot type, the jackpot pattern that is stopped and displayed on each special symbol display section AS, BS and the jackpot that is determined at the time of the jackpot. It corresponds to the type.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). The variation type counter CS is used by the MPU 312 to determine the variation display time in the first special figure display section AS and the second special figure display section BS of the special figure display section 43.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process (described later) is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the normal process. The variable type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314 at the timing when the game ball enters the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63. More specifically, when the game ball enters the first operating port 62, it is stored in the first special figure holding area Ra of the RAM 314, and when the game ball enters the second operating port 63, the second special figure is stored in the RAM 314. storage area Rb.

The allocation destination of the variable display time to the variable type counter CS is stored as a variable display time table in the variable display time table storage area 313c of the ROM 313. Here, the variable display time table will be explained with reference to FIG. 14.

As the variable display time table, a variable display time table for a jackpot (FIG. 14(a)) and a variable display time table for a loss (FIG. 14(b)) are set. If the result of the lottery based on winnings to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 is a jackpot, the variable display time table for jackpots is referred to, and the winnings to each of the operating ports 62 and 63 are If the result of the lottery based on the winning result is a loss, the variable display time table for losses is referred to.

In each fluctuation display time table, the numerical range of the fluctuation type counter CS and the information of the fluctuation pattern are set in association with each other. In addition, in FIG. 14, information on the variable display time is shown together with the variable pattern in order to facilitate understanding. However, the information on the variable display time is shown in the variable display time table as the time information corresponding to each variable pattern. is stored separately in the ROM 313.

As shown in FIG. 14(a), in the fluctuation display time table for jackpot, selectable fluctuation patterns include fluctuation pattern 1A (15 sec), fluctuation pattern 2A (60 sec), fluctuation pattern 3A (60 sec), and fluctuation pattern 3A (60 sec). A pattern 4A (120 sec) and a variation pattern 5A (120 sec) are set. When a variation pattern is selected using the variation type counter CS, the symbol changes in the first special figure display section AS or the second special figure display section BS at the variation display time corresponding to the selected variation pattern. Display is performed.

Further, when a variation pattern is selected, information indicating the variation pattern is transmitted to the production control device 143 as a variation start command. The production control device 143 grasps the variation pattern selected by the main control device 162 based on the received variation start command. Then, the display control device 350 is controlled so that each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is displayed in a variable manner at a variable display time corresponding to the grasped variation pattern. As a result, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 75 in synchronization with the variable display of the symbols on the first special symbol display section AS or the second special symbol display section BS.

Further, each variation pattern also corresponds to a game round effect such as a reach effect performed on the symbol display device 75. Specifically, variation pattern 1A corresponds to normal reach performance, variation pattern 2A corresponds to SP reach (super reach) A performance, variation pattern 3A corresponds to SP reach B performance, and variation pattern 4A corresponds to performance per SP reach B. The variation pattern 5A corresponds to the SPSP reach A winning performance, and the variation pattern 5A corresponds to the SPSP reach B winning performance. That is, when the performance control device 143 recognizes a fluctuation pattern from the received fluctuation start command, it controls the display control device 350 so that the game round performance corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is performed on the symbol display device 75.

Each of the above-mentioned reach-for-win effects is such that after the reach-for-reach display is performed, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in a jackpot symbol combination. Here, the reach display (reach state) is equipped with a symbol display device 75 that can perform variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures), and the stop display result after the variable display is a special display result (jackpot result), in the gaming machine where the gaming state becomes a special gaming state (open/close execution mode) advantageous to the player, variable display (or variable display) of the symbols (pictures) on the symbol display device 75 is started. This refers to a display state that is used to make the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to result in the special display result, before the stop display result is derived and displayed.

In other words, by stopping and displaying the symbols for some of the plurality of symbol arrays displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, a jackpot symbol combination corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot state is established. This is a display state in which possible combinations of ready-to-win symbols are displayed, and in that state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows. More specifically, as a step before ending the fluctuating display of symbols, while the symbols in the final stop row are being displayed in a fluctuating manner, a symbol in a symbol row other than the final stop row is placed on the active line in the display screen G to hit the jackpot. This is to form a reach line by stopping and displaying the symbol combinations.

In the normal reach-winning performance, symbols are stopped and displayed in a jackpot symbol combination after the above-mentioned reach-to-reach display is performed. The SP reach effect is a reach effect that is higher than the normal reach effect, and after the reach line is formed, a predetermined effect in which a character etc. appears is performed, and after the predetermined effect, symbols are stopped and displayed in a jackpot symbol combination. be. Note that the content of the predetermined performance after formation of the reach line is different between the SP reach A performance and the SP reach B performance. The SPSP reach performance is a reach performance higher than the SP reach performance, and after a development performance that develops from the SP reach performance is performed, symbols are stopped and displayed in a jackpot symbol combination. SPSP Reach A performance develops from SP Reach A performance, and SPSP Reach B performance develops from Reach B performance.

Note that the items in the "Remarks (presentation mode)" column in FIG. 14(a) are added for convenience and are not set in the variable display time table.

As shown in FIG. 14(b), in the variation display time table for failure, selectable variation patterns include variation pattern 1H, variation pattern 2H (15 sec), variation pattern 3H (60 sec), and variation pattern 4H ( 60 sec), a variation pattern 5A (120 sec), and a variation pattern 6H (120 sec). The point that the variable display time is determined corresponding to each variable pattern is similar to the variable display time table for jackpots, but the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern 1H is determined by the first special figure or It is designed to change depending on the number of reservations for the second special drawing. Specifically, if variable pattern 1H is selected in a situation where the number of pending items is 2 or less, the variable display time is 8 seconds, and if variable pattern 1H is selected in a situation where the number of pending items is 3 or more. The variable display time is configured to be 4 seconds, which is shorter than 8 seconds.

Variation pattern 1H corresponds to a completely missed performance on the symbol display device 75, variation pattern 2H corresponds to a normal reach-off performance, variation pattern 3H corresponds to a SP reach-A missed performance, and variation pattern 4H corresponds to a SP reach-B missed performance. Correspondingly, the variation pattern 5H corresponds to the SPSP reach-A out-of-reach performance, and the variation pattern 6H corresponds to the SPSP reach-B out-of-reach performance.

The complete miss performance is one in which symbols are stopped and displayed in a miss symbol combination without a reach display. In addition, each of the above-mentioned out-of-reach effects is a combination of symbols in symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that are out of reach (the symbols in the final stop row that are stopped and displayed on the reach line are different from the reach symbols) after the reach display is performed. The symbol is stopped and displayed when the combination results in a symbol other than the symbol that forms a jackpot. In addition, the SP Reach A out of reach effect corresponds to the SP Reach A hit effect, and after a predetermined effect of the same type as the SP Reach A hit effect is performed, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a symbol combination that is out of reach. It is. Furthermore, the SP reach B out performance, the SPSP reach A out performance, and the SPSP reach B out performance correspond to the SP reach B hit performance, SPSP reach A hit performance, and SPSP reach B win performance, respectively.

In the fluctuation display time table for jackpot, "0" of the fluctuation type counter CS corresponds to fluctuation pattern 1A, "1" to "12" correspond to fluctuation pattern 2A, and "13" to "28" correspond to fluctuation pattern 3A, "29" to "63" correspond to variation pattern 4A, and "64" to "99" correspond to variation pattern 5A. On the other hand, in the fluctuation display time table for deviations, "0" to "59" of the fluctuation type counter CS correspond to fluctuation pattern 1H, "60" to "79" correspond to fluctuation pattern 2H, and "80" to "59" correspond to fluctuation pattern 2H. "89" corresponds to variation pattern 3H, "90" to "96" correspond to variation pattern 4H, "97" to "98" correspond to variation pattern 5H, and "99" corresponds to variation pattern 6H. are doing.

If the result of the winning lottery based on winnings to the operating ports 62 and 63 is a jackpot result, the variation pattern 5A corresponding to the SPSP Reach B effect is most likely to be selected, and if the result of the winning lottery is a winning result. In this case, the variation pattern 6H corresponding to the SPSP reach B performance is the least likely to be selected. In other words, the SPSP Reach B effect is the reach effect that is most likely to be executed when it is a jackpot, and the least likely to be executed when it is a miss, so it functions as the top reach effect with the highest expectation of a jackpot. Become.

Regarding the variation patterns other than the variation pattern 5A and the variation pattern 6H, the variation pattern corresponding to the higher reach performance is more likely to be selected when it is a jackpot, and less likely to be selected when it is a miss. That is, the expectation level of a jackpot increases in the order of normal reach performance < SP reach A performance < SP reach B performance < SPSP reach A performance.

For example, the random number counter C3 per ordinary figure is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 250, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). The random number counter C3 per common figure is updated regularly and is stored in the common figure holding area 314c of the RAM 314 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 64. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the general utility object 63a to be in an open state based on the stored value of the random number counter C3 per common figure. For example, if C4=0 to 190, the general electric accessory 63a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4=191 to 250, the general electric accessory 63a is not controlled to be in the open state.

<About various processes executed by the main controller 162>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 312 of the main control device 162 will be explained. The processing of the MPU 312 can be roughly divided into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing and normal processing that are executed to advance the game, and NMI processing that is started by inputting a power outage signal to the NMI terminal. There is interrupt processing. For convenience of explanation, NMI interrupt processing and timer interrupt processing will be explained first, and then main processing and normal processing will be explained.

<NMI interrupt processing>
NMI interrupt processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 15. This process is executed when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring section 315 of the power supply and launch control device 191 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 312, and the MPU 312 interrupts the control being executed. and starts NMI interrupt processing.

In the NMI interrupt processing, first, in step S11, data in a use register provided in the MPU 312 is saved to a backup area of the RAM 314. In step S12, a power outage flag (information on the occurrence of a power outage state) is set in the backup area. In step S13, the data saved in the backup area is restored to the register used by the MPU 312, and then the NMI interrupt processing is ended. Note that if the power outage flag can be set without destroying the data in the use register of the MPU 312, it is possible to omit the processing in step S11 and step S13.

After the NMI interrupt process is executed, it is confirmed that the power failure flag is set in the normal process described later, and then the process at the time of a power failure is executed. This process will be explained later.

<Timer interrupt processing>
The timer interrupt process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 16. This process is started by the MPU 312 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing of various winning sensors is executed. That is, it reads the states of various winning sensors connected to the main control device 162, determines the states of the winning sensors (detection information from the winning sensors), and stores the detected information (winning detection information). For example, when it is determined that a winning has occurred in the first operating port 62, a winning detection flag for the first special symbol is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314, and a winning in the second operating port 63 is determined to have occurred. If it is determined that this has occurred, a winning detection flag for the second special symbol is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. Further, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 64, a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314.

In step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 314.

In step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the regular pattern random number counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the regular hit random number counter C3 are each incremented by 1, and when these counter values reach the maximum value, they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 314.

In step S104, a through prize winning process is executed in conjunction with a winning to the through gate 64. In the winning process for through gates, it is determined whether or not a winning detection flag for through gates is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314, and if the flag is stored, it is stored in the general pattern holding area 314c. On the condition that the number of stored accessories held is less than 4, the value of the random number counter C3 per normal figure updated in step S103 is stored in the normal figure holding area 314c. Further, if a winning detection flag for a through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 314e, the winning detection flag is deleted and the winning process for the through gate ends.

After executing the winning process for the through gate in step S104, the process proceeds to step S105, where the winning process for the actuated openings associated with the winning of the actuating ports 62 and 63 is executed, and the present timer interrupt process ends.

<Winning process for actuation port>
The winning process for the operating port in step S105 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 17.

First, in step S201, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the first operating port 62 (starting winning) based on the detection state of the first operating port winning sensor 62a. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the first operating port 62, in step S202, a prize ball command is set for causing the payout control device 181 to pay out three game balls.

In step S203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has won in the first operating port 62. In step S204, the value stored in the reservation number storage area of the first special symbol reservation area Ra is read, and the start reservation memory number RaN stored in the first special symbol reservation area Ra is set (hereinafter referred to as , also referred to as the first start pending storage number RaN). Thereafter, in step S205, information acquisition processing is performed to store the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS, and the main prize winning process is ended.

In addition, if a negative determination is made in step S201 (if no winning has occurred in the first operating port 62), the process proceeds to step S206, and it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second operating port 63 (starting winning). is determined based on the detection state of the second operating port winning sensor 63c. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the second operating port 63, a prize ball command is set in step S207 to cause the payout control device 181 to pay out one game ball.

In step S208, external signal setting processing is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has won in the second operating port 63. In step S209, the value stored in the reservation number storage area of the second special symbol reservation area Rb is read, and the start reservation storage number RbN stored in the second special symbol reservation area Rb is set (hereinafter referred to as , the second start pending storage number RbN). Thereafter, information acquisition processing is performed in step S205, and the main prize winning processing is ended.

Moreover, when a negative determination is made in step S206 (when a winning to the second operating port 63 has not occurred), the main winning process is directly ended.

The prize ball command set in step S202 or step S207 is transmitted to the payout control device 181 in the external output process of the normal process described later.

Here, the information acquisition process in step S205 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 18.

First, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the start pending memory number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S204 or step S209 described above is less than an upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If the starting pending memory number N is the upper limit value, this information acquisition process is immediately terminated, and if it is less than the upper limit value, the starting pending memory number N of the corresponding special figure holding area Ra, Rb is determined in step S302. Increment N by 1. In step S303, the value stored in the total reservation number storage area (hereinafter referred to as common reservation number CRN) is incremented by one.

In step S304, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the corresponding special figure display holding area, that is, in step S302 above. It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of pending storages incremented by 1.

In other words, when the starting reservation storage number RaN for the first special symbol is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS are set in the reservation area Ra for the first special symbol. It is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas, that is, the reservation area Ra corresponding to the start reservation storage number RaN for the first special symbol incremented by 1 in step S302.

In addition, when the start reservation storage number RbN for the second special symbol is set, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS is set in the reservation area RbN for the second special symbol. It is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas, that is, the reservation area Rb corresponding to the start reservation storage number RbN for the second special symbol incremented by 1 in step S302.

In step S305, a pending prefetch process is executed to execute a pending notice effect, which will be described later. Details of the pending prefetch processing will be described later. After executing step S305, this information acquisition process ends.

<Main processing>
The main processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 19. The main process is performed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while external power is supplied, or when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on) (when external power is supplied).

First, in step S2001, initial setting processing upon power-on is executed. Specifically, wait processing is executed for about one second, for example, in order to wait for the sub-side control device (such as the payout control device 181) to become operational. In the following step S2002, access to the RAM 314 is permitted.

In step S2003, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch of the power supply and launch control device 191 is turned on, and in the subsequent step S2004, it is determined whether a power outage flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 314. In step S2005, a RAM determination value is calculated, and in step S2006, it is determined whether the RAM determination value is normal. Specifically, the RAM determination value calculated in step S2005 is compared with the RAM determination value saved at the time of occurrence of the power outage state, and it is determined whether the two match. If the two match, the RAM judgment value is determined to be normal, and the data stored and held in the RAM 314 is recognized as valid. Conversely, if the two do not match, it is determined that the RAM judgment value is abnormal, and the data stored and held in the RAM 314 is recognized as invalid. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 314. Note that it is also possible to determine the validity of the stored data based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 314 is correctly stored.

If the RAM determination value is normal, the process advances to step S2007, where the value of the stack pointer saved in the backup area is written to the stack pointer of the MPU 312, and the stack state is restored to the state before the power was cut off. In step S2008, a power restoration command is output for returning the sub-side control device (such as the payout control device 181) to the gaming state before the power outage. In step S2009, the power outage flag stored in the backup area is erased. Thereafter, in step S2010, interrupt permission is set, and the process shifts to normal processing, which will be described later.

If a positive determination is made in step S2003 (when the RAM erase switch is pressed) or a negative determination is made in step S2006 (if the RAM determination value is not normal), the process advances to step S2011, and the sub-side control device (dispensing control In order to initialize the device (device 181, etc.), an initialization command is output. In step S2012, the used area of the RAM 314 is cleared to 0, and in step S2013, initialization processing of the RAM 314 is executed. Thereafter, in step S2010, interrupt permission is set, and the process shifts to normal processing, which will be described later.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 20. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is activated upon power-on is executed, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an overview, the process of steps S401 to S408 is executed as a regular process with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update process of steps S409 and S410 is executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, first, in step S401, external signal output processing is executed. In the external signal output process of step S401, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 181. In addition, if production commands such as a variation start command, type command, variation end command, etc. are set, they are transmitted to the production control device 143.

In step S402, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 314.

In step S403, a game round control process is executed to control the game in each game round. In this game round control process, jackpot determination, display control of the special figure display section 43, etc. are performed.

In step S404, a gaming state transition process is executed. This gaming state transition process shifts the gaming state to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. The details of the gaming cycle control process in step S403 and the gaming state transition process in step S404 will be described later.

In step S405, an electric utility support process for driving and controlling the general electric utility object 63a provided in the second operating port 63 is executed. In this process for electric utility support, numerical information obtained from the random number counter C3 per ordinary figure stored in the ordinary figure holding area 314c of the RAM 314 is used to decide whether or not to open the electric utility object 63a. A lottery is conducted to determine whether the lottery is successful or not, and if the lottery is determined to be successful, opening/closing processing of the utility appliance 63a is executed. It also controls the display of the common symbol display section 44 so as to teach the lottery results of the common symbol lottery.

Here, as already explained, a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode are set as modes of support by the general electric accessory 63a, and it is possible to switch to either of the support modes in the game state transition process described later. A transition takes place. After this process, if the high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314, the mode becomes high-frequency support mode, and if the flag is not set, the mode becomes low-frequency support mode.

In the electric support support process, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is set by determining whether the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. In the case of the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the utility power utility object 63a becomes the open state is set to be greater than the case of the low-frequency support mode, and the number of times the general power utility object 63a is in the open state is set to be greater than that in the low-frequency support mode. Set the opening time to be longer. In addition, in the case of the high-frequency support mode, if the electric power open state is won and the open state of the general electric utility object 63a occurs multiple times, the next open state will start after one open state ends. Set so that the closing time until opening is shorter than the opening time.

In step S406, game ball launch control processing is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is excited once every predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on the condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power supply and launch control device 191. . As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE.

In step S407, it is determined whether a power outage flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 314. The power outage flag is set in the NMI interrupt process (FIG. 15) that is executed when a power outage occurs, and is used by the MPU 312 to detect the occurrence of a power outage.

If the power outage flag is not stored (if a power outage state has not occurred), in step S408, it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has arrived, that is, a predetermined period of time (from the start of the current normal processing). In this embodiment, it is determined whether 4 msec) has elapsed. Then, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated.

That is, in step S409, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 314. Furthermore, in step S410, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the change type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value, they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 314.

Here, since the execution time of each process in steps S401 to S408 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and similarly The variation type counter CS can also be updated randomly.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S407 (if the power outage flag is stored), the process advances to step S411, and generation of each interrupt process is prohibited. In step S412, the value of the stack pointer of MPU 312 is stored in the backup area of RAM 314, and in step S413, a power outage flag is set in the backup area.

In step S414, a RAM determination value is calculated and saved in the backup area. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 314. In step S415, access to the RAM 314 is prohibited, and thereafter, an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Note that even after the power is completely cut off, the power for data storage retention of the RAM 314 is supplied from the power supply and launch control device 191, so the information stored in the RAM 314 before the power is cut off remains unchanged. It is retained within a period (for example, one or two days).

<Game time control processing>
The game time control process in step S403 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 21.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is stored (stored) in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. The opening/closing execution mode flag is stored when the gaming state is transferred to the opening/closing execution mode in a gaming state transition process to be described later, and is cleared when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the same gaming state transition process.

If it is in the opening/closing execution mode, the processing after step S502, that is, the processing for starting the game round from step S502 to step S505, the processing for progressing the game round from step S506 to step S507, and the game round ending processing from step S508 to step S509. This game round control process ends without executing any of the other processes. In other words, when the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, the special figure game round will not be started regardless of whether or not a prize has been won in the operating ports 62, 63.

It should be noted that the game round (common figure game round) based on a winning lottery triggered by winning in the through gate 64 is executed regardless of whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. That is, during the opening/closing execution mode, although the execution of the special figure game round is restricted, the regular figure game round is executed in the same manner as when not in the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, when the result of the random drawing lottery is a winning result during the opening/closing execution mode, the second operating port 63 (general electric accessory 63a) is opened.

If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the special figure display section 43 is in a variable display mode. Specifically, it is determined whether either the first special figure display section AS or the second special figure display section BS is in the process of variable display. Note that this determination is made by determining whether or not the variable display flag is stored (stored) in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. The variable display flag is stored when a variable display is started in either the first special figure display section AS or the second special figure display section BS, and is erased when the variable display ends.

If the special figure display unit 43 is not in the variable display state, the process advances to step S503, and it is determined whether the common reservation number CRN is "0". When the common reservation number CRN is "0", it means that the start reservation storage numbers RaN and RbN are "0" for both the first operation port 62 and the second operation port 63. Therefore, the game time control process is immediately ended.

If the common reservation number CRN is not "0", in step S504 data for setting the data stored in the first special symbol reservation area Ra or the second special symbol reservation area Rb for variable display After executing the setting process and further executing the variation start process for starting the variable display on the special symbol display section 43 and the variable display on the symbol display device 75 in step S505, the present game round control process is ended.

Here, the data setting process in step S504 and the fluctuation start process in step S505 will be described in detail below.

First, data setting processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 22.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether the second start pending storage number RbN stored in the second special symbol holding area Rb is "0". When the second starting pending memory number RbN is "0", the data setting process for the first special feature (first operating port 62) in steps S602 to S608 is executed, and the second starting pending memory number RbN is If it is not "0", data setting processing for the second special figure (second operating port 63) in steps S609 to S615 is executed.

As already explained, the data setting process is performed when the common hold count CRN is 1 or more, but the situation in which the data setting process is executed is the first start hold memory number RaN and the second start hold memory number RaN. This means that at least one of RbN is 1 or more. In this case, in the data setting process, it is first determined whether or not the second start pending memory number RbN is "0", and it is determined that the second start pending memory number RbN is "0", that is, the second special It is configured to execute processing related to the reservation information for the first special symbol on the condition that there is no reservation information for the first special symbol. Therefore, if the reservation information is stored in both the first special figure reservation area Ra and the second special figure reservation area Rb, the second special figure reservation area Rb stored in the second special figure reservation area The reservation information for the figure (second operating port 63) will be processed with priority.

In the data setting process for the first special symbol, first, in step S602, the first starting reservation storage number RaN of the first special symbol reservation area Ra is decremented by one. In step S603, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by 1. In step S604, the data stored in the first area of the first special figure reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE.

In step S605, a process is executed to shift the data (reservation information such as jackpot random number counter C1) stored in the storage area of the first special figure reservation area Ra. In this process, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in the second to fourth areas are sequentially moved to lower areas.

In step S606, it is determined whether the second special symbol flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. The second special figure flag is for the MPU 312 to grasp that the reservation information of the second operating port 63 exists. If the second special figure flag is stored, the second special figure flag is deleted in step S607.

After executing step S607 or if a negative determination is made in step S606 (if the second special symbol flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S608, and the production control device 143 is notified that the data in the reservation area has been shifted. Set the shift command (shift occurrence information) for notification. In this case, from the command information storage area 313e of the ROM 313, information indicating that the holding area to which the current data has been shifted corresponds to the first special figure holding area Ra, that is, the first operating port 62. A shift command including information that it is compatible is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the production control device 143. After that, this data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step S608 is transmitted to the production control device 143 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). Based on the received shift command, the performance control device 143 executes processing for changing the display in the first reservation display area Ga of the symbol display device 75 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations.

In the data setting process for the second special symbol, first in step S609, the second start reservation storage number RbN of the second special symbol reservation area Rb is decremented by one. In step S610, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by 1. In step S611, the data stored in the first area of the second special figure reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE.

In step S612, a process is executed to shift the data (reservation information such as jackpot random number counter C1) stored in the storage area of the second special figure reservation area Rb. In step S613, it is determined whether the second special figure flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. If the second special figure flag is not stored, the second special figure flag is set in step S614.

After executing step S614 or when an affirmative determination is made in step S613 (if the second special symbol flag is stored), the process proceeds to step S615, and the sub-side control device informs that the data in the reservation area has been shifted. A shift command (shift occurrence information), which is information to be recognized by the production control device 143, is set. In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area 313e of the ROM 313 that the holding area to which data has been shifted this time corresponds to the second special figure holding area Rb, that is, it corresponds to the second operating port 63. A shift command including information on what is being done is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the production control device 143. After that, this data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step S613 is transmitted to the production control device 143 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). Based on the received shift command, the performance control device 143 executes processing for changing the display in the second reservation display area Gb of the symbol display device 75 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations.

Next, the fluctuation start process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23.

First, in step S701, it is determined whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether a high probability mode flag is stored (stored) in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. The high probability mode flag is for the MPU 312 to know that it is in the high probability mode, and is set when transitioning to the high probability mode.

If it is not the high probability mode, the validity determination is made in step S702 by referring to the validity table for the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value (for example, "7") set as a jackpot win for the low probability mode. . On the other hand, if it is the high probability mode, the validity determination is made in step S703 by referring to the validity table for the high probability mode. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is a value set as a jackpot win for the high probability mode (for example, "7", "17", "27", "37"). ”, “47”).

After executing step S702 or step S703, it is determined in step S704 whether or not the result of the determination in step S702 or step S703 is a jackpot win. If it is a jackpot win, it is determined in step S705 whether or not the second special symbol flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. If the second special figure flag is not stored, in step S706, a lottery of the jackpot type is performed with reference to the type table (FIG. 13(a)) for the first special figure display section. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 4R probability variable jackpot result or the numerical range of the 4R normal jackpot result.

On the other hand, if the second special symbol flag is stored, in step S707, a lottery of the jackpot type is performed with reference to the second special symbol type table (FIG. 13(b)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 10R probability variable jackpot result or the numerical range of the 4R normal jackpot result.

After step S706 or step S707 is executed, in step S708, a type flag indicating the jackpot type selected by lottery in S706 or step S707 is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. For example, when the jackpot type selected by lottery is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 10R probability variable jackpot flag is stored.

In step S709, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of the ROM 313 is referred to and the stop result for the jackpot is set. Specifically, the stop result corresponding to the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is read from the stop result table and set as the stop result for the current game round.

If a negative determination is made in step S704 (no jackpot has occurred), the process proceeds to step S710, and a stop result for a loss is set. In this embodiment, only one type of stop result is provided for disconnection, and that stop result is set in step S710.

After executing step S709 or step S710, in step S711, a variable display time setting process is performed to set a variable display time for the current game round in the first special figure display section AS or the second special figure display section BS. Execute.

Here, the variable display time setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24.

First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/fail determination in the current game round is a jackpot. If it is a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S802, and a variable display time table for jackpot (FIG. 14(a)) is obtained as a table for drawing variable display times (variable patterns). On the other hand, if it is not a jackpot but a miss, the process advances to step S803 and a variable display time table for misses (FIG. 14(b)) is obtained.

After step S802 or step S803 is executed, in step S804, a lottery process for variable display times (variable patterns) is executed using the variable display time table acquired in step S802 or step S803. Specifically, one variation pattern corresponding to the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is identified from among the variation pattern group set in the variation display time table.

In step S805, the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern identified in step S804 is set as the variable display time of the current game round. In this step, the value of the variable display time corresponding to the specified variation pattern is set in the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314. For example, if the variable display time is 15 seconds, 7500 is set in the variable display time counter area as the corresponding value. This set value is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16) is activated. After executing step S805, the variable display time setting process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the variation start process (FIG. 23), after step S711 is executed, a variation start command and a type command are set in step S712. The variation start command includes variation pattern information. Since the fluctuation patterns are set separately for a jackpot and a loss (FIG. 14), the production control device 143 analyzes the fluctuation patterns from the fluctuation start command, thereby controlling the main control device 162. It is possible to determine the result of the validity judgment made in . That is, the variation start command includes not only information regarding the variation display time but also information regarding the result of the validity determination. Further, the type command includes information on the jackpot type. Note that the type command is set only when the result of the judgment is a jackpot.

The variation start command and type command set in step S712 are transmitted to the production control device 143 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). The performance control device 143 determines the content of the performance in the game round based on the received variation start command and type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. The contents of this production include the variable display mode of the symbols on the symbol display device 75, and the determined variable display mode of the symbols is output from the production control device 143 to the display control device 350 as a display content command. Ru. The display control device 350 controls the display of the symbol display device 75 based on the display content command received from the production control device 143 so that symbols corresponding to each game round are displayed in a variable manner.

In step S713, variable display on the special figure display section 43 is started. At that time, the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314 are referred to, and if the second special figure flag is stored, the current game round corresponds to the second special figure, and the picture on the second special figure display section BS is is displayed in a variable manner. On the other hand, if the second special figure flag is not stored, it is assumed that the current game round corresponds to the first special figure, and the symbols on the first special figure display section AS are displayed in a variable manner. After executing step S713, this variation start process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the game time control process (FIG. 21), if an affirmative determination is made in step S502 (when the special figure display section 43 is in the process of variable display), the process advances to step S506, and the variable display time of the current game time is displayed. It is determined whether or not the period has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 314 has become "0".

If the variable display time has not elapsed, a variable display process is executed in step S507. In the variable display processing, display control is performed on the special figure display section for the current game so that each display segment is turned on and off in a predetermined order (light emission control is performed on each display segment). )do. After executing step S507, the present game round control process is ended.

If the fluctuation display time has elapsed, a fluctuation end process is executed in step S508. In the variation end process, each special figure display section AS, BS is controlled so that the symbols being varied and displayed are stopped and displayed according to the stop result set in step S709 or step S710.

In step S509, a variation end command is set, and then the main game round control process is ended. The variation end command set in step S509 is transmitted to the production control device 143 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). The production control device 143 transmits the received variation end command to the display control device 350 while maintaining its information form. By receiving the variation end command, the display control device 350 causes the final stop symbol combination in the game round to be displayed as determined (final stop display).

<Game state transition processing>
The gaming state transition process in step S404 (FIG. 20) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 25.

First, in step S901, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S902, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the variable display on each special symbol display section AS, BS has ended (the fixed display has ended). If it is not the end timing of the variable display, the main game state transition process is ended as it is.

If it is the end timing of the variable display, it is determined in step S903 whether the game result of the current game round corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, that is, whether or not the result of the validity determination is a jackpot. do. In this step, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot by referring to whether or not the type flag (step S708 in FIG. 23) is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. If the game result of the current game round does not correspond to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the main game state transition process is immediately ended.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S903 (if the game result of the current game round corresponds to transition to the opening/closing execution mode), the process proceeds to step S904, and a process for starting the opening/closing execution mode is executed. In the start process, an opening/closing execution mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. Further, an opening period is set for waiting for the start of the first round while keeping the variable winning device 65 in a closed state. Further, if a high probability mode flag or a high frequency support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e, a process for erasing these flags is executed.

In step S905, a round display start process is executed to notify the number of rounds in the opening/closing execution mode. In this step, the current jackpot type is determined based on the type flags stored in the various flag storage areas 314e, and the round display section is controlled so that the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. Note that the display of the number of rounds on the round display section continues until the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In step S906, it is determined whether the current jackpot type is a 10R probability variable jackpot result. If the result is not a 10R probability variable jackpot, that is, if it is either a 4R probability variation jackpot or a 4R normal jackpot result, "4" is set in the round counter area RC provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314 in step S907. do. On the other hand, if the current jackpot type is a 10R probability variable jackpot result, "10" is set in the round counter area RC in step S908.

After executing step S907 or step S908, in step S909, an opening command for notifying the production control device 143 of the start of the opening and the opening period is set. This set opening command is sent to the production control device 143 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20).

In step S910, after executing the external signal setting process, the main game state transition process is ended. In the external signal setting process, the jackpot signal output terminal provided at the external output terminal 213 is set to an output state. As a result, if the jackpot signal output terminal is connected to the management control device on the gaming hall side, the jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and a jackpot occurs at the pachinko machine 10 in the management control device. I can understand what I did.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S901 (if the opening/closing execution mode is in progress), the process proceeds to step S911, and it is determined whether or not the opening period has elapsed. If the opening period has not elapsed, the main game state transition process is immediately ended. If the opening period has elapsed, a big winning opening opening/closing process is executed in step S912.

Here, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 26.

First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the big prize opening 65a is being opened. This determination is made based on the driving state of the driving section 65d. If the big prize opening 65a is not being opened, it is determined in step S1002 whether or not the value of the round counter area RC is "0". If the value of the round counter area RC is not "0", that is, if there is a round game to be executed, the value of the timer area T provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 314 is "0" in step S1003. Determine whether it exists or not. This process determines whether a waiting period between rounds (round interval period) has elapsed.

If the value of the timer area T is "0", the process advances to step S1004, and "15000" is set in the timer area T as a value corresponding to the upper limit opening time (30 seconds) of the variable winning device 65 in one round game. Set. The value set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16) is activated. In step S1005, "10" is set in the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 344b as a value corresponding to the upper limit number of winnings (10) to the variable winning device 65 in one round game.

In step S1006, the variable winning a prize driving section 32c is brought into a driving state in order to open the big winning a prize opening 65a. In step S1007, an opening command is set to notify the production control device 143 that opening of the grand prize opening 65a (variable winning device 65) has started, and then the main prize opening opening/closing process is ended. This set release command is sent to the production control device 143 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20).

If a positive determination is made in step S1002 (if the value of the round counter area RC is 0) or a negative determination is made in step S1003 (if the value of the timer area T is not 0), the main prize opening opening/closing process is continued. finish.

Moreover, when an affirmative determination is made in the above step S1001 (when the big prize opening 65a is being opened), the process proceeds to step S1008, and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer area T is "0". This process is to determine whether or not the upper limit opening time of the variable prize winning device 65 set in step S1004 has elapsed.

If the value of the timer area T is not "0", the process advances to step S1009, and it is determined whether or not a winning has occurred in the big winning hole 65a based on the detection state of the big winning hole winning sensor 65c. If no prize has been won, the main prize opening/closing process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if a winning has occurred, the value of the winning counter area PC is decremented by 1 in step S1010, and then, in step S1011, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter area PC is "0" or not. judge. If the value of the winning counter area PC is not "0", the main winning opening opening/closing process is immediately terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1008 (if the value of the timer area T is 0) or if an affirmative determination is made in step S1011 (if the value of the winning counter area PC is 0), the process proceeds to step S1012, and the drive unit 65d is switched to a non-driving state and the big prize opening 65a is closed. In step S1013, the value of the round counter area RC is decremented by 1, and in step S1014, it is determined whether the value of the round counter area RC is "0".

If the value of the round counter area RC is not "0", that is, if there are remaining round games, the process advances to step S1015, and the variable winning device 65 is kept in a closed state for a period of waiting for the start of the next round game. "1000" is set in the timer area T as a value corresponding to (2 sec).

In step S1016, a closing command is set to notify the production control device 143 that the variable winning device 65 has been closed (that the round game has ended), and then the main winning opening opening/closing process is ended. The set closing command is sent to the production control device 143 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20).

If an affirmative determination is made in the above step S1014 (if the value of the round counter area RC is 0), that is, if the final round of the opening/closing execution mode has ended, the process advances to step S1017 and an ending start process is executed. In the start processing, an ending period is set in which the variable prize winning device 65 is kept in a closed state and waits for the start of the next game round (the first game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends). In step S1018, an ending command is set to notify the production control device 143 of the start of the ending and the ending period, and then the main prize opening/closing process is ended. The set ending command is transmitted to the production control device 143 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20).

Returning to the explanation of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 25), after executing the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S912, it is determined in step S913 whether or not the value of the round counter area RC is "0". If the value of the round counter area RC is not "0", the main game state transition process is ended as it is in order to continue the opening/closing execution mode.

If the value of the round counter area RC is "0", the process advances to step S914, and it is determined whether the ending has ended (whether the ending period has elapsed). If the ending has not been completed, the main game state transition process is immediately ended in order to continue the ending. On the other hand, if the ending has ended, the process advances to step S915, and transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed.

Here, the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27.

First, in step S1101, the type flags stored in the various flag storage areas 314e of the RAM 314 are referred to to determine whether or not the current jackpot is a probability-variable jackpot result. If it is a probability variable jackpot result, in step S1102, a high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e, and in step S1103, a high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. As a result, a transition is made to a gaming state in which the win/fail lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode (so-called variable probability gaming state with electric support). This gaming state continues until the next jackpot occurs. After step S1103 is executed, the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is ended.

If a negative determination is made in the above step S1101 (if the current jackpot is not a probability-variable jackpot result), that is, if the current jackpot is a normal jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S1104, and the high frequency support flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 314e. Set. If the current jackpot is a normal jackpot result, the high probability mode flag is not set, so the processing in step S1104 sets the gaming state where the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode (so-called time saving mode). (gaming state). In the subsequent step S1105, "100" is set in the game number counter area provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 314. This set value is decremented by 1 each time a special figure game is executed in the time saving game state, and when the value of the game number counter area becomes "0", the various flags mentioned above are decremented. The high frequency support flag stored in the storage area 314e is deleted. Therefore, the above-mentioned time-saving gaming state ends when 100 gaming rounds are played, and thereafter shifts to a gaming state (normal gaming state) in which the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low-frequency support mode. do. After step S1105 is executed, the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is ended.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 25), after the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in step S915 is completed, the round display termination process is executed in step S916. In this process, the round display section in the special figure display section 43 is controlled so that the round display section is turned off.

In step S917, the opening/closing execution mode termination process is executed, and then the main game state transition process is terminated. In the process of terminating the opening/closing execution mode, a process of erasing the type flag and opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the various flag storage areas 314e is executed.

<Pending read ahead processing>
The reservation prefetching process in step S305 (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 28. This process is executed when pending information is acquired based on winning to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63, and regarding the acquired pending information, the fluctuation corresponding to the pending information is Prior to the execution of the start process (FIG. 23), the presence or absence of a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and the variation pattern are selected by lottery.

First, in step S1201, the starting reservation storage numbers RaN and RbN stored in each reservation area Ra and Rb of the reservation ball storage area 314b and the common reservation number CRN stored in the total reservation number storage area of the reservation ball storage area 314b are calculated. and stores the information in the register of the MPU 312.

In step S1202, based on the current winning to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 (a random number for determining success or failure) included in the reservation information acquired in step S304 (FIG. 18) is determined. Understand numerical values). In step S1203, a validity determination is made using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step S1202. At this time, if the lottery mode when the pending information was acquired is low probability mode, refer to the win/fail table for low probability mode, and if the lottery mode when the pending information was acquired is high probability mode, The validity determination is made by referring to the validity table for the high probability mode.

In step S1204, it is determined whether the result of the determination in step S1202 is a jackpot win. If it is a jackpot win, in step S1205, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 (the jackpot type is drawn by drawing Random numbers).

In step S1206, a jackpot type lottery is performed using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped in step S1205. At this time, if the reservation information is based on winning to the first operating port 62, refer to the type table for the first special symbol (FIG. 13(a)), and check whether the reservation information is based on winning to the second operating port 63. If it is information, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is specified with reference to the second special figure type table (FIG. 13(b)). Note that the processing from step S1203 to step S1206 is similar to step S701 to step S707 in the variation start processing (FIG. 23).

In step S1207, jackpot information indicating that it is a jackpot and type information indicating the jackpot type drawn in step S1206 are stored in the register of the MPU 312.

After executing step S1207 or if a negative determination is made in step S1204 (if it is not a jackpot win), in step S1208, the reservation information acquired based on the current prize winning to the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 is The value of the included variation type counter CS is grasped. In step S1209, a variation pattern (variation display time) is selected by lottery using the value of the variation type counter CS obtained in step S1208. At this time, if the obtained pending information corresponds to a jackpot, refer to the variable display time table for jackpots (Fig. 14 (a)), and if the obtained pending information corresponds to a loss, , a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is specified with reference to the fluctuation display time table for deviations (FIG. 14(b)). Note that the processing in this step is similar to steps S801 to S804 in the variable display time setting process.

In step S1210, variation pattern information indicating the variation pattern drawn in step S1209 is stored in the register of the MPU 312. In step S1211, a pending command is set as an output target to the production control device 143, and thereafter, the pending prefetching process is ended. The hold command includes information indicating whether the current hold information corresponds to the 1st special figure or the 2nd special figure, as well as various information stored in the register (information on the start hold memory number RaN, RbN, common information on the number of reservations CRN, jackpot information, type information, and fluctuation pattern information). In addition, as already explained, since the presence or absence of a jackpot can be ascertained from the fluctuation pattern, the pending command may be set so as not to include jackpot information. The hold command set in step S1211 is transmitted to the production control device 143 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20).

<About the electrical configuration of the production control device 143 and the display control device 350>
The electrical configuration of the production control device 143 and the display control device 350 will be described below with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 29.

An MPU 342 is mounted on the performance control board 341 provided in the performance control device 143. The MPU 342 includes a ROM 343 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 342, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 343. It has a built-in RAM 344, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc.

The MPU 342 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main controller 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 342 . The main controller 162 sends hold display control commands such as shift commands and hold commands, game cycle control commands such as fluctuation start commands, type commands, and fluctuation end commands, and opening/closing execution mode commands such as opening commands and ending commands. Receive various commands.

As already explained, the output side of the MPU 342 is connected to the lamp sections 26 to 28 provided on the front door frame 14 and the speaker section 29, as well as the display control device 350.

Further, the input side of the MPU 342 is connected to the production operation section 36 provided on the front door frame 14. The performance operation unit 36 is provided with a detection sensor that detects the operation of the performance operation unit 36, and detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensor is input. The MPU 342 determines whether or not the production operation unit 36 has been operated based on the detected information, and determines the manner of operation that has been performed.

The display control device 350 includes a display control board 351 on which an MPU 372 in which a program ROM 373 and a work RAM 374 are integrated into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 375, a character ROM 376, and a video RAM 377 are respectively mounted. There is.

The MPU 372 analyzes commands received from the production control device 143 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 375 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 375).

The program ROM 373 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 372, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 374 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 372 executes various programs. These work data, flags, etc. are stored in each area of the work RAM 374.

The VDP 375 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 75. Since the VDP 375 is implemented as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and its actual form is a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 375 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 372, the video RAM 377, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 377 from the character ROM 376 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 75.

The character ROM 376 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 75. This character ROM 376 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table, etc. that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image.

Note that it is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 376 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 376. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 373 is stored in the character ROM 376.

The video RAM 377 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 75, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 377, the display contents of the symbol display device 75 are changed.

<About various processes executed by the production control device 143>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 342 of the production control device 143 will be explained.

<Production setting process>
The effect setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 30. The effect setting process is a process activated by the MPU 342 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

First, in step S1301, it is determined whether a hold command from the main controller 162 has been received. The pending command received from the main control device 162 is stored in a command storage area 344a provided in the RAM 344 of the production control device 143. The command storage area 344a is configured as a ring buffer that can individually store a plurality of commands and read out the previously stored commands. Therefore, even if a plurality of commands are received at the same time, processing corresponding to each command can be executed satisfactorily.

In the determination in step S1301, it is determined whether or not a pending command is stored in the area to be read this time in the command storage area 344a. If the hold command is stored (if the hold command has been received), in step S1302, the hold image is displayed in the hold display section 200 (FIG. 9(b)) of the display screen G. Executes pending command processing. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later.

After executing step S1302 or if a negative determination is made in step S1301 (if no pending command has been received), it is determined in step S1303 whether or not a shift command from the main controller 162 has been received. If a shift command has been received, in step S1304, a process corresponding to the shift command is executed to shift the hold image displayed on the hold display section 200. Details of the shift command response process will be described later.

After executing step S1304 or if a negative determination is made in step S1303 (if the shift command has not been received), in step S1305, a variable display of symbol rows Z1 to Z3, etc. is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. Execute special figure fluctuation display processing to perform. Details of the special figure fluctuation display processing will be described later.

In step S1306, processing for the opening/closing execution mode is executed to perform effects during the opening/closing execution mode. In the process for the opening/closing execution mode, in addition to the round performance during the opening/closing execution mode, processing for performing an opening performance, an ending performance, a winning performance when a winning occurs in the variable winning device 65, etc. is executed.

In step S1307, a production mode switching process for switching the production mode is executed. Details of the production mode switching process will be described later.

In step S1308, other processing is executed, and then the effect setting processing is ended. Other processes include displaying a demonstration screen when a starting prize does not occur for a predetermined period of time, switching to a power saving mode that stops the video display on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 to reduce power consumption, etc. Execute the processing to be performed.

<Pending command handling process>
The command corresponding processing in step S1302 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31.

First, in step S1401, a hold command from the main controller 162 is analyzed, and hold information (jackpot information, type information, fluctuation pattern information, etc.) is stored in the hold storage area 344c of the RAM 344.

As shown in FIG. 32, the holding storage area 344c is provided with a first special figure holding area SRa and a second special figure holding area SRb in correspondence with the holding ball storage area 314b on the main controller 162 side. It is being Each reservation area SRa, SRb has four storage areas: a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area. Further, in the reservation storage area 344c, an execution area SAE is provided in correspondence with the execution area AE on the main controller 162 side.

In step S1401, based on the hold command, it is determined whether the current hold information corresponds to the first special figure or the second special figure, and what number of hold information it is in the corresponding special figure. The change pattern information (if it is a jackpot, jackpot information and type information) is stored in the corresponding storage area of the reservation storage area 344c. For example, if the current hold information is the second hold information corresponding to the first special figure, the fluctuation pattern information etc. are stored in the second storage area of the first special figure hold area SRa.

After executing step S1401, in step S1402, the value of the hold number counter (start hold storage number SN) provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344 is incremented by one. The various counter areas 344b are provided with a pending number counter for the first special symbol and a pending number counter for the second special symbol, and in step S1402, the starting pending memory number SN on the corresponding side is updated.

In step S1403, a setting process for a pending notice is executed to execute a pending notice effect. Here, the pending notice effect will be explained with reference to FIG. 33.

In this embodiment, depending on the display mode of the pending image displayed on the pending display section 200 of the display screen G, a pending preview effect that informs or suggests the degree of expectation that a jackpot will occur in the game round to which the pending image corresponds is implemented. We are planning to do this. The display mode of the hold image is set to a normal display mode when the hold preview effect is not performed, and a specific display mode when the hold preview effect is performed, and furthermore, the specific display mode includes multiple displays. The mode has been set.

In this embodiment, the above expectation level is suggested by the display color (color) of the pending image. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33(a), a normal display mode HMa in which the main display color is a normal color (for example, white) is set as the normal display mode, and the main display color is set as the specific display mode. Four types are set: a blue display mode HMb in which the color is blue, a green display mode HMc in which the color is green, a red display mode HMd in which the color is red, and a rainbow color display mode HMe in which the color is rainbow-colored. . Note that, in FIG. 33(a), different hatching is provided depending on the difference in display color.

Among the specific display modes, the blue display mode HMb has the lowest expectation of a jackpot, and thereafter, the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of green display mode HMc<red display mode HMd<rainbow display mode HMe. The rainbow color display mode HMe suggests a jackpot.

Furthermore, each specific display mode suggests the performance to be performed in the game round to which the pending image corresponds. Specifically, the blue display mode HMb suggests that a reach effect (any of normal reach effect, SP reach effect, or SPSP reach effect) with a rank higher than normal reach effect will be performed in the game round to which the pending image corresponds. However, the green display mode HMc suggests that a ready-to-reach effect with a rank higher than the SP ready-to-reach effect will be performed, and the red display mode HMd suggests that a SPSP ready-to-reach effect will be performed.

The above-mentioned suspension notice performance using a suspension image is a period from the start of display to the end of the display of the suspension image that is the target of the execution of the performance, in other words, from the generation of suspension information to the end of the game round of that suspension information. It is carried out using at least a part of the period up to. During the period (holding period) in which the holding image is displayed in the first holding display area Ga or the second holding display area Gb, the holding notice effect may be executed at multiple times, such as when the holding image starts displaying or when shifting. The timing is set. Furthermore, the execution timing of the pending notice performance during the execution of the game round is set as a plurality of pending change points, as shown in FIG. 33(b). Each pending change point is set in accordance with, for example, the start timing of a game round (variation start timing), the start timing of various reach effects, the development timing of reach effects, etc.

Returning to the explanation of the hold command corresponding processing (FIG. 31), in the setting process for hold notice in step S1403, an execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute a hold notice effect for the current hold information, and when a hold notice effect is to be executed. or execute processing to set the display mode of the pending image. Details of the setting process for pending notice will be described later.

In step S1404, a first execution process of a pending notice for executing a pending notice effect is executed. In the first execution process of the pending notice, execution control of the pending notice effect is performed based on the setting result of step S1403. Details of the first execution process of the pending notice will be described later.

In step S1405, processing for displaying a hold image on the hold display section 200 of the display screen G is executed. Specifically, a hold display command is created so that a hold image is additionally displayed in the corresponding unit hold display area in each hold display area Ga, Gb, and set as an output target to the display control device 350. The hold display command includes information indicating whether the current hold information corresponds to the first special figure or the second special figure, and information indicating what number of hold information it is. After executing step S1405, the pending command handling process ends.

<Setting process for pending notice>
The setting process for pending notice in step S1403 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34.

First, in step S1501, the hold storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern, etc. (pre-read result) in the current hold information is grasped. In step S1502, it is determined whether the current hold information corresponds to a jackpot based on the fluctuation pattern etc. grasped in step S1501.

If the pending information does not correspond to a jackpot, that is, if the pending information corresponds to a loss, the process advances to step S1503 and determines whether the fluctuation pattern of the pending information is fluctuation pattern 1H (fluctuation pattern corresponding to a complete loss). Determine. If a negative determination is made in step S1503 (if the fluctuation pattern is other than fluctuation pattern 1H) or if an affirmative determination is made in step S1502 (if the pending information corresponds to a jackpot), the current production mode is grasped in step S1504. do.

Here, the presentation mode will be explained with reference to FIG. 35. In this embodiment, performance mode A and performance mode B are set as the performance modes of the game performance executed on the display screen G. These production modes A and B are distinguishable from the player's perspective. For example, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the background image 401 displayed on the back side of the hold display section 200 are different between the two production modes. It has become something to do.

These production modes can be manually switched by the player's operation, and specifically, by performing a predetermined operation on the production operation unit 36 (FIG. 1) during the valid period of mode switching. It is possible to switch by. For example, if a predetermined operation is performed using the production operation unit 36 in a situation where the production mode is production mode A, the production mode is switched to production mode B, and the production operation is performed in a situation where production mode B is set. When a predetermined operation is performed by the section 36, the production mode is switched to production mode A.

In addition, the frequency of occurrence of the above-mentioned pending notice performance is different between production mode A and production mode B, and the system is configured such that the frequency of occurrence of the pending notice production in production mode A is higher than that in production mode B. There is. The configuration for differentiating the frequency of occurrence of the pending notice performance is not particularly limited, but for example, in any production mode, the pending notice performance is executed through an execution lottery, and then in production mode B. A configuration is conceivable in which the winning probability of the above-mentioned execution lottery is lower than that of production mode A when the pending information corresponds to a loss.

In this case, in production mode B, the percentage of the executed pending preview performance that corresponds to the prediction of the jackpot is higher than in production mode A, so the expectation level of the jackpot when the pending preview performance is executed is high. Become. In other words, production mode A functions as a mode in which the pending preview performance is likely to be executed and the performance is easy to enjoy, and production mode B functions as a mode in which the pending preview performance is difficult to execute, but the expectation of a jackpot when it is executed is It can function as a high mode.

Although not shown in FIG. 35, for example, in presentation mode A, a holding image imitating a game ball is displayed, whereas in presentation mode B, a holding image imitating a star is displayed. For example, the base image of the holding image may be different between production mode A and production mode B.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process for pending notice (FIG. 34), after grasping the current production mode in step S1504, the corresponding pending notice execution lottery table is retrieved from the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343 in step S1505. get. A plurality of pending notice execution lottery tables are set in correspondence with the presence or absence of a jackpot and the presentation mode. For example, a pending preview execution lottery table corresponding to a case where the current pending information is a jackpot is set to have a higher probability of winning than a pending preview execution lottery table corresponding to a case where the current pending information is a jackpot. In addition, the pending notice execution lottery table that corresponds to presentation mode A and corresponds to the case where the current pending information is out of order is the holding notice execution lottery table that corresponds to presentation mode B and corresponds to the case where the current pending information is out of order. The probability of winning is set higher than the lottery table.

In step S1506, based on the pending notice execution lottery table obtained in step S1505 and the lottery counter (random value) obtained from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344, an execution lottery is determined as to whether or not to execute the pending notice performance. I do. In step S1507, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S1506 is a winning result.

If the lottery result is an actual win, the process advances to step S1508, and the corresponding number of reservations is determined. In this step, the reservation storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is referred to, and it is determined whether the current reservation information corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the number of reservations for the corresponding special symbol is determined. . The number of reservations in this case includes the current reservation information. For example, if the current reservation information is stored in the third area of the first special symbol reservation area SRa in the reservation storage area 344c, the reservation information corresponds to the first special symbol and the number of reservations is is 3. In addition, when the current hold information is stored in the first area of the first special figure holding area SRa (if it is the first hold information), if the hold information is stored in the execution area SAE. (If the game session is being executed), the above pending number is 1, and if no pending information is stored in the execution area SAE (when the gaming session is not being executed), the above pending number is 0. do.

In step S1509, the final display mode lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. In this embodiment, the display mode of the hold image is changed only once to perform the hold notice effect, but also the display form of the hold image is changed multiple times to perform the hold notice effect. It is configured. The final display mode lottery table is a table for selecting the final display mode of the pending image in the pending preview performance.

In the final display mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 36, the range of selectable final display modes and the selection probability of each display mode are set in correspondence with each variation pattern. In addition, in FIG. 36, the item "Remarks (performance mode)" indicating the game round performance corresponding to each variation pattern is added for convenience and is not set in the final display mode lottery table.

In addition, in the final display mode lottery table, a final display mode lottery table for jackpots (FIG. 36(a)) and a final display mode lottery table for losers (FIG. 36(b)) are set, and each of these is set. In the lottery table, the selection range of the final display mode and the selection probability of each option are different depending on each variation pattern.

In the final display mode lottery table for the jackpot, the range of the final display mode of the pending image in the pending preview performance is blue display mode HMb and rainbow color display mode HMe when the current pending information is fluctuation pattern 1A (normal reach hit). , In the case of variation pattern 2A (per SP reach A) or variation pattern 3A (per SP reach B), blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, and rainbow color display mode HMe, variation pattern 4A (per SPSP reach A) or variation In the case of pattern 5A (per SPSP reach B), blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, and rainbow color display mode HMe are set. Therefore, when a hold image with the blue display mode HMb is displayed as a hold preview performance, the hold image corresponds to a game round (game round of hold information that triggered the hold preview performance) when the hold image is higher than the normal reach performance. It suggests that a reach effect for the ranking will be performed, and if a pending image with a green display mode HMc is displayed, it suggests that a reach effect for a rank higher than the SP reach effect will be performed, and a red display mode HMd for a hold image is displayed. When the image is displayed, it suggests that the SPSP reach effect will be performed.

In addition, even in the final display mode lottery table for losers, if a pending image with a blue display mode HMb is displayed as a pending preview effect, a reach effect with a rank higher than the normal reach effect will occur in the game round to which the pending image corresponds. If a hold image with a green display mode HMc is displayed, it suggests that a reach effect with a rank higher than the SP reach effect will be performed, and a hold image with a red display mode HMd is displayed. In this case, the selection range of the final display mode corresponding to each variation pattern is determined so as to suggest that the SPSP reach effect will be performed. Therefore, when the hold preview performance is performed and any of the blue, green, or red hold images are displayed, the player can predict which level of the ready-to-reach performance will be performed. However, it is not possible to determine whether there is a jackpot or not.

In addition, in the final display mode lottery table for losers, the rainbow color display mode HMe is not set as an option for the final display mode, and the pending image of the rainbow color display mode HMe is displayed only when there is a jackpot. It becomes. Therefore, the pending image in the rainbow color display mode HMe suggests a jackpot, and when the pending image is displayed, the player is aware that a jackpot will occur in the game round to which the pending image corresponds. Can be predicted.

In the final display mode lottery table for the jackpot, the selection probability of the rainbow color display mode HMe is suppressed to a small probability (for example, 5%) in any variation pattern. This is because if the selection probability of the rainbow color display mode HMe is increased, there will be frequent opportunities for players to recognize the jackpot before the execution of the game round, and there is a concern that interest in the game round effect will fade. This is to prevent such inconveniences from occurring. The selection probabilities for other options are such that in each variation pattern, a higher display mode is more likely to be selected than a lower display mode. For example, in the case of the variation pattern 3A, the green display mode HMc is more likely to be selected than the blue display mode HMb.

On the other hand, in the final display mode lottery table for losers, higher display modes are less likely to be selected than in the case of the final display mode lottery table for jackpots. For example, in the variation pattern (variation pattern 4A) corresponding to the SPSP Reach A performance in the final display mode lottery table for jackpots, the selection probability of red display mode HMd is 55%, whereas the final display mode lottery for jackpots In the variation pattern (variation pattern 5H) corresponding to the SPSP reach B effect on the table, the selection probability of the red display mode HMd remains at 10%.

In each final display mode lottery table for jackpots and misses, the display mode selection tendency is set as described above, so even if the type of reach effect performed in the game round is the same, the game The expectation of a jackpot is higher when the higher-ranking display mode is displayed as the pending image corresponding to the round.

In this embodiment, a common table is used for production mode A and production mode B as the final display mode lottery table for jackpots and the final display mode lottery table for losers, but different tables are used for each production mode. It is also possible to configure the settings.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process for pending notice (FIG. 34), in step S1509, a final display mode lottery table corresponding to whether or not there is a jackpot in the pending information is obtained based on the fluctuation pattern etc. grasped in step S1501. In step S1510, based on the fluctuation pattern grasped in step S1501, the final display mode lottery table acquired in step S1509, and the lottery counter (random value) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344, the current pending The final display mode in the preview performance is selected by lottery.

Note that the lottery counter is acquired when a suspension command is received from the main control device 162, in other words, when suspension information that is subject to lottery processing is generated. This also applies to counters (random numbers) used in other lottery processes executed by the production control device 143.

In step S1511, the production scenario lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. The production scenario lottery table is a table for drawing production scenarios for the pending preview production.

In the performance scenario lottery table, as shown in FIG. 37, a plurality of performance scenarios are set in correspondence with the number of reservations and the final display mode of the reservation preview performance. Specifically, groups are set from the group of presentation scenario 0 corresponding to the number of reservations = 0 to the group of presentation scenario 4 corresponding to the number of reservations = 4, and furthermore, in each group, the final display mode of blue, green, red, and rainbow color is set. A group of production scenarios for each color is set corresponding to the color. Then, a random numerical value for lottery from 0 to 99 is assigned to a group of presentation scenarios for one color. For example, if the number of reservations is 0 and the final display mode is blue display mode HMb, then production scenario 0 blue (1) and production scenario 0 blue (2) are the production scenarios to be selected. The one corresponding to the random value is selected.

Each production scenario defines at what timing and in which display mode the pending image will be displayed in the pending preview performance whose final display mode has been determined. When pre-reading the reservation information corresponding to the first special symbol, the number of reservations for the first special symbol at that time is 4, and the red display mode HMd is selected by lottery as the final display mode. Taking production scenario 4 red (1) as an example, this scenario displays a holding image in the blue display mode HMb in the fourth unit holding display area Ga4 of the first holding display area Ga (FIG. 9(b)). After that, when the pending image is moved and displayed in the second unit pending display area Ga2, the display mode is changed to green HMc, and thereafter, the period during which the pending image is displayed in the execution display area D (the pending image is changed to the green display mode HMc). This stipulates that the display mode is changed to red (HMd) during the execution of the game round corresponding to the image.

Although not shown in FIG. 37, in a performance scenario in which the display mode of the pending image is changed in the execution display area D, the display mode is changed at which timing (which pending change point) in the game round. It also stipulates whether There are also production scenarios that change the display mode multiple times during the execution of a game session.For example, production scenario 0 green (2) changes the display mode at the previous pending change point during the execution of the game session. After the normal display mode HMa is changed to the blue display mode HMb, it is specified that the display mode is further changed to the green display mode HMc at a later pending change point.

Note that "G4 (Hold 4)" to "G1 (Hold 1)" in "Remarks (Production mode)" in FIG. 37 are displays when displaying a hold image in each unit hold display area of the hold display section 200. It shows the aspect. In addition, "D (playing game)" is the display mode when the pending image is shifted from the first unit pending display area to the execution display area D, and the display mode when the pending image is displayed in the execution display area D. It shows the display mode in terms of period. Incidentally, the items in the "Notes (performance mode)" column are added for convenience and are not set in the production scenario lottery table.

Further, as the performance scenario lottery table, a performance scenario lottery table for a jackpot and a performance scenario lottery table for a loss are set. In this embodiment, a common table is used in production mode A and production mode B as the performance scenario lottery table for jackpot and the performance scenario lottery table for loss, but a configuration in which different tables are set for each production mode is used. Good too. Note that FIG. 37 shows an example of a performance scenario lottery table for a jackpot.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process for pending notice (FIG. 34), in step S1511, based on the fluctuation pattern etc. grasped in step S1501, an effect scenario lottery table corresponding to the presence or absence of a jackpot in the pending information is acquired. In step S1512, the number of reservations grasped in step S1508, the final display mode determined in step S1510, the production scenario lottery table acquired in step S1511, and the lottery counter (random number value) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344. ), the performance scenario for this pending preview performance will be drawn by lottery.

In step S1513, performance scenario data is set so that the performance scenario selected at step S1512 is executed. In step S1514, a pending notice flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344, and thereafter, the setting process for pending notice is ended. The suspension notice flag is for the MPU 342 to grasp that the suspension notice performance should be executed.

In addition, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1503 (if the fluctuation pattern of the reservation information is fluctuation pattern 1H (completely missed)) or if a negative determination is made in step S1507 (if the result is a loss in the execution lottery of the reservation notice performance), , the process advances to step S1515, and the display mode of the pending image is set to the normal display mode HMa. Thereafter, the setting process for pending notice is ended.

<Process for first execution of pending notice>
The first execution process of the pending notice in step S1404 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38(a).

First, in step S1601, it is determined whether a suspension notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. If the pending notice flag is not stored, that is, if the situation is not such that the pending notice performance should be executed, the process for first execution of the pending notice is ended.

On the other hand, if the suspension notice flag is stored and the situation is such that a suspension notice performance should be executed, the process advances to step S1602, and the display mode is changed for the suspension image corresponding to the suspension information that triggered the suspension notice performance. Determine whether it is time to change. That is, it is determined whether the situation is such that the hold image should be displayed in a specific display mode from the beginning. In this step, the above-mentioned determination is made with reference to the setting result of the effect scenario of the pending notice effect set in step S1513 (FIG. 34). If it is not the timing to change the display mode, the first execution process of the pending notice is ended.

On the other hand, if it is the timing to change the display mode, an execution lottery is performed in step S1603 to determine whether or not to execute the change suggestion effect. The change-suggesting performance is a performance that suggests that the display mode of the pending image changes (ranks up). Although the manner of the change suggestion performance is not particularly limited, in this embodiment, the change suggestion performance is performed in the manner shown in FIG. 39. First, as shown in FIG. 39(a), a predetermined character image 402 is displayed near the hold display section 200 at a predetermined timing before the hold image changes. In addition, when performing a change suggestion effect in accordance with the generation timing of the suspension information, first, the suspension image is displayed in the normal display mode, and the character image 402 is displayed immediately after or at the same time. Thereafter, a video of the character performing a predetermined action is displayed, and the display mode of the pending image is changed to a higher-level display mode, as shown in FIG. 39(b). Note that the character image 402 is deleted after changing the display mode of the pending image.

In step S1603, the execution lottery of the change suggestion effect is performed based on the lottery counter (random value) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344 and the execution lottery table stored in the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343. . In step S1604, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S1603 is a winning result. If the lottery result is a winning result, in step S1605, a change suggestion effect is set to be executed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. Specifically, a command to the effect that a change suggestion effect should be executed is set as an output target to the display control device 350.

Note that in this embodiment, the change suggestion effect can be executed only when the display mode of the hold image is changed, but the change suggestion effect can also be executed when the display mode of the hold image is not changed. It is also possible to have a configuration in which it is possible to do so. In other words, even when the display mode of the pending image is not changed, a lottery for executing the change suggestion performance may be performed.

In such a case, the change-suggesting effect may be, for example, after displaying a predetermined character image 402 as shown in FIG. After that, the character image 402 may be deleted without changing the display mode of the pending image, and the display mode before displaying the character image 402 may be maintained as it is. However, if such fake performances occur frequently, the player may lose expectations for the change-suggesting performance, so it is better to keep the frequency of execution low. Specifically, when the display mode is not changed, the execution probability of winning the change suggestion effect is lower than when the display mode is changed.In other words, when the character image 402 is displayed, the display mode of the pending image is lower. It is preferable that the frequency at which the value does not change is lower than the frequency at which it changes.

After the execution of step S1605 or if a negative determination is made in step S1604 (if the execution lottery of the change suggestion effect is not won), the process proceeds to step S1606, and the destination to be changed in the current change process based on the setting result of the effect scenario. Understand the display mode. Specifically, it is determined which specific display mode among the blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, and rainbow color display mode HMe is used to display the pending image.

In step S1607, settings are made to change the display mode of the pending image to the display mode determined in step S1606. Note that when this process is performed when a hold command is received (when a hold image is additionally displayed), the initial display mode of the hold image to be additionally displayed is set to be the display mode grasped in step S1606 above.

At this time, if the change suggestion effect is not to be executed, the hold image is set to be displayed in one of the specific display modes indicated by the effect scenario from the beginning. On the other hand, when executing a change-suggesting performance, the display is set to be displayed in the normal display mode HMa and then changed to a specific display mode indicated by the production scenario. When the setting process in step S1607 is executed, in step S1405 of the pending command corresponding process (FIG. 31), the command is updated so that information about the display mode set in step S1607 is included in the pending display command to the display control device 350. Set.

In step S1608, information indicating the display mode of the current pending image is stored in the display mode storage area 344e of the RAM 344. As shown in FIG. 38(b), in the display mode storage area 344e, areas are provided corresponding to the reservation information (reservation image) of each special figure and the reservation information during the game round, The display mode of the pending image can be stored in each area. For example, when displaying the blue display mode HMb in the second unit pending display area Ga2 of the first pending display area Ga, the second area for the first special figure (corresponding to the second pending information) is displayed in the display mode storage area 344e. area) is displayed in the blue display mode HMb. Incidentally, when performing a change suggestion effect, information indicating the display mode (display color) after the change is stored. Note that the display mode storage area 344e may not be provided, and the display mode information may be stored in an area corresponding to the reservation storage area 344c. After executing step S1608, the first execution process for pending notice is ended.

<Processing for commands during shift>
The shift command response process in step S1304 (FIG. 30) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 40(a).

First, in step S1701, a first execution process of a pending notice is executed. This process is for changing the display mode of the hold image of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect when the hold image is shifted. The process in this step is basically the same as the process for first execution of a suspended notice (FIG. 38(a)) in step S1404 (FIG. 31).

To explain with reference to FIG. 38(a), in the first execution process of the pending notice in step S1701, the pending notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344, and the situation in which the pending notice effect should be executed is If so, in step S1602, the current shift timing is determined for the hold image (the hold image displayed in each hold display area Ga, Gb) corresponding to the hold information that triggered the hold notice performance. It is determined whether it is time to change the display mode (display color). This determination is made based on the setting result of the effect scenario of the pending notice effect set in step S1513 (FIG. 34).

If it is time to change the display mode, an execution lottery is performed in step S1603 to determine whether or not to execute the change suggestion effect, and if the lottery is won, the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 is changed in step S1605. Set so that the change suggestion effect is executed. After the execution of step S1605 or if a negative determination is made in step S1604 (if the execution lottery of the change suggestion effect is not won), the process proceeds to step S1606, and the destination to be changed in the current change process based on the setting result of the effect scenario. Understand the display mode.

In step S1607, settings are made to change the display mode of the pending image to the display mode grasped in step S1606. Specifically, the output command to the display control device 350 includes information indicating which pending image's display mode is to be changed, and information indicating which display mode (display color) is to be changed. In this way, a command is set to the effect that the display mode of the pending image should be changed at the current shift timing. As a result, the display mode of the pending image is changed to the display mode determined by the setting result of the production scenario at the current shift timing.

In step S1608, information on the changed display mode of the pending image whose display mode is to be changed is stored in the display mode storage area 344e of the RAM 344. For example, when changing the hold image in the blue display mode HMb displayed in the second unit hold display area Ga2 of the first hold display area Ga to the green display mode HMc when shifting to the first unit hold display area Ga1, In the display mode storage area 344e, after erasing the information displayed in blue stored in the second area for the first special figure (area corresponding to the second pending information), the information displayed in green is stored in the same area. do.

Returning to the description of the shift command response process (FIG. 40), after the process of step S1701 is executed, the second execution process of the pending notice is executed in step S1702. Since this process is related to the production mode switching process of step S1307 (FIG. 30), it will be described in detail after the switching process is explained.

In step S1703, the value of the hold number counter (start hold storage number SN) provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344 is decremented by 1. The various counter areas 344b are provided with a pending number counter for the first special symbol and a pending number counter for the second special symbol, and in this step, the starting pending storage number SN on the corresponding side is updated.

In step S1704, a shift process for moving and displaying the hold image is executed, and then the shift command corresponding process is ended. In the shift process, the pending information stored in the first area of the pending storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is moved to the execution area SAE, and the pending information stored in the second to fourth areas is sequentially moved to the lower area side. shift. At this time, the display mode information stored in each area of the display mode storage area 344e is also sequentially shifted to the lower area side.

In the shift process, the display control device 350 is controlled to change the display position of the pending image in the pending display section 200 of the display screen G to the lower unit pending display area. As a state before the control, for example, as shown in FIG. 40(b1), the holding image is displayed in the first unit holding display area Ga1 and the second unit holding display area Ga2 of the first holding display area Ga. In this case, the display positions of these pending images are changed to the execution display area D and the first unit pending display area Ga1 by the control, as shown in FIG. 40(b2). Note that if the display mode of the pending image is set to be changed in the first execution process of the pending notice in step S1701, the display position and the display mode are changed together.

<Special figure fluctuation display processing>
The special figure variation display process in step S1305 (FIG. 30) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 41.

First, in step S1801, it is determined whether a game round is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether a game round of either the first special figure or the second special figure is being executed. If no game is being executed, the process advances to step S1802, and it is determined whether a fluctuation start command transmitted from the main controller 162 has been received. The fluctuation start command includes information on the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation display time setting process (FIG. 24) in the main controller 162.

By referring to the information on this variation pattern, it is possible to grasp at which variable display time the special figure game round on the special figure display unit 43 whose display is controlled by the main control device 162 is performed. Moreover, as already explained, since the fluctuation pattern for jackpots and the fluctuation pattern for misses are set separately, it is also possible to determine the result of the success/failure determination from the fluctuation patterns.

If the fluctuation start command has not been received, the special figure fluctuation display process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the fluctuation start command has been received, the process advances to step S1803, where a fluctuation start process is executed to start the performance for the game round, and thereafter, the special figure fluctuation display process is ended.

In the fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command from the main controller 162 is analyzed to identify the fluctuation pattern regarding the current special figure game round. Furthermore, based on the specified fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display time in the current special figure game round is grasped. The various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343 stores a performance pattern table in which variable display times are determined in association with each variable pattern. The variable display time defined in the effect pattern table corresponds to the variable display time to which each variable pattern (FIG. 14) corresponds in the main control device 162, and the effect control device 143 and the main control device 162 A common variable display time is assigned to the patterns. For example, when the variation pattern is variation pattern 1A, the corresponding variation display time is 15 seconds for both the production control device 143 and the main control device 162. In the variation start processing, the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern analyzed from the variation start command is specified with reference to the performance pattern table, and this is set as the variation display time of the current special figure game round.

Further, in the performance pattern table, performance patterns for game round performances are associated with each variation pattern. These performance patterns include normal reach, SP reach A, SP reach B, SPSP reach A, SPSP reach B, complete miss, normal reach miss, and SP reach A, which were mentioned when explaining the variable display time table. Missing, SP Reach B Missing, SPSP Reach A Missing, and SPSP Reach B Missing are set. Since the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the effect pattern has already been described with reference to FIG. 14, the explanation will be omitted. In the variation start process, the performance pattern corresponding to the current variation pattern is specified with reference to the performance pattern table, and this is set as the performance pattern for the current special figure game round.

In addition, in the fluctuation start process, if the result of the judgment regarding the current special figure game is a jackpot, the jackpot type is specified based on the type command from the main control device 162. When the jackpot type is a probability-variable jackpot, a stop result for a probability-variable jackpot is set as the stop result of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. Conversely, when the jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the stop result for the normal jackpot is set as the stop result of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In these cases, the active lines L1 to L5 on which the stop result for the jackpot is displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

Further, if the result of the validity judgment regarding the current special pattern game round is a failure, each stop symbol in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is determined at random. However, if the performance pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is a ready-to-win performance, each stop symbol is determined so that a reach is formed on the active lines L1 to L5 determined by lottery. That is, a stop result in which a combination of off-reach symbols is established on one active line L1 to L5 is set as the current stop result.

In the fluctuation start processing, after executing each of the above-mentioned processing, a command including information on the current stop symbol and information on the production pattern is set as an output target to the display control device 350. In the display control device 350, according to the received command, the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 are stopped according to the stop result determined by the production control device 143, or the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped according to the production pattern determined by the production control device 143. The symbol display device 75 is controlled so that a performance is performed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1801 (if a game round is being executed), the process advances to step S1804, and it is determined whether or not a variation end command has been received from the main controller 162. If the fluctuation end command has not been received, it means that the fluctuation display time has not yet elapsed in the current special figure game round. In this case, in step S1805, processing for changing is executed. In the fluctuating process, the fluctuating display of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that was started by the fluctuating start process is continued, the symbols of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in order, and each reach effect is executed. Execute processing to

In step S1806, it is determined whether or not the current special figure game round is the game round of the hold information that triggered the hold notice presentation. If it is not the game time of the reservation information that triggered the reservation notice performance, the special figure variation display process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is the game time of the pending information that triggered the pending preview performance, the process for first execution of the pending preview is executed in step S1807. This process is for changing the display mode of the pending image of the pending information that triggered the pending preview performance during the execution of the game round of the pending information. The process in this step is basically the same as the process for first execution of a pending notice (FIG. 38(a)) in step S1404 (FIG. 31).

To explain with reference to FIG. 38(a), in the first execution process of the pending notice in step S1807, the pending notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344, and the situation in which the pending notice effect should be executed is If so, in step S1602, it is determined whether it is time to change the display mode of the pending image (the pending image displayed in the execution display area D) corresponding to the pending information that triggered the pending preview effect. Determine whether or not. This determination is made based on the setting result of the effect scenario of the pending notice effect set in step S1513 (FIG. 34).

If it is time to change the display mode, an execution lottery is performed in step S1603 to determine whether or not to execute the change suggestion effect, and if the lottery is won, the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 is changed in step S1605. Set so that the change suggestion effect is executed. After the execution of step S1605 or if a negative determination is made in step S1604 (if the execution lottery of the change suggestion effect is not won), the process proceeds to step S1606, and the destination to be changed in the current change process based on the setting result of the effect scenario. Understand the display mode.

In step S1607, settings are made to change the display mode of the pending image to the display mode grasped in step S1606. As a result, the display mode of the pending image is changed to the display mode determined by the setting result of the production scenario at a predetermined pending change point during a game round. In the subsequent step S1608, information on the changed display mode is stored in the area corresponding to the execution display area D in the display mode storage area 344e of the RAM 344.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure fluctuation display process (FIG. 41), after executing the process of step S1807, the third execution process of the pending notice is executed in step S1808. Since this process is related to the production mode switching process of step S1307 (FIG. 30), it will be described in detail after the switching process is explained. After executing step S1808, the special figure variation display process is ended.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1804 (if a fluctuation end command has been received), it means that the fluctuation display time has elapsed. In this case, the process advances to step S1809, and a variation termination process is executed. In the process for ending variation, the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 and the performance being executed are ended (the symbols of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 are fixed and stopped).

In step S1810, it is determined whether or not the current special figure game round is the game round of the hold information that triggered the hold notice performance. If it is not the game time of the reservation information that triggered the reservation notice performance, the special figure variation display process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is the game time of the pending information that triggered the pending notice performance, it is determined in step S1811 whether a pending notice flag or a return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. Details of the return standby flag will be described later.

If either the suspension notice flag or the return standby flag is stored, the stored flag is erased in step S1812. After execution of step S1812 or when a negative determination is made in step S1811 (when neither the suspension notice flag nor the standby flag for return is stored), the special symbol variation display process is ended.

In addition, in this embodiment, the configuration is such that it is determined whether or not the variation display time has elapsed based on whether or not a variation end command is received from the main control device 162. Since the variable display time can be determined from the transmitted variable start command, it may be configured to determine whether or not the variable display time related to the game session being executed has elapsed based on the determined variable display time. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the main control device 162 does not transmit the fluctuation end command.

<Processing for switching production mode>
The production mode switching process in step S1307 (FIG. 30) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 42. The production mode switching process is for switching between production mode A and production mode B, which have already been described.

First, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not the effect mode switching is still valid. In this embodiment, the period in which the SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect is being executed in the special figure game round, and the period in which the opening/closing execution mode is being executed are set as invalid periods in which the effect mode cannot be switched. The period is the effective period for switching the performance mode, including during the execution of the special figure game. In step S1901, it is determined whether the current timing belongs to the valid period. If the effect mode switching is not within the valid period, the effect mode switching process is immediately ended.

If the effect mode switching is still valid, the process advances to step S1902, and it is determined whether a predetermined operation for switching the effect mode has been performed using the effect operation unit 36. If the predetermined operation is not performed, the production mode switching process is immediately ended.

If the predetermined operation has been performed, the process advances to step S1903 and a switching process for switching the production mode is executed. For example, if the current performance mode is performance mode A, the performance data is set so as to switch to performance mode B. In addition, the switching of the production mode may be performed in accordance with the timing at which the above-mentioned predetermined operation is performed, or may be performed in accordance with the timing at which the next special figure game round is started.

In step S1904, the production mode flag corresponding to the production mode after switching is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. In this embodiment, a mode A flag and a mode B flag are provided as flags corresponding to production mode A and production mode B, respectively. For example, when switching the production mode from production mode A to production mode B, the above-mentioned various The mode A flag stored in the flag storage area 344d is deleted, and the mode B flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d.

In step S1905, it is determined whether a return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. The return standby flag will be described later.

If the return standby flag is not stored, the process advances to step S1906, and it is determined whether or not a suspension notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. If the pending notice flag is not stored, the production mode switching process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if the pending notice flag is stored, that is, if the pending notice effect is being executed or is in a standby state, the process advances to step S1907 and the pending notice flag is deleted. As a result, if the pending preview performance was being executed before the mode switching, the continuation of the pending preview performance is canceled. Further, if the pending preview performance is in a standby state, the execution of the pending preview performance that has been on standby is canceled.

In step S1908, it is determined whether a hold preview effect is being executed, that is, whether there is a hold image displayed in a specific display mode. Specifically, among the holding images displayed in each holding display area Ga, Gb, in any one of the blue display mode HMb, the green display mode HMc, the red display mode HMd, or the rainbow color display mode HMe. Determine whether the displayed item exists. This determination is made with reference to the information of each area stored in the display mode storage area 344e of the RAM 344. If there is no pending image displayed in the specific display mode, the production mode switching process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if there is a hold image displayed in the specific display mode (if the hold preview effect is being executed), the process advances to step S1909, and the hold image displayed in the specific display mode is selected in any mode. Information indicating whether the display is displayed is stored in the return area 344f of the RAM 344. In the return area 344f, areas are set corresponding to the hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4, Gb1 to Gb4 and execution display area D of each special figure, and the display mode of the hold image can be stored in each area. It is possible.

In step S1909, information on the display mode stored in the display mode storage area 344e at that time is also stored in the return area 344f. Therefore, at the time of processing in step S1909, the same information is stored in the display mode storage area 344e and the return area 344f.

Note that the information on the display mode may be identification information indicating the display mode or may be identification information indicating the display color. In short, it is sufficient that the display mode of the pending image can be specified from the information stored in the return area 344f, and any information that corresponds to the display mode of the pending image is sufficient.

Through the above processing, by referring to the return area 344f after switching the production mode, it is possible to grasp which pending image was being displayed in which display mode before switching the production mode. Note that when executing the shift process in step S1704 in the shift command response process (FIG. 40) with display mode information stored in the return area 344f, not only the display mode storage area 344e but also the return mode information is stored. The display mode information stored in each area of the area 344f is also sequentially shifted to the lower area side.

In step S1910, processing for canceling the display in the specific display mode is executed for the pending image displayed in the specific display mode. That is, it is set so that the hold image displayed in the specific display mode is switched to the normal display mode HMa with the switching of the production mode. Note that the switching to the normal display mode HMa is performed in accordance with the switching timing of the production mode. For example, if the production mode is switched at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined operation is performed, the hold image is switched to the normal display mode HMa at that timing, and if the production mode is switched at the start timing of the next special figure game, the The hold image is set to switch to the normal display mode HMa at the appropriate timing.

Furthermore, in the cancellation process of step S1910, a process of clearing the display mode information stored in the display mode storage area 344e is executed. Therefore, at the time of processing in step S1910, information on the display mode is stored only in the return area 344f. Furthermore, in the canceling process of step S1910, a process of erasing the performance scenario data set in step S1513 of the pending notice setting process (FIG. 34) is also executed.

In this embodiment, when the production mode is switched, the obtained suspension information, in other words, the execution lottery for the suspension notice performance (the setting process for suspension notice in FIG. 34) has already been performed. Regarding pending information, the configuration is such that re-execution lottery is restricted. Specifically, we do not conduct another lottery for execution of the pending notice performance, and prevent duplicate execution lottery from occurring before and after switching the production mode for the same pending information (image for suspension). There is.

In step S1911, a return standby flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d. In this embodiment, after switching the production mode, when the original production mode is switched again, the display mode of the pending image is returned to the specific display mode. The return standby flag is a flag indicating that the system is in a standby state for the return process. After executing step S1911, the production mode switching process ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1905 (if the return standby flag is stored), the process advances to step S1912, and a process of erasing the return standby flag is executed. Here, the situation in which an affirmative determination is made in step S1905 means that the first production mode switching is performed in a situation where a pending preview production is being executed, and then, as a result of the mode switching operation being performed again, the original production mode is returned. This means that the situation has returned to . For example, there is a situation in which the production mode is switched from production mode A to production mode B while one of the pending images is displayed in a specific display mode, and then switched to production mode A again. At that time, in the previous mode switching (switching from production mode A to production mode B), the display mode of the pending image is set to the normal display mode HMa and the pending preview production is canceled, so production mode A The hold image that was displayed in the specific display mode will continue to be displayed in the normal display mode HMa during the stay in production mode B.

Note that after switching to production mode B and before switching to production mode A, the game round of the holding image (holding information) may end. In this case, since the return standby flag is erased in steps S1811 and S1812 of the special figure fluctuation display process (FIG. 41), a negative determination is made in step S1905.

After step S1912 is executed, in step S1913, a setting process for returning to advance notice is executed to return the display mode of the pending image to a specific display mode. Thereafter, the production mode switching process ends.

<About changing the display mode of the hold image by switching the production mode>
As already explained, in this embodiment, when the production mode is switched in a situation where the hold image is displayed in a specific display mode, the display mode of the hold image is changed to the normal display mode HMa. , the suspended preview effect is released. In this case, by switching the display state of not only the background image 401 but also the hold display section 200, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the change in production mode.

In addition, if the switching of production modes is limited to simply changing the displayed image, it will be difficult to give the player an impression of the difference between the modes, but in this embodiment, the execution frequency of the pending preview production can be changed between modes. This makes it possible to highlight the differences between the production modes. However, in a configuration where the execution frequency of the pending preview effect differs between modes, even if the display mode of the pending image in which the pending preview effect is performed is the same, the jackpot expectation level suggested by the display mode will be different from the one in the production mode. It may differ depending on the type. For this reason, if the display format before the mode switch is maintained after the mode switch, even though the actual expectation level of the retained information corresponds to the production mode before the switch, it will appear as if the expectation level corresponds to the production mode after the switch. Therefore, there is a concern that there will be a mismatch between the level of expectation suggested by the pending notice performance and the actual level of expectation. In this regard, by changing the display mode of the pending image to the normal display mode HMa when switching the production mode, such mismatching of expectations can be suitably avoided.

In this way, by canceling the execution of the pending preview performance in response to switching the production mode, it is possible to make it easier to understand the change in the production mode, and to avoid inconsistencies in expectations suggested by the pending preview performance. However, on the other hand, there is a concern that some players may misunderstand that the cancellation of the pending preview presentation means that the chance suggested by the pending preview presentation has also disappeared, leading to disappointment.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a setting process for returning to the notice in step S1913, a second execution process for the pending notice in step S1702, and a third execution process for the pending notice in step S1808 are provided, and after switching the production mode, The display mode of the pending image is configured to be restored when switching back to the original production mode. The processing of each of the above steps will be explained in detail below.

<Setting process for advance notice recovery>
The setting process for advance notice return in step S1913 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43.

First, in step S2101, the display status of the pending images displayed in each pending display area Ga, Gb and execution display area D before the specific display mode is canceled and the normal display mode HMa is set is grasped. For example, in a situation where the fourth reservation image for the first special figure (the reservation image in the fourth unit reservation display area Ga4) is displayed in the blue display mode HMb, the production mode changes from production mode A to production mode B. When the mode is switched and then switched to the production mode A again, it is recognized that the pending image was displayed in the blue display mode HMb.

At that time, after switching from performance mode A to performance mode B, if the game play has been completed and the hold image has been shifted to the lower area side, it will be displayed in the fourth unit hold display area Ga4 at the time of mode switching. It is understood that the holding image corresponding to the holding image that was previously displayed was displayed in the blue display mode HMb before the cancellation process. For example, if two gaming rounds have been played after switching to production mode B, the pending image displayed in the second unit pending display area Ga2 is displayed in the blue display mode HMb at the time of mode switching. Understand that. This understanding is performed with reference to the return area 344f of the RAM 344.

In step S2102, it is determined whether the game round of the pending image (target pending image) displayed in the specific display mode is being executed. That is, after switching from production mode A to production mode B, it is determined whether or not the game cycle has been completed and the game has progressed to the game cycle of the target pending image. If the game is not being executed, the process advances to step S2103, and the number of pieces of pending information (number of pending items) prior to the target pending image is grasped. For example, if the target pending image is the third pending information, the number of previous pending images is determined to be two. Note that pending information regarding the game being played is not included in the pending number. Further, the number of reserved pieces is determined separately for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In step S2104, it is determined whether the number of pending items determined in step S2103 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, one item). If the number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the process advances to step S2105, and a lottery process for a return scenario is executed. The return scenario determines at which shift timing the target pending image is returned to its original specific display mode.

In the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343, a return scenario table is stored which determines when to restore the display mode of the pending image in correspondence with the number of pending images and the original specific display mode. There is. In the return scenario table, for example, in response to the case where the number of pending items is 2, the return timing of the display mode is set at the first shift (shift to the second unit pending display area Ga2) and the second shift ( It is possible to select between the time of shift to the first unit pending display area Ga1) and the time of the third shift (time of shift to execution display area D).

In addition, in the return scenario table, if the original display mode is a specific display mode higher than the blue display mode HMb, whether to directly return to the original specific display mode from the normal display mode HMa or to return to the original specific display mode in stages. It is also possible to select whether to return to . Therefore, there are cases in which the specific display mode before release is restored by one hold change display, and cases in which the display mode is returned to the specific display mode before release after a plurality of hold change displays.

In step S2105, based on the above-mentioned return scenario table and the lottery counter (random value) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344, the return timing and return mode of the display mode in the pending image are drawn.

After executing step S2105 or if a negative determination is made in step S2104 (if the number of pending items is less than one), a return scenario setting process is performed in step S2106. If the return scenario lottery process is performed in step S2105, the display mode of the pending image is set to be restored in the selected return scenario, and if the number of pending images is less than 1, the execution display is The display mode of the pending image is set to be restored when shifting to area D.

After executing step S2106 or when an affirmative determination is made in step S2102 (when the game round of the target pending image is being executed), a preview return flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344 in step S2107. The advance notice return flag is used by the MPU 342 to understand that processing for restoring the display mode of the pending image should be executed. After executing step S2107, the setting process for returning with advance notice ends.

<Process for second execution of pending notice>
The second execution process for pending notice in step S1702 (FIG. 40(a)) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 44. This process is performed as part of the shift command response process, in other words, it is a process that is executed at the shift timing of the pending image.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether the advance notice return flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. If the notice return flag is not stored, the process for second execution of the pending notice is ended.

If the advance notice return flag is stored, the process advances to step S2202, and the return scenario set in step S2106 in the above-mentioned advance notice return setting process is grasped. In step S2203, based on the setting result of the return scenario grasped in step S2202, it is determined whether the current shift timing is the timing to return to the display mode of the target pending image. If it is not the return timing, the second execution process of the suspended notice is ended.

If it is the return timing, the process advances to step S2204, and the display mode to be changed is determined based on the setting result of the return scenario. For example, if the display mode before the release of the target hold image is the green display mode HMc, and the display mode determined by the recovery scenario is the green display mode HMc, the display mode to be changed is the green display mode HMc. Understand. Further, when the display mode determined by the return scenario is the blue display mode HMb, which is a pre-stage to the green display mode HMc, the blue display mode HMb is grasped as the display mode to be changed.

In step S2205, the display mode of the target pending image is set to be changed to the display mode grasped in step S2204. Specifically, the output command to the display control device 350 includes information indicating the pending image whose display mode is to be changed, and information indicating which display mode (display color) to change to. A command is set to the effect that the display mode of the pending image should be changed at the current shift timing. After executing step S2205, the second execution process for pending notice ends.

<Process for third execution of pending notice>
The third execution process for pending notice in step S1808 (FIG. 41) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 45. This process is performed as a part of the special figure fluctuation display process, in other words, it is a process that is performed during the execution of the game round.

First, in step S2301, it is determined whether the advance notice return flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. If the notice return flag is not stored, the third execution process for the suspended notice is ended.

If the advance notice return flag is stored, the process advances to step S2302, and it is determined whether or not a promotion flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. The promotion flag will be described later.

If the promotion flag is not stored, the process advances to step S2303, and it is determined whether the current display mode of the target pending image is the normal display mode HMa. Note that the case where the current display mode of the target pending image is the normal display mode HMa is a case where the switching operation to the original production mode is performed during the execution of the game round of the target pending image.

If the current display mode is the normal display mode HMa, the process advances to step S2304, and it is determined whether or not there are any pending change points remaining in the current game round. For example, if there are no pending change points remaining, such as when the performance mode is changed at the end of the game of the target pending image, the process advances to step S2314, and the flags are stored in the various flag storage areas 344d. Delete the previous notice return flag. As a result, the return processing of the pending notice performance is canceled, and the target pending image (the pending image displayed in the execution display area D) continues to be displayed in the normal display mode HMa in that game round.

If the hold change point remains, in step S2305, the system refers to the return area 344f of the RAM 344 to grasp the specific display mode before release in the target hold image, and grasps this as the display mode to be changed. do. In step S2306, settings are made to change the display mode of the pending image to the display mode grasped in step S2305. Specifically, as an output command to the display control device 350, a command indicating that the display mode of the pending image should be changed is set by including information indicating which display mode (display color) to change to. do. As a result, the display mode of the hold image displayed in the execution display area D is changed (returned) to the specific display mode before cancellation at the most recent hold change point.

After executing step S2306 or when a negative determination is made in step S2303 (when the current display mode of the target pending image is not the normal display mode HMa), the determined flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d in step S2307. Determine whether or not the Note that a case where the current display mode of the target pending image (the pending image displayed in the execution display area D) is not the normal display mode HMa means that the display mode of the pending image is already the specific display mode before cancellation. The situation has changed.

If it is determined in step S2307 that the determined flag is stored, the third execution process for pending notice is ended. On the other hand, if the determined flag is not stored, processing for promoting the pending notice is executed in step S2308.

Here, the pending notice promotion process in step S2308 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 46.

In the promotion process, first, in step S2401, the fluctuation pattern of the target pending image is grasped. This understanding is performed based on the fluctuation start command (step S712 in FIG. 23) transmitted from the main controller 162 at the start of the game round (game round in progress) of the target pending image.

In step S2402, the promotion determination of the pending preview performance is performed based on the fluctuation pattern grasped in step S2401 and the promotion determination table stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. The promotion determination may change the display mode of the target pending image (the pending image displayed in the execution display area D) to a higher specific display mode (a display mode higher than the display mode before release). This is to determine whether it is possible or not.

As shown in FIG. 47, the upper limit of the display mode is determined in the promotion determination table in correspondence with each variation pattern. For example, for variation pattern 5H corresponding to SPSP reach A failure, the red display mode is set. Changes up to HMd are allowed. Incidentally, in the case of each variation pattern corresponding to a jackpot, changes up to the rainbow color display mode HMe are allowed in any of variation patterns 1A to 5A.

Note that the promotion determination table is not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 47, and may have other configurations, such as having different upper limit display modes for each variation pattern corresponding to a jackpot. In short, it is sufficient that the upper limit display mode is determined so as to correspond to the jackpot expectation level of the game round (fluctuation pattern) (in other words, to match the jackpot expectation level).

In step S2402, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern grasped in step S2401 is specified with reference to the promotion determination table, and the current display mode of the target pending image is lower than the specified upper limit display mode. It is determined whether the display mode is selected. As a result, if the current display mode is a lower display mode than the upper limit display mode, promotion of the display mode is allowed; otherwise, promotion is not allowed. Note that if the display mode is set to be changed in step S2306 above, it is determined whether the display mode after the change is a display mode lower than the upper limit display mode specified above, and the result is Determine whether promotion is possible based on the following.

After executing step S2402, a determined flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344 in step S2403. The determined flag is for the MPU 342 to know that the promotion determination has been performed, and in other words, it is for avoiding duplicate promotion determination.

In step S2404, it is determined whether the result of the promotion determination in step S2402 allows promotion of the display mode. If the promotion is not permitted, the process exits the promotion process for the suspended notice, proceeds to step S2314 (FIG. 45), erases the notice return flag, and ends the third execution process for the suspended notice.

If promotion is permitted, the process advances to step S2405 and a promotion scenario lottery process is executed. The promotion scenario determines at what timing (pending change point) the display mode of the target pending image displayed in the execution display area D is to be changed. A promotion scenario lottery table for drawing a promotion scenario is stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343, and in this promotion scenario lottery table, an execution lottery table for drawing a lottery to determine whether or not to execute a promotion effect is stored. In addition to the information, multiple types of promotion scenarios are set corresponding to each upper limit display mode of the pending preview performance. In step S2405, based on the promotion scenario lottery table and the lottery counters (random values) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344, an execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not to promote the display mode, and a scenario for the promotion. A lottery will be held.

In step S2406, it is determined whether the result of the lottery process in step S2405 is to promote the display mode. If it is not to be promoted, the process exits the promotion process for the pending notice and proceeds to step S2314 (FIG. 45), the notice return flag is erased, and the third execution process for the pending notice is ended.

In the case of promotion, the process advances to step S2407, and promotion scenario data is set so that the promotion scenario selected at step S2405 is executed. After step S2407 is executed, in steps S2408 to S2410, processing related to change suggestion effects is executed. These processes are similar to steps S1603 to S1605 in the first execution process of the pending notice (FIG. 38(a)), so the explanation will be omitted.

After execution of step S2410 or when a negative determination is made in step S2409, a promotion flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d in step S2411, and thereafter, the pending notice promotion process is ended. The promotion flag is for the MPU 342 to understand that the display mode of the target pending image should be promoted.

Returning to the explanation of the process for third execution of a pending notice (FIG. 45), after the process for promoting a pending notice in step S2308 is executed, the third execution process for a pending notice is ended.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2302 (if the promotion flag is stored), the process advances to step S2309, and it is determined whether or not it is time to promote the display mode. This determination is made based on the promotion scenario setting result in step S2407. If it is not the promotion timing, the third execution process for pending notice is ended.

If it is promotion timing, the process advances to step S2310, and the display mode to be changed (higher display mode) in the current change process is grasped based on the setting result of the promotion scenario. In the following step S2311, the display mode of the pending image displayed in the execution display area D is set to be changed to the display mode grasped in step S2310. Specifically, the display mode of the pending image displayed in the execution display area D is changed by including information indicating which display mode to change to as an output command to the display control device 350. Set the command to indicate what should be done.

In step S2312, it is determined whether the display mode grasped in step S2310 or the display mode set as the change destination in step S2311 is the final display mode in the promotion effect. For example, if a promotion scenario is set to promote the display mode in multiple stages through multiple change processes, if the current change process is an intermediate step, it is assumed that it is not the final display mode. A negative determination is made in the step, and the third execution process for pending notice is ended.

If it is the final display mode, the promotion flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d is erased in step S2313. In the following step S2314, the advance notice return flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d is erased, and then the third execution process of the suspended notice is ended.

<About the flow of the display mode of the hold image when the production mode is switched>
The flow of the display mode of the hold image when the production mode is switched will be explained with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50.

When a winning occurs in the first operation port 62 in a state where three pieces of holding information for the first special symbol have been acquired, and when the fourth piece of holding information (holding image HW) is acquired, the main controller In 162, a pending prefetch process (step S305) is executed for the acquired pending information. Here, it is assumed that as a result, a result is read in advance in which the judgment of validity is wrong and the fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern 6H (missing SPSP reach B).

In addition, the effect control device 143 executes a setting process for a pending notice (step S1403) based on the pre-read result in the main control device 162, and performs a lottery for execution of a pending notice effect regarding the pending image HW, and selects the final display mode. Lotteries, production scenario drawings, etc. will be held. As a result of those lottery results, the red display mode HMd was selected as the final display mode, and the scenario in which the display was initially displayed in the green display mode HMc and changed to the red display mode HMd at a later shift timing was selected as the production scenario. shall be. In this case, as shown in FIG. 48(a), the holding image HW in the green display mode HMc is displayed in the fourth unit holding display area Ga4 of the first holding display area Ga.

Thereafter, when the player performs a mode switching operation using the performance operation section 36, the performance mode is switched from performance mode A to performance mode B. At this time, as shown in FIG. 48(b), the display mode of the pending image HW, which has been set as the green display mode HMc in the production mode A, is changed to the normal display mode HMa. In this case, in the production control device 143, information indicating the display mode (green display mode HMc) of the pending image HW before mode switching is stored in the return area 344f of the RAM 344. Note that FIG. 48(b) shows a case where the production mode is switched in the middle of a game round in which the suspension information of the suspension image HW is acquired.

When the mode switching operation is performed again in the next game round and the production mode is switched from production mode B to production mode A, the production control device 143 uses a pre-announcement return function based on the information stored in the return area 344f. A setting process (step S1913) is executed, and the original display mode (green display mode HMc) is grasped and a return scenario is selected by lottery. As a result of the scenario lottery, it is assumed that a scenario is selected which is initially displayed in the normal display mode HMa and then changed to the original display mode HMc at the subsequent change timing.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 49(a), at the time of switching to production mode A, the hold image HW is displayed with the display mode set to the normal display mode HMa. If the selected return scenario is to change the display mode of the hold image HW to the blue display mode HMb at the next shift timing, and further to the green display mode HMc at the next shift timing, As shown in 49(b), at the timing when the pending image HW is shifted to the second unit pending display area Ga2, the display mode of the pending image HW is returned to the original green display mode HMc. As a result, the display mode of the pending image HW, which was set to the normal display mode HMa when switching to production mode B, is returned to the display mode before switching to production mode B.

Note that after switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A, until the game round of the pending image HW starts, a change-suggesting presentation (FIG. 39) that suggests a change in the display mode of the pending image (rank up) is performed. The actual lottery will not be held. Therefore, when changing to the blue display mode HMb or changing to the green display mode HMc, no change suggestion effect is performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 50(a), when the game round of the pending image HW is started, the effect control device 143 executes the third execution process (step S1808) of the pending notice, and It grasps the variation pattern of HW, grasps the upper limit display mode corresponding to the grasped variation pattern, and determines promotion to a higher display mode.

The fluctuation pattern of the holding image HW is fluctuation pattern 6H, and the upper limit display mode in this case is the red display mode HMd (Fig. 47), so in the promotion judgment, the current display mode (green display mode HMc) is the upper limit display mode. Promotion of the display mode is allowed based on the fact that the mode is lower than the mode. As a result, as shown in FIG. 50(b), at a predetermined pending change point in the game cycle of the pending image HW, the display mode of the pending image HW displayed in the execution display area D changes to the red display mode HMd. In other words, the display mode is changed to a higher level than the original display mode. At that time, if the lottery for executing the change suggestion performance is won, the change suggestion performance is performed and then the display mode is changed to red display mode HMd.

The red display mode HMd suggests that the SPSP reach effect will be performed in the game round of the relevant pending image. Here, since the fluctuation pattern of the hold image HW is the fluctuation pattern 6H corresponding to the SPSP reach B out effect, the SPSP reach B effect will be performed in the game round of the hold image HW, and the hold image HW The suggestion by and the actual game performance are consistent.

In addition, after switching from production mode A to production mode B, the game round of the pending image HW may end without switching to production mode A again. In this case, the display mode of the pending image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa without returning to the specific display mode.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be achieved.

If execution of the hold notice effect is canceled by switching the effect mode and the display mode of the target hold image HW changes from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa, then by shifting to the original display mode, the target hold The display mode of the image HW for use is returned to the original specific display mode.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the pending image is set to a specific display mode based on the result of the pending pre-reading process, so that the player's expectations for a jackpot result are aroused even before the start of the game round. be able to. Furthermore, since multiple types of specific display modes are set with different levels of jackpot expectation, it is possible to suggest different levels of expectation, which is advantageous in arousing players' sense of expectation. It can be configured as follows. Furthermore, since mode switching is performed between performance mode A and performance mode B, it is possible to change the player's mood during the game and prevent him from getting bored with the game. In such a configuration, if the performance mode is switched during the execution of a hold preview performance (a performance in which the hold image is set in a specific display mode) and the execution of the hold preview performance is canceled, the performance is notified or suggested by the relevant performance. There is a concern that players may feel misunderstood or feel anxious that their expectations have disappeared. In this case, it may be possible to restrict the switching of production modes while the pending preview production is in progress, but this may lead to a situation where the frequency of switching production modes decreases, and the significance of having multiple types of production modes may be lost. .

In this regard, in this configuration, when execution of the pending notice performance is canceled by switching the performance mode, and in that state, the switching to the original performance mode is performed again, the target pending image is changed to the normal display mode HMa. Since the HW is returned to the original specific display mode, the expectation level can be notified again. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player that the level of expectation has not disappeared, and it is possible to execute the pending notice performance without imposing restrictions on switching the performance mode. In other words, it becomes possible to suitably balance the execution of the pending notice performance and the switching of the performance mode.

Information corresponding to the notification mode of the hold image when a hold preview effect is performed can be stored in the return area 344f of the RAM 344, and when the original effect mode is returned to, the information corresponding to the notification mode of the hold image is stored in the return area 344f of the RAM 344. The configuration is such that the notification mode of the hold image HW is set. Thereby, when shifting to the original production mode, it becomes possible to suitably return the display mode of the pending image set to the normal display mode HMa to the original specific display mode.

At the time of the above setting, the display mode of the target pending image HW is set based on the information stored in the return area 344f, regardless of the result of the pending prefetch process performed on the target pending image.

For example, when transitioning from presentation mode A to presentation mode B and then to presentation mode A, the display mode of the target holding image HW is set based on the result of the holding pre-reading performed in the previous presentation mode A. If the configuration is such that the display mode is set to be different from the display mode in the production mode A described above. In this case, since the display mode of the target pending image HW in the subsequent performance mode A does not match the display mode in the previous performance mode A, the player can see that the canceled pending preview performance has been restored. Hateful. In particular, in a configuration where the display mode of the hold image can be changed in stages, even if the look-ahead result is the same, the display mode of the hold image (hold preview effect) at the time of switching may differ depending on the switching timing of the effect mode. In order to obtain this, if the display mode in the subsequent production mode A is set based on the result of the pending pre-reading process, a display mode different from the display mode in the previous production mode A is likely to be set.

In this regard, in this configuration, since the display mode is set based on the information stored in the return area 344f instead of the result of the pending prefetching process, when transitioning to the later production mode A, the display mode is set based on the information stored in the return area 344f. You can set the display mode to be the same as the actual display mode. As a result, the display mode in the previous performance mode A and the display mode in the subsequent performance mode B can be suitably matched, and the player can recognize that the display format (suspended preview performance) has returned. It becomes possible to make it easier.

When returning the display mode of the target holding image HW to the original specific display mode by transitioning to production mode A later, the display mode of the target holding image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the original specific display mode. The configuration is such that the performance scenario (return scenario) for the return is set again.

When returning the target retention image HW to the original specific display mode in the later production mode A, depending on the length of stay in the previous production mode B, the target retention image HW may be returned to the target retention image HW after switching to the later production mode A. It is assumed that the period until the game cycle of the image HW ends, that is, the remaining period during which the target pending image HW continues to be displayed, changes. In this regard, in this configuration, the production scenario is reset when the target pending image HW is returned to the original specific display mode, so even if the remaining period is changed, the target pending image HW is returned to the original specific display mode. can be suitably changed.

In the above case, the configuration is such that the number of pending images before the target pending image HW is grasped, and the production scenario is reset based on the result.

In this case, the production scenario can be reset after appropriately grasping the remaining period, and the target retention image HW can be suitably changed to the original specific display mode regardless of the stay period in production mode B. be able to.

The configuration is such that after the target retention image HW is changed to the original specific display mode in the later production mode A, it can be promoted to a higher specific display mode.

In this case, the range of the display mode (suggested expectation level) in the subsequent production mode A is limited to the display mode in the previous production mode A, and it is possible to suppress the range of suggestible expectation levels from narrowing. . At this time, if the specific display mode is suddenly changed to a higher-ranking specific display mode, it may be difficult to understand the correspondence with the pending notice performance performed in the previous performance mode A, and the performance may become difficult to understand. In this regard, in this configuration, it is possible to change from the original specific display mode to the higher-level display mode, so the display mode of the target pending image HW has been restored (the canceled pending preview effect has been restored). ), making it easy to understand, and it is possible to suppress confusion among players.

In the above case, instead of unnecessarily promoting the display mode of the target pending image HW, a promotion determination is made as to whether or not to promote it to a higher display mode based on the fluctuation pattern of the target pending image HW, and the result is The configuration is such that it is determined whether or not to use the upper mode based on the above. Thereby, it becomes possible to promote the display mode of the target pending image HW while making it consistent with the game round effect (reach effect, etc.) actually performed in the game round of the target pending image HW.

By making it possible to execute a change suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the pending image HW changes to a higher mode, and by shifting to the original mode, the display mode of the target pending image HW can be changed to the original specific display. When returning to the mode, execution of the change suggestion performance is restricted.

Since the change suggestion performance suggests a change to a higher-order display mode, expectations for the change to a higher-order display mode are aroused, and the player's attention to the pending image can be increased. In such a configuration, for example, when the target retention image HW is set to the green display mode HMc in the previous production mode A, and the normal display mode HMa is changed to the green display mode HMc in the subsequent production mode A, a change suggestion production is performed. When performing , the player changes the display mode to a higher level based on the specific display mode (green display mode HMc) in production mode A that he or she remembers, even though it actually only returns to the original specific display mode. (Red display mode HMd and rainbow color display mode HMe) may be associated with this. In this case, the actual display mode (green display mode HMc) in the target retention image HW becomes a lower display mode than the mode associated with the player, which may give an unpleasant impression to the player. In this regard, in this configuration, even if the change corresponds to a change to a higher-level display mode, if the display mode is simply returned to the previous display mode A, the change suggestion effect is not executed, so the actual It is possible to prevent the player from associating a higher level display mode than the display mode, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

The performance mode A and the performance mode B are configured to have different ease of execution of the pending notice performance.

In such a configuration, switching the production mode changes the production characteristics related to the expectation of jackpot, so compared to cases where the change is limited to only the appearance by changing the background image or character image, the difference between the production modes is more noticeable in the game. can make a strong impression on people. However, on the other hand, if the display mode of the target pending image HW is changed to a specific display mode (while the ongoing pending preview performance is continued), the expectation level suggested by the target pending image HW will change. This may lead to different situations before and after switching the production mode. In this case, such inconsistency in expectations can be suppressed by canceling the execution of the suspended preview performance when switching the production mode, but this time, the expectation level suggested by the specific display mode can be suppressed. There is a concern that the player may be misunderstood or feel anxious that the item has disappeared. By applying the present embodiment (a configuration in which the display mode of the target holding image HW is returned to the original specific display mode by shifting to the original production mode, etc.) to such a configuration, each of them can be improved. It is possible to make the features function effectively and to suitably exhibit each of the above-mentioned effects.

<Second embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, when switching from one of presentation mode A and presentation mode B to the other is performed in a state where there is a pending image in a specific display mode, for example, The display mode of the pending image is stored, and the display mode of the pending image is changed to the normal display mode. After that, if the original effect mode (one effect mode) is switched again before the game cycle of that pending image ends, the display stored at the time of the previous change (switch to the other effect mode) Based on the information on the mode, the display mode of the pending image is restored, and the display mode is changed to the original specific display mode or to a higher specific display mode.

During the period after the previous switching is performed until the subsequent switching (switching back to the original production mode), that is, during the period when the display mode restoration process is being waited for, the player cannot play the game. Therefore, new pending information may occur. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in how the suspension notice effect is handled with respect to this new suspension information. This embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55. In these figures, the same components as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and their explanations will be omitted.

<Pending command handling process>
The pending command handling process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 51. This process is executed when a hold command is received in the production control device 143 (when hold information is generated), and is executed in place of the hold command corresponding process in FIG. 31. In FIG. 51, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 31, and the explanation thereof will be omitted or simplified.

In step S1402, the value of the pending number counter (start pending storage number SN) provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344 is incremented by 1, and in step S2601, the recovery standby flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344. Determine whether it is stored. The return standby flag is for the MPU 342 to understand that the MPU 342 is waiting for the return process (processing to return the display mode of the pending image to the original specific display mode), and is used for the return process. During the standby period, various flags are stored in the flag storage area 344d. The waiting period for the return process includes the period from when one of production mode A and production mode B is switched to the other until switching back to the original production mode (duration of stay in the other production mode). In addition, after being switched to the other production mode, the game round of the target pending image (the pending image that is subject to the display mode restoration process) ends without being switched back to the original production mode. There is a period until

If a negative determination is made in step S2601 (if the return standby flag is not stored), the process advances to step S1403, and a setting process for pending notice (FIG. 34) is executed. In the setting process for pending notice, settings are made to execute a pending notice effect for the generated pending information.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2601 (if the return standby flag is stored), the process proceeds to step S2602 without executing the setting process for pending notice in step S1403, and the pending notification corresponding to the generated pending information is The image display mode is set to the normal display mode HMa. That is, in the present embodiment, when new suspension information is generated during the standby period of the return process, execution of the suspension preview effect for the suspension information is restricted.

Note that the reservation prefetching process for the reservation information is performed in the reservation prefetching process (FIG. 26) of the main controller 162, similarly to other reservation information. Therefore, although the production control device 143 forcibly sets the display mode of the pending image to the normal display mode HMa as described above, the pre-reading results such as fluctuation patterns are in a state obtained by the pending command from the main control device 162. ing.

In step S2603, restricted occurrence information is stored in association with the generated suspension information. The limited occurrence information indicates that the pending information has occurred during the limited period. The process in step S2603 is performed, for example, by storing the above-mentioned restricted occurrence information together with the suspension information such as the fluctuation pattern in the first to fourth areas (FIG. 32) provided in the suspension storage area 344c of the RAM 344. . Therefore, when the shift process in step S1704 in the shift command response process (FIG. 40) is executed, the restricted occurrence information is shifted to the lower area side along with the pending information. Thereby, even if the display area of the pending images is shifted by shift processing, it is possible to know which pending images are generated during the limited period. Note that the restricted occurrence information may be stored in a storage area other than the reservation storage area 344c so that it can be recognized which kind of reservation information it is.

After step S2603 is executed, in step S1405, a process for displaying a hold image on the hold display section 200 of the display screen G is executed. As described above, since the display mode is set to the normal display mode HMa in step S2602, the pending image of the pending information generated during the restriction period is displayed in the normal display mode HMa.

Note that if a negative determination is made in the above step S2601 (if it is not within the restriction period) and the process reaches step S1405 via the setting process for a pending notice in step S1403 or the process for first execution of a pending notice in step S1404, The pending image is displayed in the display mode set in those processes.

<Processing for switching production mode>
The production mode switching process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 52. This process is executed in step S1307 of the production setting process (FIG. 30) in the production control device 143, and is executed in place of the production mode switching process of FIG. In FIG. 52, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 42, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After executing the production mode switching process in step S1903, a production mode flag corresponding to the switched production mode is set in step S1904. In the following step S1905, it is determined whether a return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. Note that the situation in which the return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d in the situation where the switching process in step S1903 is executed means that after the effect mode switching (previous switching) is performed, the original effect is This means that the mode has been re-switched. Conversely, a situation in which the return standby flag is not stored means a situation in which the above-mentioned previous switching has been performed (a situation in which re-switching to the original production mode has not yet been performed).

If it is determined in step S1905 that the return standby flag is not stored (if the previous switching has been performed), the process advances to step S1906, and the processing of steps S1906 to S1911 is performed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. Execute.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1905 that a return standby flag is stored (if switching is performed again), the process advances to step S1912, and the return standby flag in the various flag storage areas 344d is deleted. As a result, the restricted state of the pending notice performance is released. Therefore, regarding the hold information generated after the cancellation, the process for setting the hold preview effect (step S1403) etc. is executed when the hold information is generated (when the hold command is received).

In step S1913, a setting process for advance notice return is executed, and in subsequent step S2701, it is determined whether there is any hold information that occurred during the restriction period. This determination is made based on the restricted occurrence information stored in step S2603 of the hold command processing (FIG. 51).

If there is no pending information that occurred during the limited period, the production mode switching process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if there is pending information that occurred during the limited period, a second setting process for pending notice is executed in step S2702, and then the production mode switching process is ended.

<Second setting process for pending notice>
The second setting process for pending notice in step S2702 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53.

First, in step S2801, hold information that has occurred during the restriction period is grasped. That is, based on the limited occurrence information, it is determined which of the currently existing pending information is the pending information that occurred during the limited period.

After executing the process in step S2801, the processes in and after step S2802 are executed for the identified pending occurrence during the restriction period. Note that many of the processes after step S2802 are similar to each process in the pending notice setting process (FIG. 34) of step S1403 (FIG. 51), so the explanation of common processes will be simplified. The different processes will be explained in detail.

In steps S2802 to S2804, the reservation storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is referred to to understand the fluctuation pattern in the occurrence and reservation during the limited period, and to determine whether or not it is a jackpot win. In step S2805, the production mode after switching is grasped. For example, if the reswitching is from production mode B to production mode A, production mode A is grasped as the production mode after switching.

In steps S2806 to S2808, a hold preview execution lottery table corresponding to the switched performance mode grasped in step S2805 is acquired, and a lottery for execution of the hold preview performance is performed. If the execution lottery is won, in steps S2809 to S2814, the final display mode of the pending image in the pending preview production is determined, and the process (production scenario) up to displaying the final display mode is determined. or

At that time, if the final display mode lottery table for drawing the final display mode and the production scenario lottery table for drawing the production scenario are different for each production mode, the production mode after switching ascertained in step S2805. Obtain the corresponding table and perform a lottery. Although the occurrence hold during the restriction period occurred during the production mode before switching, the conditions set for the production mode after switching are This is done in accordance with the production mode after switching.

In step S2815, a pending notice flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344, and then the second setting process for pending notice is ended. After the suspension notice flag is set in this way, the process for first execution of the suspension notice in step S1701 in the shift command response process (FIG. 38(a)) and the process for displaying special figure fluctuations (FIG. 41) In step S1807 of the first execution process of the pending notice, a process of changing the display mode of the pending image to a specific display mode is executed. That is, the suspension notice performance regarding the suspension information that occurred before the mode switching will be performed in the performance mode after the switching.

<Special figure fluctuation display processing>
The special figure variation display processing according to this embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 54. This process is executed in step S1305 of the production setting process (FIG. 30) in the production control device 143, and is executed in place of the special figure fluctuation display process of FIG. In FIG. 54, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 41, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

This process is provided as a response to the case where the game round of the target pending image (the pending image subject to the display mode restoration process) ends without being reswitched to the original production mode. It is something.

After executing the process for ending the variation in step S1809, in step S1810, the current special drawing game is updated with the pending information (the pending image that is subject to the display mode restoration process) that triggered the pending notice performance. It is determined whether it is the game time. If it is the game round of the suspension information that triggered the suspension notice performance, it is determined in step S1811 whether a suspension notice flag or a return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. If either the suspension notice flag or the return standby flag is stored, the stored flag is erased in step S1812. As a result, the above-mentioned return processing is canceled, and the restricted state of the suspended preview performance is released.

In step S2901, it is determined whether there is any pending information that occurred during the restriction period. If there is hold information that occurred during the limit period, the process advances to step S2902, and it is determined which hold information is the hold information that occurred during the limit period. Each process in step S2901 and step S2902 is performed based on the restricted occurrence information stored in step S2603 of the pending command process (FIG. 51).

In step S2903, a setting process for notice of suspension is executed for the suspension that occurs during the limited period ascertained in step S2902. This process is similar to the setting process for pending notice (FIG. 34) in step S1403 (FIG. 51), and is a setting process for executing a pending notice effect in accordance with the current presentation mode. Become.

In other words, if the restriction state is lifted without switching back to the original production mode, the execution lottery for the suspended notice production, the lottery for the final display mode, etc. will be changed to the production mode you are staying in at that time. Apply the conditions set for. For example, when switching from production mode A to production mode B is performed as the previous switching, the conditions set for production mode B are applied to perform a lottery for execution of the pending notice production, etc. After execution of step S2903 or when a negative determination is made in step S2902 (when there is no pending information that occurred during the limited period), the special symbol variation display process is ended.

<About the flow of the display mode of the pending image corresponding to the pending occurrence during the restriction period>
The flow of the display mode of the suspension image corresponding to the occurrence suspension during the restriction period will be described with reference to FIG. 55.

When the fourth suspension information of the first special symbol is generated in the situation where production mode A is set, the main control device 162 performs suspension pre-reading processing (step S305), and the production control device 143 performs suspension preview processing. Setting processing (step S1403) is performed. As a result, when it is decided to execute a hold notice effect in which the display mode is the green display mode HMc, as shown in FIG. 55(a), the hold image HA whose display mode is the green display mode HMc is is displayed in the fourth unit pending display area Ga4 of the first pending display area Ga.

When the player performs a mode switching operation in the game round in which the suspension information corresponding to the suspension image HA is acquired, the production mode is switched from production mode A to production mode B. At this time, as shown in FIG. 55(b), the display mode of the pending image HA is changed from the green display mode HMc to the normal display mode HMa.

It is assumed that two new pieces of suspension information are generated while the production mode is maintained at production mode B until the suspension image HA is shifted to the second unit suspension display area Ga2. For these newly generated hold information, the setting process for hold notice by the effect control device 143 is not performed, and the display mode is set to the normal display mode HMa. In other words, since the execution of the hold notice effect is restricted, the display mode of the hold images HB1 and HB2 corresponding to the newly generated hold information is changed to the normal display mode, as shown in FIG. 55(c). HMa is displayed in the third unit reservation display area Ga3 and the fourth unit reservation display area Ga4, respectively.

The reservation prefetching process performed by the main controller 162 on the reservation information of the reservation images HB1 and HB2 is performed at the acquisition timing of the reservation information, similarly to other reservation information. The result of pre-reading is notified to the production control device 143 through the reservation command, so although the production control device 143 is in a state where it does not perform the setting process for the reservation notice, the pre-reading result regarding the reservation information is acquired. It is in.

When the mode switching operation is performed again in the next game and the production mode is switched from production mode B to production mode A, the production control device 143 displays the holding images HB1 and HB2 displayed in the normal display mode HMa. The second setting process for pending notice (step S2702) is executed as the target. The second setting process for the suspension notice performs a lottery for execution of the suspension notice performance, a lottery for the final display mode, a lottery for the production scenario, etc., based on the pre-reading result notified from the main control device 162 at the timing of acquisition of the suspension information. It is something. When performing those lottery drawings, a lottery table corresponding to production mode A, which is the production mode after switching, is used. In other words, although the hold information of the hold images HB1 and HB2 was acquired in the situation of presentation mode B, the lottery for the hold notice effect for them is based on the effect that is the mode at the time of execution of the hold notice effect. The lottery conditions set for mode A are applied.

As a result of the above lottery, for example, if the result is that the hold preview effect is not executed for the hold image HB1, and that the hold preview effect is executed for the hold image HB2 with the display mode set to the blue display mode HMb, As shown in FIG. 55(d), the display mode of the pending image HB1 is maintained in the normal display mode HMa, and the display mode of the pending image HB2 is changed to the blue display mode HMb.

Note that regarding the hold image HA corresponding to the hold information acquired in the effect mode A before shifting to the effect mode B, the effect control device 143 performs a setting process for returning to the notice (step S1913), the second hold notice By performing the execution process (step S1702), the display mode is changed to the green display mode HMc, which is the original display mode.

Furthermore, unlike the case where the switching to production mode A is performed as described above, after the state shown in FIG. When the game round of the last pending information acquired in the previous production mode A ends, the restricted state ends with the end of the game round. In this case, at the end timing of the game round, the second setting process for pending notice targeting the pending images HB1 and HB2 is executed. At this time, various types of lottery such as execution lottery for pending preview performance, lottery for final display mode, lottery for performance scenario, etc. are performed using a lottery table corresponding to performance mode B. That is, different lottery conditions from those in the case of FIG. 55(d) are applied.

As a result of the above-mentioned lottery, for example, if it is determined that for the hold image HB1, the hold preview effect is executed with the display mode being the blue display mode HMb, but for the hold image HB2, the hold preview effect is not executed, the As shown in 55(e), the display mode of the pending image HB1 is changed to the blue display mode HMb, and the display mode of the pending image HB1 is maintained in the normal display mode HMa.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be achieved.

Regarding the holding images HB1 and HB2 corresponding to the holding information acquired during the restricted state in which the execution of the held preview effect is restricted, the display mode after the restricted state ends is determined by the holding look-ahead processing executed during the restricted state. The configuration was such that settings were made based on the results.

In the present embodiment, when the performance mode is switched during execution of the suspended preview performance, execution of the suspended preview performance is restricted until switching to the original performance mode is performed again. If new pending information is acquired during the restricted state, assuming that such pending information is not changed to a specific display mode, the player's expectations regarding the pending information acquired during the restricted state will be reduced. There is a concern that it will not be possible to evoke

In this regard, according to the present configuration, the display mode of the hold images HB1 and HB2 corresponding to the hold information acquired during the limit state can be changed to a specific display mode after the limit state ends. It is possible to arouse the player's sense of expectation regarding the pending information acquired in the above. At that time, since the change to a specific display mode after the restricted state (execution of a pending notice effect) is performed based on the result of the pending pre-reading process executed during the restricted state, the pending pre-reading is performed in the same way as when not in the restricted state. can be processed. In other words, since there is no need to change the configuration of the suspension prefetching process, it is possible to execute a suspension notice performance triggered by suspension information acquired during the restriction state after the restriction state, while suppressing the complexity of the configuration. It becomes possible.

The configuration is such that the reservation prefetching process for the acquired reservation information is performed in accordance with the acquisition timing of the reservation information, regardless of whether it is in a restricted state or not.

In this case, it is possible to perform the pending prefetching process in accordance with the acquisition timing of the pending information in both the restricted state and the non-restricted state, so the pending prefetching process can be distinguished between the former case and the latter case. There's no need to. Therefore, it becomes possible to execute a suspension notice effect triggered by suspension information acquired during the restriction state after the restriction state, while suppressing the configuration from becoming complicated.

The setting of the display mode of the hold images HB1 and HB2 after the restriction state (setting of the hold preview effect) is configured to be executed at the end of the restriction state.

For example, when setting the display mode after the restriction state based on the result of the pending prefetch process executed during the restriction state, the setting may not be executed during the restriction state. However, if the game times of the pending images HB1 and HB2 with the display mode set are executed during the restricted state, the display period of the pending images will end without the display mode settings being reflected, and the settings will be changed. There is a risk of it being wasted. In this regard, in this configuration, since the display mode is set at the end of the restricted state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such waste and perform efficient processing.

When the hold information is acquired during the restricted state, the restriction occurrence information indicating that the hold information was acquired during the restricted state is stored in the hold storage area 344c of the RAM 344.

According to the above configuration, based on the restriction occurrence information stored in the reservation storage area 344c of the RAM 344, it can be determined after the restriction state that the reservation information was acquired during the restriction state. Therefore, after the restricted state ends, even if the held information acquired before entering the restricted state and the held information acquired during the restricted state are mixed, the held information acquired during the restricted state can be easily can be specified. As a result, when setting the display mode of each pending image after a restricted state, it is possible to distinguish between held information acquired during a restricted state and other held information, and to display only held information acquired during a restricted state. It becomes possible to process the target.

<Third embodiment>
In this embodiment, a distinction is made between a case where a production mode with a high frequency of pending notice production (production mode A) is switched to a production mode with a low occurrence frequency (production mode B), and a case where a switch is made from a low production mode to a high production mode. Separately, the display mode of the pending image is restored. This embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58. Note that in these figures, the same components as in each of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and their explanations will be omitted.

In the first embodiment described above, the production mode is switched in a situation where there is a pending image in a specific display mode, and after the pending image is changed to the normal display mode HMa, the display mode is switched back to the original production mode. When the switching is performed, the display mode is restored to the pending image, but in this embodiment, even if the display mode is not switched back to the original mode, the display mode is restored. It is configured to perform a process of restoring the display mode for the pending image. By the way, the frequency of occurrence of the pending notice performance in production mode A (the execution probability of the pending notice production when the look-ahead result is incorrect) is higher than that in production mode B. In other words, the frequency of occurrence of the pending notice production in production mode A is higher than that in production mode B. On the other hand, the expectation level of jackpot in production mode A is lower than that in production mode B, which is the same as in the first embodiment.

<Processing for switching production mode>
The production mode switching process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 56. This process is executed in step S1307 of the production setting process (FIG. 30) in the production control device 143, and is executed in place of the production mode switching process of FIG. In FIG. 56, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 42, and the explanation thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After executing the production mode switching process in step S1903, the production mode flag corresponding to the switched production mode is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344 in step S1904. The production mode flag is for the MPU 342 to grasp the production mode after switching before switching the production mode, and the current production mode after switching the production mode.

In step S3101, it is determined whether a pending notice flag is stored in the various flag storage areas. The pending notice flag is for the MPU 342 to grasp that the pending notice performance should be executed or that the pending notice performance is being executed.

If the pending notice flag is not stored, the production mode switching process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if a pending notice flag is stored, the process advances to step S3102 and the pending notice flag is deleted. As a result, if a pending notice performance was being executed before the mode switch, the continuation of the currently running pending notice performance is canceled, and if the pending notice performance was in a standby state, the standby of the pending notice performance ( execution reservation) is canceled.

In step S3103, it is determined whether there is a pending image displayed in a specific display mode. Specifically, among the holding images displayed in each holding display area Ga, Gb, in any one of the blue display mode HMb, the green display mode HMc, the red display mode HMd, or the rainbow color display mode HMe. Determine whether the displayed item exists. This determination is made with reference to the information of each area stored in the display mode storage area 344e of the RAM 344. If there is no pending image displayed in the specific display mode, the production mode switching process is immediately terminated.

If there is a pending image displayed in the specific display mode, the process advances to step S3104, and it is determined whether the current mode switching is from production mode A to production mode B. In other words, whether or not the switching is from a performance mode with a high occurrence frequency of pending preview performances to a performance mode with a low occurrence frequency (in other words, a switch from a performance mode with a low jackpot expectation level of pending preview performances to a high side. (Whether or not it is switching to production mode.) In the case of switching to production mode B, in step S3105, the holding storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the holding image displayed in the specific display mode is grasped.

In step S3106, a return determination is made based on the fluctuation pattern grasped in step S3105 and the return determination table stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. The determination for return is to determine whether or not it is possible to return the hold image displayed in the specific display mode to the specific display mode after switching the production mode.

As shown in FIG. 57, the upper limit of the display mode is determined in the return determination table in correspondence with each variation pattern. For example, for variation pattern 5H corresponding to SPSP reach A failure, the green display mode is set. Returns (changes) to HMc are allowed. When executing a suspended notice performance while staying in production mode B, the upper limit display mode corresponding to fluctuation pattern 5H is the red display mode HMd, but the upper limit display mode in the return determination table is different from that. It is limited to the lower green display mode HMc. This also applies to other deviation handling variation patterns such as variation pattern 3H and variation pattern 4H. Incidentally, in the case of each variation pattern corresponding to a jackpot, changes up to the rainbow color display mode HMe are allowed in any of variation patterns 1A to 5A. Note that the return determination table is not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 57, and may have other configurations, such as having different upper limit display modes for each variation pattern corresponding to a jackpot.

In step S3106, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern grasped in step S3105 is specified with reference to the return determination table, and the display mode in which the current display mode of the target pending image is less than or equal to the specified upper limit display mode Determine whether or not. As a result, if the current display mode is less than or equal to the upper limit display mode, the display mode is allowed to return; otherwise, the display mode is not allowed to return.

In step S3107, it is determined whether the result of the restoration determination in step S3106 allows restoration of the display mode. If the return is not permitted, the process advances to step S3108, and processing for canceling the display in the specific display mode is executed for the pending image displayed in the specific display mode. That is, it is set so that the hold image displayed in the specific display mode is switched to the normal display mode HMa with the switching of the production mode. In addition, in the cancellation process of step S3108, the display mode information stored in the display mode storage area 344e and the effect scenario data set in step S1513 of the setting process for pending notice (FIG. 34) are also deleted. Execute. After executing step S3108, the production mode switching process ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3107 (if the restoration of the display mode is permitted), then in step S3109, information on the display mode of each pending image stored in the display mode storage area 344e of the RAM 344 is restored to the RAM 344. storage area 344f. In step S3110, similar to step S3108 above, processing for canceling the display in the specific display mode is executed for the pending image displayed in the specific display mode.

In step S3111, a setting process for returning to advance notice is executed, and then the production mode switching process is ended. The setting process for returning to advance notice in step S3111 is similar to the setting process for returning to advance notice (FIG. 43) in step S1913 of the production mode switching process (FIG. 42) according to the first embodiment. In the setting process for returning to advance notice, after switching to production mode B, at what timing should the display mode of the hold image be returned (changed), and how should it be returned (should it be returned with one change, or Perform setting processing such as whether to restore the system by making gradual changes.

When the setting process for returning the notice is performed as described above, the process for second execution of the pending notice in step S1702 of the shift command response process (FIG. 40(a)) (FIG. 44) and the special figure fluctuation In the third execution process (FIG. 45) of the pending notice in step S1808 of the display process (FIG. 41), the display mode of the target pending image is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode. At this time, in the second execution process of the pending notice, processing is executed to return the display mode of the target pending image to the original specific display mode (the specific display mode before switching to production mode B).

In addition, in the third execution process of the pending notice, the current display mode of the target pending image (display mode restored by the restoration process) and the fluctuation pattern of the target pending image in the game round of the target pending image is compared with the corresponding upper limit display mode, and it is determined whether it is possible to change (promote) to a higher display mode. If such a change is possible, the display mode is promoted through promotion determination and promotion lottery.

At this time, the upper limit display mode referred to is the one set for production mode B (according to the conditions of the pending notice production in production mode B). Therefore, even if the display mode that can be restored is limited to the lower upper limit display mode determined by the return determination table at the time of returning the display mode by switching to production mode B, ultimately the production mode The display mode of the target pending image can be changed within the range of the upper limit display mode suitable for B.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S3104 (in the case of switching from production mode B to production mode A), the process of steps S3105 to S3107 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S3109. In other words, when switching from presentation mode B, which has a low occurrence frequency of pending notice presentations, to presentation mode A, which has a high occurrence frequency, the display mode in presentation mode B is reflected as is in presentation mode A after the mode switch. It is configured.

<About the flow of the display mode of the hold image when the production mode is switched>
The flow of the display mode of the hold image when the production mode is switched will be described with reference to FIG. 58. Here, a case where the performance mode A is switched to the performance mode B will be described. As already explained, performance mode A is a mode in which the frequency of occurrence of pending preview performance is relatively high, and performance mode B is a mode in which the frequency of occurrence of pending preview performance is relatively low.

When the third hold information (hold image HW) of the first special figure occurs in the production mode A, the main controller 162 performs hold pre-read processing (step S305) for the generated hold information. Execute. Here, it is assumed that as a result, a result is read in advance in which the validity judgment is wrong and the fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern 4H (SP reach B is off).

In addition, the effect control device 143 executes a setting process for a pending notice (step S1403) based on the pre-read result in the main control device 162, and performs a lottery for execution of a pending notice effect regarding the pending image HW, and selects the final display mode. Lotteries, production scenario drawings, etc. will be held. As a result of those lottery results, the green display mode HMc is selected as the final display mode, and the scenario in which the display is initially displayed in the blue display mode HMb and changes to the green display mode HMc at the first shift timing is selected as the production scenario. shall be. In this case, as shown in FIG. 58(a1), the hold image HW in the blue display mode HMb is displayed in the third unit hold display area Ga3 of the first hold display area Ga.

Thereafter, when the player performs a mode switching operation using the effect operation section 36 with the display mode of the pending image HW set to the blue display mode HMb, the effect is changed as shown in FIG. 58(a2). At the same time as the mode is switched from production mode A to production mode B, the display mode of the pending image HW is changed to the normal display mode HMa.

Further, when switching to the production mode B, the production control device 143 performs a return determination as to whether or not to return the display mode of the pending image HW to a specific display mode (step S3106). In the determination for return, the fluctuation pattern of the hold image HW is specified, and the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is grasped based on the return determination table (FIG. 57), and the hold image HW before switching to presentation mode B is determined. It is determined whether the display mode of the image HW is equal to or less than the grasped upper limit display mode.

Here, the upper limit display mode of the variation pattern 4H, which is the variation pattern of the pending image HW, is the blue display mode HMb, and the display mode of the pending image HW before switching to the production mode B is the blue display mode HMb. , the display mode of the pending image HW before switching to production mode B becomes a mode below the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this case, return to the specific display mode is allowed, and a return scenario is set in a setting process for advance notice return (step S3111).

As a result, if a scenario is set to return to the blue display mode HMb at the next shift timing, the display position of the hold image HW changes from the third unit hold display area Ga3 to the second unit hold display area Ga3, as shown in FIG. When shifted to the unit pending display area Ga2, the display mode of the pending image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the blue display mode HMb.

After that, when the display position of the pending image HW set in the blue display mode HMb is shifted to the execution display area D and the game round of the pending image HW is started, the production control device 143 performs the third execution of the pending notice. process (step S1808) to determine promotion to a higher display mode. Promotion determination in this case is performed by applying the determination conditions of performance mode B.

For example, if the upper limit display mode of the variation pattern 4H in production mode B is set to blue display mode HMb, which is lower than that in production mode A, promotion of the hold image HW is not permitted, and the hold image HW is not allowed to be promoted. The display mode of the image HW is maintained in the blue display mode HMb. In addition, if the upper limit display mode of the variation pattern 4H in production mode B is set to green display mode HMc, as in production mode A, promotion is allowed and the predetermined number in the game round of the reservation image HW is At the hold change point, the display mode of the hold image HW is promoted to the green display mode HMc.

Next, a case will be described in which the production mode is switched in a situation where the display mode of the pending image HW is set to the green display mode HMc in the production mode A.

As shown in FIG. 58(a1), the pending image HW of the blue display mode HMb is displayed in the third unit pending display area Ga3, and the display position of the pending image HW is changed to the third unit pending display area Ga3 without switching the production mode. It is assumed that the display mode of the pending image HW is shifted to the 2-unit pending display area Ga2 and changed from the blue display mode HMb to the green display mode HMc, as shown in FIG. 58(b1).

In this state, when the player performs a mode switching operation using the production operation unit 36, the production mode is switched from production mode A to production mode B, and the pending image The display mode of HW is changed to the normal display mode HMa.

At this time, the production control device 143 makes a determination for return, but the display mode of the pending image HW before switching to production mode B becomes a display mode higher than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this case, returning to the specific display mode is not permitted. As a result, the display mode of the pending image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa until it is shifted to the execution display area D.

Thereafter, when the display position of the pending image HW set to the normal display mode HMa is shifted to the execution display area D and the game round of the pending image HW is started, the production control device 143 performs the third execution of the pending notice. Execute the processing to determine promotion to a higher display mode. For example, if the upper limit display mode of variation pattern 4H in production mode B is set to blue display mode HMb, promotion to blue display mode HMb is allowed, and if set to green display mode HMc, , promotion to green display mode HMc is permitted. Note that FIG. 58(b3) shows a case where the display mode of the pending image HW is promoted to the blue display mode HMb.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be achieved.

If the presentation mode is switched in a situation where the holding image is in a specific display mode (a situation where a holding notice presentation is being executed), the display mode of the target holding image HW in the switching presentation mode will be changed to the display mode before switching. The configuration is such that it is determined whether or not the display mode is the same as the display mode in the production mode.

In this embodiment, since mode switching is performed between performance mode A and performance mode B, the player's mood is changed during the game, and it is possible to suppress boredom with the game. At this time, performance mode B is set as a performance mode in which the pending notice performance is less likely to be executed than performance mode A. In such a configuration, switching the production mode changes the production characteristics related to the expectation of jackpot, so compared to cases where the change is limited to only the appearance by changing the background image or character image, the difference between the production modes is more noticeable in the game. can make a strong impression on people.

However, on the other hand, if the conditions for switching from production mode A to production mode B are satisfied in a situation where the pending image is in a specific display mode, the display mode of the target pending image HW is maintained and the production mode is changed. When a switch is made, there is a concern that only the corresponding expectation level will change even though the display mode remains unchanged. For example, even if the specific display mode is the same green display mode HMc, the expectation level in production mode B is higher than that in production mode A, so if the display mode of the target pending image HW is set to the green display mode HMc. If the player switches from production mode A to production mode B until then, if the player understands the expectation level of the green display mode HMC based on the expectation level in production mode B after the mode switch, the game that will actually be played in the game round. There is a risk that it will be associated with a higher level of expectation than a repeat performance (reach performance, etc.).

In this regard, in this configuration, when the presentation mode is switched in a situation where the holding image is set to a specific display mode, the display mode of the target holding image HW is changed to the same mode as the display mode in the presentation mode before switching. Determine whether or not to do so. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconsistency in expectations, and it is possible to suitably display the pending image after transition to production mode B.

The display mode of the target holding image HW at the time of transition to production mode B is compared with the upper limit display mode set corresponding to production mode B, and the display mode of the target holding image HW is changed to the mode based on the result. The configuration is such that it is determined whether the display mode is the same as the display mode before switching.

In the above configuration, by comparing the display mode at the time of transition to production mode B and the upper limit display mode set corresponding to production mode B, it is determined whether the display mode can be the same as the display mode in production mode A. be done. As a result, it is possible to decide whether or not each aspect (blue display mode HMb, etc.) should be the same in production mode B based on the corresponding expectation level, and display the pending image after transitioning to production mode B. This makes it possible to suitably perform the following.

In the above case, a plurality of upper limit display modes in production mode B are set corresponding to each variation pattern, and among them, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the variation pattern read in advance for the target holding image HW is applied. The configuration was configured to perform judgment. As a result, based on the pre-reading result of the target pending image HW, that is, the win/fail result actually announced in the game round of the target pending image HW and the game round effect (reach effect, etc.) performed in the relevant game round. It is possible to decide whether to use the same mode or not.

When the display mode of the target holding image HW in production mode B is the same as the display mode in production mode A before mode switching, the configuration changes from the normal display mode HMa of the target holding image HW to the same mode. And so.

In the above configuration, when the display mode of the target pending image HW is the same as before the mode switching, it is possible to change the display mode from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode. With this configuration, the display mode of the target holding image HW can be changed from production mode A to production mode B regardless of whether the display format is the same as before the mode switching or not. Accordingly, a configuration can be adopted in which the display mode is switched to the normal display mode HMa. This makes it possible to reduce unnaturalness when the specific display mode is changed to the normal display mode HMa due to a determination that the display mode is not the same. In addition, by having a configuration in which the display mode changes to the specific display mode after becoming the normal display mode HMa, even if it is determined that the same mode is not used, the hold that is set to the normal display mode HMa after transitioning to production mode B. It is possible to arouse a sense of expectation that the reserved image (reserved information) will be changed to a specific display mode, and it is possible to maintain the expectation for the reserved image (reserved information).

In the case of switching from production mode B to production mode A, the display mode of the target holding image in production mode A after mode switching is the same as the display format in production mode A before mode switching, without performing the above judgment. The configuration is as follows.

In the above configuration, when the mode is switched from the side where the level of expectation for the pending notice performance is high to the side where the level of expectation is low, it is not determined whether or not the same mode is to be used. As a result, it is possible to prevent the continuation of the suspension notice performance (maintenance of a specific display mode of the suspension image) from being excessively restricted, and it is also possible to reduce the processing load.

<Fourth embodiment>
In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the target is the display mode of the pending image before and after the production mode switching, but in this embodiment, the target is the display mode of the pending image before and after the opening/closing execution mode. This embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 59 to 67. Note that in these figures, the same components as in each of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and their explanations will be omitted.

In this embodiment, a variable display time table when the mode is high probability mode and high frequency support mode (high certainty gaming state), and a variable display time table when the mode is low probability mode and high frequency support mode (time saving gaming state). The table is set separately from the variable display time table (FIG. 14) when the table is in the low probability mode and low frequency support mode (normal gaming state).

In the variable display time table for the high probability gaming state, as shown in FIGS. 59(a) and 59(b), jackpots and misses are set respectively. In the fluctuation display time table for jackpot, a fluctuation pattern 11A corresponding to SPSP reach-A and a fluctuation pattern 12A corresponding to SPSP reach-B are set in correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS.

In addition, in the fluctuation display time table for misses, there is a variation pattern 11H corresponding to a complete miss, a variation pattern 12H corresponding to a miss of SPSP reach A, and a variation pattern 12H corresponding to a miss of SPSP reach B, corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS. A variation pattern 13H is set. When the value of the variation type counter CS is within the range of 0 to 79, either complete miss (variation pattern 1H) or normal reach miss (variation pattern 2H) corresponds in the normal gaming state (Fig. 14(b)) ), in the high-precision gaming state, only the complete loss (variation pattern 11H) corresponds (FIG. 59(b)). In other words, even if the variable type counter CS has the same value, different game performances can be performed in the normal gaming state and the high certainty gaming state.

In the variable display time table for the time saving game state, as shown in FIGS. 59(c) and 59(d), jackpots and misses are set respectively. In the fluctuation display time table for the jackpot, in correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS, there is a fluctuation pattern 21A corresponding to SP reach A, a fluctuation pattern 22A corresponding to SP reach B, and a fluctuation pattern 22A corresponding to SP SP reach A. A fluctuation pattern 23A corresponding to SPSP reach B and a fluctuation pattern 24A corresponding to SPSP reach B are set.

In addition, in the variation display time table for misses, there is a variation pattern 21H that corresponds to a complete miss, a variation pattern 22H that corresponds to a miss of SP reach A, and a variation pattern 22H that corresponds to a miss of SP reach B, corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS. A fluctuation pattern 23H that corresponds to the SPSP reach A failure, a fluctuation pattern 24H that corresponds to the SPSP reach B failure, and a fluctuation pattern 25H that corresponds to the SPSP reach B failure are set. Also in the variable display time table for the time-saving gaming state, when compared with the same value of the variable type counter CS, different game times can be performed in the normal gaming state and the high-precision gaming state. In the variable display time table for misses corresponding to the time-saving gaming state, the percentage of complete misses is lower than in other gaming states, but this is because by increasing the frequency of occurrence of reach effects, This is to prevent the time-saving gaming state from ending without being completed.

Note that the correspondence between the number of types of fluctuation patterns and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS in each fluctuation display time table shown in FIG. Other modes may be used as long as they are set.

<Setting process for pending notice>
The setting process for pending notice according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 60. This process is executed when the production control device 143 receives a hold command from the main control device 162. This process is executed in step S1403 of the pending command handling process (FIG. 31), and is executed in place of the pending notice setting process in FIG. In FIG. 60, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 34, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step S1501, fluctuation pattern information and the like regarding the current hold information is grasped based on the hold information stored in step S1401 of the hold command handling process (FIG. 31). In step S1502, it is determined whether the current hold information corresponds to a jackpot based on the fluctuation pattern information etc. grasped in step S1501.

If the pending information does not correspond to a jackpot, that is, if the pending information corresponds to a loss, the process advances to step S3301, and the fluctuation pattern of the pending information is variable pattern 1H (variation pattern corresponding to a complete loss in the normal gaming state). , a fluctuation pattern 11H (a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a complete loss in a high-precision gaming state), or a fluctuation pattern 21H (a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a complete loss in a time-saving gaming state). If a negative determination is made in step S3301 (if none of the fluctuation patterns 1H, 11H, or 21H are found) or an affirmative determination is made in step S1502 (if the pending information corresponds to a jackpot), the process proceeds to step S3302. Understand the current gaming status. Specifically, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a normal gaming state, a high probability gaming state, or a time saving gaming state.

In step S3303, the corresponding pending notice execution lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343. A plurality of pending notice execution lottery tables are set in correspondence with the presence or absence of a jackpot and the gaming state. For example, a pending preview execution lottery table corresponding to a case where the current pending information is a jackpot is set to have a higher probability of winning than a pending preview execution lottery table corresponding to a case where the current pending information is a jackpot. In addition, in the reservation notice execution lottery table that corresponds to the high-precision gaming state and corresponds to the case where the current reservation information is incorrect, in order to suppress the occurrence of false effects in the high-precision gaming state, the normal gaming state and the time-saving game The probability of winning is set lower than that of the reservation notice execution lottery table that corresponds to the state and corresponds to the case where the current reservation information is out of order.

Note that it is not necessarily necessary to make the execution probabilities of the pending preview performance different depending on the gaming state, and it is also possible to have a configuration in which the execution probability of the pending preview performance is the same in the above three states or two of them.

In step S1506, based on the pending notice execution lottery table obtained in step S3303 and the lottery counter (random value) obtained from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344, an execution lottery is determined as to whether or not to execute the pending notice performance. I do. In step S1507, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S1506 is a winning result. If the lottery result is an actual win, the process advances to step S1508 and the corresponding number of reservations is determined.

In step S3304, the final display mode lottery table corresponding to the current gaming state is acquired from the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. In the final display mode lottery table, the range of selectable final display modes and the selection probability of each display mode are set in correspondence with each variation pattern. In this embodiment, since different variation patterns are set according to the gaming state, the final display mode lottery table is also set separately corresponding to each gaming state.

FIG. 61 shows a jackpot table and a losing table as examples of final display mode lottery tables in a high-precision gaming state. Further, FIG. 62 shows a jackpot table and a loss table as examples of final display mode lottery tables in the time-saving gaming state.

In step S1510, based on the fluctuation pattern grasped in step S1501, the final display mode lottery table acquired in step S3304, and the lottery counter (random value) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344, the current pending The final display mode in the preview performance is selected by lottery. In step S1511, the production scenario lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. In step S1512, the number of reservations grasped in step S1508, the final display mode determined in step S1510, the production scenario lottery table acquired in step S1511, and the lottery counter (random number value) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344. ), the performance scenario for this pending preview performance will be drawn by lottery.

In step S1513, performance scenario data is set so that the performance scenario selected at step S1512 is executed. In step S1514, a pending notice flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344, and thereafter, the setting process for pending notice is ended. The suspension notice flag is for the MPU 342 to grasp that the suspension notice performance should be executed.

When the setting process for pending notice is performed as described above, based on the setting result in step S1513, step S1404 of the pending command corresponding process (FIG. 31) or step S1701 of the shift command corresponding process (FIG. 40) , In the first execution process (FIG. 38) of the reservation notice in step S1807 of the special figure variation display process (FIG. 41), the display mode of the target reservation image is changed.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3301 (if the fluctuation pattern of the reservation information is a fluctuation pattern of a completely lost pair), the process advances to step S1515, and the display mode of the reservation image is set to the normal display mode HMa. Thereafter, the setting process for pending notice is ended.

<Processing for open/close execution mode>
The opening/closing execution mode processing according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 63. This process is executed in step S1306 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30).

First, in step S3401, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode is being executed. If the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, it is determined in step S3402 whether an opening command (step S909 in FIG. 25) has been received from the main controller 162, that is, whether it is the timing to start the opening/closing execution mode. judge. If the opening command has not been received, the process for the opening/closing execution mode is ended.

If an opening command has been received, the process advances to step S3403, and opening processing is executed. In the opening process, a command to be sent to the display control device 350 is set so that a predetermined opening effect is executed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, etc.

In step S3404, it is determined whether the number of pending items (total number of special 1 pending and special 2 pending) is 0, that is, whether there is a pending. If the number of pending items is 0 (if there is no pending item), the opening/closing execution mode processing is immediately terminated.

If the number of reservations is not 0 and there are reservations, the process advances to step S3405, and it is determined whether a reservation notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. If a suspension notice flag is stored, the suspension notice flag is erased in step S3406. As a result, if a pending notice performance is being executed before the start of the opening/closing execution mode, the continuation of the currently running pending notice performance will be canceled, and if the pending notice performance is in a standby state, the pending notice performance will be canceled. The standby (execution reservation) for is canceled.

In step S3407, it is determined whether there is a pending image displayed in a specific display mode. Specifically, among the holding images displayed in each holding display area Ga, Gb, in any one of the blue display mode HMb, the green display mode HMc, the red display mode HMd, or the rainbow color display mode HMe. Determine whether the displayed item exists. This determination is made with reference to the information of each area stored in the display mode storage area 344e of the RAM 344.

If there is a pending image displayed in the specific display mode, the process advances to step S3408, and information indicating in which mode the pending image displayed in the specific display mode is displayed is stored in the RAM 344 for recovery purposes. It is stored in area 344f. In the subsequent step S3409, information indicating the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is stored in the RAM 344. For example, if the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is the normal gaming state, information corresponding to the normal gaming state is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 344. Note that this information is stored in a separate storage area from the state flag indicating the current gaming state in order to be distinguished from the state flag.

In step S3410, a return standby flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d. The return standby flag is for the MPU 342 to understand that the MPU 342 is waiting for a return process to return the display mode of the pending image to the original specific display mode. In the following step S3411, processing for erasing the pending image from the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, the hold image displayed on the hold display section 200 is erased upon starting the opening/closing execution mode. After executing step S3411, the opening/closing execution mode processing ends.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step S3405 (if the pending notice flag is not stored) or if a negative determination is made in step S3407 (if there is no pending image in a specific display mode), the process advances to step S3411, and the pending notice flag is not stored. Executes image deletion processing. That is, even when the hold preview effect is not being executed, the hold image on the hold display section 200 is erased when the opening/closing execution mode is started.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3401 (if the opening/closing execution mode is in progress), the process advances to step S3412, and it is determined whether a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the ending effect. If the elapsed time has not elapsed, processing for opening/closing execution mode is executed in step S3413, and thereafter, processing for opening/closing execution mode is ended. In the opening/closing execution mode process, a command to be sent to the display control device 350 is set so that a predetermined round effect, winning effect, ending effect, etc. are executed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3412 (if a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the ending effect), the process proceeds to step S3414, and it is determined whether a return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. If the return standby flag is not stored, the opening/closing execution mode processing is immediately terminated.

If the return standby flag is stored, the process advances to step S3415, and processing for erasing the return standby flag is executed. Here, the situation where an affirmative determination is made in step S3414 means that the opening/closing execution mode is performed in a situation where the hold preview effect is being executed and the display of the hold image is erased. In this case, the process advances to step S3416, and a setting process for returning to advance notice is executed to return the display mode of the pending image to the specific display mode. Details of this processing will be described later.

After executing step S3416, settings for displaying the pending image in the normal display mode HMa are performed in step S3417. That is, when returning the display mode of the pending image to the specific display mode, immediately after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the display mode of the pending image is resumed as the normal display mode HMa. After executing step S3417, the opening/closing execution mode processing ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S3414 (if the return standby flag is not stored), the process advances to step S3418, and it is determined whether the number of pending items (total number of special 1 pending and special 2 pending) is 0. do. If the number of pending items is 0 and there is no pending item, the opening/closing execution mode processing is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the number of pending items is not 0 and there are pending items, in step S3417, the pending images for those pending items are displayed in the normal display mode HMa.

<Setting process for advance notice recovery>
The setting process for advance notice return in step S3416 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 64.

First, in step S3501, the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is grasped. This understanding is performed based on the information stored in step S3409 (FIG. 63). In step S3502, the jackpot type of the jackpot that triggered the current opening/closing execution mode is grasped. This understanding is performed based on the hold information obtained by analyzing the fluctuation start command.

In step S3503, the display mode is restored based on the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode ascertained in step S3501, the jackpot type ascertained in step S3502, and the return determination table stored in the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343. Make a judgment regarding the use of the data. The determination for return is to determine whether or not to return the pending image, which was set to a specific display mode in the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode, to the original display mode in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 65, in the return determination table, whether the display mode is allowed to return or not depending on the game state before the opening/closing execution mode and the jackpot type of the jackpot that triggered the current opening/closing execution mode. It is determined whether or not. Specifically, the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is a time saving gaming state and the jackpot type is a normal jackpot, or the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is a high certainty gaming state and the jackpot type is a certain variable jackpot. If the gaming state is the same before and after the opening/closing execution mode, as in some cases, the display mode of the pending image is allowed to return. On the other hand, if the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is a time-saving gaming state and the jackpot type is a variable jackpot, or if the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is a high-probability gaming state and the jackpot type is a normal jackpot, When the game state before the opening/closing execution mode is a normal gaming state and the jackpot type is a time-saving gaming state, when the gaming status is different before and after the opening/closing execution mode, the return of the display mode is regulated.

However, if the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is the normal gaming state and the jackpot type is a probability variable jackpot, it is determined whether or not to return by referring to the pre-reading result of the target pending image. Specifically, if the pre-reading result of the target pending image is a result other than a normal jackpot, the above display mode is regulated, while if the pre-reading result of the target pending image is a normal jackpot, the above display mode is regulated. allow the return of This is to prevent the high-certainty gaming state from ending without the player being able to fully enjoy the game in the high-certainty gaming state.

In other words, if the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is the normal gaming state and the jackpot type is a variable jackpot, the game from the first special figure (left-handed game state) to the second special figure with the opening/closing execution mode in between. The game mode switches to a game (right-handed game state), but at that time, there is usually a jackpot in the hold of the first special symbol, and when the hold is exhausted, it is difficult to shift to the high-precision game state. Even if it is possible, the state will end prematurely. Therefore, if there is such a possibility, the display mode of the first special hold image is returned to the specific display mode to alert the player, and the second operating port 63 (starting port for the second special symbol) is ).

In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the return of the display mode is restricted when the pre-reading result of the target pending image is a probability-variable jackpot, but the configuration may be such that this is permitted.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process for advance notice return (FIG. 64), after execution of step S3503, it is determined in step S3504 whether or not the result of the determination process in step S3503 allows return of the display mode. If the return is not permitted, the setting process for return with advance notice is immediately terminated. That is, the display mode of the target pending image after the opening/closing execution mode remains the normal display mode HMa.

If the return is permitted, in step S3505, the return area 344f of the RAM 344 is referred to and the display mode of the target pending image before the opening/closing execution mode is grasped. After step S3505 is executed, steps S3506 to S3510 are executed.

These processes are similar to steps S2103 to S2107 in FIG. 43, and the display mode of the target pending image is changed back to the original display at any timing in accordance with the number of pending images before the target pending image. This is for setting whether to return to the mode. That is, in step S3506, the number of pending images before the target pending image is determined, and if the determined number of pending images is 1 or more, in step S3508, a return scenario for the display mode determined in step S3505 is determined. will be drawn by lottery. In step S3509, return scenario data is set so that the selected return scenario is executed, and in step S3510, a preview return flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344. The advance notice return flag is used by the MPU 342 to understand that processing for restoring the display mode of the pending image should be executed.

When the setting process for returning the notice is performed as described above, the process for second execution of the pending notice in step S1702 of the shift command response process (FIG. 40(a)) (FIG. 44) and the special figure fluctuation In the third execution process (FIG. 45) of the pending notice in step S1808 of the display process (FIG. 41), the display mode of the target pending image is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode. At this time, in the second execution process of the hold notice, a process is executed to return the display mode of the target hold image to the original specific display mode (the specific display mode before the opening/closing execution mode).

In addition, in the third execution process of the pending notice, the current display mode of the target pending image (display mode restored by the restoration process) and the fluctuation pattern of the target pending image in the game round of the target pending image is compared with the corresponding upper limit display mode, and it is determined whether it is possible to change (promote) to a higher display mode. If such a change is possible, the display mode is promoted through promotion determination and promotion lottery.

<About the display mode of the hold image before and after opening/closing execution mode>
The display mode of the hold image before and after the opening/closing execution mode will be described. Here, a jackpot usually occurs in a situation where the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is the time-saving gaming state, a case where the gaming state shifts to the time-saving gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode, and a situation where the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is the time-saving gaming state. An example will be explained in which a variable probability jackpot occurs and a transition to a variable probability gaming state occurs after the opening/closing execution mode.

First, a case will be described with reference to FIG. 66 in which a normal jackpot occurs in a situation where the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is the time-saving gaming state and the game shifts to the time-saving gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode.

When the third reservation information of the second special symbol occurs in the time-saving gaming state, the main control device 162 performs reservation advance reading processing (step S305), and the production control device 143 performs reservation advance notice processing. Setting processing (step S1403) is performed. As a result, when it is decided to execute a hold notice performance in which the display mode is the green display mode HMc, as shown in FIG. 66(a), the hold image HW whose display mode is the green display mode HMc is displayed in the third unit pending display area Gb3 of the second pending display area Gb.

When the game round in which the pending image HW is acquired usually results in a jackpot and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the display of all pending images including the pending image HW is erased, as shown in FIG. 66(b). . This state is maintained until a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the ending effect.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the ending effect, the effect control device 143 executes a setting process for returning to the notice (step S3416), and changes the display mode of the pending image HW to the specific display mode before the opening/closing execution mode. A return determination is made to determine whether or not to return. In the determination for return, the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is compared with the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode, and it is determined whether or not the two match. When a normal jackpot result is obtained in the time-saving game state, the game state after the opening/closing execution mode becomes the time-saving gaming state, so the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode matches the game state after the opening/closing execution mode. In this case, return to the specific display mode is allowed, and a return scenario is selected by lottery.

As a result, if a scenario for returning to the green display mode HMc is selected at the second shift timing after the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. The display of each pending image is resumed with the display mode set to the normal display mode HMa.

Thereafter, at the first shift timing from the third unit hold display area Gb3 to the second unit hold display area Gb2, the display mode of the hold image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa, as shown in FIG. 66(d). be done. Then, at the second shift timing from the second unit pending display area Gb2 to the first unit pending display area Gb1, the display mode of the pending image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the green display mode HMc.

Next, a case will be described with reference to FIG. 67 about a case where the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is the time-saving gaming state, and a variable probability jackpot is achieved, and the state shifts to the variable probability gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode.

When the third reservation information of the second special symbol occurs in the time-saving gaming state, the main control device 162 performs reservation advance reading processing (step S305), and the production control device 143 performs reservation advance notice processing. Setting processing (step S1403) is performed. As a result, when it is decided to execute a hold notice performance in which the display mode is the green display mode HMc, as shown in FIG. 67(a), the hold image HW whose display mode is the green display mode HMc is displayed in the third unit pending display area Gb3 of the second pending display area Gb.

When the game round in which the hold image HW was acquired results in a variable jackpot result and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the display of all hold images including the hold image HW is erased, as shown in FIG. 67(b). .

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the ending effect, the effect control device 143 executes a setting process for advance notice return (step S3416) and performs a return determination. When a probability variable jackpot result is obtained in the time-saving game state, the game state after the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high probability gaming state, so that the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode and the game state after the opening/closing execution mode do not match. In this case, returning to the specific display mode is not permitted and the return process is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 67(c), at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the display of each pending image is restarted with the display mode of the pending image HW set to the normal display mode HMa. Thereafter, the display mode of the pending image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa during a period until the pending image HW is shifted to the execution display area D. In other words, if the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is different from the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode, basically the hold notice performance made before the opening/closing execution mode is canceled, and the same hold after the opening/closing execution mode. The pending notice effect for the image HW is not executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67(d), the display position of the pending image HW set to the normal display mode HMa shifts to the execution display area D, and when the game round of the pending image HW is started, the performance control The device 143 executes the third execution process for pending notice (step S1808) and determines promotion to a higher display mode. As a result, if promotion to a higher display mode is selected by lottery, the display mode of the pending image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode, as shown in FIG. 67(e). Note that FIG. 67E shows a case where the display mode of the pending image HW is promoted to the green display mode HMc.

Next, a case will be described in which the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is the normal gaming state, and a variable probability jackpot occurs, and the game shifts to the high probability gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode.

In this case, the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode and the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode do not match, so if the above example is applied, the display mode of the pending image HW will not be restored after the opening/closing execution mode. . However, when switching from a low-probability gaming state (left-handed game) in which you aim to win a prize to the first operating port 62 to a high-probability gaming state (right-handed game) in which you aim to win a prize to the second operating port 63, the hold image Whether or not to restore the display mode is switched based on the result of pre-reading the pending information corresponding to the HW.

Specifically, when the pre-read result of the reservation information corresponding to the reservation image HW is a normal jackpot result, the display mode of the reservation image HW is restored after the opening/closing execution mode. In other words, when there is pending information that would normally result in a jackpot on the first special map, when a game round of that pending information is executed, even though it was possible to shift to a high-guarantee gaming state, the Since the state ends early, the display mode is changed to a specific display mode in order to encourage winning through the second operating port 63.

In this case, instead of changing from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode, the pending image HW may be displayed in the specific display mode from the beginning. It is expected that the player's awareness will be encouraged by using a display format that is different from the case where the display format is restored when the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode matches the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode. Ru. In addition, by displaying in a specific display mode from the beginning, there is an advantage that the player can quickly detect that there is reservation information that would normally result in a jackpot on the first special drawing, and it becomes easier to take action.

On the other hand, if the pre-read result of the pending information corresponding to the pending image HW is a result other than the normal jackpot result, as in principle, the display mode of the pending image HW is not restored after the opening/closing execution mode.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be achieved.

When transitioning to opening/closing execution mode in a situation where the target holding image HW is set to a specific display mode (a situation where a holding notice effect is being executed), the gaming state before opening/closing execution mode and the gaming state after opening/closing execution mode is different, the display mode of the target holding image HW after the open/close execution mode is made different from the display mode before the open/close execution mode.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the pending image is set to a specific display mode based on the result of the pending pre-reading process, so that the player's expectations for a jackpot result are aroused even before the start of the game round. be able to. Further, a plurality of types of game states are set as the game state, and when a jackpot result is obtained and the opening/closing execution mode is executed, the game state is shifted to one of the plurality of types of game states. In a configuration with multiple types of gaming states like this, even if the pending information used for winning or losing judgments is the same, the winning or losing results and the game round effects (reach effect, etc.) performed in the game round may differ depending on the gaming status. may occur.

In this regard, in this configuration, if the game state before and after the execution of the opening/closing execution mode is different for the target holding image HW that is set to the specific display mode before the execution of the opening/closing execution mode, the display after the opening/closing execution mode is Since the display mode is different from the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode, even if the award determination result or game rendition etc. change due to the difference in the gaming state, the target retention image HW will mislead the player. This makes it possible to suitably display the hold image in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode.

When transitioning to opening/closing execution mode in a situation where the target holding image HW is set to a specific display mode (a situation where a holding notice effect is being executed), the gaming state before opening/closing execution mode and the gaming state after opening/closing execution mode The display mode of the target holding image HW after the opening/closing execution mode is made different depending on whether or not they are the same.

As mentioned above, in a configuration with multiple types of gaming states, even if the pending information used for winning/failing judgments is the same, the winning/failing results and game round effects (reach effects, etc.) performed in the game round may vary depending on the gaming status. Differences may occur. In this regard, in this configuration, the display mode in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is changed between the display mode before and after the execution of the opening/closing execution mode for the target holding image HW that is set to the specific display mode before the execution of the opening/closing execution mode. Since the game state is different depending on whether the game state is the same or not, the display mode can be set based on the result of the right/fail judgment due to the difference in the game state and the change in the game play, and the game state after the opening/closing execution mode It becomes possible to suitably display the reserved image in the .

When the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is different from the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode, the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is set to the normal display mode HMa.

With the above configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress the display of a holding image that does not match the actual expectation level after the opening/closing execution mode, thereby causing a misunderstanding among the players. Further, by uniformly setting the normal display mode HMa, it is possible to eliminate the need for fine adjustment of the display mode according to changes in the expectation level, and it is also possible to simplify the processing configuration.

When the display mode of the target pending image HW is set to the normal display mode HMa based on the difference between the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode and the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode, then the target pending image HW The configuration is such that it is determined whether or not to promote the display mode to a higher display mode (specific display mode), and the display mode of the target pending image HW is changed based on the result.

If the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is different from the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode, by changing the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode to the normal display mode HMa, the gaming state can be changed. Although it is possible to absorb fluctuations in the results of the validity judgment and the game performance due to changes, there is a concern that it will not be possible to notify or suggest the expectation level of the reservation information corresponding to the target reservation image HW. In this regard, in this configuration, the target pending image HW set as the normal display mode HMa is given an opportunity to change to the specific display mode after that, so if the specific display mode is changed to the normal display mode HMa Even if it is, it can be promoted to a specific display mode after the fact, and it becomes possible to notify the degree of expectation.

In the above case, when the game progresses to the game time of the target pending image HW set in the normal display mode HMa, it is determined whether or not to promote the display mode of the target pending image HW to a specific display mode, The configuration is such that the promotion is executed based on the results.

By promoting the display mode of the target hold image HW after the game round of the target hold image HW has started, the information regarding the validity judgment and the information regarding the game round performance that is acquired and transmitted at the start of the game round can be utilized. Promotion can be determined by Since this information corresponds to the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode, the above promotion can be performed in a manner suitable for the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode, and will not give players a misunderstanding about their expectations. Instead, it becomes possible to change the display mode of the target pending image HW set in the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode after the opening/closing execution mode.

In particular, by determining whether or not the target retention image HW is to be promoted to a specific display mode based on the fluctuation pattern specified by execution of the validity determination (start of the game round) in the main control device 162, It is possible to determine whether or not promotion is possible using the same information that is used for selecting the game round performance in the game round of the target pending image HW. As a result, when the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is different from the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode, the target holding image HW The display mode can be changed to a specific display mode.

In addition, with the above configuration, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state after the opening/closing execution mode is supported solely for determining whether or not to promote the target holding image HW to a specific display mode. It is possible to avoid adding a dedicated process for transmitting the fluctuation pattern (information regarding the results of the validity judgment and the game performance). That is, when executing the game round of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode, the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 is changed to the special symbol display section 43. It is necessary to send a fluctuation start command from the main control device 162 to the production control device 143 in order to execute it in synchronization with the special figure game time in , but the configuration is such that the promotion judgment is executed using this fluctuation start command. By doing so, there is no need to notify the production control device 143 from the main control device 162 of the variation pattern corresponding to the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode by a dedicated command different from the variation start command. Therefore, not only can promotion determination be performed using the existing processing configuration in the main control device 162, but also the production control device 143 does not need to be equipped with a processing configuration for when such a dedicated command is received. , it is possible to suppress the processing configuration from becoming complicated.

Information corresponding to the notification mode of the pending image when a pending notice performance is performed can be stored in the return area 344f of the RAM 344, so that the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode and the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode are the same. In some cases, the display mode of the target pending image HW in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is configured to be set based on the information stored in the return area 344f.

For example, if the display mode of the target pending image HW in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is set based on the result of the pending pre-reading process performed before the opening/closing execution mode, the display manner before the opening/closing execution mode may be set. There is a concern that the display mode may be set to be different. In this regard, in this configuration, when the opening/closing execution mode is executed in a situation where there is a hold image set as a specific display mode, information on the display mode at that time is stored, and the opening/closing mode is stored based on the stored information. Since the information display mode after the execution mode is set, it becomes possible to suitably return the display mode after the opening/closing execution mode to the original mode before the opening/closing execution mode.

By restoring the original state before the opening/closing execution mode in this way, opening/closing execution is performed for the target holding image HW (holding information) that aroused the player's expectations by changing to a specific display mode before the opening/closing execution mode. A similar feeling of anticipation can be aroused even after the mode.

When the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode and the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode are the same, the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is the same as the specific display mode before the opening/closing execution mode. When changing the display mode, the configuration is such that the normal display mode HMa can be changed to a specific display mode once.

In this case, regardless of whether the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is the same as the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode, the display mode of the target pending image HW will change as the opening/closing execution mode is executed. The specific display mode may be changed to the normal display mode HMa. This makes it possible to reduce unnaturalness when the display mode is changed to the normal display mode HMa due to a difference in the gaming state. In addition, by causing an event that changes from the normal display mode HMa to a specific display mode, it is possible to change the pending display mode to the normal display mode HMa in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode, including when the gaming state is different. It is possible to arouse a sense of expectation that the image will be changed to a specific display mode, and it is possible to maintain the sense of expectation for the pending image (pending information).

The configuration is such that a determination as to whether or not the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is the same as the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is performed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

In this case, it is possible to promptly respond to the display mode of the target holding image HW after the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, after the opening/closing execution mode, even in a situation where the number of reservations before the target reservation image HW is small, the display mode of the target reservation image HW can be suitably adjusted.

The configuration is such that the pending image is not displayed while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed.

When changing the display mode of the target holding image HW at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, if you suddenly change the display mode of the target holding image HW to another display mode at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the game There is a concern that people may get an unnatural impression. In particular, if the display mode is downgraded to the normal display mode HMa, it is likely to be easily noticed by the player and give an unnatural impression. In this regard, in this configuration, the hold image is hidden in the opening/closing execution mode, so when changing the display mode of the target hold image HW, the display of the hold image itself, including other hold images, is There may be intervening periods in which the event is not performed. This prevents changes in the display mode from being noticeable and makes it possible to reduce unnaturalness. Furthermore, since the hold image is hidden, there is also the advantage that it becomes easier to draw the player's attention to the performance for the opening/closing execution mode (jackpot game performance).

<Fifth embodiment>
In the fourth embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode is set for the hold image that is set to a specific display mode before the opening/closing execution mode, depending on the relationship between the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode and the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode. Although the configuration is such that the subsequent display mode is determined, in this embodiment, the pre-reading process is executed again after the opening/closing execution mode for the hold image that has been set to the specific display mode before the opening/closing execution mode, and based on the result, the relevant display mode is determined. It is configured to determine the display mode of the hold image. This embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 68 to 76. Note that in these figures, the same components as in each of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and their explanations will be omitted.

The processing performed by the MPU 312 of the main control device 162 will be explained.

<Information acquisition process>
Information acquisition processing according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 68(a). This process is executed when a winning occurs in the operating ports 62, 63 (executed in step S205 of the winning process for operating ports (FIG. 17)), and is performed in the information acquisition process of FIG. It is executed instead. In FIG. 68(a), the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 18, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After storing each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and fluctuation type counter CS in the corresponding special figure display section holding area in step S304, a holding command setting process is executed in step S4101. . After executing step S4101, the information acquisition process ends. Here, the pending command setting process in step S4101 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 68(b).

First, in step S4201, the starting reservation storage numbers RaN and RbN stored in each reservation area Ra and Rb of the reservation ball storage area 314b and the common reservation number CRN stored in the total reservation number storage area of the reservation ball storage area 314b are calculated. and stores the information in the register of the MPU 312. In steps S4202 to S4204, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 ( (a random number for determining whether the jackpot is successful), a value of a jackpot type counter C2 (a random number for drawing a jackpot type), and a value of a fluctuation type counter CS (a random number for drawing a fluctuation pattern). Note that the processing in steps S4201 to S4204 is similar to the processing in steps S1202, S1205, and S1208 of the pending prefetch processing (FIG. 28) according to the first embodiment.

In the subsequent step S4205, a pending command is set as an output target to the production control device 143, and thereafter, the pending command setting process is ended. The hold command includes information indicating whether the current hold information corresponds to the first special figure or the second special figure, as well as the values of various counters C1, C2, and CS grasped in steps S4202 to S4204 above. Contains information indicating.

That is, in the first embodiment described above, in the reservation look-ahead process (FIG. 28), the validity judgment process and the fluctuating pattern lottery process are performed based on the values of the various counters C1, C2, and CS that have been grasped, and the results are Although it was configured to be sent to the production control device 143 by being included in the hold command, in this embodiment, the information of various counters C1, C2, CS that has been grasped ( Random number information used for the success/failure determination process and the fluctuating pattern lottery process) is included in the hold command and transmitted to the production control device 143.

The processing performed by the MPU 342 of the production control device 143 will be explained.

<Pending command handling process>
The pending command handling process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 69. This process is executed when a hold command is received from the main controller 162 (executed in step S1302 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30)), and is an alternative to the hold command corresponding process in FIG. It is something that is carried out. In FIG. 69, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 31, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

In step S1402, after incrementing the value of the hold count counter (start hold storage number SN) provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344 by 1, the process proceeds to step S4301, where a first hold lookahead process is executed. The first pending pre-reading process is a pending pre-reading process performed by the production control device 143, and is based on the information of various counters C1, C2, and CS included in the pending command from the main control device 162, and is acquired by the occurrence of a starting prize. This is to pre-read the results of validity judgment regarding pending information. Here, the first pending prefetching process in step S4301 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 70.

First, in step S4401, the current gaming state is grasped. Specifically, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a normal gaming state, a high probability gaming state, or a time saving gaming state. In step S4402, the hold command from the main controller 162 is analyzed and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the current hold information is determined. In step S4403, the validity determination table is acquired from the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343.

In this embodiment, the same table data as the validity determination table stored in the ROM 313 (validity table storage area 313a) of the main control device 162 is stored as the validity determination table for the production control device 143. In addition, regarding the jackpot type table for drawing the jackpot type and the variable display time table for drawing the variable pattern, the jackpot type table (FIG. 13) stored in the ROM 313 of the main controller 162 and the variable display time table are stored in the ROM 313 of the main controller 162. The same table data as the table (FIGS. 14 and 59) is stored. Therefore, even if the performance control device 143 performs the lottery processing separately from the win/fail lottery and the variable pattern lottery in the main control device 162, if the random numbers used for the lottery are the same value, the same lottery result will be obtained. It is now possible to

Since the success/failure determination table is set separately for the low probability mode (normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state) and the success/failure table for the high probability mode (high probability gaming state), step S4403 Now, a table corresponding to the gaming state grasped in step S4401 is acquired.

In step S4404, as a pre-reading process to determine whether or not it is a jackpot, a judgment is made based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 obtained in step S4402 and the judgment table obtained in step S4403, and the judgment result is grasped. . In step S4405, it is determined whether the win/fail result grasped in step S4404 is a jackpot win. If it is a jackpot win, in step S4406, the hold command from the main controller 162 is analyzed and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the current hold information is grasped.

In step S4407, as a pre-read process of the jackpot type, a jackpot type lottery is performed based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped in step S4406 and the type table stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. Understand the results. At this time, if the reservation information is based on winning to the first operating port 62, refer to the type table for the first special symbol, and if the reservation information is based on winning to the second operating port 63, the reservation information is based on winning to the second operating port 63. Refer to the type table for 2 special figures.

In step S4408, jackpot information as information indicating the jackpot result grasped in step S4404 and type information as information indicating the jackpot type result grasped in step S4407 are stored. These pieces of information are stored in corresponding areas in the reservation storage area 344c (FIG. 32) of the RAM 344.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the pre-reading result of the jackpot type is not reflected in the pending preview performance, the processing of steps S4406 and S4407 may be omitted.

After executing step S4408 or if a negative determination is made in step S4405 (not winning the jackpot), in step S4409, the pending command from the main controller 162 is analyzed, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS in the current pending information is determined. grasp. In step S4410, a corresponding variable display time table is acquired from the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343 based on the gaming state ascertained in step S4401 and the winning/failure lottery result ascertained in step S4404. For example, if the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state and the grasping result in step S4404 is a loss result, a variable display time table for losing for the time-saving gaming state (FIG. 59(d)) is obtained.

In step S4411, as a prefetching process for a variation pattern, a lottery process for a variation pattern is performed based on the value of the variation type counter CS grasped in step S4409 and the variation display time table acquired in step S4410, and the result is grasped. . In step S4412, information indicating the fluctuation pattern grasped in step S4411 is stored in the corresponding area of the storage area 344c for reservation. After executing step S4412, the first pending prefetching process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the pending command handling process (FIG. 69), after the first pending prefetch process is executed in step S4301, a pending notice setting process is performed in step S1403 using the processing result of step S4301. The pending notice setting process is a setting process for executing a pending notice effect.

<Processing for open/close execution mode>
The opening/closing execution mode processing according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 71. This process is executed in step S1306 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30), and is executed in place of the opening/closing execution mode process of FIG. 63. In FIG. 71, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 63, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After erasing the reservation notice flag in step S3406, it is determined in step S3407 whether or not there is a reservation image displayed in a specific display mode. That is, at the start timing of the opening/closing execution mode, the blue display mode HMb, the green display mode HMc, the red display mode HMd, or the rainbow color display mode HMe is selected among the pending images displayed in the respective pending display areas Ga and Gb. It is determined whether something displayed in any of the modes exists.

If there is a pending image displayed in the specific display mode, the process advances to step S3408, and information indicating in which mode the pending image displayed in the specific display mode is displayed is stored in the RAM 344 for recovery purposes. It is stored in area 344f. After step S3408 is executed, a return standby flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344 in step S3410 without performing the process of step S3409 (FIG. 63). That is, in the fifth embodiment, the process of storing the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode was executed in step S3409, but in this embodiment, this process is not executed.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3414 (if it is determined that the return standby flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344), processing to erase the return standby flag is executed in step S3415.

Here, the situation where an affirmative determination is made in step S3414 means that the opening/closing execution mode is performed in a situation where the hold preview effect is being executed and the display of the hold image is erased. In this case, in step S4501, a second pending prefetching process is executed to perform pending prefetching again. In the following step S4502, a setting process for returning to advance notice is executed to return the display mode of the pending image to a specific display mode. Details of the second pending prefetching process in step S4501 and the setting process for advance notice return in step S4502 will be described later.

After step S4502 is executed, in step S3417, processing is executed to display the pending image in the normal display mode HMa, and then the opening/closing execution mode processing is ended. That is, in this embodiment as well, immediately after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the hold image is displayed in the normal display mode HMa.

<Second pending prefetch processing>
The second pending prefetching process in step S4501 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 72.

First, in step S4601, the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is grasped. This determination is made with reference to the jackpot type of the current jackpot that triggered the opening/closing execution mode. For example, if the current jackpot is a variable probability jackpot result, the variable probability gaming state is grasped as the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode, and if it is a normal jackpot result, the time saving gaming state is grasped as the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode. do.

In step S4602, the reservation storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is referred to, and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 for each reservation information stored in the storage area 344c is grasped. Note that this process may be performed on all pending information stored in the pending storage area 344c, or may be performed on all pending information stored in the pending storage area 344c. It is also possible to perform this process only on the hold information of the hold images (reservation information of the hold images).

In step S4603, a propriety determination table corresponding to the gaming state grasped in step S4601 is acquired. In step S4604, as a pre-reading process to determine whether or not it is a jackpot, a lottery is performed based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 obtained in step S4602 and the judgment table obtained in step S4603, and the result is grasped. . Note that the processing in step S4604 is performed on the pending information whose jackpot random number counter C1 was grasped in step S4602. This also applies to the processing after step S4605.

Here, the processing in step S4603 and step S4604 is similar to step S4403 and step S4404 of the first reservation prefetching process (FIG. 70) performed at the time of starting winning (at the time of acquiring reservation information). However, if the lottery mode changes before and after the opening/closing execution mode, for example, when the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is a normal gaming state and the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is a high-certain gaming state, step S4603 Since the validity determination tables obtained in the process are different, a lottery result different from that in the first pending prefetch process may be obtained. For example, in the case where a jackpot result with variable probability is won under the normal gaming state, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 regarding the pending pending information is "17", the opening/closing execution corresponding to the variable jackpot result is executed. In the first pending pre-reading process before the mode is performed, the winning result is pre-read, but in the second pending pre-reading process assuming the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode, the winning result is pre-read (FIG. 12).

In step S4605, it is determined whether the win/fail result grasped in step S4604 is a jackpot win. If it is a jackpot win, in step S4606, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped with reference to the storage area 344c for reservation. In step S4607, as a pre-read process of the jackpot type, a jackpot type lottery is performed based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped in step S4606 and the type table stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. Understand the results.

In step S4608, the jackpot information as information indicating the jackpot result grasped in step S4604 and the type information as information indicating the jackpot type result grasped in step S4607 are stored in the corresponding storage area of the reservation storage area 344c. do.

In step S4609, the value of the variation type counter CS is determined with reference to the storage area 344c for reservation. In step S4610, a corresponding variable display time table is acquired from the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343 based on the gaming state ascertained in step S4601 and the result of the winning lottery ascertained in step S4604. For example, if the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is a high-precision gaming state and the grasp result in step S4604 is a loss result, the variable display time table for loss for the high-precision gaming state (FIG. 59(b)) get.

In step S4611, as a prefetching process for a variation pattern, a lottery process for a variation pattern is performed based on the value of the variation type counter CS grasped in step S4609 and the variation display time table acquired in step S4610, and the result is grasped. . The process in step S4611 is similar to step S4411 of the first pending pre-reading process performed at the time of starting winning (when obtaining pending information), but if the gaming state changes before and after the opening/closing execution mode, step S4611 Since the fluctuating display time tables obtained in the above process are different, a lottery result different from that in the first pending prefetch process may be obtained.

In step S4612, information indicating the fluctuation pattern grasped in step S4611 is stored in the corresponding area of the storage area 344c for reservation, and then the second reservation prefetching process is ended.

<Setting process for advance notice recovery>
The setting process for advance notice return in step S4502 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 73.

First, in step S4701, the hold storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the hold information corresponding to the target hold image (the hold image that was displayed in the specific display mode before the opening/closing execution mode) is grasped. The variation pattern grasped in this case is the variation pattern grasped in the second pending prefetch process.

In step S4702, it is determined whether the variation pattern grasped in step S4701 is one of variation pattern 1H, variation pattern 11H, or variation pattern 21H. These fluctuation patterns correspond to complete failures (FIGS. 14 and 59), and if either of them is the case, the setting process for returning with advance notice is immediately terminated.

If the variation pattern grasped in step S4701 is neither variation pattern 1H, variation pattern 11H, or variation pattern 21H, the process advances to step S4703, and the variation pattern grasped in step S4701 (the variation pattern pre-read in the second pending pre-reading process) Understand the upper limit display mode corresponding to The various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343 stores an upper limit display mode table. As shown in FIG. 74, in the upper limit display mode table, the upper limit of the display mode is determined in correspondence with each variation pattern. , a red display mode HMd is set as the upper limit of the specific display mode. In step S4703, the upper limit display mode table is referred to and the upper limit display mode corresponding to the variation pattern in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is specified.

In step S4704, the return area 344f of the RAM 344 is referred to, and the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode is grasped for the target pending image. In step S4705, a return determination process is performed to determine whether or not to return the display mode of the target pending image to the specific display mode before the open/close execution mode in the game after the open/close execution mode. In this process, the upper limit display mode grasped in step S4703 is compared with the display mode before opening/closing execution mode grasped in step S4704, and the display mode before opening/closing execution mode is the same as or lower than the upper limit display mode. If so, the determination result is that the return is permitted, and if the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode is a display mode higher than the upper limit display mode, the determination result is that the return is not permitted.

In step S4706, it is determined whether the result of the return determination in step S4705 allows return. If the determination result is that the return is not permitted, the setting process for the advance notice return is immediately terminated.

If the determination result is that return is permitted, the processes of steps S4707 to S4711 are executed. These processes are similar to steps S2103 to S2107 in FIG. 43, and the display mode of the target pending image is changed back to the original display at any timing in accordance with the number of pending images before the target pending image. This is for setting whether to return to the mode. That is, in step S4707, the number of pending images before the target pending image is ascertained, and if the grasped number of pending images is 1 or more, a return scenario lottery process is executed in step S4709. In step S4710, return scenario data is set so that the selected return scenario is executed.

Note that since the second hold prefetch process (step S4501) is executed when the opening/closing execution mode ends, it is also possible to start displaying the holding image in a specific display mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this embodiment, the normal display mode HMa is uniformly set immediately after the opening/closing execution mode ends (step S3417). That is, even when the target holding image is set to a specific display mode after the opening/closing execution mode, it is first displayed in the normal display mode HMa and then changed to the specific display mode after the fact. The reason for this configuration is that there is a high possibility that the payout of game balls will continue immediately after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and the player must take appropriate action such as ejecting the game balls from the lower tray 34, etc. This is based on the assumption that in such cases, attention to the hold images may decrease. By avoiding displaying the specific display mode at such timing, it is possible to prevent the specific display mode from being used without the player's knowledge.

After executing step S4710, a notice return flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344 in step S4711. The advance notice return flag is used by the MPU 342 to understand that processing for restoring the display mode of the pending image should be executed.

After executing step S4711, the setting process for returning with advance notice ends. After that, as shown in FIG. 71, in step S3417, the holding images are set to be displayed in the normal display mode HMa for all holds that exist at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, including the target holding image. . That is, even when the return process is performed, the target pending image is displayed in the normal display mode HMa immediately after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Then, the second execution process of the pending notice in step S1702 of the shift command response process (FIG. 40(a)) (FIG. 44), and the second execution process of the pending notice in step S1808 of the special figure variation display process (FIG. 41). In the third execution process (FIG. 45), the display mode of the target pending image is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode. At this time, in the second execution process of the hold notice, a process is executed to return the display mode of the target hold image to the original specific display mode (the specific display mode before the opening/closing execution mode).

In addition, in the third execution process of the pending notice, the current display mode of the target pending image (display mode restored by the restoration process) and the fluctuation pattern of the target pending image in the game round of the target pending image is compared with the corresponding upper limit display mode, and it is determined whether it is possible to change (promote) to a higher display mode. If such a change is possible, the display mode is promoted through promotion determination and promotion lottery.

<About the flow of the display mode of the hold image before and after opening/closing execution mode>
The flow of the display mode of the hold image before and after the opening/closing execution mode will be described. First, a case will be described with reference to FIG. 75 about a case where the pre-read result of the validity judgment does not change before and after the opening/closing execution mode, but the pre-read result of the fluctuation pattern changes.

As shown in FIG. 75(a), when the third hold information (hold image HW) of the second special symbol occurs in the high-precision gaming state, the main controller 162 performs the information acquisition process ( Execute FIG. 68(a). As a result, it is assumed that 25 is obtained as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and 80 is obtained as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS.

In addition, the production control device 143 executes the first pending prefetching process (step S4301) based on the result of the information acquisition process of the main control device 162. In the first pending pre-reading process, the pre-reading process is executed using the gaming state at that time, that is, the validity determination table for the high-probability gaming state and the variable display time table. The winning result corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 = 25 is a winning result (Figure 12), and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation type counter CS = 80 is fluctuation pattern 12H (Fig. 59 (b)), so the first pending The result of the pre-reading process is an error and a variation pattern 12H. The fluctuation pattern 12H is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to SPSP reach A failure.

Furthermore, the effect control device 143 executes a setting process for a pending notice (step S1403) based on the result of the first pending pre-reading process, and performs a lottery for execution of a pending notice effect for the pending image HW and a lottery for the final display mode. , a lottery for performance scenarios, etc. will be held. The selection range of the final display mode corresponding to the variation pattern 12H is the blue display mode HMb, the green display mode HMc, and the red display mode HMd (FIG. 61(b)). It is assumed that a red display mode HMd is selected by lottery as the mode, and a production scenario in which the initial display mode is the blue display mode HMb is selected. In this case, the hold image HW whose display mode is the blue display mode HMb is displayed in the third unit hold display area Gb3 of the second hold display area Gb.

When the game round in which the pending image HW is acquired results in a normal jackpot and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the display of all pending images including the pending image HW is erased, as in the fifth embodiment. Ru. This state is maintained until a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the ending effect.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the ending performance, the performance control device 143 executes a second reservation prefetch process (step S4501) based on the reservation information stored in the storage area for reservation 344c. Normally, in the case of a jackpot result, the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode becomes the time-saving gaming state, but in the second pending pre-reading process, the pre-reading process is executed using the validity judgment table and variable display time table for the time-saving gaming state. do. The winning result corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 = 25 is a winning result (Figure 12), and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation type counter CS = 80 is fluctuation pattern 23H (Fig. 59 (d)), so the second pending The result of the pre-reading process is an error and a variation pattern 23H. The variation pattern 23H is a variation pattern that corresponds not to the SPSP reach A failure but to the SP SP reach B failure, which is lower than the reach effect.

In addition, the production control device 143 executes a setting process for returning to advance notice (step S4502) based on the result of the second pending prefetch process, and returns the display mode of the pending image HW to the specific display mode before the opening/closing execution mode. A return determination is made as to whether or not to do so. In the determination for return, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern read in advance by the second hold look-ahead process is grasped based on the upper limit display mode table (FIG. 74), and the display mode of the hold image HW before the opening/closing execution mode is determined. , it is determined whether the mode is equal to or less than the grasped upper limit display mode.

Here, since the upper limit display mode of the fluctuation pattern 23H prefetched by the second pending prefetching process is the green display mode HMc (FIG. 74), the blue display mode HMb, which is the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode, corresponds to the fluctuation pattern. The upper limit display mode is as follows. In this case, return to the specific display mode is allowed and a return scenario is set.

As a result, if a scenario is set to return to the blue display mode HMb at the next shift timing, the display position of the hold image HW changes from the third unit hold display area Ga3 to the second unit hold display area Ga3, as shown in FIG. 75(b). When shifted to the unit reservation display area Ga2, the display mode is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the blue display mode HMb.

In addition, even if the display mode of the holding image HW is the green display mode HMc when the opening/closing execution mode is started, the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode corresponds to the fluctuation pattern pre-read by the second holding pre-reading process. Since the display mode is below the upper limit display mode, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the display mode of the pending image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the green display mode HMc.

On the other hand, if the display mode of the holding image HW is the red display mode HMd when the opening/closing execution mode is started, the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode is a variation pattern pre-read by the second holding pre-reading process. This is a mode higher than the upper limit display mode corresponding to . In this case, returning to the specific display mode is not permitted. That is, whether or not to return to the specific display mode depends on the display mode of the pending image HW when the opening/closing execution mode is started.

If the return to the specific display mode is not permitted, the pending image HW will be displayed in the normal display mode HMa at the end of the opening/closing execution mode until it is shifted to the execution display area D. The state is maintained (FIG. 75(c)).

Thereafter, when the display position of the pending image HW set to the normal display mode HMa is shifted to the execution display area D and the game round of the pending image HW is started, the production control device 143 performs the third execution of the pending notice. process (step S1808) to determine promotion to a higher display mode. As a result, if promotion to a higher display mode is selected by lottery, the display mode of the pending image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode. For example, when the upper limit display mode of the variation pattern 23H in the promotion determination is set to the green display mode HMc, the display mode of the pending image HW is promoted within the range up to the green display mode HMc.

Next, a case will be described with reference to FIG. 76 about the case where the pre-read result of the propriety judgment changes before and after the opening/closing execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 76(a), when the third hold information (hold image HW) of the second special symbol occurs in the high-probability gaming state, the main controller 162 performs the information acquisition process. Execute. As a result, it is assumed that 17 is obtained as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and 45 is obtained as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS.

In addition, the production control device 143 executes a first pending prefetch process based on the result of the information acquisition process of the main control device 162. The win/fail result corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1=17 in the high probability gaming state is a winning result (Fig. 12), and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation type counter CS=45 is the fluctuation pattern 12A (Fig. 59(a) )), the result of the first pending prefetching process is a win and a variation pattern 12A. The fluctuation pattern 12A is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to SPSP reach B.

Furthermore, the production control device 143 executes a setting process for a pending notice based on the result of the first pending pre-reading process. The selection range of the final display mode corresponding to the variation pattern 12A is the blue display mode HMb, the green display mode HMc, the red display mode HMd, and the rainbow color display mode HMe (FIG. 61(a)). As a result of the lottery, it is assumed that a rainbow color display mode HMe is selected as the final display mode, and a production scenario in which the initial display mode is the blue display mode HMb is selected. In this case, the hold image HW whose display mode is the blue display mode HMb is displayed in the third unit hold display area Gb3 of the second hold display area Gb.

When the game round in which the pending image HW is acquired usually results in a jackpot, and the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the display of all pending images including the pending image HW is erased. This state is maintained until a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the ending effect.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the ending performance, the performance control device 143 executes a second reservation prefetch process based on the reservation information stored in the storage area 344c for reservation. In the second suspension prefetching process, the prefetching process is executed using the propriety determination table for the time-saving gaming state and the variable display time table. The winning result corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 = 17 is a winning result (Fig. 12), and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation type counter CS = 45 is fluctuation pattern 22H (Fig. 59 (d)), so the second pending The result of the pre-reading process is an error and a variation pattern 22H. The fluctuation pattern 22H is not a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a reach hit, but a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a reach miss (SP reach A miss).

In addition, the production control device 143 executes a setting process for returning to advance notice based on the result of the second hold lookahead process, and determines whether or not to return the display mode of the hold image HW to the specific display mode before the opening/closing execution mode. Make a determination for return. Since the upper limit display mode of the fluctuation pattern 22H prefetched by the second pending prefetch process is the green display mode HMc (FIG. 74), the blue display mode HMb, which is the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode, is the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. The following aspects apply. In this case, return to the specific display mode is allowed and a return scenario is set.

As a result, if a scenario is set to return to the blue display mode HMb at the next shift timing, the display position of the hold image HW changes from the third unit hold display area Ga3 to the second unit hold display area Ga3, as shown in FIG. When shifted to the unit reservation display area Ga2, the display mode is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the blue display mode HMb.

In addition, even if the display mode of the holding image HW is the green display mode HMc when the opening/closing execution mode is started, the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode corresponds to the fluctuation pattern pre-read by the second holding pre-reading process. Since the display mode is below the upper limit display mode, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the display mode of the pending image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the green display mode HMc.

On the other hand, if the display mode of the holding image HW is the red display mode HMd or the rainbow color display mode HMe when the opening/closing execution mode is started, the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode is the second pending pre-reading process. This is a mode higher than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern read in advance. In this case, returning to the specific display mode is not permitted. That is, even if the validity changes before and after the opening/closing execution mode, whether or not the specific display aspect is restored depends on the display manner of the holding image HW when the opening/closing execution mode is started.

If the return to the specific display mode is not permitted, the pending image HW will be displayed in the normal display mode HMa at the end of the opening/closing execution mode until it is shifted to the execution display area D. The state is maintained (FIG. 76(c)).

Thereafter, when the display position of the pending image HW set to the normal display mode HMa is shifted to the execution display area D and the game round of the pending image HW is started, the production control device 143 performs the third execution of the pending notice. Execute the processing to determine promotion to a higher display mode. As a result, if promotion to a higher display mode is selected by lottery, the display mode of the pending image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode.

Furthermore, depending on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS of the holding image HW, even if the result of the first holding look-ahead processing in the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is a hit and the fluctuation pattern is greater than the reach effect, the opening/closing execution mode ends. In some cases, the result of the second pending look-ahead processing is a loss and changes to a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a complete loss (for example, as mentioned above, a normal jackpot result occurs in the high-precision gaming state, and after the opening/closing execution mode, the result changes to a fluctuation pattern that corresponds to a complete loss). (in the case where the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the hold information of the hold image HW is 17 and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is 10). In such a case, the display mode restoration process is not performed in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode, and the display mode of the pending image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be achieved.

If the target hold image HW is set to a specific display mode (a situation where a hold notice effect is being executed) and the mode shifts to opening/closing execution mode, the hold look-ahead process is performed again after the open/close execution mode (second hold look-ahead process). is executed, and the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is set based on the result.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the pending image is set to a specific display mode based on the result of the pending pre-reading process, so that the player's expectations for a jackpot result are aroused even before the start of the game round. be able to. Further, a plurality of types of game states are set as the game state, and when a jackpot result is obtained and the opening/closing execution mode is executed, the game state is shifted to one of the plurality of types of game states. In a configuration with multiple types of gaming states like this, even if the pending information used for winning or losing judgments is the same, the winning or losing results and the game round effects (reach effect, etc.) performed in the game round may differ depending on the gaming status. may occur.

In this regard, in this configuration, when transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode while a pending notice performance is being executed, the pre-reading process is executed again after the opening/closing execution mode for the pending information that triggered the pending notice performance, and the result is Based on this, the display mode of the target pending image HW (the pending image of the pending information that triggered the pending preview effect) is set. For this reason, it is possible to adjust the display mode after the opening/closing execution mode of the target pending image HW for which the suspension preview performance was performed before the opening/closing execution mode so that it becomes a mode suitable for the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode. This makes it possible to suitably display the hold image after the opening/closing execution mode.

When performing the pending pre-reading process again after the opening/closing execution mode, the pre-reading is performed by applying the validity judgment conditions and effect selection conditions corresponding to the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode. As a result, the display mode of the target pending image HW can be made consistent with the win/fail result actually reported in the game round of the target pending image HW performed after the opening/closing execution mode and the game round effect actually performed in the relevant game round. can be adjusted.

Set the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the holding pre-reading process again after the opening/closing execution mode and the display mode of the target holding image HW before the opening/closing execution mode. It was configured to do this.

For example, if the display mode of the pending image changes frequently as the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, there is a concern that the player may feel uncomfortable. In this regard, in this configuration, the display mode after opening/closing execution mode is set by taking into account not only the read-ahead result again but also the display format before opening/closing execution mode. In light of the pre-reading results, if there is no problem in maintaining the same display mode after opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to carry over the display mode before opening/closing execution mode. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the display mode of the holding image from changing excessively after the opening/closing execution mode, and it becomes possible to display the holding image after the opening/closing execution mode in a natural manner.

A plurality of upper limit display modes are set corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of each gaming state, and among them, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern identified by the pre-reading process again after the opening/closing execution mode, and the upper limit display mode before the opening/closing execution mode. The display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is set based on the result. More specifically, if the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode is below the upper limit display mode derived from the fluctuation pattern, the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is the opening/closing execution mode. The configuration is the same as the previous display mode.

In this embodiment, a plurality of types of modes are set as the specific display mode of the pending image (notification mode in the pending preview performance) so that the jackpot expectation level is different. In a configuration where the expectation level is set stepwise and a large number of display modes are provided, the range of expectation levels that one display mode corresponds to is narrowed, so the opening/closing mode is set in the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode. If the hold image is displayed after the execution mode, a difference is likely to occur in the level of expectation suggested before and after the opening/closing execution mode. In this regard, with this configuration, even in a situation where a large number of display modes are set, it is possible to suitably display the hold image after the opening/closing execution mode by matching the expectations.

If the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode is a higher display mode than the upper limit display mode derived from the fluctuation pattern, the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is set to the normal display mode HMa. It was configured to do this. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display mode after the opening/closing execution mode from exceeding the corresponding expectation in the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode, and it is possible to suitably display the holding image after the opening/closing execution mode.

When the display mode of the target pending image HW in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is set to the normal display mode HMa, determine whether to promote the display mode of the target pending image HW to a specific display mode in the game round. The configuration is such that the promotion is executed based on the result.

If the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is different from the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode, by changing the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode to the normal display mode HMa, the gaming state can be changed. Although it is possible to absorb fluctuations in the results of the validity judgment and the game performance due to changes, there is a concern that it will not be possible to notify or suggest the expectation level of the reservation information corresponding to the target reservation image HW. In this regard, in this configuration, when the game progresses to the game round of the target pending image HW set to the normal display mode HMa, an opportunity to change to the specific display mode is given. Therefore, even if the display mode is changed from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa, it can be promoted to the specific display mode after the fact, and it becomes possible to notify the level of expectation. .

In the above case, the configuration determines whether or not the target pending image HW is to be promoted to a specific display mode based on the variation pattern specified by the execution of the propriety judgment (start of the game round) in the main control device 162. And so.

In this case, the same information used to select the game round effect in the game round of the target pending image HW is used to determine whether promotion is possible, so the game state before the opening/closing execution mode and the game after the opening/closing execution mode are determined. In the case where the state is different, the display mode of the target holding image HW can be changed to a specific display mode while adapting to the game round performance actually performed in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode.

In addition, with the above configuration, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state after the opening/closing execution mode is supported solely for determining whether or not to promote the target holding image HW to a specific display mode. It is possible to avoid adding a dedicated process for transmitting the fluctuation pattern (information regarding the results of the validity judgment and the game performance). That is, when executing the game round of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode, the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 is changed to the special symbol display section 43. It is necessary to send a fluctuation start command from the main control device 162 to the production control device 143 in order to execute it in synchronization with the special figure game time in , but the configuration is such that the promotion judgment is executed using this fluctuation start command. By doing so, there is no need to notify the production control device 143 from the main control device 162 of the variation pattern corresponding to the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode by a dedicated command different from the variation start command. Therefore, not only can promotion determination be performed using the existing processing configuration in the main control device 162, but also the production control device 143 does not need to be equipped with a processing configuration for when such a dedicated command is received. , it is possible to suppress the processing configuration from becoming complicated.

When the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is the same as the specific display mode before the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to change the display mode from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode. The structure is as follows.

In this case, regardless of whether or not the display mode of the target pending image HW is restored to the same mode, as the opening/closing execution mode is executed, the display mode of the target pending image HW changes from the specific display mode to the normal display mode. The display mode can be changed to HMa. This makes it possible to reduce unnaturalness when the display mode is changed to the normal display mode HMa due to a determination not to return to the same mode. In addition, by causing an event that changes from the normal display mode HMa to a specific display mode, the normal display mode HMa can be changed from the normal display mode HMa in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode, including when it is determined not to return to the same mode. It is possible to arouse a feeling of expectation that the reserved image (reserved information) will be changed to a specific display mode, and it is possible to maintain the expectation for the reserved image (reserved information).

The configuration is such that the pending image is not displayed while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed.

When changing the display mode of the target holding image HW at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, if you suddenly change the display mode of the target holding image HW to another display mode at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the game There is a concern that people may get an unnatural impression. In particular, if the display mode is downgraded to the normal display mode HMa, it is likely to be easily noticed by the player and give an unnatural impression. In this regard, in this configuration, the hold image is hidden in the opening/closing execution mode, so when changing the display mode of the target hold image HW, the display of the hold image itself, including other hold images, is There may be intervening periods in which the event is not performed. This prevents changes in the display mode from being noticeable and makes it possible to reduce unnaturalness. Furthermore, since the hold image is hidden, there is also the advantage that it becomes easier to draw the player's attention to the performance for the opening/closing execution mode (jackpot game performance).

<Sixth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the display mode of the hold image before the occurrence of the power outage state and the display mode of the hold image at the time of recovery from the power outage state are targeted. This embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 77 to 86. Note that in these figures, the same components as those in each of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and their explanations will be omitted.

In each of the embodiments described above, when the occurrence of a power outage state is detected by the power outage monitoring unit 315 of the power supply and launch control device 191, a power outage flag (indicating the power outage state) is stored in the backup area provided in the RAM 314 of the main control device 162. occurrence information) is set, and power is supplied from the backup power supply unit 316 of the power supply and launch control device 191 to the RAM 314 for power outage. That is, when a power outage occurs, the game times of special and regular symbols on the main display unit 81 that were in progress when the power outage occurred, and the RAM 314 of the main controller 162 when the power outage occurred. Power is supplied to the RAM 314 so that the stored pending information and the like can be retained, and the data in the RAM 314 is backed up. In this embodiment, in addition to this, the data stored in the RAM 344 is also backed up in the production control device 143.

However, since the production control device 143 handles a larger amount of data than the main control device 162, the RAM 344 installed in the production control device 143 has a larger capacity and larger scale than the RAM 314 of the main control device 162. . For this reason, if it is attempted to back up all the data stored in the RAM 344 of the production control device 143 as it is, the amount of power consumed under a power outage state will increase. As a result, the power stored in the backup power supply section 316 is consumed in a short period of time, resulting in a shortened data retention period (backup period) and the need for a backup power supply section 316 with a large amount of stored power, resulting in increased costs. There are concerns that it may lead to

Therefore, in this embodiment, instead of backing up the entire data stored in the RAM 344, as part of the data, information related to the pending image such as pending information stored in the pending storage area 344c is backed up. is configured to do so. The electrical configuration for this will be explained with reference to FIG. 77.

In addition to the RAM 344, the production control device 143 is provided with a backup RAM 345 as a storage medium exclusively for backup. The capacity of the backup RAM 345 is smaller than that of the RAM 344, and is large enough to store information related to reserved images. Note that, like the RAM 344, the backup RAM 345 may be integrated into one chip with the MPU 342, or may be integrated into a chip separately from the MPU 342 and the RAM 344.

The RAM 344 and the backup RAM 345 are supplied with power for power outage from the backup power supply section 316. In this embodiment, when a power outage occurs, information regarding the pending image out of the data stored in the RAM 344 is stored (copied) in the backup RAM 345, and the power is saved to the RAM 344 at the time of a power outage. The power supply is for supplying the power necessary to read the information regarding the pending image stored in the RAM 344. Therefore, after the read process (write process to the backup RAM 345) is completed, the supply of power to the RAM 344 during power outage is stopped.

On the other hand, the backup RAM 345 continues to be supplied with power during a power outage even after the writing process of information regarding the pending image is completed. In this way, when a power outage occurs, the information to be backed up is stored in a small storage medium provided separately from the RAM 344, and power is supplied to the storage medium in the event of a power outage. , power consumption for data retention can be kept low. This can prevent the data retention period from becoming short and from requiring the backup power supply section 316 with a large amount of stored power.

Although not shown, the power supply and firing control device 191 or the production control device 143 is provided with a switching unit (switch circuit) that switches the power supply state to the RAM 344 during power outage. The switching unit supplies the RAM 344 with power during a power outage from the backup power supply unit 316 while at least reading the information related to the pending image from the RAM 344 and writing it to the backup RAM 345, and writes the information related to the pending image to the backup RAM 345. After finishing, it operates to stop the supply of power to the RAM 344 during a power outage.

The production control device 143 is provided with an NMI terminal like the main control device 162, and a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring section 315 in the power supply and launch control device 191 is output to the NMI terminal. That is, in this embodiment, when a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring unit 315, the process for power outage is executed in both the main control device 162 and the production control device 143.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 342 of the production control device 143 will be explained. The processing of the MPU 342 can be roughly divided into a main process that is started upon power-on, a normal process for effect control, and an NMI interrupt process that is started when a power outage signal is input to the NMI terminal. Among these, the NMI interrupt processing is almost the same as the NMI interrupt processing (FIG. 15) in the main control device 162, so it will be explained with reference to FIG.

<NMI interrupt processing>
As shown in FIG. 15, in the NMI interrupt process, first in step S11, data in the use register provided in the MPU 342 is saved to a predetermined storage area of the RAM 344 or to the backup RAM 345. In step S12, a power failure flag is set in the backup RAM 345. In step S13, the saved data is returned to the register used by the MPU 342, and then the NMI interrupt processing is ended. Note that if the power outage flag can be set without destroying the data in the use register of the MPU 342, the processes of step S11 and step S13 can be omitted.

<Main processing>
The main processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 78. The main process is performed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while external power is supplied, or when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on) (when external power is supplied).

In step S5101, initial setting processing upon power-on is executed, and in step S5102, access to the RAM 344 and backup RAM 345 is permitted. In step S5103, the used area of the RAM 344 is cleared to 0, and in step S5104, initialization processing of the RAM 344 is executed. Thereafter, the main process ends, and the process shifts to normal processing, which will be described later.

<Normal processing>
The normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 79.

First, in step S5201, power-on notification processing is executed. The power-on notification process is to perform a power-on notification corresponding to the fact that the power of the pachinko machine 10 has been turned on.

If a power outage occurs in a situation where a game round is not in progress before the power is turned on, a message such as "The power has been turned on" will be displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 75 as the above-mentioned power-on notification. It is done in G. This message display continues for a predetermined period of time, and then a predetermined demo video is displayed.

Additionally, if a power outage occurs in the middle of a game and the game is resumed after the power is turned on (after the power is restored), a message such as ``The screen will be restored soon'' will be displayed as a power-on notification. is performed on display screen G. At that time, the main display unit 81 is in a state where the next game round is executed, but the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are not displayed on the display screen G, and no variable display is performed due to them. Such a fluctuating display is performed from the start timing of the next game round (game round started after the power is turned on) after the power is turned on (after the power is restored). Note that the above message display is erased when the subsequent game round ends (when the next game round starts).

In addition, in both cases where a power outage occurs while a game session is not being executed or when a power outage condition occurs in the middle of a game session, sound is output from the speaker unit 29 while the power-on notification is being executed. is not performed, and a silent state is maintained. The sound output is performed from the start timing of the game round that starts after the power is turned on (or the next game round if the subsequent game round is played when the power is restored). With such a configuration, when the hall power supply to which multiple pachinko machines 10 are connected is turned on and the pachinko machines 10 are started up at the same time, each pachinko machine It is possible to suppress the sound from being outputted all at once from 10 and turning into noise.

In step S5202, processing for restoring the hold notice is executed to display the hold image in the display mode before the power outage. Details of this processing will be described later. Note that the processing in steps S5201 and S5202 is executed only when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

After executing step S5202, external signal output processing is executed at step S5203. In the external signal output processing, commands set in the previous normal processing are transmitted to the display control device 350, control signals for driving and controlling the various lamp sections 26 to 28 and the speaker section 29, etc. are transmitted. In step S5204, counter update processing is executed to update the counter values provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344.

In step S5205, command reception processing for receiving a command from the main control device 162 is executed. The command received by the command reception process is stored in the command storage area 344a of the RAM 344, as already explained. In step S5206, the effect setting process described with reference to FIG. 30 is executed.

In step S5207, it is determined whether a power outage flag is set in the backup RAM 345. If the power outage flag is not set, that is, if a power outage state has not occurred, the process advances to step S5208, and a determination is made as to whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has arrived, that is, a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the current normal processing. It is determined whether or not (2 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed.

If the predetermined time has elapsed, the process returns to step S5203 and processes from step S5203 onwards are executed. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not elapsed, the process waits until the predetermined time has elapsed. In this case, the remaining time may be used to update the values of various counters, similar to the normal processing in the main controller 162 (FIG. 20).

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5207 (the power outage flag is set), it means that a power outage state has occurred. In this case, the process advances to step S5209 to create pending image information indicating in which display mode each pending image was displayed before (immediately before) the power outage state occurred. In this step, by referring to the effect scenario data for the hold preview effect stored in the RAM 344, it is determined whether there is a hold image displayed in a specific display mode or if such a hold image exists. , in which mode it is displayed, etc., and create pending image information based on the result of the understanding.

In step S5210, information regarding the pending image is stored in the backup RAM 345. At this time, in addition to the hold image information created in step S5209, the information stored in the hold storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is also stored in the backup RAM 345, and the hold image is displayed when the power is restored. It is stored and retained as information for The information stored in the storage area 344c for reservation includes reservation information (jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, fluctuation type counter) stored in each area set for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition to each value of CS, etc.), information indicating the number of pending items is included.

Note that the storage process of the pending image information created in step S5209 and the storage process of the information stored in the pending storage area 344c do not necessarily need to be performed in the same step, and it is not necessary to perform the storage process of either one. After that, the other storage process may be executed.

In step S5211, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup RAM 345. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value of information regarding the pending image stored in the backup RAM 345. In step S5212, access to the RAM 344 and backup RAM 345 is prohibited, and thereafter, an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

<Processing for restoring pending notice>
The process for restoring the suspended notice in step S5202 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 80.

First, in step S5301, it is determined whether a power outage flag is stored in the backup RAM 345. If the power outage flag is not stored, it means that the power stored in the backup power supply unit 316 has run out and the data stored in the backup RAM 345 has been lost. In this case, the process for returning the suspended notice is ended.

If a power outage flag is stored, the process advances to step S5302 and a RAM determination value is calculated. In the following step S5303, it is determined whether the RAM determination value is normal. Specifically, the RAM determination value calculated in step S5302 is compared with the RAM determination value (step S5211) saved at the time of occurrence of the power outage state, and it is determined whether the two match.

If the two do not match, the RAM judgment value is determined to be abnormal, and the data stored and held in the backup RAM 345 is recognized as invalid. In this case, the process for returning the suspended notice is ended. Note that the validity of the data stored and held in the backup RAM 345 can also be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the backup RAM 345 is correctly stored.

On the other hand, if the two match, the RAM determination value is determined to be normal, and the data stored and held in the backup RAM 345 is recognized as valid. In this case, the process advances to step S5304, and the data stored in the backup RAM 345 is referenced to determine the number of pending items at the time of occurrence of the power outage state.

In step S5305, it is determined whether the number of pending items determined in step S5304 is zero. If the number of pending items is 0, that is, if a power outage has occurred in a situation where no pending items exist, the process for restoring the pending notice is immediately terminated.

If the number of pending items is not 0, the process advances to step S5306, and display mode setting processing is executed. This process is for setting the display mode of the hold image to be displayed after power is restored. Here, the display mode setting process in step S5306 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 81.

In step S5401, data stored in the backup RAM 345 is referenced to grasp the display mode of each pending image before (immediately before the occurrence of) a power outage state. In step S5402, based on the grasp result in step S5401, it is determined whether or not there is a pending image displayed in a specific display mode. If there are no pending images displayed in the specific display mode, the process advances to step S5403, and the display mode of all pending images is set to the normal display mode HMa.

If there is a hold image displayed in a specific display mode, the process advances to step S5404, and the display mode of the hold image (target hold image) is equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode (for example, red display mode HMd). Determine whether or not. If the display mode of the target hold image is lower than the predetermined display mode (for example, green display mode HMc or blue display mode HMb), the process advances to step S5405, and the display mode of the hold image is changed to the state before the power cut. Set to a specific display mode. In step S5406, the display mode of the pending images other than the target pending image is set to the normal display mode HMa.

If the display mode of the target pending image is a predetermined display mode or higher (for example, red display mode HMd or rainbow color display mode HMe), the process advances to step S5407, and the display mode of the pending image is lower than the predetermined display mode. (for example, green display mode HMc). That is, if the display mode of the target pending image is equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode, the display mode of the target pending image at the time of power restoration is limited to a lower mode than the specific display mode before the power outage.

In step S5408, the display mode of the pending images other than the target pending image is set to the normal display mode HMa. In step S5409, a return notice flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. The role of the return notice flag will be described later.

Returning to the explanation of the process for restoring a pending notice (FIG. 80), after executing the display mode setting process in step S5306, each pending image is displayed in the display mode set in step S5306 in step S5307. The display control device 350 is controlled so as to In step S5308, the pending information and the like stored in the backup RAM 345 are stored (restored) in the corresponding area of the RAM 344. In step S5309, the power failure flag stored in the backup RAM 345 is erased, and thereafter, the process for restoring the suspended notice is ended.

<Special figure fluctuation display processing>
The special figure variation display processing according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 82. This process is executed in step S1305 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30), and is executed in place of the special figure variation display process of FIG. In FIG. 82, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 41, and the explanation thereof will be omitted or simplified. Note that in FIG. 82, for convenience, the description of the first execution process of the pending notice is omitted.

If a negative determination is made in step S1804 and the variable display is in progress, a process for changing is executed in step S1805. In step S5501, it is determined whether the current special figure game round is the game round of the hold image (target hold image) that was displayed in a specific display mode before the power outage. If it is not the game time of the target pending image, the special figure fluctuation display process is ended as it is.

If it is the game time of the target pending image, the fourth execution process of the pending notice is performed in step S5502, and then the special figure variation display process is ended. The fourth execution process of the suspension notice is for promoting the display mode of the target suspension image to a higher mode in the game round of the target suspension image.

<Fourth execution process of pending notice>
The fourth execution process for pending notice in step S5502 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 83.

First, in step S5601, it is determined whether a return notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. The recovery notice flag indicates that when the power is restored, processing should be executed to change the display mode of the hold image that was set to a lower display mode than the specific display mode before the power outage to a higher mode. This is for the MPU 342 to understand. If the return notice flag is not stored, the fourth execution process of the suspended notice is ended.

If a return notice flag is stored, the process advances to step S5602, and it is determined whether a promotion flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. The promotion flag is for the MPU 342 to understand that the display mode of the target pending image should be promoted, and is similar to the promotion flag according to the first embodiment.

If the promotion flag is not stored, it is determined in step S5603 whether or not a determined flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. If the determined flag is stored, the fourth execution process for pending notice is ended.

If the determined flag is not stored, the process advances to step S5604, and it is determined whether or not there are any pending change points remaining in the ongoing game round. If there are no pending change points remaining, the process advances to step S5611 to erase the return notice flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d, and then terminate the fourth execution process of the pending notice. do.

If the pending change point remains, the process advances to step S5605 to execute the process for promoting the pending notice, and then ends the fourth execution process for the pending notice. Here, the process for promoting a suspended notice will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 84.

In the promotion process, first, in step S5701, the current display mode of the target pending image displayed in the execution display area D is grasped. Note that the current display mode is the display mode set in step S5407 of the display mode setting process (FIG. 81).

In step S5702, the fluctuation pattern of the target pending image is grasped. This understanding is performed based on the fluctuation start command (step S712 in FIG. 23) transmitted from the main controller 162 at the start of the game round (game round in progress) of the target pending image.

In step S5703, the promotion determination of the pending preview performance is performed based on the fluctuation pattern grasped in step S5701, the current display mode grasped in step S5702, and the promotion determination table stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. conduct. The promotion determination is to determine whether the display mode of the target pending image displayed in the execution display area D can be changed to a specific display mode higher than the current display mode.

Similar to the promotion determination table (FIG. 47) according to the first embodiment, the promotion determination table has an upper limit of the display mode determined in correspondence with each variation pattern. In step S5703, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the variation pattern is specified with reference to the promotion determination table, and it is determined whether the current display mode is a lower display mode than the specified upper limit display mode. As a result, if the display mode is in a lower level, the display mode is allowed to be promoted, and if it is not, the promotion is not allowed.

After executing step S5703, a determined flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d in step S5704. The determined flag is for the MPU 342 to know that the promotion determination has been executed.

In step S5705, it is determined whether the result of the promotion determination in step S5703 allows promotion of the display mode. If the promotion is not permitted, the process exits the promotion process for the pending notice and proceeds to step S5611 (FIG. 83), the return notice flag is cleared, and the fourth execution process for the pending notice ends.

If promotion is permitted, the process advances to step S5706 and a promotion scenario lottery process is executed. The promotion scenario determines at what timing (pending change point) the display mode of the target pending image displayed in the execution display area D is to be changed. The promotion scenario lottery is obtained from the promotion scenario lottery table stored in the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343 and each counter area 344b of the RAM 344, similarly to step S2405 (FIG. 46) according to the first embodiment. This is done based on the lottery counter (random value).

In step S5707, promotion scenario data is set so that the promotion scenario selected in step S5706 is executed. In step S5708, a promotion flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d, and thereafter, the pending notice promotion process is ended.

Returning to the explanation of the fourth execution process for pending notice (FIG. 83), if an affirmative determination is made in step S5602 (if the promotion flag is stored), the process advances to step S5606, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing to promote the display mode. Determine whether This determination is made based on the promotion scenario setting result in step S5707. If it is not the promotion timing, the fourth execution process for pending notice is ended.

If it is promotion timing, the process advances to step S5607, and the display mode to be changed (higher display mode) in the current change process is grasped based on the setting result of the promotion scenario. In the following step S5608, the display mode of the pending image displayed in the execution display area D is set to be changed to the display mode grasped in step S5607. Specifically, the display mode of the pending image displayed in the execution display area D is changed by including information indicating which display mode to change to as an output command to the display control device 350. Set the command to indicate what should be done.

In step S5609, it is determined whether the display mode grasped in step S5607 or the display mode set as the change destination in step S5608 is the final display mode in the promotion effect. For example, if a promotion scenario is set to promote the display mode in multiple stages through multiple change processes, if the current change process is an intermediate step, it is assumed that it is not the final display mode. A negative determination is made in the step, and the fourth execution process for pending notice is ended.

If it is the final display mode, the promotion flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d is deleted in step S5610. In the subsequent step S5611, the return notice flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d is erased, and then the fourth execution process of the suspended notice is ended.

<About the display mode of the hold image before power outage and after power restoration>
The display mode of the hold image before power outage and after power restoration will be described. First, a case will be described with reference to FIG. 85 in which a hold image with the green display mode HMc exists before the power outage state occurs.

As shown in FIG. 85(a), in a situation where the game round of the first special figure is being executed, there are three pieces of hold information of the first special figure, and the hold information of the third unit hold display area Ga3 is It is assumed that the image HW is displayed in a green display mode HMc. If a power outage occurs in this state, the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and the display on the display screen G disappears. Accordingly, all the pending images including the pending image HW are not displayed.

At this time, the production control device 143 stores information regarding the pending image in the backup RAM 345. Since power is supplied to the backup RAM 345 from the power source and launch control device 191 during a power outage for data retention, information regarding the hold image stored in the backup RAM 345 is retained even during a power outage state. .

Thereafter, when the power is restored after the power outage is resolved, the main controller 162 executes the power restoration process (steps S2004 to S2010 in FIG. 19) based on the data stored in the RAM 314. As a result, the continuation of the game round (game round of the first special figure) that was interrupted when the power outage state occurred is resumed on the special figure display section 43.

When the power is restored, the production control device 143 executes a power-on notification process (step S5201) for carrying out a power-on notification. As a result, a character display 461 such as "The screen will be restored soon" is displayed on the display screen G, for example.

In addition, the production control device 143 executes a process for returning the pending notice (step S5202) in order to restore the display of the pending image. In the processing for restoring the hold notice, based on the information related to the hold images stored in the backup RAM 345, the number of hold items and the display mode of each hold image before the occurrence of the power outage state is grasped, and the grasped It is determined whether or not there is an image displayed in a specific display mode among the pending images. If there is a hold image that was displayed in a specific display mode, it is determined whether the display mode is a predetermined display mode (for example, red display mode HMd) or higher, and restoration is performed based on the result. Set the display mode when the power is on.

Here, since the display mode before the power outage state occurs is the green display mode HMc, which is a lower mode than the predetermined display mode, the display mode of the hold image HW is the display mode before the power outage state occurs. Set it to do so. As a result, as shown in FIG. 85(b), each pending image is displayed on the display screen G in the same state as when the power outage state occurred.

In addition, since the information regarding the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is not backed up, the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is not displayed in the above case. Therefore, the character display 461 as a power-on notification and each pending image restored based on the information related to the pending image stored in the backup RAM 345 are different from each other when the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner. It is displayed on a power recovery background 462 that is different from the background. The power recovery background 462 is, for example, a monochrome background in a predetermined display color (for example, black).

Thereafter, when the continued game session that has been restarted ends, each pending image is shifted to the lower unit pending display area, as shown in FIG. 85(c). With the start of the next game round, symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen G, and the screen returns.

Next, a case will be described with reference to FIG. 86 in which a hold image with the red display mode HMd exists before the power outage state occurs.

As shown in FIG. 86(a), in a situation where the game round of the first special figure is being executed, there are three pieces of hold information of the first special figure, which are displayed in the third unit hold display area Ga3. It is assumed that the pending image HW is displayed in a red display mode HMd. If a power outage occurs in this state, the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and the display on the display screen G disappears.

Thereafter, when the power outage state is resolved and the power is restored, the continuation of the game round (game round of the first special figure) that was interrupted when the power outage state occurred is resumed on the special figure display section 43. In addition, the effect control device 143 executes a process for restoring the pending notice, and determines whether the specific display mode of the pending image HW before the occurrence of the power outage state is equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode.

Here, the display mode of the hold image HW before the power outage occurs is the red display mode HMd, which is a predetermined display mode or higher, so that the display mode of the hold image HW before the power outage is The green display mode HMc is set to a lower level than the display mode HMc. As a result, as shown in FIG. 86(b), the display of each pending image is restored with the display mode of the pending image HW set to the green display mode HMc.

After that, when the timing for starting the game of the hold image HW comes, the production control device 143 grasps the fluctuation pattern of the hold information corresponding to the hold image HW based on the fluctuation start command sent from the main control device 162. . Then, based on the variation pattern, it is determined whether or not to promote the display mode to a higher level display mode than the current display mode (green display mode HMc).

In other words, if the display mode before the power outage state is higher than the predetermined display mode, the display mode is temporarily restored to a lower display mode than the display mode before the power outage, and then the change start command sent at the start of the game session is Based on this, the display mode of the pending image HW is reset. As a result, if promotion to the red display mode HMd (higher display mode) is determined, the display mode of the pending image HW in the execution display area D is changed to the green display mode, as shown in FIG. 86(c). The red display mode is changed from HMc to HMd. In addition, since the game round performance (reach performance, etc.) carried out in the game round of the pending image HW is determined based on the fluctuation pattern analyzed from the fluctuation start command, promotion is determined based on the fluctuation pattern. The display mode of the pending image HW is consistent with the above-mentioned game performance.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be achieved.

If a power outage abnormality occurs in a situation where the target hold image HW is in a specific display mode (a situation where a hold notice effect is being executed), and the power is restored after the power outage abnormality is resolved, the power outage The display mode of the target hold image HW after power restoration is set based on the display mode of the previous target hold image HW, and the hold preview performance is re-executed.

In this embodiment, since a hold preview effect is executed in which the display mode of the hold image is set to a specific display mode based on the result of the hold look-ahead process, the player is aware of the possibility of a jackpot result even before the start of the game round. can arouse a sense of expectation. Furthermore, since multiple types of specific display modes are set with different levels of jackpot expectation, it is possible to suggest different levels of expectation, which is advantageous in arousing players' sense of anticipation. It can be configured as follows. Under such a configuration, if a power outage abnormality occurs during execution of a hold notice performance and then power is restored, the hold notice performance that was being performed before the abnormality occurred is re-executed. Thereby, it is possible to restore the suspended preview performance after the abnormality is resolved, and it is suppressed that the suspended preview performance disappears due to the occurrence of the abnormality. At this time, since the display mode of the target hold image HW is set based on the display mode before the occurrence of the abnormality, it becomes possible to suitably restore the hold preview performance that was being performed before the power outage.

By storing information regarding the pending image in the backup RAM 345 when a power outage occurs, the configuration is such that information corresponding to the display mode of the pending image can be retained even after the power outage occurs.

According to the above configuration, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped due to the occurrence of a power outage state and the control regarding the pending image is stopped, the information held in the backup RAM 345 will be retained after the power is restored. By referring to it, it is possible to understand the display mode of the target hold image HW before the power is cut off. This makes it possible to suitably restore the display mode of the target holding image HW to the display mode before the power cut, when re-executing the hold preview effect after the power is restored.

If the display mode of the target hold image HW before the power outage is a notification mode higher than the predetermined mode (green display mode HMc), the display mode of the target hold image HW after power restoration is limited to a predetermined mode or below. And so.

For example, if there is a change in the reservation information stored in the reservation ball storage area 314b due to a power outage abnormality, the result of the reservation look-ahead performed before the power outage and the propriety of the game play after the power is restored will be displayed. An inconsistency occurs between the determination result and the selection result of the game rendition. In such a case, if the suspended notice performance indicates a high level of expectation before the power is cut off, and if it is re-executed after the power is restored, the notification result (result of the judgment) in the game round and the result in the game round will be different. There is a concern that the game performance to be performed will not match the level of expectation suggested by the pending notice performance, giving an unpleasant impression to the player.

In this regard, in the above configuration, if the type of specific display mode that was being used at the time of the power outage is a mode that is higher than the predetermined level and suggests a certain degree of expectation, the display mode is limited to the lower display mode and the display is suspended. Rerun. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pending notice performance from suggesting an expectation level that does not match the notification results, etc. in the game round, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

When the display mode of the target pending image HW is limited to a display mode below a predetermined mode, it is determined whether or not to promote the display mode to a higher display mode in the game round of the target pending image HW, and the result is The configuration is such that the promotion is executed based on the following.

In the above configuration, even if the display mode of the target pending image HW is limited to a display mode below a predetermined display mode, promotion to a higher display mode is achieved by playing the game round of the target pending image HW. Therefore, the suggested level of expectation is prevented from remaining low.

In the above case, the configuration is such that the determination as to whether or not to promote the display mode to a higher-level display mode is made based on the result of the validity determination made at the timing of the game round and the selection result of the variable pattern.

In the above configuration, a determination is made as to whether or not to promote the display mode of the target pending image HW, using the results after power restoration regarding the validity determination and the selection of the game round effect as a determination material. Thereby, the promotion can be performed while being consistent with the notification results etc. that are actually carried out in the game round after the power is restored.

In the power restoration process executed when the power is restored from a power outage state, the configuration is such that a setting process for re-executing the suspended notice performance (suspended notice recovery process) is executed.

In this case, when the power outage is resolved and the power is restored, the pending notice performance can be promptly re-executed. As a result, if a power outage occurs in the middle of a game and there is a period in which symbol fluctuations are not displayed on display screen G after the power is restored, a suspended notice performance will be performed prior to the restoration of the symbol fluctuation display. can be re-executed.

<Seventh embodiment>
In the sixth embodiment, the production control device 143 was provided with a backup RAM 345, but in this embodiment, it is not provided, and the production control device 143 does not have a backup function. This embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 87 to 91. Note that in these figures, the same components as in each of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and their explanations will be omitted.

The production control device 143 according to this embodiment has the same electrical configuration as the production control device 143 according to the first embodiment, and is not provided with a backup RAM 345. Further, it does not have a function to back up data stored in the RAM 344. Therefore, if a power outage occurs in a situation where a hold exists (a situation where a hold image is displayed on the hold display section 200), the hold information etc. held on the production control device 143 side will be Disappear.

Note that in this embodiment, the signal line that transmits the power outage signal output from the power outage monitoring unit 315 of the launch control device 191 is not connected to the production control device 143, and the power outage signal is input to the production control device 143. is configured so that it does not occur.

Further, in this embodiment, in the reservation prefetching process (FIG. 28) of the main controller 162, the processing result (prefetching result of fluctuating pattern lottery, etc.) is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b (FIG. 11) of the RAM 314. That is, in each area set in the reserved ball storage area 314b, in addition to the reservation information (the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS), the reservation made for the reservation information is stored. The prefetch results are stored.

The information regarding the result of the pre-reading process stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b continues to be stored in the RAM 314 without being erased even after the information is transmitted to the production control device 143. The reason for this configuration is to enable, when a power outage occurs and then power is restored, the result of the pending prefetch processing performed before the power outage to occur to be ascertained.

In other words, in a normal pachinko machine, the main control device 162 executes the hold pre-reading process, and after transmitting the result as a hold command etc. to the performance control device 143, the pre-reading result is sent to the control process on the main control device 162 side. Since the information is not used for other purposes, there is no need to leave the information on the main controller 162 side. For this reason, after sending the information to the production control device 143, it is common to release the area in which the information regarding the prefetch results was stored and erase the information by overwriting the prefetch results, etc. for the subsequent pending information. It is.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, even after transmitting the information regarding the prefetch result to the production control device 143, the information is stored in the RAM 314. When a power outage occurs, power for power outage is supplied from the power supply and launch control device 191 to the RAM 314, and the information in the RAM 314 is held without being erased. Therefore, with the configuration of this embodiment, it is possible to retain information regarding the look-ahead results when a power outage occurs, and when the power is restored after a power outage, It becomes possible to grasp the result of the pending prefetch processing that was performed previously.

Note that the information regarding the prefetch results stored in the RAM 314 does not continue to be stored permanently, but is erased when the pending information is erased. That is, in response to the execution of the game round of the pending information that has been subjected to the pending pre-reading process, the information regarding the pre-reading result in the RAM 314 is erased.

By the way, the reason why the storage area for the information regarding the pre-reading result is set as the reserved ball storage area 314b is to understand which pending information the information regarding the pre-reading result corresponds to, and to prevent other information from being overwritten inadvertently. This is done in consideration of convenience when allocating areas. Therefore, the storage area for this information does not necessarily need to be the reserved ball storage area 314b, and may be another storage area in the RAM 314.

The processing performed by the MPU 312 of the main control device 162 will be explained.

<Main processing>
The main processing according to this embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 87(a). This process is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and is executed in place of the main process shown in FIG. 19. In FIG. 87(a), the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 19, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative determination is made in step S2003 (the RAM erase switch is not pressed), it is determined in step S2004 whether or not a power outage flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 314. If a power outage flag is stored, that is, if power is restored with the data in the RAM 314 stored and held after a power outage occurs, a RAM determination value is calculated in step S2005.

In step S2006, it is determined whether the RAM judgment value is normal or not. If it is normal, the stack pointer is restored in step S2007. In step S2008, a power restoration command is output.

In step S6101, a power restoration hold command is set based on the information stored and held in the held ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314, and is output to the production control device 143. The command for holding at the time of power recovery includes information indicating the number of items on hold at the time of occurrence of a power outage state, information indicating the result of pre-reading of holdings performed before the occurrence of a power outage state, and the like. After executing step S6101, the process of step S2009 (erasing the power outage flag) is executed.

The processing performed by the MPU 342 of the production control device 143 will be explained.

<Normal processing>
The normal processing according to this embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 87(b). This process is executed in place of the normal process in FIG. 79. As shown in FIG. 87(b), the normal processing according to this embodiment does not include backup processing of pending information in the event of a power outage state.

Specifically, in the normal process of FIG. 79 according to the sixth embodiment, it is checked in step S5207 whether or not a power outage flag is stored in the backup RAM 345 to determine whether there is a power outage state; When the power outage flag is stored (when a power outage state occurs), the processes of steps S5209 to S5212 are executed, but these processes are not performed in the normal process of FIG. 87(b) according to this embodiment. is not provided. Furthermore, in the normal process shown in FIG. 79 according to the sixth embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the process for returning the suspended notice is executed in step S5202. In the normal process of 87(b), such a process is not provided, and after executing the power-on notification process of step S5201, the external output process of step S5203 is executed.

<Production setting process>
The effect setting process according to this embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 88. This process is executed in step S5206 of the normal process (FIG. 87(b)), and is executed in place of the effect setting process of FIG. 30. In FIG. 88, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 30, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step S6201, it is determined whether a power restoration hold command from the main controller 162 has been received. The power restoration hold command is output when the power is restored from a power outage state (step S6101 in FIG. 87(a)), and the command includes information indicating the number of items held at the time of the power outage state. It also includes information indicating the result of pending prefetching performed before the occurrence of the power outage state.

If a power recovery hold command has been received, the process advances to step S6202, and the number of items held at the time of the power outage state is determined based on the power recovery hold command from the main controller 162. In step S6203, it is determined whether the number of pending items determined in step S6202 is zero. If the number of pending images is not 0, the process advances to step S6204, and a display mode setting process for setting the display mode of the pending image after power restoration is executed. Here, the display mode setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 89.

First, in step S6301, the fluctuation pattern of each piece of hold information is grasped based on the hold command at power restoration from the main controller 162. This fluctuation pattern is pre-read by the pending pre-read process (FIG. 28) of the main controller 162 before the power outage state occurs. Since the hold command at power restoration includes information on fluctuation patterns for the number of hold requests grasped in step S6202, all of these fluctuation patterns are grasped in this step.

Note that if you send a power-return-on-hold command that includes information on fluctuation patterns for the number of items on hold, it is assumed that the amount of data will become large or that the information on the fluctuation patterns will not be able to be accommodated. The information may be sent in multiple parts. Specifically, a configuration may be adopted in which first, a power recovery hold command is transmitted in a form that does not include information on the fluctuation pattern, and then information on the fluctuation pattern of each hold information is sequentially transmitted following the command.

In step S6302, based on the grasp result in step S6301, it is determined whether or not jackpot pending information exists. Specifically, it is checked whether the fluctuation patterns grasped in step S6301 include a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a jackpot, and whether there is pending information in which a jackpot was read in advance before the power outage state occurred. Determine whether or not.

If the jackpot pending information exists, the process advances to step S6303, and the display mode of the pending image corresponding to the pending information is set to the first specific display mode. The first specific display mode is a specific display mode lower than the rainbow color display mode HMe, which is the upper limit of the final display mode selected when a jackpot is predicted, and is, for example, the green display mode HMc.

In step S6304, a return notice flag is set in association with the pending image (target pending image). The return notice flag is for the MPU 342 to grasp that a process (promotion process) for changing the display mode of the target pending image should be executed in the game round of the target pending image. Note that the return notice flag may be stored in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344, or may be stored in the corresponding area ( (area corresponding to the target pending image).

After executing step S6304 or when a negative determination is made in step S6302 (when there is no jackpot pending information), in step S6305, it is determined that a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach effect exists among the fluctuation patterns grasped in step S6301. Determine whether or not. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the variation patterns 5H, 6H, 12H, 13H, 24H, and 25H exists. This step is to determine whether or not the pending information whose look-ahead result before the power outage is a negative result includes information that corresponds to a reach effect where the ranking of the jackpot expectation level is higher than a predetermined level. .

If there is a variation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach performance, the process advances to step S6306, and the display mode of the pending image corresponding to the pending information in which the variation pattern is read in advance is set to the second specific display mode. The second specific display mode is a display mode lower than the first specific display mode, and is, for example, a blue display mode HMb. In step S6307, a return notice flag is set in association with the pending image.

After executing step S6307 or if a negative determination is made in step S6305 (if there is no variation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach effect), in step S6308, it is determined whether there is pending information for which the variation pattern cannot be grasped in step S6301. Determine. If the fluctuation pattern cannot be grasped, some of the information indicating the look-ahead results may be damaged due to a power outage, or some data may be damaged due to the influence of noise etc. when sending the hold command when power is restored. There may be cases where the

If there is hold information whose fluctuation pattern cannot be grasped, the process advances to step S6309, and the display mode of the hold image corresponding to the hold information is set to the normal display mode HMa. In step S6310, a return notice flag is set in association with the pending image.

After executing step S6310 or if a negative determination is made in step S6308 (if there is no pending information whose fluctuation pattern cannot be grasped), in step S6311, the remaining pending images (the display mode is set in steps S6302 to S6310). The display mode of the pending image) is set to the normal display mode HMa.

Returning to the explanation of the effect setting process (FIG. 88), after executing the display mode setting process in step S6204, the hold image of the display mode set in the setting process is displayed on the display screen G in step S6205. The display control device 350 is controlled so as to be displayed. After executing step S6205, the process advances to step S1301, and thereafter, the processes of steps S1301 to S1308 are executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S6201 (if a power restoration hold command has not been received), the process skips steps S6202 to S6205 and proceeds to step S1301. If a negative determination is made in step S6203 (if the number of pending items is 0), the process skips steps S6204 and S6205 and proceeds to step S1301.

As a result of the above processing, when the power is restored after a power outage occurs, the pending image of the pending information in which the jackpot result was read in advance is displayed in the first specific display mode, creating a reach effect with a high jackpot expectation. The pending image of the pending information for which the corresponding missing result has been read in advance is displayed in the second specific display mode. After that, the display mode of the target pending image is promoted by performing the fourth execution process of the pending notice in step S5502 in the specific variation display process (FIG. 82). That is, the display mode of the target pending image is reset based on the fluctuation start command transmitted after the power is restored. Note that the fourth execution process of the pending notice is the same as that in the sixth embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted.

<About the display mode of the hold image before power outage and after power restoration>
The display mode of the hold image before power outage and after power restoration will be described. First, a case will be described with reference to FIG. 90 in which the jackpot result has been read in advance before the power outage state occurs.

As shown in FIG. 90(a), in a situation where the game round of the first special figure is being executed, there are three pieces of hold information of the first special figure, and the hold information of the third unit hold display area Ga3 is It is assumed that the image HW is displayed in a red display mode HMd. The pre-reading result of the pending information corresponding to the pending image HW is a jackpot result, and the pre-reading results of pending information corresponding to other pending images are all lose results (completely missed).

If a power outage occurs in this state, the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and the display on the display screen G disappears. Accordingly, all the pending images including the pending image HW are not displayed.

At this time, the RAM 314 of the main controller 162 is supplied with power during power outage for data retention from the power supply and launch control device 191, so the data stored in the RAM 314 is retained even during the power outage state. be done. Note that the data stored in the RAM 314 includes the processing results of the pending prefetching process (step S305) performed on the pending information of each pending image before the power outage occurs.

Thereafter, when the power is restored after the power outage is resolved, the main controller 162 executes power restoration processing (steps S2004 to S2010) based on the data stored in the RAM 314. As a result, the continuation of the game round (game round of the first special figure) that was interrupted when the power outage state occurred is resumed on the special figure display section 43.

In addition, at the time of power restoration, the main control device 162 includes, among the data stored in the RAM 314, information indicating the number of reservations, information indicating whether each reservation information corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, The result information (variation pattern) of the suspension prefetching process for each suspension information is read out and transmitted to the production control device 143 as a suspension command at power restoration (step S6101).

In the production control device 143, based on the above-mentioned various information transmitted from the main control device 162, a process for restoring the display of the pending image is executed (steps S6202 to S6205). In this process, the display mode of the pending image HW in which the jackpot result has been read in advance is set to the first specific display mode (green display mode HMc), and the display mode of the other pending images is set to the normal display mode HMa. . At this time, if there is hold information whose fluctuation pattern cannot be grasped, the display mode of the hold image corresponding to the hold information is set to the normal display mode HMa.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 90(b), the display mode of the pending image HW is set to the green display mode HMc, and the display mode of the other pending images is set to the normal display mode HMa, and each pending image Image display is restored. When the power is restored, the production control device 143 executes a power-on notification process (step S5201) to notify the power-on, so the display screen G displays, for example, text such as "The screen will be restored soon." Display 461 is displayed. Therefore, each pending image whose display has been restored is displayed together with the character display 461.

After that, when the timing for starting the game of the hold image HW comes, the production control device 143 grasps the fluctuation pattern of the hold information corresponding to the hold image HW based on the fluctuation start command sent from the main control device 162. . Then, based on the variation pattern, it is determined whether or not to promote the display mode to a higher level display mode than the current display mode (green display mode HMc).

In other words, the pending image HW of the pending information in which the jackpot result was read in advance before the power outage state occurred is once displayed in a manner limited to a predetermined or lower display mode (first specific display mode), and the display mode is limited to the display mode below a predetermined value (first specific display mode). The display mode of the hold image HW is reset based on the fluctuation start command sent at the time. As a result, if promotion to a higher display mode (red display mode HMd or rainbow color display mode HMe) is determined, the hold image HW is displayed in the execution display area D as shown in FIG. 90(c). The display mode is changed to a higher level mode (for example, red display mode HMd).

In addition, if the fluctuation pattern ascertained from the fluctuation start command sent at the start of the game round of the pending image HW does not correspond to a jackpot, that is, if the jackpot is not notified in the relevant game round. is not allowed to be promoted to a higher display mode, and the display mode of the pending image HW in the execution display area D is maintained in the first specific display mode.

Next, a case will be described with reference to FIG. 91 in which the SP out-of-reach result and the SPSP out-of-reach result are pre-read before the occurrence of the power outage state.

As shown in FIG. 91(a), in a situation where the game round of the first special figure is being executed, there are three pieces of hold information of the first special figure, and the hold information of the first unit hold display area Ga1 is It is assumed that the image HW1 for holding is displayed in a blue display mode HMb, and the holding image HW in the third unit holding display area Ga3 is displayed in a green display mode HMc.

The result of pre-reading the reservation information corresponding to the reservation image HW1 is a variation pattern 3H (outside SP reach A), and the result of pre-reading the reservation information corresponding to the reservation image HW2 is a variation pattern 6H (outside SPSP reach B). Note that the pre-reading result of the reservation information corresponding to the reservation image in the second unit reservation display area Ga2 is a variation pattern 1H (completely off).

If a power outage occurs in this state, the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and the display on the display screen G disappears. Thereafter, when the power outage state is resolved and the power is restored, the continuation of the game round (game round of the first special figure) that was interrupted when the power outage state occurred is resumed on the special figure display section 43.

In addition, the production control device 143 executes processing for restoring the display of the pending image based on the power recovery pending command transmitted from the main control device 162 (steps S6202 to S6205). At this time, for the hold image HW1 for which the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern 3H) corresponding to SP out-of-reach has been read in advance, its display mode is set to the normal display mode HMa, and the SPSP out-of-reach situation of a higher rank is handled. Regarding the hold image HW2 for which the variation pattern (variation pattern 6H) has been read in advance, its display mode is set to the second specific display mode (blue display mode HMb).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 91(b), the display mode of the pending image HW1 is set to the normal display mode HMa, and the display mode of the pending image HW2 is set to the blue display mode HMb, and each pending image The display will be restored. In other words, the pending image of the pending information corresponding to the out-of-reach performance below the predetermined ranking is displayed in the normal display mode HMa, regardless of whether it was displayed in the specific display mode before the power outage state occurred. , the reservation image of the reservation information corresponding to the reach performance of a predetermined rank or higher is displayed in a display mode that is limited to a predetermined or lower display mode (second specific display mode).

When the game round of the pending image HW2 is executed, the determination of promotion to a higher display mode is performed in the same way as in the case where the jackpot result is read in advance as explained with reference to FIG. 90. , the explanation is omitted.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be achieved.

If a power outage abnormality occurs in a situation where the target hold image HW is in a specific display mode (a situation where a hold notice effect is being executed), and the power is restored after the power outage abnormality is resolved, the power outage The configuration is such that the display mode of the target hold image HW after power restoration is set based on the result of the previously performed hold look-ahead process, and the hold preview effect is re-executed.

In this embodiment, since a hold preview effect is executed in which the display mode of the hold image is set to a specific display mode based on the result of the hold look-ahead process, the player is aware of the possibility of a jackpot result even before the start of the game round. can arouse a sense of expectation. Furthermore, since multiple types of specific display modes are set with different levels of jackpot expectation, it is possible to suggest different levels of expectation, which is advantageous in arousing players' sense of expectation. It can be configured as follows. Under such a configuration, if a power outage abnormality occurs during execution of a hold notice performance and then power is restored, the hold notice performance that was being performed before the abnormality occurred is re-executed. Thereby, it is possible to restore the suspended preview performance after the abnormality is resolved, and it is suppressed that the suspended preview performance disappears due to the occurrence of the abnormality. At this time, since the display mode of the target hold image HW is set based on the result of the hold look-ahead process before the occurrence of the abnormality, it becomes possible to suitably re-execute the hold preview effect after the power is restored.

By storing the validity results, variation patterns, etc. pre-read by the reservation pre-reading process in the reserved ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314, the configuration is such that information corresponding to the above-mentioned pre-read results can be retained even after the occurrence of a power outage state.

In the above configuration, when a power outage occurs, the information corresponding to the prefetch result is retained without being lost. Therefore, after the power is restored, the display mode of the target pending image HW is based on the information retained in the RAM 314. This makes it possible to suitably re-execute the suspended notice performance after the power is restored.

In the case of executing the hold preview performance after power restoration, the display mode of the target hold image HW is limited to a predetermined mode (green display mode HMc) or less.

For example, if there is a change in the reservation information stored in the reservation ball storage area 314b due to a power outage abnormality, the result of the reservation look-ahead performed before the power outage and the propriety of the game play after the power is restored will be displayed. An inconsistency occurs between the determination result and the selection result of the game rendition. In such a case, if the suspended notice performance indicates a high level of expectation before the power is cut off, and if it is re-executed after the power is restored, the notification result (result of the judgment) in the game round and the result in the game round will be different. There is a concern that the game performance to be performed will not match the level of expectation suggested by the pending notice performance, giving an unpleasant impression to the player. In this regard, in the above configuration, if the type of specific display mode that was being used at the time of the power outage is a mode that is higher than the predetermined level and suggests a certain degree of expectation, the display mode is limited to the lower display mode and the display is suspended. Rerun. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pending notice performance from suggesting an expectation level that does not match the notification results, etc. in the game round, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

When the display mode of the target pending image HW is limited to a display mode below a predetermined mode, it is determined whether or not to promote the display mode to a higher display mode in the game round of the target pending image HW, and the result is The configuration is such that the promotion is executed based on the following.

In the above configuration, even if the display mode of the target pending image HW is limited to a display mode below a predetermined display mode, promotion to a higher display mode is achieved by playing the game round of the target pending image HW. Therefore, the suggested level of expectation is prevented from remaining low.

In the above case, the configuration is such that the determination as to whether or not to promote the display mode to a higher-level display mode is made based on the result of the validity determination made at the timing of the game round and the selection result of the variable pattern.

In the above configuration, a determination is made as to whether or not to promote the display mode of the target pending image HW, using the results after power restoration regarding the validity determination and the selection of the game round effect as a determination material. Thereby, the promotion can be performed while being consistent with the notification results etc. that are actually carried out in the game round after the power is restored.

After the power is restored, if the result of the pending prefetch process performed before the power outage cannot be specified, the display mode of the target pending image HW is set to the normal display mode HMa.

For example, if it is not possible to determine the result of the pending prefetching process that was performed for some pending images before the power outage, if the display of those pending images itself is canceled, the number of pending images cannot be properly notified to players. There are concerns that it will disappear. In addition, when re-executing the hold preview effect using a hold image for which the result of the hold look-ahead process can be specified (the display mode of the hold image is set to a specific display mode), if the hold preview effect cannot be specified for the hold look-ahead process, If the image display is missing, the order of the reserved image set as a specific display mode and the game round may be out of sync, and there is a risk that the expectation level may be suggested by corresponding to a different game round. . In this regard, in this configuration, a holding image in which the result of the holding look-ahead processing performed before the power outage can be specified is distinguished from a holding image in which the result cannot be specified, and the display mode for the latter is redisplayed as the normal display mode HMa. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the player of the number of reservations and to suitably perform a reservation notice effect in other reservation images.

When the power is restored from a power outage state, the main control device 162 outputs a hold command when the power is restored to the production control device 143, and based on the reception of the hold command when the power is restored in the production control device 143, the pending notice performance is restarted. The configuration is configured to execute setting processing (display mode setting processing) for execution.

In this case, when the power outage is resolved and the power is restored, the pending notice performance can be promptly re-executed. As a result, if a power outage occurs in the middle of a game and there is a period in which symbol fluctuations are not displayed on display screen G after the power is restored, a suspended notice performance will be performed prior to the restoration of the symbol fluctuation display. can be re-executed.

<Eighth embodiment>
This embodiment is configured to restrict switching of the production mode when the hold image is displayed in a specific display mode. This embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. Note that in these figures, the same components as in each of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and their explanations will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, the production mode was configured to be switched by manual operation, but in this embodiment, the production mode can be automatically switched without operating the production operation section 36. It is configured as follows. It should be noted that the production mode includes production mode A and production mode B, and these are different in the frequency of occurrence of pending preview production, similar to the first embodiment. Specifically, performance mode A functions as a mode in which the pending preview performance is likely to be executed and it is easy to enjoy the performance, and performance mode B functions as a mode in which the pending preview performance is difficult to execute, but it is possible to win a jackpot if it is executed. It is configured to function as a high expectation mode.

<Processing for switching production mode>
The production mode switching process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 92. This process is executed in step S1307 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30), and is executed in place of the effect mode switching process of FIG. 42.

First, in step S7101, it is determined whether it is the lottery timing for switching the production mode. In this embodiment, a period in which the game is in a predetermined state (for example, a state in which the game is in a normal gaming state and in which a performance that spans multiple game rounds such as a continuous performance is not performed) is set as the effective period for switching the performance mode. , During the switching validity period, the production mode switching lottery is performed at a predetermined timing in each game round (for example, the start timing of the game round). In this step, it is determined whether it is the timing to execute the switching lottery. If it is not the lottery timing for switching the performance mode, the process for switching the performance mode is directly ended in order to maintain the current performance mode.

If it is the lottery timing for switching the production mode, the process advances to step S7102, and a first mode switching lottery is executed to perform a lottery for executing production mode switching. In this step, the lottery is performed based on the lottery counters (random numbers) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344 and the first mode switching lottery table stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. The first mode switching lottery table is a lottery table for determining whether or not to switch the production mode. Note that this table may have a common winning probability regardless of the type of performance mode in which the user is staying, or may have a winning probability that varies depending on the performance mode in which the player is staying.

In step S7103, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S7102 is a winning result. If the lottery result is a losing result, the production mode switching process is directly ended in order to maintain the current production mode.

If the lottery result is a winning result, the process advances to step S7104 and mode switching determination processing is executed. The mode switching determination process is for determining whether or not to allow switching of the production mode. Here, the mode switching determination process in step S7104 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 93.

First, in step S7201, the current number of pending items is determined by referring to the pending storage area 344c of the RAM 344. In step S7202, it is determined whether the number of pending items determined in step S7201 is zero. If the number of pending items is 0, it is determined in step S7203 that the production mode switching is allowed, and then the mode switching determination process is ended.

If the number of pending images is not 0, the current display mode of each pending image is determined in step S7204. In the subsequent step S7205, the pending display displayed in a specific display mode (one of the blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, or rainbow color display mode HMe) based on the grasp result of step S7204 Determine whether the image exists. If there is no pending image in the specific display mode, the process advances to step S7203, and it is determined that the production mode switching is allowed.

If there is a pending image in the specific display mode, it is determined in step S7206 whether the current mode switching is from production mode A to production mode B. In other words, whether or not the switching is from a performance mode with a high occurrence frequency of pending preview performances to a performance mode with a low occurrence frequency (in other words, a switch from a performance mode with a low jackpot expectation level of pending preview performances to a high side. (Whether or not it is switching to production mode.)

In the case of switching to production mode B, the process advances to step S7207, and it is determined whether the pre-read result for the reservation information of the reservation image displayed in the specific display mode is a jackpot result. If the pre-reading result is not a jackpot result, it is determined in step S7208 that the effect mode switching is not permitted, and thereafter, the mode switching determination process is ended. In general, in a win/fail judgment, the probability of winning is much higher than the winning probability (probability of jackpot), and most of the results of pending look-ahead are incorrect, so most of the judgment results in step S7207 above are negative. This means that switching the production mode will not be allowed. That is, in the case of switching to production mode B, in a situation where a pending image of a specific display mode exists, switching of production modes is basically not allowed and is restricted.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7207 (if the pre-reading result is a jackpot result), the process proceeds to step S7209, and a second mode switching lottery is executed to perform a mode switching re-lottery. In this step, the lottery is performed based on the lottery counters (random numbers) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344 and the second mode switching lottery table stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. The second mode switching lottery table, like the first mode switching lottery table, is a lottery table for determining whether or not to switch the production mode. The winning probability in the second mode switching lottery table may be the same as or different from the winning probability in the first mode switching lottery table.

In step S7210, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S7209 is a winning result. If the lottery result is a losing result, the process advances to step S7208, and it is determined that the production mode switching is not permitted.

If the lottery result is a winning result, the process advances to step S7203, and it is determined that the performance mode switching is allowed. That is, in some cases where the pre-reading result is a jackpot result, switching of the performance mode is exceptionally allowed even in a situation where a pending image of a specific display mode is displayed.

As already explained, in a situation where there is a pending image in a specific display mode and there is no pre-reading pending jackpot, switching the production mode is not allowed, and even if there is a pre-reading pending jackpot. If the second mode switching lottery is also unsuccessful, switching of the performance mode is not allowed. That is, it is a rare case that switching of performance modes is allowed in a situation where a reserved image of a specific display mode exists, so the player recognizes that the rules are broken and the performance is guaranteed to be a jackpot.

If a negative determination is made in step S7206 above (if the switching is from production mode B to production mode A), that is, if the switching is from a production mode with a lower occurrence frequency of pending notice production to a production mode with a higher occurrence frequency. (In other words, when switching from a production mode with a high jackpot expectation level to a production mode with a low jackpot expectation level of the pending preview production), in step S7211, the pending image displayed in the specific display mode is It is determined whether the display mode is equal to or higher than a predetermined mode (for example, green display mode HMc).

If the display mode is a mode lower than the predetermined mode (for example, blue display mode HMb), the process advances to step S7203, and it is determined that the effect mode switching is allowed. In other words, in the case of switching to production mode A, even if a pending image of a specific display mode is displayed, switching of the production mode is permitted as long as the display mode is lower than the predetermined display mode. . In this case, the production mode is switched while the specific display mode of the pending image is maintained. Note that when the form of the holding image changes depending on the production mode, the form is changed and its display color is set to the same display color as before the mode switching.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7211 above (if the display mode is the predetermined mode or higher), then in step S7207, for the pending image whose display mode is the predetermined mode or higher, the result of pre-reading the pending information is the jackpot result. Determine whether or not. Thereafter, the processes of steps S7208 to S7210 are executed, and the switching of the production mode is permitted on the condition that the second mode switching lottery is won.

Returning to the explanation of the production mode switching process (FIG. 92), after executing the mode switching determination process in step S7104, it is determined in step S7105 whether the result of the determination process in step S7104 allows mode switching. Determine whether or not. If the result is that the mode switching is not permitted, the production mode switching process is directly ended in order to maintain the current production mode.

If the result is that mode switching is permitted, the process advances to step S7106, and a switching process for switching the production mode is executed. For example, if the current performance mode is performance mode A, the performance data is set so as to switch to performance mode B. Note that the switching of the performance mode may be performed at the start timing of the game round, or may be performed during the game round.

In step S7107, the production mode flag corresponding to the production mode after switching is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344, and then the production mode switching process is ended.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second execution process of the pending notice in step S1702 in the shift command response process (FIG. 40) and the third execution process in step S1808 in the special figure variation display process (FIG. 41) , processing associated with them is not executed.

<About production mode switching restrictions>
A manner of restricting switching of the production mode will be explained with reference to FIG. 94. First, the case of switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B will be described with reference to FIG. 94(a).

When it is time to switch the performance mode, if there is no hold, or if there is no hold image in a specific display mode even if there is hold, the change of the performance mode is allowed.

If there is a pending image in a specific display mode, switching of the production mode is basically not allowed. In other words, from production mode A in which the frequency of occurrence of pending notice performances is relatively high (a production mode in which the jackpot expectation level of pending notice performances is relatively low) to production mode B in which the occurrence frequency of pending notice performances is relatively low (a production mode in which the jackpot expectation level of pending notice performances is relatively low). When switching to a production mode (high performance mode), switching of the production mode is restricted on the condition that a pending image of a specific display mode exists.

However, even if there is a pending image in a specific display mode, if there is one in which the jackpot result has been read in advance, switching of the production mode is allowed as an exception. In this case, as already explained, the performance will be such that a jackpot is guaranteed due to the contradiction in the performance. In addition, when there is pending information in which the jackpot result is pre-read, and the display mode is the normal display mode HMa, it is assumed that there is no pending image in the specific display mode and switching of the performance mode is allowed.

Next, the case of switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A will be described with reference to FIG. 94(b).

When it is time to switch the production mode, if there is no hold, or if there is no hold image in a specific display mode even if there is a hold, the same as when switching from production mode A to production mode B, Switching of production modes is allowed.

If there is a pending image in a specific display mode, whether or not mode switching is allowed depends on the display mode. Specifically, when the display mode of the pending image displayed in the specific display mode is a display mode lower than the predetermined display mode (blue display mode HMb), switching of the production mode is allowed. In other words, from production mode B in which the frequency of occurrence of pending preview performances is relatively low (a production mode in which the jackpot expectation level of pending preview performances is relatively high) to production mode A (a production mode in which the jackpot expectation level of pending preview performances is relatively high). When switching to a production mode with a lower level of performance), the switching restrictions are more relaxed than when the opposite is true. In this case, the display mode for the pending picture is not changed to the normal display mode HMa, and the specific display mode before the mode switching is maintained.

On the other hand, if the display mode of the pending image is a display mode higher than the predetermined display mode, switching of the performance mode is not allowed unless there is a pre-read jackpot result. In other words, when the player is informed of a certain level of expectation through the pending advance notice performance, switching of the performance mode is restricted.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be achieved.

The system is configured to restrict switching of the performance mode when a hold preview effect is being executed in which the display mode of the hold image is set to a specific display mode.

In this embodiment, since a hold preview effect is executed in which the display mode of the hold image is set to a specific display mode based on the result of the hold look-ahead process, the player is aware of the possibility of a jackpot result even before the start of the game round. can arouse a sense of expectation. Furthermore, since mode switching is performed between performance mode A and performance mode B, it is possible to change the player's mood during the game and prevent him from getting bored with the game. In such a configuration, for example, if the production mode is switched while the pending preview performance is being executed, the attention to the pending preview performance may decrease due to being distracted by the change of the production mode, or conversely, the performance mode may be switched while the pending preview performance is being executed. As a result of concentrated concentration, there is a concern that the performance mode may be changed without the player noticing, causing confusion.

In this regard, in this configuration, since switching of the production mode is restricted when the pending preview performance is being executed, it is possible to suppress the execution of the pending preview performance and the switching of the performance mode from overlapping. As a result, the execution of the pending notice performance and the switching of the performance mode can be carried out in such a way that it is easy for the player to pay attention to each of them, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience. In addition, if the production mode after switching is not suitable for the pending preview production in progress, advance adjustment is required to make both compatible when designing the production, but with this configuration, such adjustment is not possible. There is also the advantage that it becomes unnecessary and the burden at the time of design can be reduced.

The performance mode A and the performance mode B are configured to have different ease of execution of the pending notice performance.

In such a configuration, switching the production mode changes the production characteristics related to the expectation of jackpot, so compared to cases where the change is limited to only the appearance by changing the background image or character image, the difference between the production modes is more noticeable in the game. can make a strong impression on people. However, on the other hand, if the performance mode is switched while the pending preview performance is being executed, there is a risk that the level of expectation suggested by the pending preview performance will be different before and after switching the performance mode. In this case, there is a concern that in the performance mode after switching, the level of expectation suggested by the pending advance notice performance and the actually notified result of the propriety determination will be different, giving an unpleasant impression to the player. By applying the present embodiment (a configuration that restricts switching of production modes when a pending preview production is in progress) to such a configuration, the occurrence of the above-mentioned discrepancy can be avoided and the player will not be uncomfortable. It becomes possible to suitably suppress giving an impression.

The performance mode B is a performance mode in which the pending preview performance is more difficult to be executed than the performance mode A, and is configured to restrict switching to the performance mode B when the pending preview performance is executed in the performance mode A.

If the ease of execution of the pending notice performance in production mode B is lower than that in production mode A, if you switch from production mode A to production mode B while the pending notice production is still being executed, the apparent expectation level will increase. Therefore, there is a concern that players may have higher expectations than they actually have. In this regard, in this configuration, it is difficult to execute the pending notice performance from production mode A in which the pending notice performance is likely to be executed (the expectation level corresponding to the specific notification is relatively low). When switching to production mode B (highly expected), if a pending preview production is in progress, the execution of the switch is restricted, so it is possible to suitably suppress the suggestion of a higher level of expectation than the actual level. become.

If a pending preview performance is being executed in production mode A, switching to production mode B is basically restricted, but as an exception if the pending preview performance that triggered the pending preview performance is a jackpot result. The configuration allows switching to production mode B.

In this case, even though the switching of production modes is not normally performed, the switching occurs, which breaks the rules from the player's perspective, and can suggest a jackpot. In other words, it becomes possible to utilize the switching of the presentation mode as one of the presentations suggesting the degree of expectation.

If the conditions for switching to production mode A are met when a pending preview production is being executed in production mode B, whether to restrict switching to production mode A depending on the type of specific display mode when the switching condition is met. The configuration is such that the results are different.

If a configuration that uniformly restricts the switching of production modes when a pending preview performance is being executed, there is a risk that the switching of production modes may be excessively restricted or the execution frequency of the pending preview performance may be suppressed. , there is a concern that the significance of providing multiple types of presentation modes and the significance of having a function to execute a pending notice presentation will be diminished. In this regard, in this configuration, when switching from production mode B, which has a high expectation level and corresponds to a pending notice performance, to production mode A, which has a low expectation level, and which corresponds to a pending notice performance, the restrictions on mode switching are relaxed, and the switching Switching is permitted on the condition that the specific display mode when the condition is satisfied is equal to or less than a predetermined mode (green display mode HMc). For this reason, it is possible to prevent switching of production modes and execution of a pending notice production from being excessively restricted, and it is possible to suitably secure such opportunities.

<Ninth embodiment>
In this embodiment, execution of the pending notice performance is restricted when the performance mode is switched. This embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 95 to 99. Note that, in these figures, the same components as in each of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, switching guidance notification is performed during the effective period for switching the performance mode, and when the player operates the performance operation unit 36 while the notification is being performed, the performance mode will be switched from the next game round. It is configured as follows. Here, an example of such mode switching will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 95(a), a switching guide image 451 as a switching guide notification is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 in a predetermined game time during the effect mode switching period. This switching guide image 451 is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, until the end of the game).

In FIG. 95(a), as a display example of the switching guide image 451, a text message such as "Press the production button will switch the production mode" is displayed as a caption above the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G. It shows. Note that the switching guidance notification is not limited to this, and may also include displaying a window in which the above characters are displayed, or causing a predetermined light emitting unit to emit light corresponding to the switching guidance. . Further, the notification is not necessarily limited to visual notification, but may be audio guidance using the speaker unit 29.

In such a state, when the player performs a predetermined operation using the performance operation section 36, a switching standby notification is performed. The switching standby notification is for notifying that the switching of the production mode is on standby. The specific form of the switching standby notification is not particularly limited, but for example, as shown in FIG. One that displays an image 452 is conceivable.

When the game round in which the switching standby image 452 was displayed ends and the game moves on to the next playing round, as shown in FIG. 95(c), the display of the switching standby image 452 is erased and the production mode is switched. .

Furthermore, if the performance operation unit 36 is not operated by the player during the display period of the switching guide image 451 in FIG. The production mode is maintained.

It should be noted that the production mode includes production mode A and production mode B, and these are different in the frequency of occurrence of pending preview production, similar to the first embodiment. Specifically, performance mode A functions as a mode in which the pending preview performance is likely to be executed and it is easy to enjoy the performance, and performance mode B functions as a mode in which the pending preview performance is difficult to execute, but it is possible to win a jackpot if it is executed. It is configured to function as a high expectation mode.

<Processing for switching production mode>
The production mode switching process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 96. This process is executed in step S1307 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30), and is executed in place of the effect mode switching process of FIG. 42.

First, in step S8101, it is determined whether or not the effect mode switching is valid. In this embodiment as well, similarly to the eighth embodiment, a predetermined state (for example, a normal gaming state and a state in which a performance such as a continuous performance or the like that is performed over a plurality of game rounds is not performed) A certain period is set as the effective period for switching the production mode. If the effect mode switching is not within the valid period, the effect mode switching process is ended to maintain the current effect mode.

If the effect mode switching is still valid, the process advances to step S8102, and it is determined whether a switching standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. The switching standby flag is for the MPU 342 to understand that it is in a state of waiting for mode switching, in other words, that the production mode will be switched afterwards.

If the switching standby flag is not stored, that is, if the mode is not in a standby state for switching, the process advances to step S8103, and it is determined whether a guide display flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. The guidance notification flag is for the MPU 342 to grasp that switching guidance notification is being executed.

If the guidance notification flag is not stored, that is, if the switching guidance notification is not being executed, the process advances to step S8104, and it is determined whether it is the timing to execute the switching guidance notification execution lottery. The execution lottery for switching guidance notification is a process for determining whether or not to execute the switching guidance notification. Although the lottery timing of the switching guidance notification is not particularly limited, in this embodiment, the start timing of the game round is set to the above-mentioned lottery timing. If it is not the lottery timing, the production mode switching process is immediately ended.

If it is the lottery timing, the process advances to step S8105, and a lottery for executing switching guidance notification is performed. In this step, the lottery is performed based on the lottery counters (random numbers) acquired from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344 and the switching guide lottery table stored in the various table storage areas 343a of the ROM 343. In step S8106, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S8105 is a winning result. If the lottery result is a losing result, the process for switching the production mode is ended so that the switching guidance notification is not executed.

If the lottery result is a winning result, the process advances to step S8107, and the display control device 350 is controlled to display the switching guidance image 451 as switching guidance notification. Specifically, a command to display the switching guide image 451 is set as a transmission command to the display control device 350. As a result, the switching guide image 451 is displayed on the display screen G. In step S8108, a guide notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 344d, and then the production mode switching process is ended.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S8103 above (if the guidance notification flag is stored), that is, if the switching guidance notification is being executed, the process advances to step S8109, and the production mode is switched using the production operation unit 36. It is determined whether a predetermined operation has been performed. If the predetermined operation has been performed, the process advances to step S8110, and the guidance notification flags stored in the various flag storage areas 344d are deleted.

In step S8111, a switching standby flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d. This causes the device to enter a standby state for mode switching. In step S8112, the display control device 350 is controlled to display the switching standby image 452 as a switching standby notification. Specifically, a command to display the switching standby image 452 is set as a transmission command to the display control device 350. As a result, a switching standby image 452 is displayed on the display screen G. After executing step S8112, the production mode switching process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S8109 (the predetermined operation has not been performed), the process advances to step S8113, and it is determined whether the display period of the switching guidance image 451 (the notification period of the switching guidance notification) has elapsed. If the display period has not elapsed, the production mode switching process is ended to continue displaying the switching guide image 451.

If the display period has elapsed, the process advances to step S8114, and the guidance notification flags stored in the various flag storage areas 344d are deleted. As a result, the period for accepting production mode switching operations ends. Furthermore, in step S8114, the display control device 350 is controlled to erase the switching guide image 451. After executing step S8114, the production mode switching process ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in the above step S8102 (if the switching standby flag is stored), that is, if the mode is in a standby state for mode switching, the process advances to step S8115, and it is determined whether it is the timing to execute mode switching. . The timing of switching the performance mode is not particularly limited as long as it is the timing after transition to the standby state, but in this embodiment, the timing of switching the production mode is the start of the next game round after the end of the game round in which the switching operation was performed. The timing is set to the above switching timing. If it is not the switching timing, the production mode switching process is ended to continue the mode switching standby state.

If it is the switching timing, the process advances to step S8116, and the switching standby flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d is deleted. This ends the mode switching standby state. In step S8117, switching processing for switching the production mode is executed. For example, if the current performance mode is performance mode A, the performance data is set so as to switch to performance mode B.

In step S8118, the production mode flag corresponding to the production mode after switching is set in the various flag storage areas 344d. In step S8119, a second setting process for pending notice is executed, and then the production mode switching process is ended. The second suspension notice setting process is to set execution of a suspension notice performance for suspension information generated during the standby period for mode switching. Details of the setting process will be described later.

<Pending command handling process>
The pending command handling process according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 97. This process is executed when a hold command is received from the main controller 162 (executed in step S1302 of the effect setting process (FIG. 30)), and is an alternative to the hold command corresponding process in FIG. It is something that is carried out. In FIG. 97, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. 31, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

In step S1402, after incrementing the value of the pending number counter (start pending memory number SN) provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344 by 1, the process proceeds to step S8201, and the switching standby flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 344d of the RAM 344. Determine whether or not is stored. If the switching standby flag is not stored, that is, if the mode is not in a mode switching standby state, the process advances to step S1403, and a setting process for pending notice (FIG. 34) is executed. In the setting process for pending notice, settings are made to execute a pending notice effect for the generated pending information.

If the switching standby flag is stored (mode switching standby state), the process advances to step S8202, and the display mode of the pending image corresponding to the generated pending information is set to the normal display mode HMa. That is, in the present embodiment, when new hold information is generated during the standby period for mode switching, execution of the hold preview performance triggered by the hold information is restricted.

Note that the pre-reading of the pending information is performed in the pending pre-reading process (FIG. 26) of the main controller 162, similarly to other pending information. Therefore, although the production control device 143 does not execute the setting process for pending notice in step S1403 and forcibly sets the display mode of the pending image to the normal display mode HMa, the pre-reading results of fluctuation patterns etc. are controlled by the main control. The state is obtained by a hold command from the device 162.

In step S8203, standby occurrence information indicating that the hold information has occurred during the standby period is stored in association with the generated hold information. This process is performed, for example, by storing the standby occurrence information in the first to fourth areas (FIG. 32) provided in the storage area 344c for reservation in the RAM 344. Therefore, when the shift process in step S1704 in the shift command response process (FIG. 40) is executed, the standby occurrence information is shifted to the lower area side along with the pending information (variation pattern information, etc.). As a result, even if the display area of the pending images is shifted by shift processing, it is possible to know which pending images have been generated during the standby period. Note that the standby occurrence information may be stored in a storage area other than the hold storage area 344c of the RAM 344 as long as it is possible to recognize which hold information is targeted.

After step S8203 is executed, in step S1405, processing for displaying the hold image on the hold display section 200 of the display screen G is executed. As described above, since the display mode is set to the normal display mode HMa in step S8202, the pending image of the pending information generated during the standby period is displayed in the normal display mode HMa.

<Second setting process for pending notice>
The second setting process for pending notice in step S8119 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 98. The second setting process for a pending notice is to set execution of a pending notice performance for pending information generated during a standby period for mode switching.

First, in step S8301, hold information generated during the standby period for mode switching is grasped. That is, based on the standby occurrence information, it is determined which of the hold information existing at that time is the hold information that has occurred during the standby period.

After executing the process in step S8301, the process in and after step S8302 is executed for the grasped pending occurrence during the waiting period. Note that many of the processes after step S8302 are similar to each process in the setting process for pending notice (FIG. 34), so common processes will be simplified and different processes will be explained in detail. .

In steps S8302 to S8304, the holding storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is referred to to understand the fluctuation pattern of the occurrence and holding during the waiting period, and to determine whether or not there is a jackpot win. In step S8305, the production mode after switching is grasped. For example, if the current mode switching is from production mode A to production mode B, production mode B is grasped as the production mode after switching.

In steps S8306 to S8308, a hold preview execution lottery table corresponding to the switched performance mode grasped in step S8305 is obtained, and a lottery for execution of the hold preview performance is performed. If the execution lottery is won, in steps S8309 to S8314, the final display mode of the pending image in the pending preview presentation is determined, and the presentation scenario is determined. At that time, if a different table is set for each production mode as the final display mode lottery table for drawing the final display mode or the production scenario lottery table for drawing the production scenario, the table is determined in step S8305. A table corresponding to the performance mode after switching is acquired and a lottery is performed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, for hold information generated during a standby period for mode switching, a hold preview effect is set (processing to set a display mode based on the pre-read result) when the standby state is released. At that time, although the occurrence hold during the standby period occurred during the production mode before switching, the lottery for execution of the pending notice production, the lottery for the final display mode, etc. are set for the production mode after switching. This is done by applying the specified conditions and corresponding to the production mode after switching.

In step S8315, a pending notice flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344, and then the second setting process for pending notice is ended. After the suspension notice flag is set in this way, the process for first execution of the suspension notice in step S1701 in the shift command response process (FIG. 38(a)) and the process for displaying special figure fluctuations (FIG. 41) In step S1807 of the first execution process of the pending notice, a process of changing the display mode of the pending image to a specific display mode is executed. That is, the suspension preview performance regarding the suspension information generated during the waiting period for mode switching is performed after the performance mode is switched.

<About the display mode of the hold image when the production mode is switched>
The display mode of the hold image when the production mode is switched will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 and 99. Here, a case where switching from production mode A to production mode B will be explained as an example.

If the lottery for executing the switching guidance notification is won during the validity period of the mode switching, the switching guidance image 451 is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, as shown in FIG. 95(a). In this state, when the player performs a mode switching operation using the production operation unit 36, the player shifts to a mode switching standby state (a state in which the player knows that a mode switching will be performed later), as shown in FIG. 99(a). A switching standby image 452 is displayed on the display screen G as shown in FIG. Note that the mode switching standby state ends when the mode switching timing (start timing of the next game round) comes.

If two pieces of new hold information are generated during the standby period, the main controller 162 executes the hold lookahead process (step S305) in the same way as for hold information generated outside the standby period, and Predict fluctuation patterns in information. In addition, the production control device 143 does not execute the setting process (step S1403) for the pending notice for each of the pending information, and changes the display mode of the corresponding pending images HW1 and HW2 to the normal display mode HMa. Set.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 99(b), the holding images HW1 and HW2 in the normal display mode HMa are displayed in the second unit holding display area Ga2 and the third unit holding display area Ga3 of the first holding display area Ga. Is displayed. The state in which the display mode of the pending images HW1 and HW2 is the normal display mode HMa continues at least until the standby state ends.

When the mode switching timing comes with the start of the next game round, the standby state for mode switching ends, and the performance mode is switched from performance mode A to performance mode B, as shown in FIG. 99(c). At this time, the production control device 143 executes a second setting process for reservation notice (step S8119) targeting the reservation information (retention images HW1, HW2) that occurred during the waiting period.

In the second setting process for the hold notice, various drawings for executing the hold notice performance (execution lottery for the hold notice performance, final display (Lotteries for various formats, drawings for performance scenarios, etc.) will be held. At that time, a lottery table set for production mode B, which is the production mode after switching, is used for those lottery selections.

Suppose that as a result of the second setting process for the hold notice, a result is drawn in which the hold preview effect is not executed for the hold image HW1, and the display mode is changed to the blue display mode HMb at the next shift timing for the hold image HW2. As shown in FIG. 99(d), when the holding image HW2 is shifted from the second unit holding display area Ga2 to the first unit holding display area Ga1, the display mode changes from the normal display mode HMa to the blue display mode HMb. will be changed to That is, a suspension notice effect triggered by suspension information generated during a waiting period for mode switching is executed after mode switching.

It should be noted that there is a case where the player wins the execution lottery for switching guidance notification while the suspension preview performance is being executed, and the switching guidance image 451 (FIG. 95(a)) is displayed while the suspension preview performance is being executed. In this case, the pending notice performance is not subject to execution restrictions, and the system shifts to a standby state while the pending notice performance is continued.

In addition, when hold information is generated from when the switching guide image 451 is displayed until the switching operation is performed (until the transition to the standby state), and the hold notice effect is executed using the hold information as a trigger. There is also. In other words, the hold image of the hold information acquired after the switching guide image 451 is displayed may transition to the standby state with the hold image in a specific display mode. In this case as well, the pending notice performance is not subject to execution restrictions, and the system shifts to a standby state while the pending notice performance continues.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be achieved.

In a configuration in which the production mode is switched to a standby state when the switching condition for the production mode is satisfied, and then the switching timing is reached, the display mode of the pending image is set to a specific display mode while the production mode is in the standby state. The system is configured to restrict the execution of preview effects.

In this embodiment, since a hold preview effect is executed in which the display mode of the hold image is set to a specific display mode based on the result of the hold look-ahead process, the player is aware of the possibility of a jackpot result even before the start of the game round. can arouse a sense of expectation. Furthermore, since mode switching is performed between performance mode A and performance mode B, it is possible to change the player's mood during the game and prevent him from getting bored with the game. In such a configuration, for example, if the production mode is switched while the pending preview performance is being executed, the attention to the pending preview performance may decrease due to being distracted by the change of the production mode, or conversely, the performance mode may be switched while the pending preview performance is being executed. As a result of concentrated concentration, there is a concern that the performance mode may be changed without the player noticing, causing confusion.

In this regard, according to the present configuration, in a state where it is known that the production mode will be switched later (standby state for mode switching), execution of the pending notice performance is restricted, so the production mode is changed while the pending notice performance is being executed. Switching can be suppressed. As a result, the execution of the pending notice performance and the switching of the performance mode can be carried out in such a way that it is easy for the player to pay attention to each of them, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience. In addition, if the production mode after switching is not suitable for the pending preview production in progress, advance adjustment is required to make both compatible when designing the production, but with this configuration, such adjustment is not possible. There is also the advantage that it becomes unnecessary and the burden at the time of design can be reduced.

The system is configured to restrict the execution of a hold notice performance for hold information acquired during a standby state.

With the above configuration, the range of special states subject to restrictions on the pending notice performance is widened, and execution of the pending notice performance can be prevented from being excessively restricted. In particular, if the hold information acquired after the switching guide image 451 is displayed and before the transition to the standby state is subject to the execution restriction of the hold preview effect, it is uncertain whether the change of the effect mode will actually be performed. Execution of the pending notice effect is restricted even for the pending information obtained in . In this case, if the player does not perform the switching operation and the production mode is not switched, the execution of the pending notice performance will be restricted for the pending information that did not need to be restricted. However, according to this configuration, it is possible to suppress such unnecessary restrictions.

The configuration is such that the execution of the pending notice performance is restricted regardless of the result of the pending pre-reading process.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to forcibly restrict the execution of the pending notice effect regardless of the result of the pending prefetching process. Thereby, it is possible to suitably suppress switching of the performance mode during execution of the pending notice performance. In addition, since the execution restriction of the pending notice performance is not affected by the result of the pending advance reading process, even if you are in the standby state (during the restriction period of the pending advance notice performance), the pending advance reading process will proceed in the same way as when you are not in the standby state. be able to. That is, since there is no need to change the configuration of the pending prefetch process, it is possible to restrict the execution of the pending preview performance during the standby state while suppressing the configuration from becoming complicated.

The performance mode A and the performance mode B are configured to have different ease of execution of the pending notice performance.

In such a configuration, switching the production mode changes the production characteristics related to the expectation of jackpot, so compared to cases where the change is limited to only the appearance by changing the background image or character image, the difference between the production modes is more noticeable in the game. can make a strong impression on people. However, on the other hand, if the performance mode is switched while the pending preview performance is being executed, there is a risk that the level of expectation suggested by the pending preview performance will be different before and after switching the performance mode. In this case, there is a concern that in the performance mode after switching, the level of expectation suggested by the pending advance notice performance and the actually notified result of the propriety determination will be different, giving an unpleasant impression to the player. By applying the present embodiment to such a configuration (a configuration that restricts execution of the pending notice performance in a standby state in which the production mode is being prepared for switching), the above-mentioned discrepancy can be avoided. , it is possible to suitably suppress giving an unpleasant impression to the player.

The performance mode B is a performance mode in which the pending preview performance is more difficult to be executed than the performance mode A, and is configured to restrict switching to the performance mode B when the pending preview performance is executed in the performance mode A.

If the ease of execution of the pending notice performance in production mode B is lower than that in production mode A, if you switch from production mode A to production mode B while the pending notice production is still being executed, the apparent expectation level will increase. Therefore, there is a concern that players may have higher expectations than they actually have. In this regard, in this configuration, it is difficult to execute the pending notice performance from production mode A in which the pending notice performance is likely to be executed (the expectation level corresponding to the specific notification is relatively low). When switching to production mode B (highly cost-effective), execution of the pending notice production is restricted if preparation for switching to the mode is in progress. Thereby, switching from performance mode A to performance mode B during execution of the pending notice performance is suppressed, and it becomes possible to suitably suppress the suggestion of a higher level of expectation than the actual level.

The system is configured to perform a hold notice performance corresponding to hold information acquired during a standby state after switching the performance mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent execution of a pending notice performance from being restricted for pending information acquired during the standby state, and not being able to suggest expectations.

In the above case, the system is configured to execute the hold preview performance after mode switching based on the result of the hold look-ahead process performed during the standby state (the hold look-ahead process when hold information is acquired). In this case, it is possible to execute the hold preview performance corresponding to the hold information acquired during the standby state without having to execute the hold look ahead process again after switching the performance mode. Thereby, the existing configuration can be used as is for the pending prefetch processing of the main control device 162, and the configuration can be prevented from becoming complicated.

After switching the performance mode, an execution lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to execute the suspension notice performance based on the reservation information acquired during the standby state, and the lottery conditions (winning probability, etc.) for the execution lottery are based on the information after switching. It is configured to apply conditions set in accordance with the production mode.

In the above configuration, when drawing a lottery to determine whether or not to execute a pending notice performance after switching the production mode, the lottery conditions (the lottery set corresponding to the production mode before switching) when the target pending information is acquired (condition), but the lottery conditions set in accordance with the production mode after switching are applied. Thereby, even if the hold information is acquired during the standby state (before switching of the performance mode), it is possible to perform a hold preview performance in correspondence with the performance mode after switching.

When hold information is acquired during the standby state, standby occurrence information indicating that the hold information was acquired during the standby state is stored in the hold storage area 344c of the RAM 344.

According to the above configuration, based on the standby occurrence information stored in the hold storage area 344c of the RAM 344, it can be determined after the standby state that the hold information was acquired during the standby state. Therefore, even if the hold information obtained before entering the standby state and the hold information obtained during the standby state are mixed after the end of the standby state, the hold information obtained during the standby state can be easily retrieved. can be specified. As a result, when performing a hold notice effect after switching modes, it is possible to distinguish between hold information acquired during the standby state and hold information that is not, and process only the hold information acquired during the standby state. It becomes possible to do this.

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the embodiments and modifications described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the number of reservation information based on winnings to the first operating port 62 is stored up to four pieces, but it may be less than four pieces (even one piece). ), or the number may be 5 or more. Further, the upper limit storage number of pending information based on winnings to the second operating port 63 may be less than 4 (or may be 1), or may be 5 or more. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the upper limit storage number of pending information based on winnings to each operating port 62, 63 is different.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, the reservation information based on winnings to the first operating port 62 and the second operating port 63 is distinguished, but it may be configured that they are not differentiated. In addition, the reservation information based on winnings to the second operating port 63 was configured to be subject to determination of validity with priority over the pending information based on winnings to the first operating port 62, but the relationship is reversed. There may also be a structure in which the winning/falsifying determination is made in the order of winning.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, only the game ball flowing down the right route can pass through the through gate 64 and the second operating port 63 or win a prize, but only the game ball flowing down the left route passes through. Alternatively, it may be configured so that prizes can be won, or it may be configured such that it is possible to pass through or win from either the right route or the left route. However, in order to add sharpness to the game, only game balls flowing down one of the right route and the left route can enter the first operating port 62, and only game balls flowing down the other of the right route and the left route can enter the prize through the through gate. 64, it is preferable that the second operating port 63 be configured to be able to pass through or win a prize.

(4) In each of the embodiments described above, by displaying the holding image on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, the holding notification was performed so that the player could recognize the number of holdings. The holding image may be displayed on a display unit other than the device 75, or the holding lamp parts (light emitting parts) provided in the number corresponding to the upper limit memory number are made to emit light, and the number of holding lamp parts that emit light is displayed. It may also be configured to notify the number of reservations. In the case where the hold lamp part is made to emit light, a hold notice effect is performed by setting the light emitting mode (for example, the light emitting color) to a specific light emitting mode different from the normal light emitting mode based on the result of the hold lookahead processing. be able to.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, when the result of the judgment becomes a jackpot, the transition to the jackpot game (opening/closing execution mode) is made. The result is a small winning result, and in a small winning game (a game state in which a variable winning device that has an internal V winning opening or a V winning opening and a winning opening is opened and closed), the game ball hits the V winning opening (V winning sensor). It may be configured to shift to a jackpot game when it passes (when the result of the award determination becomes a predetermined result and a predetermined game result).

In addition, in the present invention, "a privilege can be granted to the player based on the result of grant support" and "a transition to a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of grant support" It can be understood that "let the player win" includes the case where the result of the win/fail determination becomes a small win result and the game progresses to a jackpot game via a V win, as described above.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, as a specific notification, a hold preview effect is executed in which the display mode of the hold image is a specific display mode. The structure of each embodiment may be applied to a game round performance (so-called continuous preview performance or look-ahead zone performance) that is executed over a plurality of game rounds based on the results of the above.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, an effect that spans game rounds is executed as a specific notification, but the specific notification does not necessarily need to span game rounds, but may be performed within a single game round. There may be. For example, in the first embodiment, it is assumed that the production mode will be switched multiple times during a game. In this case, the performance that is performed during one game round does not necessarily have to be triggered by the result of the pending prefetching process, but is based on the result of the validity judgment etc. performed at the start of the game round. It may be.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the symbols displayed variably on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 are scrolled in the horizontal direction, but the symbols are displayed side by side on the left, middle and right. It may also be configured such that the symbols are scrolled in the vertical direction and displayed in a variable manner. That is, the direction in which the symbols are arranged and the direction in which the symbols are scrolled are not particularly limited. Further, the number of symbols (the number of symbol rows) is not limited to three, and may be two or four or more.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the execution display area D is provided to notify the player of the execution of a game that has been put on hold, but the execution display area D may not be provided. good.

(10) In each of the above-described embodiments, when executing a hold notice effect, the effect scenario is set including the notification period in the execution display area D. A configuration may be adopted in which a performance scenario is set for a period before being displayed (a period during which the game round of the target holding image HW is on hold).

(11) In each of the above-described embodiments, when executing a pending preview performance, settings are performed in stages such as determining the final display mode of the pending image and then setting the performance scenario. A configuration may also be adopted in which the final display mode and production scenario are set in the process. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which both the final display mode and the production scenario are determined using one table.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, when notifying the performance control device 143 of the result of the pending prefetch process executed by the main control device 162, the information on the fluctuation pattern is transmitted, but the data capacity of the transmission command is In order to suppress the increase in size, a configuration is adopted in which predetermined information with a smaller amount of data than the fluctuation pattern (an identifier corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, rank information when the fluctuation pattern is ranked according to the degree of expectation, etc.) is transmitted. Good too. This also applies to the power recovery hold command and the like in the sixth embodiment.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, the game run performance (performance pattern) is determined based on the fluctuation pattern, but the game run performance may be determined based on the values of the fluctuation type counter CS or the jackpot random number counter C1. good. In this case, the main control device 162 does not execute the reservation prefetching process, and the production control device 143 executes the reservation command based on the reservation command (information indicating the values of the fluctuation type counter CS and the jackpot random number counter C1) from the main control device 162. It is preferable to adopt a configuration that executes a pending pre-reading process (a process of pre-reading the result of the validity judgment and the game performance).

(14) In each of the above embodiments, the mode of the pending notice performance (the display mode of the pending image) is set based on the fluctuation pattern specified by the pending prefetching process. It may also be configured such that the performance pattern (game performance) is read in advance based on the information of the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern specified by the reservation pre-reading process) transmitted from the system, and the mode of the reservation notice performance is set based on the result. . Such a configuration is particularly effective, for example, when a plurality of types of performance patterns (game performance) correspond to one variation pattern.

(15) In the first to fourth and sixth to ninth embodiments described above, the suspension look-ahead processing is performed by the main control device 162, but it may also be performed by the production control device 143 or the display control device 350. good. When the performance control device 143 executes the pending prefetching process, as in the fifth embodiment, information corresponding to the values (obtained random numbers) of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the fluctuation type counter CS is sent from the main control device 162. It is preferable to have a configuration in which the performance control device 143 transmits the results to the performance control device 143 and pre-reads the results of the validity determination, the lottery results of the fluctuating patterns, and the like. Further, in the fifth embodiment, the main controller 162 may perform at least one of the first pending prefetching process and the second pending prefetching process.

(16) In the first to fifth embodiments described above, the display mode of the target pending image HW is returned to the original specific display mode and then promoted to a higher display mode. A configuration may be adopted in which the display mode is promoted to a higher display mode without returning to the display mode. In addition, as a configuration in which both the case of returning to the original specific display mode and then promoting to a higher display mode, and the case of promoting to a higher display mode without returning to the original specific display mode, good.

(17) In the first to fifth embodiments described above, when the display mode of the target pending image HW is restored to the original specific display mode, the display mode of the target pending image HW is restored in stages. Although the configuration has been described in which this occurs, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the gradual return mode does not occur. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which the display mode is uniformly changed once to return to the original specific display mode.

(18) In the first to fifth embodiments described above, the return scenario is set including the display period in the execution display area D, but the first hold display area Ga or the second hold display area Gb is A configuration may be adopted in which the return scenario is set only for the display period (without including the display period in the execution display area D).

(19) In the first to fifth embodiments described above, a configuration may be adopted in which the promotion process of the target pending image HW is not performed.

(20) In the first to fifth embodiments described above, the original specific display is performed during the period (holding period) in which the target holding image HW is displayed in the first holding display area Ga or the second holding display area Gb. Although the above-mentioned suspension period It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which promotion can be performed in the following manner. When performing promotion processing before the start of a game round, instead of using the fluctuation start command sent from the main controller 162 at the start of fluctuation, the reservation prefetch processing performed on the target reservation image HW (reservation information) is used. Please refer to the results.

(21) In the first to fifth embodiments described above, when promoting the target pending image HW to a higher display mode in a game round, the variation start command sent from the main controller 162 at the time of starting the variation is Although the configuration is referred to, the promotion may be performed based on the result of the reservation prefetch process performed on the target reservation image HW (reservation information).

(22) In the first to third embodiments described above, the production mode is switched by the player's operation (manually), but as in the eighth embodiment, the production mode is not changed by the player's operation. It may also be configured such that the production mode is automatically switched.

(23) In the first to third embodiments, the production mode is switched during the game round, but the production mode may be switched via the opening/closing execution mode (jackpot game). For example, for a configuration where a plurality of performance modes are set as performance modes for a high-precision gaming state, and the player can select which performance mode to play in in the opening/closing execution mode immediately before that. , the configurations according to the first to third embodiments may be applied.

For example, when applying the configuration according to the first embodiment, the following configuration can be adopted. In the performance mode A during the high-probability gaming state, the display mode of the target pending image HW is set to a specific display mode, and the game cycle of the pending information before the target pending image HW results in a guaranteed jackpot and shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. However, if production mode B, which is different from production mode A, is selected during the opening/closing execution mode, the display mode of the target holding image HW is normally displayed in production mode B (high-precision gaming state) after the opening/closing execution mode. The mode is set to HMa. Then, in the game game of the reservation information before the target reservation image HW, it becomes a probability-variable jackpot again and shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, and if production mode A is selected during the opening/closing execution mode, after the opening/closing execution mode In production mode A (high-precision gaming state), the display mode of the target pending image HW is set to the original specific display mode.

Note that the above configuration is not limited to the case where the production mode is switched by the player's operation (manually), but may be configured such that the production mode is automatically switched without the player's operation.

(24) In the first to third embodiments described above, the susceptibility to execution (execution probability) of the pending notice performance is different in production mode A and production mode B, but in these production modes, the pending notice production It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the ease of execution is the same.

(25) In the first to third embodiments described above, the configuration includes two types of performance modes, performance mode A and performance mode B, as the plurality of types of performance states, but the configuration includes three or more types of performance modes. You can also use it as In this case, for example, in a configuration that has three or more types of performance modes, such as performance mode A to performance mode C, it may be difficult to execute the pending preview performance in the order of performance mode A > performance mode B > performance mode C, etc. It may be possible to have a configuration in which the ease with which the pending notice performance is executed is different between the production modes, or in which the ease with which the pending notice performance is executed is the same in production modes A to C. Mode A and production mode C have the same ease of execution of the pending notice performance, but production mode B has the same ease of execution of the pending notice performance; It is also possible to have a configuration in which production modes with different ease of execution coexist.

In addition, in a configuration where a production mode with the same ease of execution of a suspended notice production and a production mode with a different ease of execution coexist, it is difficult to switch between production modes with the same ease of execution. Similarly to the switching between different production modes, the display mode of the target retention image HW may be set to the normal display mode HMa when switching the production mode. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which switching between production modes that have the same ease of execution and switching between different production modes is not distinguished.

In addition, when switching between production modes that have the same ease of execution, unlike switching between different production modes, even when the production mode is switched, the normal display mode HMa is not changed, and the specific display before mode switching A configuration may be adopted in which the aspect is maintained. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which switching between performance modes that have the same ease of execution and switching between different performance modes are distinguished, and the pending preview performance is handled differently between the two.

(26) In the first to third embodiments described above, the configuration is such that the pending preview performance can be executed in the performance mode B in which the pending preview performance is difficult to be executed, but the configuration is such that the pending preview performance is not executed in the performance mode B. Good too. In other words, the "performance state in which specific notification is difficult to be performed" in the present invention is understood to include not only a performance mode in which the execution probability of the pending notice performance is low, but also a performance mode in which the pending notice performance is not executed. I can do it.

(27) In the first to third embodiments described above, by making the execution probabilities of the pending notice performance different when the pending information corresponds to a failure, the performance of the pending notice performance is executed in performance mode A and performance mode B. The probability of winning is different, but the execution probability of the reservation notice effect is different when the reservation information corresponds to a jackpot, and the execution probability is different when the reservation information corresponds to a miss and when it corresponds to a hit. In this way, the ease with which the pending notice performance is executed in these performance modes may be configured to be different.

(28) In the first to third embodiments described above, when the production mode is switched during execution of a pending preview production, the pending image displayed in the execution display area D is also changed to the normal display mode HMa. However, the first hold display area Ga and the second hold display area Gb are distinguished from the execution display area D, and the hold image displayed in the execution display area D is not changed to the normal display mode HMa. Good too.

(29) In the first to third embodiments described above, the execution of the change suggestion effect is restricted when the display mode of the target retention image HW is returned to the original specific display mode. It may also be configured to execute a dedicated performance (different from the change suggestion performance) corresponding to the change. By adopting such a configuration, the case where the display mode of the pending image is purely changed to a higher-level display mode and the case where the pending image is returned to the original specific display mode due to the restoration process can be handled easily. This can make it easier for people to identify.

(30) In the first embodiment, if the performance mode A shifts to the performance mode B while the pending preview performance is being executed, and then shifts to the performance mode A again (the source where the pending preview performance was being executed), The display mode of the target retention image HW is returned to the original specific display mode when the display mode is returned to the production mode of In a situation where the pending notice performance is being executed, the display mode of the target pending image HW is changed to the normal display mode HMa, and then the performance mode is changed before the game round of the target pending image HW ends. It may be configured such that when switching to C (a production mode different from production mode A), the original specific display mode is restored.

In the above case, the ease with which the pending notice performance is executed is the same in production mode A and production mode C, or the pending notice performance is more likely to be executed in production mode C than in production mode A (the degree of expectation for the pending notice production). It is preferable to use a production mode (low). However, the present invention is not limited to these, and the configuration may be such that the performance mode C is more difficult to execute the pending preview performance than the performance mode A. In this case, production mode C may be a production mode in which the pending notice production is more likely to be executed than production mode B, or may be a production mode in which it is less likely to be executed, or production mode C and execution of the pending notice production. It may be a production mode in which the ease of being played is the same. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the performance mode A, performance mode B, and performance mode C have the same ease of execution of the pending notice performance.

(31) In the first embodiment described above, there are two cases: when switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B while the pending notice presentation is being executed, and when switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A during the execution of the pending notice presentation. In both cases, the display mode of the target pending image HW is changed to the normal display mode HMa, but in the latter case, in other words, the display mode corresponding to the pending preview performance is changed from a high-expectation performance mode to a low-expectation performance mode. In the case of switching, the display mode of the target pending image HW may be maintained in the specific display mode (not changed to the normal display mode HMa).

(32) In the first embodiment, the performance mode A is switched to the performance mode B while the pending preview performance is being executed, and after that, the performance is switched before the game round of the pending information that triggered the pending preview performance ends. When switching to mode A, the display mode of the target hold image HW is configured to return to the original specific display mode, but the hold information that triggered the hold preview effect is displayed before the game round starts. When switching to mode A, the display mode of the target pending image HW may be returned to the original specific display mode. That is, when switching to production mode A after the game round of the reservation information that triggered the suspension notice performance has started, the display mode of the target suspension image HW may not be returned to the original specific display mode. .

(33) In the first embodiment described above, when the production mode A is switched from the production mode B to the production mode B during the execution of the pending preview production, and new pending information occurs while the production mode B is staying, the production In mode B, the suspension notice performance is not executed based on the suspension information, but by holding a lottery for execution of the suspension notice performance under the conditions set corresponding to production mode B, and winning the lottery. It may also be configured to execute a pending notice performance.

However, while the pending image that was in the specific display mode in production mode A before switching to production mode B is changed to the normal display mode HMa by switching to production mode B, the pending information that occurred in production mode B When a hold preview effect is performed for , it further aggravates the player's anxiety that the hold image (hold information) that was set as the normal display mode HMa may have been a big hit or even his expectations have disappeared. There are concerns. Additionally, if the performance mode is switched back to production mode A while a pending preview performance started in production mode B is being executed, there is a problem of how to handle the pending preview performance, and there is a concern that the process as a whole will become complicated. .

In this sense, as in the first embodiment, the state of staying in production mode B (in other words, the state of the target holding image HW that was set to the specific display mode in the previous production mode A) It is preferable to restrict the execution of a pending notice effect for newly generated pending information (in a state where the display mode is waiting for a return process to return the display mode to the original display mode). In addition, in the case where the performance mode A is switched to the performance mode B in a situation where the pending notice performance is not being executed, the execution of the pending notice performance triggered by the newly generated pending information in the performance mode B will not be restricted. It's okay.

(34) In the first embodiment, the number of reservations including the current reservation information is grasped in step S1508, but the configuration is such that the number of suspensions is grasped based on the reservation information earlier than the current suspension information. Good too.

(35) In the second embodiment, the target holding images HB1 and HB2 in the restricted state (images for holding the held information generated during the restricted state) are set as the normal display mode HMa, but the normal display mode HMa and A predetermined display mode (for example, a black display mode) different from any of the specific display modes may be used. In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the suspended notice performance is in a restricted state.In other words, the player can be made aware that there is a possibility that the display mode will be changed to a specific display mode when the restricted state ends. It becomes possible to inform.

(36) In the second embodiment, when switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B during execution of a pending notice presentation, that is, when transitioning to a restricted state of pending notice presentation, the state is in a restricted state. It is also possible to provide a notification that corresponds to this and is different from the hold image (for example, a predetermined display indicating that the restricted state is in effect).

(37) In the second embodiment, the display of the pending image may not be executed during the restriction state. More specifically, not only the holding image HA set in a specific display mode in presentation mode A and the holding images HB1 and HB2 of holding information generated in presentation mode B, but also all holding images including other holding images. The configuration may be such that the display is not executed.

In this case, in order to prevent the player from being unable to recognize the number of pending games, the number of pending games may be notified by a separate display such as a numeric display (notification of the number of pending games separate from the pending image). However, if the display suddenly switches to the above-mentioned separate display, it will be difficult for the player to understand, so for example, the number of reservations can be notified by both the reservation image and a separate display such as a number display, so that the number of reservations is notified while the reservation notice is being executed. When switching from production mode A to production mode B, it is preferable to configure such a configuration that only the display of the pending image is deleted in production mode B. In this case, in order to prevent the player from losing sight of the separate display, it is preferable not to change the display location of the separate display.

(38) In the above-mentioned second embodiment, the mode of the suspension notice effect triggered by the suspension information generated during the restriction state is configured to be set at the end of the restriction period (step S2702). You may set it, or you may set it after the limit period ends.

(39) In the second embodiment described above, when hold information is acquired during a restricted state, hold prefetch processing is executed, and after the restricted state ends, based on the result of the hold prefetch process performed during the restricted state. The configuration is such that the display mode of target hold images HB1 and HB2 is set, but the hold lookahead processing for the hold information acquired during the limit state is executed after the limit state, and based on the result, the display mode of the target hold images HB1 and HB2 is set. A configuration may also be adopted in which the display mode of the hold images HB1 and HB2 is set. At this time, the suspension prefetching process may be performed by the main control device 162 or by the production control device 143. Further, the suspension prefetching process when suspension information is acquired during the restriction state may not be executed or may be executed.

(40) In the third embodiment, when the performance mode A is switched to the performance mode B while the pending notice performance is being executed, the display mode is the same in the performance mode B as in the performance mode A. , in cases where the notification mode of the pending image is differentiated between production mode A and production mode B, it is not necessarily necessary to return to the same specific display mode, and the player recognizes that the display mode is of the same rank. The display mode may be changed to a display mode that allows the display mode to be changed. For example, in production mode A, the rankings are in the order of blue display mode HMb<green display mode HMc<red display mode HMd<rainbow display mode HMe, while in production mode B, yellow display mode<brown display mode In a configuration that is ranked in the order of <Purple display mode<Rainbow display mode, when the display mode of the target holding image HW is switched to the green display mode HMc, and the production mode A is switched to the production mode B. , the display mode of the target retention image HW in production mode B may be configured to be a brown display mode.

In addition, in a gaming machine that suggests the level of expectation by changing the pending image to a predetermined character image, if the character's costume, pose, facial expression, etc. are set to differ depending on the production mode, the target pending When switching from production mode A to production mode B while the image HW for use has been changed to a character image such as a costume corresponding to production mode A (a state in which a pending preview production is being executed), if production mode A is switched from production mode A to production mode B, the target image in production mode B While the hold image HW is restored to the same character image as in the production mode A, the costumes and the like may be made to correspond to the production mode B.

In short, it is sufficient that the player can recognize that the display mode of the target retention image HW in production mode B is the same as the display mode in production mode A. This also applies to the case where the display mode of the target pending image HW is promoted to a higher-level display mode in production mode B. That is, any display mode that can be recognized as a higher-ranking display mode from the perspective of the player may be used. In the above example, the display mode of the target pending image HW is set to a brown display mode, and then promoted to a purple display mode.

Note that the configuration in which the display mode of the target holding image HW is returned to the original specific display mode upon returning to the original production mode A in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, and In the fourth embodiment, when the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode and the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode are the same, the display mode of the target holding image HW after the opening/closing execution mode is the same as before the opening/closing execution mode. Configuration as a specific display mode, in the fifth embodiment, the specific display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is an upper limit display corresponding to a variation pattern specified by the second holding look ahead processing. In the case of the following aspects, a configuration in which the display aspect of the target holding image HW after the opening/closing execution mode is the same specific display aspect as before the opening/closing execution mode; Regarding the configuration in which the display mode of the target holding image HW is the same specific display mode as the display mode at the time of power outage, the display mode of the target holding image HW can be changed to a display mode that allows the player to recognize that the target holding image HW is of the same rank. This can be said to be a specific example of restoration.

(41) In the third embodiment, when the performance mode A is switched to the performance mode B during execution of the pending preview performance, the display mode of the target pending image HW is temporarily changed to the normal display mode HMa. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the display mode is not changed to the normal display mode HMa. That is, when the determination result is to display the equivalent display mode in production mode B (if an affirmative determination is made in step S3107), the display mode of the target pending image HW is not changed to the normal display mode HMa ( It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the appositional display mode is used (without executing the process in step S3110).

(42) In the third embodiment, when the determination result is that the display format of the peer is not displayed in the production mode B (when a negative determination is made in step S3107), the display format of the target pending image HW is Although the configuration is such that the normal display mode HMa is set, the display mode may be set to a specific display mode within a range that does not exceed actual expectations. Specifically, when the specific display mode of the target suspension image HW before switching to the production mode is a mode higher than the upper limit display mode set in the return determination table, the display mode is lower than or equal to the upper limit display mode. (A lower display mode than the specific display mode before switching to the production mode) may be used as the specific display mode.

(43) In the fourth to fifth embodiments, there are three types of gaming states: a normal gaming state, a high-probability gaming state, and a time-saving gaming state. For example, the normal gaming state and the high-probability gaming state The structure may include other than three types of game states, such as two types of game states. In other words, it suffices to have a plurality of types of gaming states.

(44) In the fourth and fifth embodiments described above, the display of the hold image is not executed during the opening/closing execution mode, but the hold image may be displayed. In this case, the display mode of the pending image during the opening/closing execution mode may be the normal display mode HMa, or the display mode may be a specific display mode before the opening/closing execution mode. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined display mode (for example, a black display mode) is different from both the normal display mode HMa and the specific display mode. In this case, the predetermined display mode may be one that does not correspond to the jackpot expectation level, etc. of each pending information (one that does not suggest the expectation level, etc.).

(45) In the fourth and fifth embodiments described above, the display of the hold image is resumed during the ending period, but the display of the hold image is resumed before the start of the ending period. Alternatively, the display of the pending image may be resumed after the ending period ends (for example, when the first game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends).

(46) In the fourth to fifth embodiments described above, the display mode of the target holding image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode, but the normal display mode It is also possible to display a specific display target without using the aspect HMa. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which the display of the pending image HW is restarted in a state where the display mode of the target pending image HW is set to the specific display mode.

(47) In the fourth to fifth embodiments, the applicable configuration is a configuration in which the game state (variable pattern table) is changed through the opening/closing execution mode in which a plurality of round games are executed. Although illustrated, it is also possible to apply a configuration in which the variable pattern table is changed through a small winning game (opening/closing execution mode in which one round game is executed). Note that changes to the variable pattern table are not limited to those triggered by the result of a win/fail determination or the opening/closing execution mode (game state in which the variable prize winning device 65 is opened/closed) being executed; for example, The determination may be performed based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition, such as the number of times the game has been played in which the result of the determination is incorrect has reached a predetermined number of times.

(48) In the fourth to fifth embodiments described above, even if the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the fluctuation type counter CS are the same, the results obtained by lottery differ. Although the example in which the gaming state is changed is illustrated, the above-mentioned difference may be caused by an event other than the opening/closing execution mode. Examples of such an event include, for example, the number of times the player has played a game with a wrong result in a win/fail determination, or the player has won some kind of lottery. In other words, what is the trigger is arbitrary; in short, it is sufficient that the above-mentioned difference occurs due to the occurrence of some event. Further, the above-mentioned difference is not limited to one caused by a change in the gaming state, but may be caused by a change in the production state that does not involve a change in the jackpot probability, for example.

(49) In the fourth embodiment, the display mode of the pending image is stored when the opening/closing execution mode is started, but the storage timing of the display mode is not particularly limited. For example, it may be configured to store the winning game time that triggers the opening/closing execution mode.

However, if the display mode of the pending image is gradually promoted in the pending preview performance, the display mode of the pending image may change during the execution of the winning game round, so the display mode may change. It is preferable to memorize the display mode after it has been determined, in other words, after the display mode has been restricted from changing. Specifically, it is preferable to store the information when the opening/closing execution mode is started (when the winning game round ends) as in the fourth embodiment.

(50) In the fourth embodiment, return determination and return process setting (step S3416) are performed during the ending period, but these processes may be performed after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Moreover, it may be performed after the start of the opening/closing execution mode and before the start of the ending period.

In addition, when performing each of the above-mentioned processes during the opening/closing execution mode, it is preferable to perform them during a period when the variable prize winning device 65 is in a closed state, such as an opening period, an ending period, or a round interval period. When the variable winning device 65 is in the open state in the opening/closing execution mode, the processing load is relatively high, such as the need to perform processing to perform a winning effect based on the occurrence of a winning to the variable winning device 65. It is assumed that there are. If such a period is used to determine return or set return processing, there is a concern that an even higher load will be caused. In this regard, by configuring the above-mentioned processes to be performed using the period during which the variable winning device 65 is in the closed state, it is possible to reduce the processing load.

(51) In the fourth embodiment, when the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is the normal gaming state and the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is the high certainty gaming state, the result of the pending prefetching process is normal. Although the display mode of the target pending image HW is restored when the result is a jackpot result, the jackpot result is pre-read by the pending pre-reading process regardless of whether it is a normal jackpot result or a variable jackpot result. In this case, the display mode of the target pending image HW may be restored.

(52) In the fifth embodiment, the acquired random numbers themselves such as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the fluctuation type counter CS are transmitted from the main control device 162 to the production control device 143, but the data of the transmission command In order to suppress an increase in capacity, a configuration may be adopted in which predetermined information (such as an identifier corresponding to a random number) whose data amount is smaller than those obtained random numbers is transmitted.

(53) In the fifth embodiment, the second pending prefetch process is performed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, but it may be configured to be performed after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Further, it may be configured to be performed while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed or before the opening/closing execution mode is started (the period from the start of the winning game round until the opening/closing execution mode is started).

(54) In the fifth embodiment, the variation pattern is pre-read in the first pending pre-reading process and the second pending pre-reading process, but it may also be configured to pre-read the performance pattern (game performance). Such a configuration is particularly effective, for example, when a plurality of types of performance patterns (game performance) correspond to one variation pattern.

(55) In the fifth embodiment, the upper limit display mode is set in correspondence with the fluctuation pattern in the upper limit display mode table, but the upper limit display mode may also be set in correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. good.

(56) In the fifth embodiment, even if the winning/failing result for the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 varies between the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode and the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode, the target pending image Although the display mode of the HW is set to the specific display mode after the opening/closing execution mode, it may be configured not to be set to the specific display mode. Specifically, if the result of the first pending pre-reading process is a jackpot and the result of the second pending pre-reading process is a loss, the display mode of the target pending image HW is changed to a specific display mode after the opening/closing execution mode. It is also possible to have a configuration in which this is not done.

(57) In the fifth embodiment, the specific display mode of the target pending image HW in the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode and the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern specified by the second pending pre-reading process are described. The configuration is such that the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the open/close execution mode is set based on the comparison result, but the above comparison is not performed (regardless of the display mode before the open/close execution mode). A configuration may be adopted in which the display mode is set based on the result of the second pending prefetch process.

(58) In the fifth embodiment, the specific display mode of the target pending image HW in the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is higher than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the second pending prefetching process. In the case of the upper mode, the display mode of the target holding image HW in the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode is set to the normal display mode HMa, but the specific display mode may be set within the range of actual expectations. May be set. Specifically, when the specific display mode of the target pending image HW in the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode is a higher mode than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern specified by the second pending pre-reading process. , the specific display mode may be set to a display mode below the upper limit display mode (a display mode lower than the specific display mode before the opening/closing execution mode).

(59) In the fifth embodiment, the second pending prefetching process is executed regardless of the difference between the gaming state before the opening/closing execution mode and the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode. If the states are the same, the second pending prefetch process may not be executed, and the display mode of the target pending image HW after the opening/closing execution mode may be set based on the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the display mode after the open/close execution mode may be set to be the same as the display mode before the open/close execution mode. In this case, the normal display mode HMa may be changed to the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode, or the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode may be displayed from the beginning.

(60) In the sixth and seventh embodiments described above, a power outage abnormality was exemplified as the predetermined abnormality, but other abnormalities such as a magnetic sensor abnormality or a vibration sensor abnormality may be used. At this time, the predetermined abnormality is not limited to one in which the game progress is stopped, but may be one in which the game progress is continued.

(61) In the sixth and seventh embodiments described above, when the power outage abnormality is resolved and the power is restored, the display of the holding image is resumed with the target holding image HW set to the specific display mode. However, at the initial stage when the power is restored, the display mode of the target hold image HW is set to the normal display mode HMa, and then the display mode before the power outage state or the result of the hold look-ahead processing performed before the power outage is changed. The configuration may be such that the display mode is changed to a specific display mode set based on.

In addition, at the initial stage when the power is restored, the display mode of the target holding image HW is a predetermined display target that is different from both the normal display mode HMa and the specific display mode (a display mode exclusive to the power recovery, for example, a purple display mode). It may be configured such that the display mode is changed to a specific display mode that is set based on the display mode before the occurrence of the power outage state or the result of the pending prefetch processing performed before the power outage state. At that time, a configuration may be adopted in which the pending image set in the predetermined display mode is once changed to the normal display mode HMa and then changed to the specific display mode.

(62) In the sixth and seventh embodiments, when the power outage abnormality is resolved and the power is restored, the screen state of the symbol display device 75 changes to the recovery standby screen (such as "The screen will be restored soon"). Although the display of the pending image is resumed in the situation where the character display 461 is displayed (the screen on which the character display 461 is displayed), the display of the pending image is not displayed in the return standby screen state, and the display of the pending image is resumed (the screen where the character display 461 is displayed) The display of the pending image may be restarted when the symbol variation display of Z3 is returned (or when the screen is returned). In such a case, the display of the pending images is resumed with the number of pending images updated (each pending image is shifted to the lower side and the number of pending images is decreased by one).

Furthermore, the display timing of the pending image may be different depending on whether the power outage abnormality occurs while a game session is not being executed or when it occurs while a game session is being executed. Specifically, if a power outage error occurs while a gaming session is not in progress, the game will be put on hold when the power-on screen (a screen displaying text such as "Power has been turned on") is displayed. If the display of the hold image is resumed and a power outage error occurs during the execution of a game, the hold image will not be displayed in the recovery standby screen state, and the hold image will be displayed again when the screen returns. It is also possible to have a configuration in which In other words, if a power outage abnormality occurs while a gaming session is not being executed, the hold image will be displayed at an earlier timing (with a shorter elapsed time from the start of power supply) than when it occurs during a gaming session. It is also possible to configure the system so that it is restarted.

(63) In the sixth and seventh embodiments described above, the case where the power outage abnormality occurs during execution or non-execution of a game round is exemplified, but the power outage abnormality occurs while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed. It can also be applied to cases where At that time, the display of the target hold image may be resumed in the power-on screen state or recovery standby screen state, or the hold image may be displayed during the period when the subsequent opening/closing execution mode is performed after the power is restored. It may be configured such that the display is not executed and the display of the target pending image is restarted in accordance with the start timing of the first game round after the opening/closing execution mode. Alternatively, the display of the pending image may not be executed during the period when the screen is in the return standby state, and the display of the pending image may be restarted when the screen returns.

(64) In the sixth to seventh embodiments, the power outage monitoring unit 315 is provided in the power supply and launch control device 191, but it may be provided in the main control device 162 or the production control device 143. In this case, in the sixth embodiment, the power outage monitoring section 315 may be provided in each of the main control device 162 and the production control device 143, or provided in one of the main control device 162 and the production control device 143, A configuration may be adopted in which a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring unit 315 or a power outage command (command indicating the occurrence of a power outage state) from one control device is transmitted to the other control device.

(65) In the sixth and seventh embodiments described above, the processing for setting the display mode of the target pending image HW after the power is restored (the processing for restoring the pending notice in step S5202 and the display mode setting process in step S6204) is executed when the power is restored, but it may be executed after the power is restored. Specifically, it may be configured to be executed at a predetermined timing during a period after the power is restored until the game round of the target pending image HW is started.

(66) In the sixth embodiment, the information indicating the display mode of the target hold image HW is backed up, and after the power is restored, the display mode before the power outage is grasped based on that information, and the display mode after the power is restored is In the seventh embodiment, the display mode of the target hold image HW is set, and in the seventh embodiment, information indicating the prefetch results is backed up, and after the power is restored, the prefetch results before the power outage are grasped and restored. Although the display mode of the target hold image HW after the power is restored has been set, the prefetch process may be performed again after the power is restored, and the display mode of the target hold image HW after the power is restored may be set based on the result. At that time, the pre-reading process after the power is restored may be performed by the main control device 162 or by the production control device 143.

In the above case, in a situation where multiple hold images are displayed, change point information that allows you to understand which hold image is set to a specific display mode is stored, and a power outage condition occurs. It is also preferable to back up (memory retain) the changed location information. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to ascertain which pending image was displayed in a specific display mode before the power outage occurred after the power is restored. The change location information may be stored in the RAM 314 of the main control device 162 and backed up by the main control device 162, or may be stored in the RAM 344 or backup RAM 345 of the production control device 143 and backed up by the production control device 143. Good too.

In the above case, it is preferable to execute the pre-reading process after the power is restored, targeting the hold image (hold information) that was determined to be in a specific display mode before the power outage. In this case, even the hold images that were not set in the specific display mode before the power outage are set in the specific display mode by the pre-reading process after the power is restored, making it possible to prevent an unnatural impression from being given to the player. Furthermore, compared to the case where the prefetch processing is performed again on all the pending information that exists after the power is restored, the number of times the prefetch processing is executed can be reduced, making it possible to reduce the processing load when the power is restored. .

Here, knowing which hold images were being displayed in a specific display mode before the power outage can also be expressed as knowing which hold images were not being displayed in the specific display mode before the power outage. However, the display mode may be set to the normal display mode for the hold image that is determined to have not been displayed in the specific display mode. In this case, the processing may be to set the display mode of the hold images that were not subject to the prefetching process after power restoration to the normal display mode, or to set the display mode to the normal display mode for the hold images that were not subject to the prefetch processing after power restoration, or to For hold images that are determined to have not been displayed in a specific display mode after prefetch processing, the display mode may be forcibly set to the normal display mode, regardless of the result of the prefetch process. .

In addition, in the configuration in which the display mode of the target holding image HW is set based on the pre-read result after power restoration, the display mode is set below a certain level as in the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment. The configuration may be such that the display mode is limited to a specific display mode (for example, green display mode HMc or blue display mode HMb).

Note that the pre-reading process after power restoration may be performed at the time of power restoration, or as long as it is before the start of the game round of the hold image (hold information) that was set as the specific display mode before the power outage. It may be performed after power is restored.

In addition, without performing pre-reading processing after power restoration, for hold images that are determined to have been in a specific display mode before the power outage, the display mode is changed to a predetermined specific display mode (for example, a blue display mode). HMb).

(67) In the sixth embodiment, the backup RAM 345 is provided to back up (memory retain) the information regarding the reserved images, but without providing the backup RAM 345, all the information stored in the RAM 344 is It may also be configured to back up as a target. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a part of the information (information regarding the reserved image) stored in the RAM 344 is backed up without providing the backup RAM 345.

(68) In the sixth embodiment, the power outage signal from the power outage monitoring unit 315 is sent to the main control device 162 and the production control device 143, but it may be configured to be sent only to the main control device 162. . In this configuration, when a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring unit 315 is input to the main control device 162, a power outage command is transmitted from the main control device 162 to the production control device 143, and the production control device 143 receives the power outage command. It is preferable to use this as an opportunity to execute power outage processing (processing in steps S11 to S13, etc.).

(69) In the sixth embodiment, if the specific display mode of the target holding image HW before power cut is a display mode equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode (green display mode HMc) (if an affirmative determination is made in step S5404) ), the display mode of the target hold image HW after power restoration was configured to be limited to a specific display mode lower than the predetermined display mode, but the display mode of the target hold image HW was set to the normal display mode HMa (specific The display mode may be canceled).

(70) In the sixth embodiment, the display mode of the target hold image HW after power restoration is set to a specific display mode lower than the specific display mode before power outage, and Although the configuration is such that the promotion process for the image HW is executed in each gaming session (step S5409, step S5601), even if the display mode of the target pending image HW after power restoration is set to the specific display mode before the power outage, It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which promotion processing of the target pending image HW is executed in the game round. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the promotion process is executed in a gaming session regardless of the display mode of the target pending image HW after the power is restored.

(71) In the seventh embodiment, if the jackpot result is prefetched by the prefetch prefetch process before power outage (if an affirmative determination is made in step S6302), the display of the target pending image HW after power restoration is performed. Although the configuration is such that the mode is uniformly set to the first specific display mode (green display mode HMc), a configuration may be adopted in which the mode is easily set to the first specific display mode. Specifically, when the jackpot result is prefetched by the prefetching process before power outage, the display mode of the target pending image HW after power restoration is lower than the normal display mode HMa or the first specific display mode. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the first specific display mode is set to a higher probability than those display modes.

In addition, without setting restrictions such as the first specific display mode, the same setting process for hold notice as before the power outage can be performed based on the grasped hold look-ahead result (result of the hold look-ahead process performed before the power outage). A configuration may also be adopted in which a lottery process for executing a reservation notice performance or a lottery process for displaying a display mode of a reservation image is performed.

The same holds true for the case where a highly expected outlier result is read in advance (if an affirmative determination is made in step S6305).

(72) In the seventh embodiment, the display mode of the upper limit of the target pending image HW after power restoration is changed depending on whether the pending prefetching process before the power outage is a jackpot result or a missed result. However, a configuration may be adopted that does not make such a distinction. Specifically, the upper limit display mode of the target hold image HW after power restoration may be uniformly set to a predetermined special display mode regardless of whether it is appropriate or not.

(73) In the seventh embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern specified by the pre-fetching pre-fetch processing before power outage cannot be grasped (when a negative determination is made in step S6308), the holding image corresponding to the holding information is Although the configuration is such that the display is set to the normal display mode HMa, the display of the pending image may be configured to be handled as an error. At that time, the hold image corresponding to the hold information whose fluctuation pattern cannot be grasped may be hidden, or all the hold images including other hold images may not be displayed.

(74) In the seventh embodiment, if the jackpot result is prefetched by the prefetch prefetch process before power outage (if an affirmative determination is made in step S6302), the display of the target pending image HW after power restoration is performed. Although the mode is set to the first specific display mode, it may be configured to be set to the normal display mode HMa. In other words, if you set a specific display mode with a high expectation level after the power is restored based on the fact that the jackpot result was pre-read before the power outage, the result of the pre-read result and the result of the win/fail judgment in the game will be postponed due to the influence of the power outage abnormality. It is assumed that if an inconsistency occurs between the two, it will have a large impact on the player. In this regard, by setting the display mode of the hold image after the power is restored as the normal display mode HMa for the time being, and changing the display mode based on the fluctuation start command sent at the start of a game session, it is possible to It becomes possible to safely set the display mode of the pending image. This also applies to the case where a highly expected outlier result is prefetched (if an affirmative determination is made in step S6305).

(75) In the seventh embodiment, the case where the jackpot result is prefetched by the pending prefetching process before the power outage, or the case where the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the out-of-reach performance that is greater than the out-of-reach performance of SPSP is pre-read. As a target, the promotion process is executed in the game round of the target pending image HW (step S6304, step S6307), but even in the case of other pre-read results (SP out of reach effect, etc.), It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which promotion processing of the target pending image HW is executed in the game round. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the promotion process is executed in the game round regardless of the pre-read result.

(76) In the seventh embodiment, not only the information corresponding to the result of the reservation lookahead processing performed before the power outage, but also the information corresponding to the specific display mode of the target reservation image HW before the power outage. It is also possible to back up the information and set the display mode of the target pending image HW after the power is restored based on both pieces of information. For example, you can set multiple types of the upper limit of the specific display mode after power restoration (upper limit display mode) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, and set the specific display mode of the target hold image HW before the power outage (backed up specific display mode). ) is below the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (backed up pending look-ahead result) read ahead in the hold look-ahead process before power outage, the display mode of the target hold image HW after power restoration is The configuration may be such that the specific display mode is set to be the same as the specific display mode before the power is cut off.

(77) In the seventh embodiment, the main control device 162 backs up the information corresponding to the result of the pending prefetch process performed before the power outage, but the production control device 143 and the display control device It is also possible to have a configuration in which backup is performed at 350. When backing up in the production control device 143, as in the sixth embodiment, the production control device 143 is equipped with a backup function, such as by providing a backup RAM, and then transmitted from the main control device 162. The information corresponding to the result of the pending prefetching process is stored in the RAM 344 of the production control device 143, and when a power outage occurs, the information is written to the backup RAM, or the information stored in the RAM 344 is stored in the RAM 344 during a power outage. It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the information is also retained. In such a configuration, when the power is restored after the power outage is resolved, based on the information held in the production control device 143 (information corresponding to the result of the pending pre-reading process), the pending pre-reading performed before the power outage is performed. The results of processing can be understood.

In the above case, the information corresponding to the result of the pending prefetch processing in the main control device 162 may or may not be backed up. By the way, if the configuration is such that both the main control device 162 and the production control device 143 back up information corresponding to the result of pending prefetch processing, the information corresponding to the result of the pending prefetch processing is backed up based on the comparison result of each information backed up by both control devices 162 and 143. The information processing apparatus may further include a configuration for determining the normality of the information. Specifically, when the power outage is resolved and the power is restored, information corresponding to the result of the pending prefetching process backed up by the main control device 162 is transmitted to the production control device 143, and the production control device 143 , compares the information it backs up (information corresponding to the result of the pending prefetching process) and the information transmitted from the main controller 162. As a result, if both pieces of information correspond, it is determined that the backed up information is normal, the information is recognized as valid, and is used to set (return) the suspended notice effect after the power is restored. do. On the other hand, if the two pieces of information do not correspond, it is determined that the backed up information is not normal, and the information is deemed invalid and the process of restoring the suspended preview performance (setting of the suspended preview performance using the information) ) is not executed.

Here, the information transmitted from the main control device 162 and the information backed up by the production control device 143 correspond not only when the values of both pieces of information match, but also when the format of the information at the time of storage (for example, the value ) are different between the control devices 162 and 143, and although the information itself does not match, the substantive meaning of each piece of information may be the same.

Note that the comparison of information may be performed not only by the production control device 143 but also by the main control device 162 or the display control device 350. When the main control device 162 performs the comparison, the information backed up by the production control device 143 is transmitted to the main control device 162 when the power outage is resolved and the power is restored.

In addition, the information for determining normality by comparing (verifying) the results backed up by the main control device 162 and the production control device 143 is not necessarily limited to the result of the pending prefetching process, and for example, the information for determining the correctness. It may also be other information, such as information regarding results or the number of reservations. By the way, if the information regarding the number of reservations backed up by the main control device 162 does not correspond to the information regarding the number of reservations backed up by the production control device 143, an error notification may be executed as an abnormality. Alternatively or in addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of reservations is notified based on information backed up by the main control device 162 (priority is given to information backed up by the main control device 162).

(78) In the eighth to ninth embodiments described above, the susceptibility to execution (execution probability) of the pending notice performance is different between production mode A and production mode B, but in these production modes, the pending notice production It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the ease of execution is the same.

(79) In the eighth to ninth embodiments described above, the configuration is such that the pending preview performance can be executed in the performance mode B in which the pending preview performance is difficult to be executed, but the configuration is such that the pending preview performance is not executed in the performance mode B. Good too. In other words, the "performance state in which specific notification is difficult to be performed" in the present invention is understood to include not only a performance mode in which the execution probability of the pending notice performance is low, but also a performance mode in which the pending notice performance is not executed. I can do it.

(80) In the eighth embodiment, the production mode is automatically switched without the player's operation, but the production mode may be switched by the player's operation (manually). In this case, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the performance mode switching operation is disabled while the pending preview performance is being executed.

(81) In the eighth embodiment, the structure is provided with two types of presentation modes, presentation mode A and presentation mode B, as the plurality of types of presentation states, but it may be configured with three or more types of presentation modes. . In this case, for example, in a configuration that has three or more types of performance modes, such as performance mode A to performance mode C, it may be difficult to execute the pending preview performance in the order of performance mode A > performance mode B > performance mode C, etc. It may be possible to have a configuration in which the ease with which the pending notice performance is executed is different between the production modes, or in which the ease with which the pending notice performance is executed is the same in production modes A to C. Mode A and production mode C have the same ease of execution of the pending notice performance, but production mode B has the same ease of execution of the pending notice performance; It is also possible to have a configuration in which production modes with different ease of execution coexist.

In addition, in a configuration where a production mode with the same ease of execution of a suspended notice production and a production mode with a different ease of execution coexist, it is difficult to switch between production modes with the same ease of execution. Similarly to switching between different production modes, switching between production modes may be restricted while a pending preview production is being executed, or in the case of switching between production modes that have the same ease of execution, It may be configured to allow switching of the performance mode even while the pending preview performance is being executed.

(82) In the eighth embodiment, when it is the switching lottery timing (if an affirmative determination is made in step S7101), the production mode switching lottery (the first mode switching lottery in step S7102) is executed, and the lottery In the case of winning in step S7101, it is determined whether or not the pending notice performance is being executed, and the production mode switching process is not executed if the performance mode is being executed. If an affirmative determination is made), it may be determined whether or not the pending notice performance is being executed, and if it is being executed, the mode switching may not be performed without performing the performance mode switching lottery.

(83) In the eighth embodiment, in addition to switching from presentation mode A in which a pending notice presentation is likely to be performed to presentation mode B in which a pending notice presentation is difficult to be performed, the switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A is possible. Also, although the configuration is such that switching of the production mode is restricted while the pending preview performance is being executed, it may be configured to allow switching from production mode B to production mode A even while the pending preview performance is being executed. .

(84) In the eighth embodiment, when switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A, the display mode of the target holding image HW on which the holding preview presentation is being executed is the predetermined display mode (green display mode). HMc) It is configured to determine whether or not the above display mode is present, and to decide whether or not to allow switching of the production mode based on the result, but in the case of switching from production mode A to production mode B Similarly, regardless of the display mode of the target pending image HW, switching of the production mode may be restricted if the pending preview production is being executed.

(85) In the eighth embodiment, when switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, regardless of the display mode of the target pending image HW, if the pending preview presentation is being executed, the presentation mode is changed. Although the configuration is such that switching is restricted, in the same way as in the case of switching from production mode B to production mode A, it is also configured to decide whether or not to allow switching of production modes based on the display mode of the target holding image HW. Good too.

In the above case, the predetermined display mode that serves as the criterion (boundary) for whether or not to allow switching of production modes may be the same display mode as the case of switching from production mode B to production mode A, or may be the same display mode as the case of switching from production mode B to production mode A. The display mode may be different from that in the case of switching from B to production mode A. When using a different display mode, it is preferable to use a higher display mode than in the case of switching from production mode B to production mode A.

(86) In the eighth embodiment, when switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A is permitted during execution of a pending notice presentation, the display mode of the target pending image HW is maintained in a specific display mode. Although the configuration is such that the production mode can be switched, a configuration may also be adopted in which the display mode of the target retention image HW is changed to the normal display mode HMa as the production mode is switched. In this case, it may be configured such that the target pending image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa until the game round starts or ends, or as in the first to third embodiments, the target pending image A configuration may be adopted in which the display mode of the game image HW is changed to a specific display mode before the game session starts or ends.

(87) In the eighth embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which switching of production modes is restricted based on the result of the pending prefetch process. For example, when a predetermined result (for example, a jackpot result or a losing result that is higher than the SPSP reach performance) is prefetched by the pending prefetching process, switching of the production mode may be restricted until the game round of the pending information ends. .

For example, if a miss result with high expectations such as a jackpot result or a SPSP reach effect is read in advance, the pending effect such as a preview effect that arouses the player's sense of anticipation even before the game session of the pending information (pending It is assumed that a production (different from the pending preview production using images for use) will be performed. If the performance mode is switched during execution of the promotion performance, there is a risk that the promotion performance may become difficult to understand from the player's perspective. At this time, regardless of whether or not the pending notice performance is being executed, if the configuration is such that the switching of the production mode is restricted based on the result of the pending preview processing that triggers the pending notice performance, the inciting performance may be restricted. It is possible to suitably prevent the production mode from switching midway. In addition, since it is possible to restrict production mode switching before the execution of the pending notice performance, even if the switching timing of the production mode and the start timing of the pending notice production overlap, the production mode switching and the execution of the pending notice production It is possible to prevent these from occurring at the same time.

(88) In the eighth embodiment, when the performance mode switching condition is satisfied during the execution of the suspended preview performance (when the timing for switching the performance mode has come and the first mode switching lottery is won), the suspended preview performance is Although the configuration is such that switching of the performance mode is allowed when the pre-read result of the reservation image (reservation information) on which the performance is being performed is a jackpot result, instead of or in addition to this, a predetermined miss result (for example, It is also possible to adopt a configuration that allows switching of the performance mode when a loss result of SPSP reach performance or higher is read in advance. In other words, although the presentation mode cannot be switched as a general rule while the pending notice presentation is being executed, when the presentation mode is switched, it suggests that expectations for the pending information that is the target of the pending notice presentation are high. be able to.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned configuration that allows production mode switching exceptionally is not essential, and in the eighth embodiment, the pending preview production is being executed without referring to the result of the pending pre-reading process. It may be configured to decide whether or not to allow switching of the production mode based on whether or not the production mode is allowed or not and the type of specific display mode at that time.

(89) In the eighth embodiment, the production mode is allowed to be switched on the condition that the second mode switching lottery is won, but the mode is allowed to be switched without going through such a lottery. You can also use it as That is, when the performance mode switching condition is satisfied during the execution of the pending preview performance and the result of pre-reading the pending information is a jackpot result, the switching of the performance mode may be always permitted.

(90) In the ninth embodiment, the production mode is switched by the player's operation (manually), but the production mode may be automatically switched without the player's operation. In such a configuration, for example, switching of the production mode is set in advance based on a predetermined result being pre-read by the pending pre-reading process, and then the production mode is automatically switched when the switching execution condition is satisfied. I can think of things. Note that the switching execution conditions may include, for example, starting a game round of pending information in which a predetermined result has been read in advance, or starting a game round a predetermined time before the relevant game round.

(91) In the ninth embodiment described above, the structure is provided with two types of presentation modes, presentation mode A and presentation mode B, as the plurality of types of presentation states, but the structure may be provided with three or more types of presentation modes. . In this case, for example, in a configuration that has three or more types of performance modes, such as performance mode A to performance mode C, it may be difficult to execute the pending preview performance in the order of performance mode A > performance mode B > performance mode C, etc. It may be possible to have a configuration in which the ease with which the pending notice performance is executed is different between the production modes, or in which the ease with which the pending notice performance is executed is the same in production modes A to C. Mode A and production mode C have the same ease of execution of the pending notice performance, but production mode B has the same ease of execution of the pending notice performance; It is also possible to have a configuration in which production modes with different ease of execution coexist.

In addition, in a configuration where a production mode with the same ease of execution of a suspended notice production and a production mode with a different ease of execution coexist, it is difficult to switch between production modes with the same ease of execution. Similarly to switching between different production modes, the execution of the pending notice production may be restricted while the production mode is in a standby state, or switching between production modes that have the same ease of execution may be possible. In this case, the configuration may be such that execution of the pending notice performance is allowed even in a standby state for switching the performance mode.

(92) In the ninth embodiment, the execution of the pending preview performance is uniformly restricted when the performance mode is in a standby state. It may also be configured to restrict execution. For example, in a standby state for production mode switching, while allowing the execution of a pending notice production in which the display mode of the pending image is set to the blue display mode HMb, the display mode of the pending image is set to the green display mode HMc or higher. It may also be configured such that the pending notice performance as the display mode is not executed.

(93) In the ninth embodiment, the execution of the pending notice performance is restricted when the production mode is in a standby state for switching, regardless of the production mode to which the switch is to be made. The restriction mode may be different. For example, in the case of switching from production mode B, in which pending notice performances are difficult to execute, to production mode A, in which pending notice performances are likely to be executed, while the execution of pending notice performances is uniformly restricted in the standby state for switching the production mode, In the case of switching from production mode A to production mode B, execution of a pending notice production is permitted even in the standby state for production mode switching, or a specific display higher than a predetermined display mode (for example, blue display mode HMb) is allowed. Although the execution of the pending notice effect as a mode is restricted, the execution of the pending notice effect in a specific display mode below a predetermined display mode may be permitted.

(94) In the ninth embodiment, the display mode of the target holding image HW after switching the production mode is set when the standby state ends, but after the standby state ends (the production mode is It may also be configured to be set at a predetermined timing during a period after the switching) and until the game round of the target pending image HW starts or ends. In addition, when setting the target pending image HW during a game round, the display mode may be set based on the result of the pending prefetching process of the target pending image HW, or during the gaming round of the target pending image HW. The display mode may be set based on a variation start command sent at the start.

(95) In the ninth embodiment, the execution of the suspension notice performance is not restricted for the suspension information acquired before the display of the switching guide image 451, but the configuration may be configured to restrict the execution of the suspension notice performance. good. That is, the configuration may be such that the execution of the pending notice effect is restricted not only during the standby state but also before transitioning to the standby state.

Specifically, when the switching guide image 451 is displayed while the pending preview performance is being executed, the pending preview performance is executed at a predetermined timing during the period from when the switching guide image 451 is displayed until the performance mode is switched. It is conceivable that the display mode of the target pending image is changed from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa. Note that the specific timing of changing from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa is assumed to be the display timing of the switching guide image 451, the transition timing to the standby state, the switching timing of the production mode, etc.

(96) In the ninth embodiment, the execution of the hold notice performance is not restricted for the hold information acquired after the switching guide image 451 is displayed and before transition to the standby state. It may also be configured to restrict execution.

In this case, based on the display of the switching guidance image 451 (transitioning to the switching guidance state), a configuration may be adopted in which execution restriction of the pending preview performance is started prior to transitioning to the standby state. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which a hold preview performance triggered by hold information acquired after the switching guide image 451 is displayed and before transition to the standby state is not executed before or during the transition to the standby state.

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which, although the hold preview performance is temporarily executed before transitioning to the standby state, the execution of the hold preview performance is canceled when the hold preview performance is transitioned to the standby state. Specifically, after the switching guide image 451 is displayed, a hold preview performance triggered by the hold information acquired before transition to the standby state is executed before transition to the standby state, and then the hold preview performance is executed. The display mode of the target pending image may be changed from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa. Note that the specific timing of changing from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa may be the timing of transition to a standby state, the timing of switching the production mode, etc.

(97) In the ninth embodiment, when hold information is acquired during the standby state, the hold lookahead process is executed, and after the standby state ends, based on the result of the hold lookahead process performed during the standby state. The display mode of the target hold image HW is set based on the configuration, but the hold lookahead processing for the hold information acquired during the standby state is executed after the standby state, and based on the result, the display mode of the target hold image HW is set after the standby state. A configuration may also be adopted in which the display mode of the image HW is set. At this time, the suspension prefetching process may be performed by the main control device 162 or by the production control device 143. Further, the suspension prefetching process when suspension information is acquired during the standby state may not be executed or may be executed.

(98) In the ninth embodiment, the configuration according to the eighth embodiment may be applied, and the transition to the switching guidance state may be restricted while the pending notice performance is being executed. Specifically, while the pending notice performance is being executed, the lottery may not be performed even if the switching guidance lottery is to be executed, or even if the lottery is won, the switching guidance image 451 may not be displayed or the guidance notification flag may not be displayed. A configuration may be adopted in which no setting is performed, or a configuration in which it is not determined whether or not it is the timing to execute the switching guidance lottery.

(99) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball that opens a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to game machines such as a pachinko machine in which a jackpot is generated when a ball is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arranged ball machine, and a mahjong ball machine.

In addition, non-pinball type game machines, for example, are equipped with multiple reels with multiple types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, and rotation of the reels is started by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is formed on the active line that can be seen from the display window, the player is given benefits such as a payout of medals, etc. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

Furthermore, the game machine main body supported by the outer frame in an openable and closable manner is provided with a storage section and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage section are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, which starts the rotation of the reels by doing so.

<About inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from each of the embodiments described above will be explained, showing effects etc. as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, structures corresponding to each of the embodiments described above are indicated in parentheses, etc., as appropriate; however, the present invention is not limited to the specific structures shown in parentheses, etc.

In addition, the invention described in each feature below is defined as ``For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and if the lottery result is a specific result, the game Regarding the background technology that provides a predetermined benefit to a player (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-81853), there is There is still room for improvement.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

<Characteristics Group A>
Feature A1. an information acquisition unit (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main controller 162) that acquires special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
an attachment determination means (a function for executing validity determination processing, etc. in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
Granting a benefit that allows the player to receive a benefit based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being a granting response result in which the special information to be determined corresponds to the granting information. means (a function of executing the big prize opening opening/closing process in the main controller 162);
A game repeat operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means that the game repeat operation is terminated once in the game round. a game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means so that the game time operation is performed;
A suspension notification means (a suspension notification means) that provides a suspension notification (a suspension image) using the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means so that the player can at least recognize the number of pending games before execution; (a function of executing a process corresponding to a pending command in the production control device 143);
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, information corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information is subject to the provision determination, rather than the special information being subject to the provision determination. Destination specifying means that executes a destination specifying process specified at a previous timing (in the first to fourth embodiments and the sixth to seventh embodiments, a function of executing a pending prefetching process by the main controller 162, In the embodiment of No. 5, the main control device 162 executes a pending command setting process, the production control device 143 performs a first pending pre-reading process),
Specific mode means (first to seventh) capable of setting the notification mode of the suspension notification to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode) based on the result of the destination specifying process. In the embodiment, the effect control device 143 executes a setting process for a pending notice and a first execution process for a pending notice);
Equipped with
In the specific mode, a plurality of types of modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the provision corresponding result is different. has been
When a predetermined event occurs in a state where the notification mode of the suspension notification is set to a specific mode (when the production mode is switched in the first to third embodiments, in the fourth to fifth embodiments) When the opening/closing execution mode is performed, or when a power outage state occurs in the sixth to seventh embodiments), at least the specific mode or the pending notification is determined to be non-executable for the specific mode or the pending notification. (In the first to third embodiments, the display mode of the pending image is changed to the normal display mode HMa by switching the production mode, and in the fourth to fifth embodiments, the display mode of the pending image is changed to the normal display mode HMa. In the embodiment, the hold image is hidden by executing the open/close execution mode; in the sixth and seventh embodiments, the hold image disappears due to the occurrence of a power outage state);
After the end of the specific state, a predetermined first step that allows the player to recognize the notification mode of the suspension notification that is the subject of the specific state as being the same as the notification mode before the predetermined event occurs. (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) or a predetermined second mode that allows the player to recognize that the notification mode is higher than the notification mode before the predetermined event occurs (higher rank display mode, etc.) Specifying means (specific display mode, etc.) (in the first to fifth embodiments, a setting process for returning to a notice by the production control device 143, a second execution process for a suspended notice, a third execution process for a pending notice) A function of executing an execution process, a function of executing a process for returning a suspended notice by the production control device 143 in the sixth embodiment, a function of executing a fourth execution process of a pending notice, a production control device in the seventh embodiment. 143).

In the above configuration, since the notification mode of the suspension notification is set to a specific format based on the result of so-called suspension look-ahead, it is possible to arouse the player's expectations for the result corresponding to the grant even before the start of the game round. can. Furthermore, since multiple types of specific modes are set with different expectations for the reward response results, it is possible to assign and suggest levels of expectation, which is useful in arousing players' sense of expectation. This can be an advantageous configuration. In such a configuration, if a predetermined event occurs in a situation where the suspension notification is set to a specific mode, the system transitions to a specific state where the specific mode or suspension notification is not executed. In this case, there is a concern that non-execution of the specific mode may cause the player to misunderstand or feel anxious that the level of expectation suggested by the specific mode has disappeared. In this regard, in this configuration, after the specific state ends, the suspension notification is performed in the first mode that is equivalent to the notification mode before the occurrence of the predetermined event, or in the second mode that is higher than that, so the expectation level is again set. This makes it possible to maintain expectations for the result that corresponds to the grant.

Feature A2. The configuration is such that at least information corresponding to the notification mode of the suspension notification set as the specific mode can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (return area 344f of the RAM 344),
When setting the notification mode of the suspension notification that is subject to the specific state to the predetermined first mode, the specifying means determines the notification mode from the predetermined first mode based on information stored in the predetermined storage unit. (a function of executing a setting process for advance notice return in the production control device 143 in the first to fifth embodiments, a function of executing a display mode setting process in the sixth embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature A1.

In the above configuration, information corresponding to the notification mode of the specific notification is stored, and after the specific state ends, the notification mode of the specific notification is set based on the stored information. As a result, after the specific state ends, it is possible to suitably return the notification mode of the suspension notification to the same mode as before the specific state (before the predetermined event occurs).

Feature A3. It includes an execution notification section (execution display area D) that performs a predetermined notification (display of a suspension image in the execution display area D) so that the player can recognize the execution of the game session that has been suspended;
The specifying means may change the mode of the predetermined notification performed by the execution notification unit to the predetermined first mode or the predetermined first mode in a game round of special information corresponding to the suspension notification that is subject to the specific state. Specification means that can be used as the second aspect (a function of executing the third execution process of the pending notice by the production control device 143 in the first to fifth embodiments, The gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing a fourth execution process of a pending notice by the performance control device 143.

In the above configuration, after the specific state ends, when processing is performed to make the notification mode equivalent to the notification mode before the occurrence of the predetermined event or the second mode higher than it, the notification mode becomes the target of the specific state. The game period for which the suspension notification is given can be included in the implementation period. As a result, it is possible to secure a long processing period for returning the notification mode to the same level mode, etc. For example, if a predetermined event occurs immediately before the start of a game round of pending notification that has been set as a specific mode. However, it is possible to perform the return process using the playing period of the game after the end of the specific state. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suggest the degree of expectation after the end of the specific state.

Feature A4. When a game round is executed, the game round is executed based on the special information (pending information) that was the subject of the award determination that triggered the game round, or the specific information (variation pattern) derived from the special information. Equipped with a game time performance setting means (a function for executing special symbol fluctuation display processing in the performance control device 143) for setting the game time performance (reach performance, etc.) to be performed,
When the notification mode of the predetermined notification is set to the predetermined second mode, the specifying means selects the predetermined second mode based on the special information or the specific information referred to by the game rendition setting device. (a function of executing the third execution process of the pending notice by the production control device 143 in the first to fifth embodiments, and a function of executing the fourth execution process of the pending notice in the sixth to seventh embodiments) The gaming machine according to feature A3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of:

For example, if the notification mode is simply returned to the apposition mode after the end of the specific state, it is not possible to suggest a higher level of expectation than was suggested before the occurrence of the predetermined event. On the other hand, if the notification mode is unnecessarily set to a high-ranking one, it will not match the game performance that is actually performed in the game round, and there is a risk that the player's trust will be damaged. In this regard, in this configuration, based on the special information or specific information used to set the game round performance in the game round of the suspension notification that is subject to the specific state, the notification mode of the predetermined notification corresponding to the suspension notification is determined. is promoted to a higher level than before the predetermined event occurred. Thereby, it becomes possible to promote the notification mode of the predetermined notification while suppressing the notification mode of the predetermined notification from becoming inconsistent with the game round effect actually performed in the game round.

Feature A5. The specifying means is a determining means for determining whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is to be the predetermined second mode based on the special information or the specific information referred to by the game run performance setting means. (Function to execute the third execution process of the pending notice by the production control device 143 in the first to fifth embodiments, function to execute the fourth execution process of the pending notice in the sixth to seventh embodiments) The gaming machine according to feature A4, characterized in that the notification mode of the predetermined notification is set to the predetermined second mode when the determining means determines that the predetermined second mode is selected.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether the mode is to be promoted to a higher mode based on the special information or specific information used for setting the game rendition, and if promotion to the higher mode is permitted by the determination, the promotion process is performed. It will be done. Thereby, after the end of the specific state, the notification mode of the predetermined notification can be promoted within a range that does not exceed the expected level of the game performance that will actually be performed.

Feature A6. The specifying means includes means for changing the notification mode of the suspension notification that is subject to the specific state to the predetermined first mode and then to the predetermined second mode after the specific state ends. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5.

When setting the notification mode of the suspension notification to a higher mode than the original mode after the end of a specific state, if it is suddenly set to a higher mode, the specific mode that was made before the occurrence of the predetermined event from the perspective of the player will be changed. It is difficult to understand the relationship between the two and may cause confusion. In this regard, in this configuration, since the notification mode is changed to the upper level notification mode after being set to the same level, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the notification mode has returned, and it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned confusion.

Feature A7. When the notification mode of the suspension notification is set to a specific mode, the specific mode means is a first scenario setting section (production control) that sets a notification scenario (production scenario) for setting the notification mode of the suspension notification to the specific mode. (a function of executing a setting process for a pending notice in the device 143),
When the specific means sets the notification mode of the suspension notification that is the subject of the specific state to the predetermined first mode or the predetermined second mode after the specific state ends, the specifying means determines the suspension notification. A second scenario setting means for setting a notification scenario (return scenario) for setting the notification mode to the predetermined first mode or the predetermined second mode (a function of executing a setting process for advance notice return in the production control device 143) ) The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6.

For example, in a configuration where games can be played in a specific state, the number of games played will be exhausted during the specific state, so the execution period after the specific state (remaining period) is assumed to vary depending on the length of stay in a particular state. In this regard, in this configuration, in addition to the notification scenario set before the occurrence of a predetermined event, a notification scenario is created to make the pending notification that is the subject of the specific state into an equivalent mode after the specific state ends. is reset, it is possible to suitably change the notification mode of the suspension notification to an equivalent mode even though the remaining period of the suspension notification after the specific state changes.

Feature A8. After the end of the specific state, a pending number grasping means (which executes the process of step S2103) grasps the number of pending games before or before the special information corresponding to the pending notification that is the target of the specific state. function),
The second scenario setting means sets a notification scenario for the predetermined first mode or the predetermined second mode based on the number of reservations ascertained by the number of reservations grasping means. The gaming machine described in A7.

In the above configuration, when a specific state ends, the number of reservations is ascertained, and the notification scenario is reset to take into consideration the result, so regardless of the period of stay in the specific state, The notification mode of the suspension notification can be suitably changed to an equivalent mode or the like.

Feature A9. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, wherein the specific state is such that the notification mode of at least the specific mode of suspension notification is the normal mode.

When the notification mode of the suspension notification is changed (downgraded) from the specific mode to the normal mode due to the transition to a specific state, there is a misunderstanding that the level of expectation suggested by the specific mode before the occurrence of the specified event has disappeared. This can easily cause anxiety and anxiety to players. By applying any one of the features A1 to A8 to such a structure, each feature can be made to function effectively and each of the above effects can be suitably exhibited.

In addition, when setting the suspension notification to the normal mode in a specific state, it is necessary to change (upgrade) the normal mode to the same mode after the specific state ends, but this feature cannot be changed to feature A7 or feature A8. By applying this method, it is possible to suitably change from the normal mode to the peer mode even when the remaining period of suspension notification after a specific state changes.

Feature A10. Means for restricting the execution of the specific aspect in the specific state regarding the suspension notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the specific state (suspension triggered by the suspension information acquired in production mode B) The gaming machine according to feature A9, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of restricting the execution of preview performances.

For example, if the notification mode for hold notifications, which was considered to be a specific mode, is changed to the normal mode in a specific state, but the special information acquired during the specific state is changed to the specific mode, Since it is necessary to distinguish between special information acquired before the state and special information acquired during the specific state, there is a concern that the processing will become complicated. In addition, even though there is a suspension notification that has been changed from a specific mode to a normal mode, if a suspension notification of special information acquired later is set to a specific mode, the normal mode of the previous suspension notification will be changed. There is also the risk of further aggravating a sense of anxiety that expectations regarding changes to the format may have disappeared. In this regard, in this configuration, since the suspension notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the specific state is restricted from being changed to a specific mode in the specific state, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience. It becomes possible.

Feature A11. Means for causing processing by the specific mode means to be performed after the end of the specific state regarding the suspension notification in which execution of the specific mode is restricted (second setting process for suspension notice in the second embodiment) The gaming machine according to feature A10, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function to execute).

As mentioned in the effect of feature A10 above, by restricting the change to a specific mode for special information acquired during a specific state, expectations regarding the change to the normal mode in the previous suspension notification disappear. This will prevent you from inciting anxiety that something may have gone wrong. However, on the other hand, there is a concern that an opportunity to suggest the degree of expectation regarding special information acquired during a specific state may be lost. In this regard, in the above configuration, since a change to a specific mode is allowed after the end of the specific state for the suspension notification that imposes such a restriction, it is possible to secure an opportunity to suggest the degree of expectation.

Feature A12. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, wherein the specific state is such that at least a specific mode of suspension notification is not executed.

If the notification mode of the suspension notification is not executed due to the transition to the specific state, it may cause the player to misunderstand or feel anxious that the level of expectation suggested by the specific mode before the occurrence of the predetermined event has disappeared. It becomes easier. By applying any one of the features A1 to A8 to such a structure, each feature can be made to function effectively and each of the above effects can be suitably exhibited.

Feature A13. After the specific state ends, the suspension notification that is subject to the specific state is configured to be executed in the normal mode,
The specifying means is a means for changing the notification mode of the suspension notification which has been set to the normal mode to the predetermined first mode or the predetermined second mode (setting for advance notice return in the production control device 143). The gaming machine according to feature A12, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing a process.

After the notification mode of the suspension notification is set to non-execution due to the transition to the specific state, when the suspension notification is restarted in the normal mode, the notification mode indicated by the specific mode before the predetermined event occurs. There is a risk that this will further fuel a sense of anxiety that the level of expectations that were built up may have disappeared. By applying any one of the features A1 to A8 to such a structure, each feature can be made to function effectively and each of the above effects can be suitably exhibited.

In addition, in the case of a configuration in which the suspension notification is not executed in a specific state and the suspension notification returns to the normal mode after the specific state ends, the normal mode will change from the normal mode to the equivalent mode, etc. after the specific state ends. Although a change (upgrade) process is required, by applying this feature to feature A7 or feature A8, even if the remaining period of suspension notification after a specific state changes, it is possible to change the status from the normal mode to the same mode, etc. Changes can be made appropriately.

In addition, this feature is as follows: "After the end of the specific state, the suspension notification that is the target of the specific state is executed in the normal mode, and then It can also be expressed as "it is provided with a means for changing to the second mode (a function of executing a setting process for returning to advance notice in the production control device 143)."

Feature A14. A specific effect means (a function that executes the processing of steps S1603 to S1605) that executes a specific effect (change suggestion effect) that suggests that the notification mode of the suspension notification changes to a higher level notification mode;
After the end of the specific state, when the notification mode of the suspension notification that is the target of the specific state is set to the predetermined first mode, means for restricting the execution of the specific effect (change suggestion effect) (a feature that allows execution to be restricted) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, since it is suggested that the notification mode of the hold notification will change to a higher level notification mode due to the specific effect, a sense of expectation for the change to the higher level notification mode is aroused, and the player is encouraged to receive the hold notification. can increase the attention of In such a configuration, for example, if a specific performance is performed to change the mode to the same level after the end of the specific state, the player may change the notification mode ( It is assumed that users will associate higher-level notification modes with reference to the mode before the occurrence of a predetermined event. In this case, since the actual notification mode does not match the mode associated with the player, there is a risk that the player's trust in the specific performance may be lost. In this regard, in this configuration, when the same mode is set after the end of the specific state, execution of the specific effect is restricted, so the player is suppressed from associating a higher level mode than the actual notification mode, and the above-mentioned It becomes possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of inconveniences.

Note that for each configuration of features A1 to A14, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B14, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G15, and features It is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configurations of any one of H1 to H11 and features I1 to I12 individually, or it is possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. is also possible. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. an information acquisition unit (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main controller 162) that acquires special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
an attachment determination means (a function for executing validity determination processing, etc. in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
Granting a benefit that allows the player to receive a benefit based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being a granting response result in which the special information to be determined corresponds to the granting information. means (a function of executing the big prize opening opening/closing process in the main controller 162);
A specific notification means (in the performance control device 143) that causes a specific notification (pending notice performance) to be performed on a predetermined notification device (symbol display device 75, reservation lamp part) based on a predetermined execution trigger (prereading result). function to execute processing corresponding to pending commands),
Equipped with
The specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to one of a plurality of notification modes (a blue display mode HMb, a green display mode HMc, a red display mode HMd, and a rainbow color display mode HMe). It is provided with a setting means (a function of executing a setting process for a pending notice in the production control device 143 and a process for first execution of a pending notice), and executes the specific notification based on the setting result of the first notification mode setting means. It is configured as follows.
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (when a predetermined operation is performed by the production operation unit 36), one production state among multiple types of production states (production mode A, production mode B) including the predetermined production state. A production state transition means (a function of executing production mode switching processing in the production control device 143) for transitioning from the production state to another production state;
When the specific notification (pending notice effect using the pending image HW) is transferred from the predetermined presentation state to another presentation state and then transferred to the predetermined presentation state, the specification in the subsequent predetermined presentation state A second notification mode setting means that sets the notification mode of the notification based on the notification mode of the specific notification in the previous predetermined production state (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the setting process for advance notice return by the production control device 143) )and,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, a plurality of types of performance states are provided, and the performance state is switched when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied. This allows the player to change his/her mood during the game, and prevents the player from becoming bored with the game. In such a configuration, for example, if the execution of the specific notification is canceled when the production state is switched while the specific notification is being executed, it may be assumed that the chance that was notified or suggested by the specific notification has disappeared. There is a concern that this may cause misunderstandings and anxiety to players. In such a case, it may be possible to restrict the switching of presentation states while a specific notification is being executed, but this may lead to a situation where the frequency of switching presentation states decreases, and the purpose of providing multiple types of presentation states may be lost. be.

In this regard, with this feature, when a predetermined presentation state is transitioned to another presentation state while a specific notification is being executed, and then the transition is made to a predetermined presentation state, the notification mode of the specific notification in the subsequent predetermined presentation state is set first. Since the settings are made based on the notification mode in the predetermined presentation state, the specific notification can be returned to the original notification mode by returning the presentation state to the original state. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the chance has not disappeared, and it is possible to perform specific notification without imposing restrictions on switching the presentation state. In other words, it becomes possible to suitably balance the execution of specific notification and the switching of the presentation state.

Feature B2. A game repeat operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means that the game repeat operation is terminated once in the game round. , comprising a game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the main control device 162) for controlling the game time operation to be performed,
The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the specific notification means is configured to be able to execute the specific notification over multiple game rounds.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed over a relatively long period of time, the effect state is likely to change while the specific notification is being executed. By applying the configuration of feature B1 to such a configuration, the feature can be made to function effectively and the above effects can be suitably exhibited.

Note that this feature may include the following feature: "The performance state transition means includes means for switching the performance state in accordance with the execution of the game round." In a configuration in which specific notification is performed across game rounds and the performance state is switched according to the break between game rounds, the phenomenon in which the performance state is switched during execution of the specific notification is particularly likely to occur, so the above effect of feature B1 is achieved. It becomes possible to exhibit this even more suitably.

Feature B3. The configuration is such that information corresponding to the notification mode of the specific notification can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (return area 344f of the RAM 344),
According to feature B1 or feature B2, the second notification mode setting means sets a notification mode of a specific notification in a subsequent predetermined performance state based on information stored in the predetermined storage unit. Game machine.

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the specific notification is stored, and when transitioning to a later predetermined production state, the notification mode of the specific notification is set based on the stored information. Thereby, the specific notification in the later predetermined performance state can be suitably returned to the original notification mode executed in the previous predetermined performance state.

Feature B4. A game repeat operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means that the game repeat operation is terminated once in the game round. A game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the main control device 162) that controls the game time operation to be performed;
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, information corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information is subject to the provision determination, rather than the special information being subject to the provision determination. A destination specifying means for executing a destination specifying process to be specified at a previous timing (a function of executing a pending prefetch process in the main controller 162);
Equipped with
The specific notification means is configured to be able to execute the specific notification based on the result of the destination identification process before the special information that is the target of the destination identification process becomes the target of the provision determination. ,
The specific notification means transitions from the previous predetermined presentation state to the other presentation state during the execution of specific notification triggered by specific special information (suspension information of the target pending image HW), and thereafter transitions from the predetermined presentation state to the other presentation state. If the transition to a later predetermined performance state occurs before the game round of special information ends or before the specific special information becomes subject to the provision determination by the provision determination means, in the subsequent predetermined performance state, the specific Equipped with a specific means for executing a specific notification in response to special information (a function for executing a setting process for returning to a notice in the production control device 143, a second execution process for a pending notice, and a third execution process for a pending notice). The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is executed based on the result of so-called pending look-ahead, the notification mode of the specific notification indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the allocation judgment will be the result corresponding to the allocation, and the allocation judgment is performed. It is possible to suitably arouse the player's sense of expectation for the result corresponding to the grant in advance. In such a case, if the execution of the specific notification is canceled when the performance state is switched as described above, it may cause the player to misunderstand that the award response result has disappeared or that their expectations have decreased. There are concerns about giving.

In this regard, according to the present configuration, if the original performance state is returned to before the end of the game round of the special information that triggered the specific notification or before the special information becomes subject to determination, the original notification The notification mode of the specific notification is set in accordance with the mode. Therefore, in addition to informing the player that the award corresponding results have not disappeared, the expectation level for the special information that triggered the specific notification can be notified before the award determination result for the special information is announced. can be suggested once again. Therefore, the above-mentioned concerns can be appropriately addressed, and it becomes possible to suitably balance the execution of specific notification and the switching of the production state.

Feature B5. The second notification mode setting means sets the specific notification in the subsequent predetermined performance state based on the notification pattern of the specific notification in the previous predetermined performance state, regardless of the result of the destination specifying process in the previous predetermined performance state. The gaming machine according to feature B4, characterized in that a notification mode is set.

For example, if the notification mode of a specific notification in a later predetermined production state is set based on the result of pending pre-reading performed in a previous predetermined production state, the notification of a specific notification in a previous predetermined production state may be set. It is assumed that an aspect different from the aspect is set. In addition, in a configuration where the notification mode of specific notification is changed in stages (ranked up), even if the look-ahead result is the same, there may be a difference in the notification mode of specific notification at the time of switching depending on the switching timing of the production state. If the notification mode in the later predetermined performance state is set based on the result of the pending pre-reading, a different notification mode from the specific notification in the previous predetermined performance state is likely to be set.

In this regard, in this configuration, the notification mode of the specific notification in the later predetermined production state is not the result of the pending pre-reading performed in the previous predetermined production state, but the notification mode when switching from the production state to another production state. Since the setting is based on the notification mode of the notification, when the performance state returns to the original state, the notification mode can be set to the same notification mode as the specific notification that was actually notified. As a result, it is possible to suitably match the notification mode in the previous predetermined production state with the notification mode in the subsequent predetermined production state, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the notification mode has returned. become.

Feature B6. The specific notification means is
When performing a specific notification triggered by the specific special information in the predetermined performance state, a first scenario setting means (for pending notice) sets a notification scenario (performance scenario) for changing the notification mode of the specific notification. function to execute the setting process), and
When a specific notification is made in response to the specific special information in a later predetermined production state, a second scenario setting means (notice return scenario) for resetting a notification scenario (return scenario) for changing the notification mode of the specific notification ), and
The gaming machine according to feature B4 or feature B5, characterized by comprising:

When making a specific notification in a later predetermined production state, depending on the length of the stay in the other production state, the game session of the special information to which the specific notification corresponds may start or end after switching to the later predetermined production state. It is assumed that the period until the end, that is, the period during which specific notification can be executed, will vary. In this regard, in this configuration, when a specific notification is made in a later predetermined production state, the notification scenario for changing the notification mode is reset, so even if the above period changes, the notification mode of the specific notification will be changed to the original. It can be suitably changed depending on the aspect.

Feature B7. When transitioning to a later predetermined performance state, a pending number grasping means (a function of executing the process of step S2103) is provided for grasping the pending number of gaming times before or before the specific special information,
The gaming machine according to feature B6, wherein the second scenario setting means resets the notification scenario based on the number of reservations ascertained by the number of reservations grasping means.

In the above configuration, when switching to a later predetermined presentation state, the number of pending events is grasped, and the notification scenario for the specific notification is reset by taking the result into account, so regardless of the stay period in other presentation states, The notification mode of the specific notification can be suitably changed to the original mode.

Feature B8. In the case where the previous predetermined presentation state transitions to the other presentation state during the execution of the specific notification, a means for restricting the continuation of the specific notification (a function of setting the display mode of the pending image HW to the normal display mode HMa) is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7.

In the above configuration, since the continuation of the specific notification that has been executed up to that point is restricted (regulated) when the performance state is switched, it is easy to give the player a misunderstanding that the chance has disappeared. By applying any one of the features B1 to B7 to such a structure, each of the features can be made to function effectively, and each of the effects described above can be suitably exhibited.

Feature B9. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, wherein the predetermined performance state is a performance state in which the ease with which the specific notification is executed is different from the other performance states.

In the case of a configuration in which the ease with which specific notifications are executed differs depending on the performance state, if the performance state is switched while the specific notification is still being executed, the level of expectation etc. suggested by the specific notification will be different before and after the performance state is switched. There is a risk of inviting In this case, by canceling execution of the specific notification upon switching of the production state, it is possible to suppress such inconsistency in expectations. However, on the other hand, there is a concern that the player may be misled or worried that the chance suggested by the specific notification has disappeared. By applying any one of the features B1 to B8 to such a structure, each feature can be made to function effectively, and each of the effects described above can be suitably exhibited.

In addition, in this feature, "the predetermined performance state is a performance state in which the ease with which the specific notification is executed is different from the other performance states" includes the condition that the other performance state is a state in which the specific notification can be executed. It can be understood that this includes not only a configuration in which this is set, but also a configuration in which another presentation state is set as a state in which specific notification is not executed.

Feature B10. The plurality of types of notification modes in the specific notification are set such that the degree of expectation for the provision corresponding result is different,
The second notification mode setting means sets a predetermined notification mode that allows the player to recognize that the notification mode of the specific notification in the subsequent predetermined production state is the same as the notification mode of the specific notification in the previous predetermined production state. Features B1 to B9 are characterized in that they include a first means (setting process for advance notice return in the production control device 143) for setting one mode (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) A gaming machine described in any of the above.

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the specific notification in the later predetermined production state is set to a mode that allows the player to recognize that the notification mode in the previous predetermined production state is the same, so that the specific notification is restored. It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that he/she has done so.

Feature B11. The second notification mode setting means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to the first predetermined mode in a later predetermined production state, and then sets the notification mode of the specific notification to the first predetermined mode in a subsequent predetermined performance state, and then sets the notification mode of the specific notification to the player if the notification mode is higher than the notification mode of the specific notification in the previous predetermined production state. Feature B10 characterized by comprising a second means (setting process for advance notice return in the production control device 143) for setting a predetermined second mode (upper specific display mode, etc.) that can be recognized by the user. The gaming machine described in .

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the specific notification in the later predetermined production state can be set to a higher level of notification mode than the notification mode in the previous predetermined production state, so that the notification mode in the later predetermined production state is The notification mode is limited to a predetermined performance state, and it is possible to prevent the range of possible expectations, etc. from becoming narrower. At this time, if the notification mode is suddenly set to a higher level, it may be difficult to understand the correspondence with the notification mode that was performed in the previous predetermined presentation state, and the presentation may become difficult to understand. In this regard, in this configuration, since the notification mode is first set to the same level and then changed to the higher level notification mode, it is possible to easily understand that the notification mode has been restored, and it is possible to suppress confusion among players.

Feature B12. a specific effect means (a function that executes the processing of steps S1603 to S1605) that executes a specific effect (change suggestion effect) that suggests that the notification mode of the specific notification changes to a higher level notification mode;
When the notification mode of the specific notification is set to the predetermined first mode in a subsequent predetermined presentation state, means for restricting the execution of the specific presentation (function for restricting the execution of the change suggestion presentation) and,
The gaming machine according to feature B10 or feature B11, comprising:

In the above configuration, since it is suggested that the specific presentation will change the notification mode of the specific notification to a higher level notification mode, expectations for the change to the higher level mode are aroused, and the player's attention to the specific notification is increased. You can increase the degree. In such a configuration, for example, if a specific effect is performed when the notification mode of a specific notification is set to be a peer mode, the player may be able to change the destination that he or she remembers, even though the mode is actually only a peer mode. It is assumed that the user will associate a higher level notification mode with the notification mode in a predetermined performance state as a reference. In this case, since the actual notification mode does not match the mode associated with the player, there is a risk that the player's trust in the specific performance may be lost. In this regard, in this configuration, even if the change corresponds to a change to a higher-level notification mode, if the notification mode is simply returned to the previous predetermined effect state, the execution of the specific effect is restricted, so the actual It is possible to prevent the player from associating an aspect higher than the notification aspect, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature B13. A game repeat operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means that the game repeat operation is terminated once in the game round. A game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the main control device 162) that controls the game time operation to be performed;
A suspension notifying means (a function of executing a process corresponding to a pending command in the performance control device 143) that performs a pending notification (a pending image) so that the player can at least recognize the number of pending games before execution;
Equipped with
The specific notification is characterized in that the notification mode of the suspension notification is a specific mode (specific display mode) that is different from the normal mode (normal display mode). Game machine.

When specific notification is performed using a hold notification, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, and the effect state is likely to change while the specific notification is being executed. In addition, since it becomes clear which special information is the target of the expectation level etc. suggested by the specific notification, it is assumed that there will be a large impact if the execution of the specific notification is canceled due to the switching of the production state. Ru. By applying any one of the features B1 to B12 to such a structure, each feature can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be suitably exhibited.

Feature B14. When transitioning from the previous predetermined production state to the other production state in a situation where the notification mode of the suspension notification corresponding to specific special information (the suspension information of the suspension image HW) is set to the specific mode, the specific special Feature B13, characterized in that the display device includes means for setting the notification mode of the suspension notification corresponding to the information to the normal mode (a function of setting the display mode of the suspension image HW to the normal display mode HMa). Game machine.

In the above configuration, when the production state is switched, the suspension notification that had been in a specific mode is changed to a normal mode, so it is easy for players to feel that their status has been downgraded, and that their expectations have decreased. It's easy to misunderstand. By applying any one of the features B1 to B12 to such a structure, each feature can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be suitably exhibited.

Note that for each configuration of the features B1 to B14, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B14, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G15, and features It is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configurations of any one of H1 to H11 and features I1 to I12 individually, or it is possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. is also possible. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. an information acquisition unit (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main controller 162) that acquires special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
an attachment determination means (a function for executing validity determination processing, etc. in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
Granting a benefit that allows the player to receive a benefit based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being a granting response result in which the special information to be determined corresponds to the granting information. means (a function of executing the big prize opening opening/closing process in the main controller 162);
A game repeat operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means that the game repeat operation is terminated once in the game round. , a game time control means (a function of executing game time control processing in the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 75) so that the game time operation is performed;
In order to enable the player to at least recognize the number of pending games before execution, a pending notification (a pending image) is sent to the predetermined notifying means or a notifying device different from the predetermined notifying means (symbol display device 75, a pending lamp). a suspension notification means (a function for executing suspension command corresponding processing in the production control device 143);
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, information corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information is subject to the provision determination, rather than the special information being subject to the provision determination. A destination specifying means for executing a destination specifying process to be specified at a previous timing (a function of executing a pending prefetch process in the main controller 162);
Specific mode means (specific mode means) capable of executing specific mode processing for changing the notification mode of the suspension notification to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode) based on the result of the destination specifying process; In the second embodiment, a function of executing a setting process for a pending notice in the production control device 143 and a process for first execution of a pending notice);
Equipped with
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (when switching from production mode A to production mode B), the system is configured to shift to a restricted state in which execution of the specific mode or the suspension notification is restricted. ,
Setting means (setting means) for setting a notification mode after the restriction state with respect to the suspension notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the restriction state based on the result of the destination specifying process executed during the restriction state. A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a function of executing a second setting process for a pending notice by the production control device 143 in the second embodiment.

In the above configuration, since the notification mode of the suspension notification is set to a specific format based on the result of so-called suspension look-ahead, it is possible to arouse the player's expectations for the result corresponding to the grant even before the start of the game round. can. Under such a configuration, a restriction state may be provided for restricting execution of a specific mode or suspension notification for a pending notification that has already been set as a specific mode. However, if new special information is acquired during the restricted state, assuming that such special information is not changed to the specific aspect, the player's expectations regarding the special information acquired during the restricted state will be There is a concern that it will not be possible to evoke feelings.

In this regard, according to the present configuration, the notification mode of the suspension notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the restricted state can be changed to a specific mode after the restricted state ends. It is possible to arouse players' expectations regarding special information. In this case, the change to the specific mode after the restricted state is performed based on the result of the destination identification process (pending look-ahead processing) executed during the restricted state, so the destination identification process is performed in the same way as when not in the restricted state. be able to. In other words, since there is no need to change the configuration of the destination identification process, the notification mode of the suspension notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the restriction state can be changed after the restriction state, while suppressing the configuration from becoming complicated. becomes possible.

Feature C2. The destination specifying means is configured to perform the destination specifying process on the acquired special information in accordance with the acquisition timing of the special information, regardless of whether or not it is in the restricted state. The gaming machine according to feature C1.

According to the above configuration, the destination identification process can be performed in accordance with the acquisition timing of special information both in the case of the restricted state and in the case of the non-restricted state. There is no need to distinguish between processes. Therefore, it becomes possible to change the notification mode of the suspension notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the restriction state after the restriction state, while suppressing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature C3. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2, wherein the setting means executes the setting when the restricted state ends or after the restricted state ends.

For example, when setting the notification mode after the restriction state based on the result of destination identification processing executed during the restriction state, if the configuration is configured to perform the setting during the restriction state, it will correspond to the notification for hold with the notification mode set. If a game session with special information is executed during a restricted state, the suspension notification may end without being reflected in the setting of the notification mode, and the setting may be wasted. In this regard, in this configuration, since the notification mode is set at the end of the restriction state or after the end of the restriction state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such waste and perform efficient processing.

Feature C4. The restricted state restricts execution of the specific aspect,
Regarding the suspension notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the restricted state, the notification mode during the restricted state is the normal mode, or a predetermined mode (black display mode) different from both the normal mode and the specific mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with means for forcibly setting the display mode of the hold images HB1 and HB2 to the normal display mode HMa or the black display mode.

In the above configuration, in the restricted state where execution of the specific mode is restricted, the notification for suspension is performed in the normal mode or in a predetermined mode that is different from both the normal mode and the specific mode, so that the player can recognize the number of pending games. While doing so, it is possible to disable certain aspects. By applying any one of the features C1 to C3 to such a structure, each feature can be made to function effectively, and each of the effects described above can be suitably exhibited.

Feature C5. When special information is acquired during the restriction state, predetermined information (occurrence pending during the restriction period) is provided so that it can be understood after the restriction state that the special information was acquired during the restriction state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to store information (information on this matter) in a predetermined storage unit (reservation storage area 344c of the RAM 344).

According to the above configuration, even if after the end of the restricted state, the special information acquired before entering the restricted state and the special information acquired during the restricted state are mixed, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage unit The special information acquired during the restricted state can be identified based on the information. As a result, the setting means according to feature C1 can distinguish between special information acquired during the restricted state and special information that is not, and process only the special information acquired during the restricted state. It becomes possible.

Feature C6. As the performance state, a plurality of performance states including a first performance state (performance mode A) and a second performance state (performance mode B) are set,
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (when a predetermined operation is performed by the performance operation unit 36), a performance state transition means (performance state transition means) for transitioning from one performance state to another performance state among a plurality of types of performance states. (a function of executing a production mode switching process in the control device 143),
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to shift to the restriction state when the first performance state shifts to the second performance state.

In the above configuration, when the performance state is switched, the state shifts to the restriction state. In this case, since it is considered that the player will play the game in the performance state after switching, it is assumed that the special information will be acquired during the restricted state. By applying any one of the features C1 to C5 to such a structure, each feature can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be suitably exhibited.

Feature C7. The gaming machine according to feature C6, wherein the second performance state is a performance state in which the ease with which the specific mode process is executed is different from the first performance state.

In the case of a configuration in which the ease of changing to a specific mode differs depending on the presentation state, if the presentation state is switched while maintaining the specific mode, there is a risk that the expectations suggested by the specific mode before and after the switching will not match. In this case, such inconsistency in expectations can be suppressed by restricting execution of specific modes and suspension notifications upon transition from the first performance state to the second performance state. However, even if the above restrictions are applied to the suspension notification that was in a specific mode before transitioning to the second performance state, the new suspension notification that is performed by acquiring special information in the second performance state Concerns arise as to how notifications should be handled. By applying any one of the features C1 to C6 to such a structure, each feature can be made to function effectively, and each of the effects described above can be suitably exhibited.

In addition, in this feature, "the second performance state is a performance state in which the ease with which the specific mode process is executed is different from the first performance state" includes both the first performance state and the second performance state. The specific notification can be executed not only when the execution frequency (execution probability) of the specific notification is different in each performance state, but also when the specific notification is executed in one of the first performance state and the second performance state. It can be understood that configurations that are not executed are also included.

Feature C8. The gaming machine according to feature C6 or feature C7, wherein the gaming machine is configured such that the restriction state ends when the second performance state ends.

In the above configuration, the restriction state is canceled when the second performance state ends, so regarding the suspension notification of special information acquired during the second performance state, during the second performance state, a specific mode or suspension notification is issued. It is possible to restrict the execution of , and then set it to a specific mode in response to the end of the second performance state.

Feature C9. An execution notification unit (execution display area D)
If a game round of special information acquired during the restriction state is played during the restriction state, the notification mode of the predetermined notification corresponding to the special information and performed by the execution notification unit. , comprising means for setting a specific mode different from the normal mode based on the result of the destination specifying process performed during the restricted state (a function of executing the processes of steps S2901 to S2903). The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8.

According to the above configuration, regarding the suspension notification whose notification mode is restricted from being changed due to transition to the restricted state, the change to the specific mode is permitted when the game progresses to the game round of the suspension notification. Therefore, even if a game session of the special information acquired during the restricted state is executed during the restricted state, the degree of expectation regarding the special information can be suggested.

Note that for each configuration of the features C1 to C9, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B14, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G15, and features It is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configurations of any one of H1 to H11 and features I1 to I12 individually, or it is possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. is also possible. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. an information acquisition unit (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main controller 162) that acquires special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
an attachment determination means (a function for executing validity determination processing, etc. in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
Granting a benefit that allows the player to receive a benefit based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being a granting response result in which the special information to be determined corresponds to the granting information. means (a function of executing the big prize opening opening/closing process in the main controller 162);
A game repeat operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means indicates that the game return operation is ended. A game time control means (a function of executing game time control processing in the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 75) so that the game time operation is performed as one time;
In order to enable the player to at least recognize the number of pending games before execution, a pending notification (a pending image) is sent to the predetermined notifying means or a notifying device different from the predetermined notifying means (symbol display device 75, a pending lamp). a suspension notification means (a function for executing suspension command corresponding processing in the production control device 143);
Specifying that it is possible to execute a specific mode process of changing the notification mode of the suspension notification to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode) based on a predetermined execution trigger (prereading result). A mode means (a function of executing a setting process for a pending notice in the production control device 143 and a process for first execution of a pending notice),
Equipped with
In the specific mode, a plurality of types of modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the provision corresponding result is different. has been
A plurality of types of states are set including a first state (performance mode A) and a second state (performance mode B) in which the ease with which the specific mode process is executed differs from the first state,
When the specific mode process is executed in the first state and the notification mode of the suspension notification is set to one of a plurality of types, and then the transition to the second state is made, the notification mode of the suspension notification is changed to the second state. Mode determination for determining whether or not the notification mode in the first state is a predetermined mode that allows players to recognize that they are of the same rank (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with means (a function for executing the production mode switching process by the production control device 143 in the third embodiment).

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the suspension notification is set as a specific mode, and a plurality of types of modes are set in the specific mode so that the degree of expectation for the provision response result is different. Therefore, by making the suspension notification in one of the specific modes, it is possible to suggest the level of expectation, and it is possible to suitably arouse the player's sense of expectation for the result of grant correspondence. Further, in this configuration, a plurality of types of states are set including a first state and a second state in which the first state is different in ease of change to a specific mode. Since switching between these states is performed, it is possible to change the player's mood during the game and prevent him from getting bored with the game.

Under such a configuration, when transitioning from the first state to the second state in a situation where suspension notification of a specific mode is being performed, if the specific mode is maintained, the corresponding expectation level may change to the second state depending on the type. The state will be far different from before the transition, and there is a risk of misunderstanding among players. In this regard, in this configuration, when such a transition occurs, the player recognizes that the notification mode of the suspension notification after the transition to the second state is the same as the notification mode in the first state. It is determined whether or not this mode is possible. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a mismatch of expectations, and it becomes possible to suitably perform suspension notification after transition to the second state.

In addition, in the "second state in which the ease of execution of the specific mode process is different from the first state" in this feature, the second state is set as a state in which it is possible to change the suspension notification to the specific mode. It can be understood that this includes not only a configuration in which the second state is set as a state in which the change to a specific mode of suspension notification is not executed.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the second state is a state in which the specific mode processing is less likely to be executed than the first state.

In the above configuration, in the second state, the notification for suspension is less likely to be in a specific manner than in the first state, so the expectation level for the grant response result when the notification manner for the suspension notification is changed to a specific manner When compared, it is assumed that the second state is higher than the first state. In this case, the transition from the first state to the second state is a transition from a state in which the degree of expectation for the grant response result for a specific aspect is low to a state in which the expectation level is high. By applying the above configuration, it becomes possible to suppress inconsistencies in expectations and appropriately perform suspension notification after transition to the second state.

In addition, in this feature, "the second state is a state in which the specific mode processing is more difficult to be executed than the first state" means that the probability that the suspension notification is in the specific mode in the second state is the first. In addition to a configuration in which the second state is set to be lower than that of the second state, it can be understood that a configuration in which the second state is set as a state in which the change to a specific mode of suspension notification is not executed is also included.

Feature D3. When the notification mode of the suspension notification when transitioning to the second state is higher than a predetermined notification mode (upper limit display mode), the mode determination means sets the notification mode of the suspension notification to the predetermined notification mode. If it is determined that the notification mode of the suspension notification is not allowed to be set as the predetermined notification mode and the notification mode of the suspension notification when transitioning to the second state is below the predetermined notification format, the notification format of the suspension notification is changed to the predetermined notification format. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, characterized in that it is determined that the mode is allowed.

In the above configuration, by comparing the notification mode at the time of transition to the second state and the predetermined notification mode set corresponding to the second state, it is determined whether the notification mode is the same as the notification mode in the first state. is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not each aspect should be of the same rank based on the corresponding expectation level in the second state, and it is possible to suitably perform suspension notifications after transitioning to the second state. Become.

Note that in this feature, the "predetermined notification mode" can also be expressed as "the predetermined notification mode set corresponding to the second state."

Feature D4. Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, information (fluctuation pattern, etc.) corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information is subject to the attachment determination, is determined by the information that the special information is subject to the attachment determination. Comprising a destination specifying means (a function of executing pending prefetching processing in the main controller 162) that executes a destination specifying process at a timing before the target,
The specific mode means is configured to execute the specific mode process based on the result of the previous specifying process,
Any one of features D1 to D3, characterized in that the mode determining means makes the determination based on the result of the destination specifying process regarding the special information to which the suspension notification that is the target of the determination by the mode determining means corresponds. The gaming machine described in .

In the above configuration, the change to the specific mode is performed based on the result of the pre-specifying process (so-called pre-reading result). When the mode determining means determines whether or not the mode is equivalent, the above-mentioned determination is made based on the pre-read result of the suspension notification that is the target of the determination. As a result, the pre-reading result of the suspension notification, that is, the notification result in the game round that will be executed when the special information of the suspension notification becomes the determination target of the provision determination means, and the game round in the game round. Based on the performance, it can be determined whether or not to use an equivalent mode.

Feature D5. A plurality of types of upper limit modes (upper limit display modes) are set corresponding to the results of the destination identification process (return determination table),
The mode determining means includes:
a grasping means (a function of executing the process of step S3105) for grasping the result of the destination specifying process with respect to the special information corresponding to the suspension notification to be judged by the mode judging means;
means for making the determination based on the upper limit aspect corresponding to the result grasped by the grasping means among the plurality of types of modes (a function for executing the process of step S3106);
The gaming machine according to feature D4, comprising:

In the above configuration, multiple types of upper limit modes are set corresponding to the prefetch results, and when determining whether or not to use the same mode by the mode determination means, the prefetch results of the suspension notification that is the target of the determination are The above determination is made by applying the corresponding upper limit mode. Thereby, it is possible to determine whether or not the notification mode of the suspension notification in the case of transitioning to the second state is set to be the same mode without exceeding the expectation level corresponding to the first state.

Feature D6. When executing the specific mode process, the specific mode means executes the suspension notification in a first specific mode (blue display mode HMb) that is one of the plurality of modes, and then Means for changing the notification mode of the hold notification to a second specific mode (green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) higher than the first specific mode (a means for changing the notification mode for the hold notice in the production control device 143) The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, characterized in that the gaming machine has a function of executing a setting process.

In the above configuration, after the notification mode of the reservation notification is set to a specific mode, the notification mode is changed to a higher level mode in stages. In such a configuration, when processing is performed to change the notification mode of the suspension notification to a specific mode in the first state, for example, if a transition to the second state occurs in the early stages after the notification mode is set to the specific mode. , it is assumed that the specific aspect at that time will be a relatively lower-level aspect (an aspect with low expectations), and conversely, if the above transition occurs in the final stage, it is assumed that the specific aspect at that time will be a relatively higher-ranking aspect (an aspect with low expectations). It is assumed that this will be the case. In other words, depending on the timing of transition to the second state, there is a difference in which specific mode is used in the suspension notification. By applying any of the features D1 to D5 to the configuration in this way, it is possible to decide whether or not to use the equivalent mode depending on the notification mode each time, and after the transition to the second state. This makes it possible to suitably perform suspension notifications.

In addition, in this feature, "the mode determining means determines whether or not the mode determining means uses a predetermined mode that allows the player to recognize that the player is on the same level as the notification mode in the first mode immediately before transitioning to the second state. The computer may further include a feature of ``a means for determining.''

Feature D7. The second state is a state in which the specific aspect process is less likely to be executed than the first state,
When the specific mode processing is executed in the second state and the notification mode of the suspension notification is set to one of a plurality of types of modes, and the transition is made to the first state, the determination by the mode determining means is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with means for not executing (a function of skipping the processing of steps S3105 to S3107 when a negative determination is made in step S3104).

In the above configuration, the suspension notification transitions from the second state where it is relatively difficult to be considered as a specific mode to the first state where it is relatively easy to be considered as a specific mode, that is, there is a high expectation for the result of granting response to the specific mode. In the case of switching from a state to a lower state, the configuration is such that it is not determined whether or not the state is in an appositional manner. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the opportunity for the notification mode of the hold notification to be maintained from being excessively limited, and also to reduce the processing load.

Feature D8. When it is determined by the mode determining means to change the notification mode to the predetermined mode, changing means changes the notification mode of the suspension notification that is the subject of the determination from the normal mode to the predetermined mode (executes the process of step S3110) The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, characterized in that the gaming machine has a function of:

In the above configuration, when changing the notification mode of the suspension notification to the peer mode, the mode is first changed to the normal mode and then changed to the peer mode. In this case, the notification mode of the suspension notification can be configured to switch to the normal mode when switching from the first state to the second state, regardless of whether or not the apposition mode is used. This makes it possible to reduce the unnaturalness in the case where the specific mode is changed to the normal mode because it is determined that the mode is not an appositive mode. In addition, by configuring the configuration to change to a specific mode after becoming the normal mode, it is possible to specify the hold notification that has been set to the normal mode after transitioning to the second state, including when it is determined that the mode is not of the same rank. It is possible to arouse a sense of expectation that the mode will be changed, and it is possible to maintain the sense of expectation for the suspension notification.

Feature D9. A specific effect means (a function that executes the processing of steps S1603 to S1605) that executes a specific effect (change suggestion effect) that suggests that the notification mode of the suspension notification changes to a higher level notification mode;
When the notification mode of the suspension notification is changed to the predetermined mode by the changing means, means for restricting the execution of the specific effect (a function for restricting the execution of the change suggestion effect); ,
The gaming machine according to feature D8, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, since it is suggested that the notification mode of the hold notification will change to a higher level notification mode due to the specific effect, a sense of expectation for the change to the higher level notification mode is aroused, and the game to the hold notification is aroused. It is possible to increase the attention of people. In such a configuration, for example, if a specific performance is performed when changing to a mode of the same rank, the player will associate the notification mode of the first state that is stored as a standard and the notification mode of a higher rank. It is assumed that this will happen. In this case, there is a concern that an unnatural impression may be created, as if the specific effect had simply returned to its original state. In this regard, in this configuration, even if the notification mode is changed to a higher level notification mode, when changing from the normal mode to the same mode, the execution of the specific effect is restricted, so it is preferable to prevent such inconvenience from occurring. It becomes possible to suppress the

Feature D10. When it is determined by the mode determining means that the predetermined mode is not selected, means (step The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, further comprising a function of executing the process of S3108.

In the above configuration, when it is determined that the mode is not equivalent, the notification mode of the pending notification that is the subject of the determination is set to the normal mode or the subordinate notification mode, so that the notification mode of the pending notification when transitioning to the second state is It is possible to prevent the notification mode from exceeding the corresponding expectation level in the first state, and it becomes possible to suitably perform suspension notification after transition to the second state.

Note that for each configuration of the features D1 to D10, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B14, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G15, and features It is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configurations of any one of H1 to H11 and features I1 to I12 individually, or it is possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. is also possible. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. an information acquisition unit (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main controller 162) that acquires special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
an attachment determination means (a function for executing validity determination processing, etc. in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
A special gaming state (open/close execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being a grant correspondence result in which the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. special game state means (a function for executing the big prize opening opening/closing process in the main controller 162);
A game repeat operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means that the game repeat operation is terminated once in the game round. , a game time control means (a function of executing game time control processing in the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 75) so that the game time operation is performed;
In order to enable the player to at least recognize the number of pending games before execution, a pending notification (a pending image) is sent to the predetermined notifying means or a notifying device different from the predetermined notifying means (symbol display device 75, a pending lamp). a suspension notification means (a function for executing suspension command corresponding processing in the production control device 143);
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, information corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information is subject to the provision determination, rather than the special information being subject to the provision determination. A destination specifying means for executing a destination specifying process to be specified at a previous timing (a function of executing a pending prefetch process in the main controller 162);
Specifying mode means (holding in the production control device 143) that can set the notification mode of the suspension notification to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode) based on the result of the destination specifying process. (a function to execute setting processing for advance notice and processing for first execution of pending notice);
Equipped with
Apart from the special gaming state, multiple types of gaming states (normal gaming state, high certainty gaming state, time-saving gaming state) are set as gaming states,
When the determination result of the grant determining means becomes the grant corresponding result and the special gaming state is executed, a state transition means (in the main controller 162) for transitioning to one of the plurality of gaming states function to execute transition processing at the end of open/close execution mode),
With respect to the notification for reservation that was set to a specific mode before the special gaming state, if the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are different, the notification mode after the special gaming state is set to the special mode. A specifying means for making the notification mode different from the notification mode before the gaming state (a function of executing a setting process for returning to advance notice by the production control device 143 in the fourth embodiment);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, since the notification mode of the suspension notification is set to a specific format based on the result of so-called suspension look-ahead, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the grant corresponding result, and to suitably adjust the player's expectations. can be evoked. In addition, in this configuration, when a plurality of types of game states are set as the game state, the determination result of the grant determination means becomes the grant corresponding result, and a special game state is executed, one of the plurality of game states will be transferred to the gaming state. In such a configuration where multiple types of gaming states are provided, even if the special information used for awarding determination is the same, differences may occur in the awarding determination results and game round presentations performed in the game round depending on the gaming state. There is. In this regard, in this configuration, regarding the suspension notification set in a specific mode before the execution of the special gaming state, if the gaming state before and after the execution of the special gaming state is different, the notification mode after the special gaming state is changed to a special mode. Since the notification format is different from the one before the gaming state, even if the award determination result, game rendition, etc. change due to the difference in the gaming state, it is possible to prevent the suspension notification from misleading the player. It becomes possible to suitably perform suspension notification in the gaming state after the transition.

Feature E2. When the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are different, the specifying means is configured to determine whether the notification for reservation is set in a specific mode before the special gaming state, or when the gaming state after the special gaming state is different. The gaming machine according to feature E1, further comprising means for setting the notification mode to the normal mode (a function of executing the process of step S3417 after a negative determination is made in step S3504).

In the above configuration, when the gaming state after the special gaming state is different from the gaming state before the special gaming state, the mode is changed to the normal mode and the suspension notification is performed. As a result, it is possible to suitably prevent players from being misled by the suspension notification that is not consistent with the actual level of expectation after the special game state. Further, by uniformly using the normal mode, it is possible to eliminate the need for detailed adjustment of the notification mode in accordance with changes in the degree of expectation, and it is also possible to simplify the processing configuration.

Feature E3. The identifying means is
a first means as a means for setting the normal mode;
After the notification mode is set to the normal mode by the first means, it is determined whether or not the notification mode of the suspension notification that has been set to the normal mode is set to a specific mode, and based on the result, the notification mode of the suspension notification is determined. a second means for setting (a function for executing the third execution process of the pending notice);
The gaming machine according to feature E2, comprising:

Changing the notification mode of the suspension notification which was set to a specific mode before the special gaming state to the normal mode after the special gaming state based on the difference between the gaming state after the special gaming state and the gaming state before the special gaming state. Although this can absorb fluctuations in award determination results, game rendition, etc. due to changes in the gaming state, there is a concern that it will not be possible to notify or suggest the expectation level of the special information corresponding to the suspension notification. In this regard, according to this configuration, since the suspension notification that is set to the normal mode is given an opportunity to change to the specific mode, it can be promoted to the specific mode after the fact, and the expectation level is notified. It becomes possible to do the same.

Feature E4. An execution notification unit (execution display area D)
The identifying means is
a first means as a means for setting the normal mode;
In a game round in which the notification for suspension is set to the normal mode by the first means, it is determined whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification corresponding to the notification for suspension is to be set to a specific mode different from the normal mode, and the result is a second means for setting a notification mode of the predetermined notification based on (a function for executing a third execution process of a pending notice);
The gaming machine according to feature E2 or feature E3, characterized by comprising:

Changing the notification mode of the suspension notification which was set to a specific mode before the special gaming state to the normal mode after the special gaming state based on the difference between the gaming state after the special gaming state and the gaming state before the special gaming state. Although this can absorb fluctuations in award determination results, game rendition, etc. due to changes in the gaming state, there is a concern that it will not be possible to notify or suggest the expectation level of the special information corresponding to the suspension notification. In this regard, in this configuration, regarding the suspension notification set to the normal mode, an opportunity to change to the specific mode is given as the game progresses to the game round of the suspension notification. Therefore, even if the notification mode is changed from the specific mode to the normal mode, it can be promoted to the specific mode after the fact, and it becomes possible to notify the level of expectation.

Feature E5. When a game round is executed, the game round is executed based on the special information (pending information) that was the subject of the grant determination that triggered the game round, or the specific information (variation pattern) derived from the special information. Equipped with a game time performance setting means (a function for executing special symbol fluctuation display processing in the performance control device 143) for setting the game time performance (reach performance, etc.) to be performed,
The second means determines whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is to be a specific mode based on the special information or the specific information referred to by the game run performance setting device. The gaming machine described in E4.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is to be a specific mode based on the special information or specific information used for setting the game run performance by the game run performance setting means. As a result, when the game state after the special game state is different from the game state before the special game state, the notification mode of the predetermined notification can be changed while adapting to the game round performance actually performed in the game round after the special game state. can be changed in a specific manner.

In addition, when this feature is applied to the above-mentioned feature E2, "the second means sets the notification mode of the predetermined notification in a specific mode based on the special information or the specific information referred to by the game cycle effect setting means. The second means determines whether or not to use the special information or the specific information referred to by the game run production setting means regardless of the information stored in the predetermined storage section. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is to be a specific mode."

Feature E6. In the specific mode, a plurality of types of modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the provision corresponding result is different. has been
It is configured such that information corresponding to the notification mode of the suspension notification set to the specific mode before the execution of the special gaming state can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (return area 344f of the RAM 344),
When the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are the same, the specifying means stores information in the predetermined memory regarding the suspension notification set in a specific mode before the special gaming state. A feature characterized in that it is provided with a mode setting means (a function of executing setting processing for advance notice return in the production control device 143) for setting a notification mode after the special gaming state based on information stored in the section. The gaming machine according to any one of E1 to E5.

For example, if the configuration is such that the notification mode after the special gaming state is set based on the result of pending lookahead performed before the special gaming state, there is a concern that the notification mode will be set to a different notification mode from the notification mode before the special gaming state. be. In this regard, in this configuration, when a special gaming state is executed in a situation where a specific mode of suspension notification exists, information on the notification mode at that time is stored, and the gaming state after the special gaming state is changed to the one before the special gaming state. If the game state is the same as the game state, the notification mode after the special game state is set based on the stored information. This makes it possible to suitably restore the notification mode after the special gaming state to the original mode before the special gaming state.

In addition, in this feature, "a mode setting means for setting the notification mode after the special gaming state based on information stored in the predetermined storage unit with respect to the suspension notification set to a specific mode before the special gaming state" ” to “Regarding the suspension notification that was set to a specific mode before the special gaming state, the notification after the special gaming state is determined based on the information stored in the predetermined storage unit, regardless of the result of the destination specifying process.” It can also be expressed as "aspect setting means for setting an aspect".

Feature E7. In the specific mode, a plurality of types of modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the provision corresponding result is different. has been
When the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are the same, the specifying means determines whether or not the special gaming state is correct for the suspension notification set in a specific mode before the special gaming state. Setting a mode in which the subsequent notification mode is set to a predetermined mode (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) that allows the player to recognize that the player is of the same rank as the notice mode before the special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a means (a function of executing setting processing for advance notice return in the performance control device 143).

In the above configuration, if the gaming state after the special gaming state is the same as the gaming state before the special gaming state, the notification mode after the special gaming state is recognized as being of the same rank as the notification mode before the special gaming state. In order to make it possible to do so, it is possible to arouse expectations in the same way after the special gaming state with respect to the hold notification that aroused the player's expectations by changing to a specific mode before the special gaming state. .

Feature E8. In the specific mode, a plurality of types of modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the provision corresponding result is different. has been
The identifying means is
If the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are different, the notification mode after the special gaming state is changed to the normal mode for the suspension notification that was set to the specific mode before the special gaming state. a first means for setting the mode (a function of executing the process of step S3417 after a negative determination is made in step S3504);
When the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are the same, the notification mode after the special gaming state is changed to the notification mode after the special gaming state for the suspension notification that was set to the specific mode before the special gaming state. A second means (effect control device) for setting a notification mode before the special game state to a predetermined mode (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) that allows players to recognize that they are of the same rank. 143);
Equipped with
The second means includes means (a function of executing the process of step S3507) capable of setting the notification mode after the special gaming state to the normal mode and then to the predetermined mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E7.

In the above configuration, when the notification mode after the special game state is made to be the same as the notification mode before the special game state, it is first changed to the normal mode and then changed to the same mode. In this case, regardless of whether or not the gaming state after the special gaming state is the same as the gaming state before the special gaming state, as the special gaming state is executed, the notification mode of the suspension notification changes to the specific mode. The mode is changed from to the normal mode. This makes it possible to reduce unnaturalness when the mode is changed to the normal mode due to a difference in the gaming state. In addition, by adopting a configuration in which the mode changes to a specific mode after the normal mode, the hold notification that is set to the normal mode changes to the specific mode in the gaming state after the special gaming state, including when the gaming state is different. It is possible to arouse a sense of expectation that the notification will be held, and it is possible to maintain the sense of expectation for the suspension notification.

Feature E9. The specifying means determines whether or not a game state before the special game state and a game state after the special game state are the same in the special game state or when the special game state ends. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E8, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a state determining means (a function for executing the process of step S3416).

In the above configuration, the equality determination as to whether or not the gaming states are the same is performed during execution of the special gaming state or when the special gaming state ends. As a result, it is possible to quickly respond after the special game state as to what form the notification form for reservation notification, which was made to be a specific form before the special game state, should take after the special game state. Therefore, after the special game state, even if the number of reservations prior to the reservation notification is small, the notification mode of the reservation notification can be suitably adjusted.

Feature E10. Variable that can be switched between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter than the first state. Ball entry means (variable winning device 65);
A switching control means (a function of executing a big winning opening opening/closing process in the main control device 162) that executes switching control to change the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state; ,
Equipped with
The special game state is a state in which the switching control is performed at least once,
The gaming machine according to feature E9, wherein the game state determining means performs the determination during a period in which the variable ball entry means is in the second state.

When the variable ball entry means is in the first state in the special game state, the processing load is relatively high, as it is necessary to perform performances based on the entry of game balls into the variable ball entry means. It is assumed that If such a period is used to determine equality, there is a concern that it will result in an even higher load. In this regard, in this configuration, since the equality determination is performed using the period in which the variable ball entry means is in the second state, it is possible to reduce the processing load.

Feature E11. The grant determination means performs the grant determination based on first information (value of jackpot random number counter C1) included in special information,
A game round performance (reach performance) performed in the game round based on second information (value of a fluctuation type counter CS) included in the special information or specific information (fluctuation pattern) derived from the second information. Equipped with a game turn effect setting means (a function for executing special figure fluctuation display processing in the effect control device 143) to set,
The destination specifying process includes converting the second information included in the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means or the specific information corresponding to the second information to the first information included in the predetermined special information. is specified at a timing before it becomes the subject of the grant determination,
The plurality of types of gaming states correspond to a first gaming state (one of the normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state, and high-precision gaming state) and predetermined second information (variation type counter CS with a value of 80). A second gaming state (a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, or a high-precision gaming state, which is different from the first gaming state) in which the gaming performance or specific information is different from the first gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E9.

In the above configuration, the game round effect is set based on the second information included in the special information, and even if the value of the second information is the same in the first game state and the second game state, the corresponding game performance is set based on the second information included in the special information. It is configured so that the rendition is different. Therefore, if the gaming state after the special gaming state is different from the gaming state before the special gaming state, if the notification mode after the special gaming state in the reservation notification is made the same as the notification mode before the special gaming state, the special gaming state There is a possibility that the game rendition suggested by the suspension notification before and after the special game state will not match. By applying any one of the features E1 to E9 to such a structure, each feature can be made to function effectively, and each of the effects described above can be suitably exhibited.

Feature E12. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E10, further comprising means for not executing the suspension notification in the special gaming state (a function of executing the process of step S3411).

When changing the notification mode of the suspension notification upon the end of the special gaming state, if the suspension notification that had been in effect is suddenly changed to another mode at the end of the special gaming state, the player may feel unnatural. There are concerns about giving an impression. For example, if the notification mode of the suspension notification is downgraded to a normal mode or a lower level notification mode, it is assumed that this will be easily noticed by the player and give an unnatural impression. In this regard, in this configuration, since the notification for reservation is not executed in the special gaming state, when changing the notification mode, it is necessary to interpose a period in which the notification for reservation itself, including other notifications for reservation, is not performed. I can do it. As a result, changes in the notification mode are prevented from being noticeable, and unnaturalness can be alleviated. Further, since the specific notification is not executed, there is also the advantage that it becomes easier to attract the attention of the player to the performance for the special game state.

Feature E13. an information acquisition unit (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main controller 162) that acquires special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
an attachment determination means (a function for executing validity determination processing, etc. in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
A special gaming state (open/close execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being a grant correspondence result in which the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. special game state means (a function for executing the big prize opening opening/closing process in the main controller 162);
A game repeat operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means that the game repeat operation is terminated once in the game round. , a game time control means (a function of executing game time control processing in the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 75) so that the game time operation is performed;
In order to enable the player to at least recognize the number of pending games before execution, a pending notification (a pending image) is sent to the predetermined notifying means or a notifying device different from the predetermined notifying means (symbol display device 75, a pending lamp). a suspension notification means (a function for executing suspension command corresponding processing in the production control device 143);
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, information corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information is subject to the provision determination, rather than the special information being subject to the provision determination. A destination specifying means for executing a destination specifying process to be specified at a previous timing (a function of executing a pending prefetch process in the main controller 162);
Specifying mode means (holding in the production control device 143) that can set the notification mode of the suspension notification to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode) based on the result of the destination specifying process. (a function to execute setting processing for advance notice and processing for first execution of pending notice);
Equipped with
Apart from the special gaming state, multiple types of gaming states (normal gaming state, high certainty gaming state, time-saving gaming state) are set as gaming states,
When the determination result of the grant determining means becomes the grant corresponding result and the special gaming state is executed, a state transition means (in the main controller 162) for transitioning to one of the plurality of gaming states function to execute transition processing at the end of open/close execution mode),
Regarding the suspension notification that was set to a specific mode before the special gaming state, when the notification mode after the special gaming state is the same as the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state. and a specifying means (a function of executing a setting process for advance notice return by the production control device 143 in the fourth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, since the notification mode of the suspension notification is set to a specific format based on the result of so-called suspension look-ahead, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the grant corresponding result, and to suitably adjust the player's expectations. can be evoked. In addition, in this configuration, when a plurality of types of game states are set as the game state, the determination result of the grant determination means becomes the grant corresponding result, and a special game state is executed, one of the plurality of game states will be transferred to the gaming state. In such a configuration where multiple types of gaming states are provided, even if the special information used for awarding determination is the same, differences may occur in the awarding determination results and game round presentations performed in the game round depending on the gaming state. There is. In this regard, in this configuration, regarding the suspension notification set in a specific mode before the execution of the special gaming state, the notification mode in the gaming state after the special gaming state is different from the gaming state before and after the execution of the special gaming state. In order to make the notifications different depending on whether they are the same or not, it is possible to set the notification mode based on changes in the award judgment results and game rendition caused by differences in the gaming state, and to set the notification mode for suspension in the gaming state after the transition. It becomes possible to carry out the process suitably.

Feature E14. In the specific mode, a plurality of types of modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the provision corresponding result is different. has been
It is configured such that information corresponding to the notification mode of the suspension notification set as a specific mode before the execution of the special gaming state can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (return area 344f of the RAM 344),
When the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are the same, the specifying means stores information in the predetermined memory regarding the suspension notification set in a specific mode before the special gaming state. A feature characterized in that it is provided with a mode setting means (a function of executing setting processing for advance notice return in the production control device 143) for setting a notification mode after the special gaming state based on information stored in the section. The gaming machine described in E13.

For example, if the configuration is such that the notification mode after the special gaming state is set based on the result of pending lookahead performed before the special gaming state, there is a concern that the notification mode will be set to a different notification mode from the notification mode before the special gaming state. be. In this regard, in this configuration, when a special gaming state is executed in a situation where a specific mode of suspension notification exists, information on the notification mode at that time is stored, and the gaming state after the special gaming state is changed to the one before the special gaming state. If the game state is the same as the game state, the notification mode after the special game state is set based on the stored information. This makes it possible to suitably restore the notification mode after the special gaming state to the original mode before the special gaming state.

In addition, in this feature, "a mode setting means for setting the notification mode after the special gaming state based on information stored in the predetermined storage unit with respect to the suspension notification set to a specific mode before the special gaming state" ” to “Regarding the suspension notification that was set to a specific mode before the special gaming state, the notification after the special gaming state is determined based on the information stored in the predetermined storage unit, regardless of the result of the destination specifying process.” It can also be expressed as "aspect setting means for setting an aspect".

Feature E15. In the specific mode, a plurality of types of modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the provision corresponding result is different. has been
When the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are the same, the specifying means determines whether or not the special gaming state is correct for the suspension notification set in a specific mode before the special gaming state. Setting a mode in which the subsequent notification mode is set to a predetermined mode (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) that allows the player to recognize that the player is of the same rank as the notice mode before the special game state. The gaming machine according to feature E13 or feature E14, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a means (a function of executing a setting process for advance notice return in the performance control device 143).

In the above configuration, if the gaming state after the special gaming state is the same as the gaming state before the special gaming state, the notification mode after the special gaming state is recognized as being of the same rank as the notification mode before the special gaming state. In order to make it possible to do so, it is possible to arouse expectations in the same way after the special gaming state with respect to the hold notification that aroused the player's expectations by changing to a specific mode before the special gaming state. .

Feature E16. When the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are different, the specifying means is configured to determine whether the notification for reservation is set in a specific mode before the special gaming state, or when the gaming state after the special gaming state is different. The gaming machine according to any one of features E13 to E15, further comprising means for setting the notification mode to the normal mode (a function of executing the process of step S3417 after a negative determination is made in step S3504).

In the above configuration, when the gaming state after the special gaming state is different from the gaming state before the special gaming state, the mode is changed to the normal mode and the suspension notification is performed. As a result, it is possible to suitably prevent players from being misled by the suspension notification that is not consistent with the actual level of expectation after the special game state. Further, by uniformly using the normal mode, it is possible to eliminate the need for detailed adjustment of the notification mode in accordance with changes in the degree of expectation, and it is also possible to simplify the processing configuration.

Feature E17. An execution notification unit (execution display area D)
The identifying means is
a first means as a means for setting the normal mode;
In the game round in which the suspension notification is set to the normal mode by the first means, it is determined whether the notification mode of the predetermined notification corresponding to the suspension notification is to be set to a specific mode different from the normal mode, and the result is a second means for setting a notification mode of the predetermined notification based on (a function for executing a third execution process of a pending notice);
The gaming machine according to feature E16, comprising:

Changing the notification mode of the suspension notification which was set to a specific mode before the special gaming state to the normal mode after the special gaming state based on the difference between the gaming state after the special gaming state and the gaming state before the special gaming state. Although this can absorb fluctuations in award determination results, game rendition, etc. due to changes in the gaming state, there is a concern that it will not be possible to notify or suggest the expectation level of the special information corresponding to the suspension notification. In this regard, in this configuration, regarding the suspension notification set to the normal mode, an opportunity to change to the specific mode is given as the game progresses to the game round of the suspension notification. Therefore, even if the notification mode is changed from the specific mode to the normal mode, it can be promoted to the specific mode after the fact, and it becomes possible to notify the level of expectation.

Feature E18. When a game round is executed, the game round is executed based on the special information (pending information) that was the subject of the grant determination that triggered the game round, or the specific information (variation pattern) derived from the special information. Equipped with a game time performance setting means (a function for executing special symbol fluctuation display processing in the performance control device 143) for setting the game time performance (reach performance, etc.) to be performed,
The second means determines whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is to be a specific mode based on the special information or the specific information referred to by the game run performance setting device. The gaming machine described in E17.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is to be a specific mode based on the special information or specific information used for setting the game run performance by the game run performance setting means. As a result, when the game state after the special game state is different from the game state before the special game state, the notification mode of the predetermined notification can be changed while adapting to the game round performance actually performed in the game round after the special game state. can be changed in a specific manner.

In addition, when this feature is applied to the above-mentioned feature E2, "the second means sets the notification mode of the predetermined notification in a specific mode based on the special information or the specific information referred to by the game cycle effect setting means. The second means determines whether or not to use the special information or the specific information referred to by the game run production setting means regardless of the information stored in the predetermined storage section. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is to be a specific mode."

Feature E19. In the specific mode, a plurality of types of modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set so that the degree of expectation for the provision corresponding result is different. has been
The identifying means is
When the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are the same, the notification mode after the special gaming state is changed to the notification mode after the special gaming state for the suspension notification that was set to the specific mode before the special gaming state. A first means (effect control device) for setting a notification mode before the special game state to a predetermined mode (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) that allows players to recognize that they are of the same rank. 143);
If the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are different, the notification mode after the special gaming state is changed to the normal mode for the suspension notification that was set to the specific mode before the special gaming state. a second means for setting the mode (a function of executing the process of step S3417 after a negative determination is made in step S3504);
Equipped with
The first means includes means (a function of executing the process of step S3507) capable of setting the notification mode after the special gaming state to the normal mode and then to the predetermined mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features E13 to E18.

In the above configuration, when the notification mode after the special game state is made to be the same as the notification mode before the special game state, it is first changed to the normal mode and then changed to the same mode. In this case, regardless of whether or not the gaming state after the special gaming state is the same as the gaming state before the special gaming state, as the special gaming state is executed, the notification mode of the suspension notification changes to the specific mode. The mode is changed from to the normal mode. This makes it possible to reduce unnaturalness when the mode is changed to the normal mode due to a difference in the gaming state. In addition, by adopting a configuration in which the mode changes to a specific mode after the normal mode, the hold notification that is set to the normal mode changes to the specific mode in the gaming state after the special gaming state, including when the gaming state is different. It is possible to arouse a sense of expectation that the notification will be held, and it is possible to maintain the sense of expectation for the suspension notification.

Note that it is possible to apply the configurations of the features E9 to E12 to the features E13 to E19. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying these configurations.

Note that for each configuration of the features E1 to E19, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B14, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G15, and features It is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configurations of any one of H1 to H11 and features I1 to I12 individually, or it is possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. is also possible. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic group F>
Feature F1. an information acquisition unit (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main controller 162) that acquires special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
acquisition information storage means (retention ball storage area 314b) for storing special information (retention information) acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
an attachment determination means (a function for executing validity determination processing, etc. in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
A specific notification means (effect control) that executes a specific notification (display of a pending image) corresponding to the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means before the predetermined special information becomes the subject of the provision determination. (a function of executing the first execution process of the pending notice in the device 143);
Equipped with
Regarding the predetermined special information, information (fluctuation pattern, etc.) corresponding to the judgment result when the predetermined special information is subject to the provision judgment, before the special information becomes the subject of the provision judgment. A first destination specifying means (a function of executing the first pending pre-reading process by the production control device 143 in the fifth embodiment) that specifies at a predetermined timing (timing of obtaining pending information);
Judgment when a predetermined event (opening/closing execution mode, etc.) occurs during the execution of specific notification corresponding to the predetermined special information, and the predetermined special information becomes the subject of the provision determination regarding the predetermined special information. A second destination specifying means (by the effect control device 143 in the fifth embodiment) that specifies information (variation pattern, etc.) corresponding to the result at a specific timing (such as the end timing of the opening/closing execution mode) after the predetermined event. function to execute the second pending look-ahead process);
Equipped with
The specific notification means is
A first means for setting a notification mode of a specific notification corresponding to the predetermined special information before the predetermined event based on the identification result of the first destination identification means (execution of a setting process for a pending notice in the production control device 143) function) and
A second means for setting a notification mode of a specific notification corresponding to the predetermined special information after the predetermined event based on the identification result of the second destination identification means (execution of setting processing for advance notice return in the production control device 143) function) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed based on the result of so-called look-ahead processing, the specific notification can indicate the level of expectation for the result corresponding to the grant, and suitably arouse the player's sense of expectation. I can do it. In such a configuration, the state changes with the occurrence of a predetermined event, and even if the value of the special information used for the provision determination is the same, there may be a difference in the results of the provision determination before and after the predetermined event. In this regard, in this configuration, when a predetermined event occurs during execution of a specific notification, the pre-reading process is executed again after the predetermined event for the special information that triggered the specific notification, and based on the result, the specific notification is issued. Set the notification mode. Therefore, the notification mode of the specific notification performed before the predetermined event can be adjusted to a mode suitable after the predetermined event, and it becomes possible to suitably perform the specific notification after the predetermined event.

Feature F2. A game repeat operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means that the game repeat operation is terminated once in the game round. , comprising a game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the main control device 162) for controlling the game time operation to be performed,
The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the specific notification means is configured to be able to execute the specific notification across game rounds.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed over a relatively long period of time, a predetermined event is likely to occur during execution of the specific notification. By applying the configuration of the feature F1 to such a configuration, the feature can be made to function effectively and the above effects can be suitably exhibited.

Feature F3. The awarding information (random value corresponding to a jackpot) or the determination condition (winning probability) in the awarding determination means may be different between before the predetermined event and after the predetermined event. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2.

In the above configuration, even if the value of the special information is the same, a difference may occur in the result of the provision determination before the predetermined event and after the predetermined event. For this reason, if a specific notification is made after a predetermined event in a notification mode before the predetermined event, there is a concern that a situation will be suggested that is different from the notification result (result of grant determination) that is actually notified in the game round. By applying the configuration of feature F1 or F2 to such a configuration, the notification mode can be adjusted to match the actual notification result in the game round, and notification after a predetermined event can be performed. It becomes possible to suitably perform specific notification after a predetermined event.

Feature F4. The gaming machine according to feature F3, wherein the second destination specifying means performs the specification by applying the provision information or the determination condition corresponding to the predetermined event.

In the above configuration, when prefetching is executed again after a predetermined event for the special information that triggered the specific notification, the prefetching is performed by applying the attached information and judgment conditions that correspond to the state after the predetermined event. . As a result, it is possible to adjust the notification mode to match the actual notification result in the game round regarding the specific notification that was performed before the predetermined event, and to perform the notification after the predetermined event. It becomes possible to perform notification appropriately.

Feature F5. A game repeat operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means that the game repeat operation is terminated once in the game round. , a game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the main control device 162) so that the game time operation is performed;
A game round performance setting means (performance control device 143) that sets a game round performance (reach performance, etc.) to be performed in a game round based on special information (reservation information) or specific information (fluctuation pattern) derived from the special information. function to execute special figure fluctuation display processing),
Equipped with
The gaming cycle performance corresponding to predetermined special information or predetermined specific information derived from the predetermined special information (variation pattern with a value of 80) may be different before the predetermined event and after the predetermined event. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4.

In the above configuration, even if the value of the special information or the specific information is the same, a difference may occur in the game run effect set by the game run setting means before the predetermined event and after the predetermined event. For this reason, if a specific notification is made after a predetermined event in a notification mode before the predetermined event, there is a concern that a situation may be suggested that is different from the game round performance that is actually performed in the game round. By applying the configuration described in any of the features F1 to F4 above to such a configuration, the notification mode can be changed to match the actual game play with respect to the specific notification that was performed before the predetermined event. It is possible to perform notification after a predetermined event by making adjustments, and it becomes possible to suitably perform specific notification after a predetermined event.

Feature F6. The first destination specifying means and the second destination specifying means are means for specifying, as information corresponding to the determination result, a game round performance corresponding to the predetermined special information or specific information corresponding to the predetermined special information. Equipped with
According to feature F5, the second destination specifying means specifies a game run performance corresponding to the predetermined special information or specific information corresponding to the predetermined special information in response to the predetermined event. Game machine.

In the above configuration, when pre-reading processing is executed again after a predetermined event for the special information that triggered the specific notification, the game rendition and the specific information are pre-read in accordance with the state after the predetermined event. As a result, it is possible to adjust the notification mode to match the actual game play with respect to the specific notification that was performed before the predetermined event, and to make the notification after the predetermined event. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature F7. The second means sets the notification mode after the predetermined event based on the notification mode before the predetermined event and the identification result of the second destination specifying means. The game machine described.

For example, if the configuration is such that the notification mode of the specific notification changes frequently with the occurrence of a predetermined event, there is a concern that the player may feel uncomfortable. In this regard, in this configuration, the notification mode after the predetermined event is set by taking into consideration not only the identification result of the second destination specifying means but also the notification mode before the predetermined event. In light of the identification result of the second destination identification means, if there is no problem in using the same notification mode after the predetermined event, specific notification can be carried out by taking over the notification mode before the predetermined event. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the notification mode from changing excessively after the predetermined event, and it becomes possible to perform specific notification after the predetermined event in a natural manner.

Feature F8. The specific notification includes multiple types of modes (normal display mode HMa, blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) are set,
The second means determines that the notification mode after the predetermined event is the same as the notification mode before the predetermined event based on the notification mode before the predetermined event and the identification result of the second destination specifying means. A mode determining means (a function that executes the processing of steps S4703 to S4705) for determining whether or not a predetermined mode (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) that can be recognized as The gaming machine according to feature F7.

In the above configuration, a plurality of types of notification modes are set as notification modes of the specific notification, so that the degree of expectation for a result corresponding to provision differs. In such a configuration in which the expectation level is set stepwise and a large number of notification modes are provided, the range of expectation levels that one notification mode corresponds to is narrow, so the notification mode before the predetermined event is used to If a later specific notification is made, a difference is likely to occur in the level of expectation suggested before and after the predetermined event. In this regard, in this configuration, based on the notification mode before the predetermined event and the identification result of the second party specifying means, the notification mode after the predetermined event is recognized as being of the same rank as the notification mode before the predetermined event. Therefore, even in a situation where a large number of notification modes are set, it is possible to suitably perform a specific notification after a predetermined event by matching expectations.

Feature F9. The second means is configured to change the notification mode after the predetermined event to a normal mode (normal display mode HMa) or a lower level notification than the notification mode before the predetermined event, when the mode determining means determines that the predetermined mode is not selected. The gaming machine according to feature F8, further comprising means for setting a mode (a function of executing the process of step S3417 after making a negative determination in step S4706).

In the above configuration, when it is determined that the mode is not equivalent, the notification mode of the specific notification subject to the determination is set to the normal mode or the lower level notification mode, so the notification mode after the predetermined event corresponds to the one before the predetermined event. Exceeding expectations can be suppressed, and specific notification after a predetermined event can be suitably performed.

Feature F10. A game repeat operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means that the game repeat operation is terminated once in the game round. A game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the main control device 162) that controls the game time operation to be performed;
A suspension notifying means (a function of executing a process corresponding to a pending command in the performance control device 143) that performs a pending notification (a pending image) so that the player can at least recognize the number of pending games before execution;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9, wherein the specific notification is the suspension notification.

When a specific notification is performed using a pending notification, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, and a predetermined event is likely to occur during the execution of the specific notification. In addition, since it becomes clear which special information is the object of the expectation level suggested by the specific notification, it is assumed that the impact will be large if there is a difference in the expectation level before and after the predetermined event. By applying any one of the features F1 to F9 to such a structure, each feature can be made to function effectively, and each of the effects described above can be suitably exhibited.

Feature F11. A special gaming state (open/close execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being a grant correspondence result in which the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. a special gaming state (a function of executing the big prize opening opening/closing process in the main controller 162),
Apart from the special gaming state, multiple types of gaming states (normal gaming state, high certainty gaming state, time-saving gaming state) are set as gaming states,
When the determination result of the grant determining means becomes the grant corresponding result and the special gaming state is executed, a state transition means (in the main controller 162) for transitioning to one of the plurality of gaming states function to execute transition processing at the end of open/close execution mode),
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F10, wherein the predetermined event is the special gaming state.

There are gaming machines that use the transition to the special gaming state as an opportunity to transition to a gaming state such as a normal gaming state, a high-precision gaming state, or a time-saving gaming state. In such gaming machines, even if the value of the special information used for grant determination is the same in the game state before and after the special game state, the result of the grant determination before and after the special game state is different. Differences may occur. By applying any one of the features F1 to F10 to such a structure, each feature can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be suitably exhibited.

Feature F12. Feature F11 characterized in that, when the special gaming state is entered during execution of a specific notification, a means for not executing the specific notification in the special gaming state (a function of executing the process of step S3411) is provided. The gaming machine described in .

When changing the notification mode of a specific notification upon the end of a special gaming state, if the specific notification that had been in progress is suddenly changed to another mode at the end of the special gaming state, it may give the player an unnatural impression. There are concerns that it may be affected. For example, when the notification mode of a specific notification is downgraded to a normal mode or a lower-level notification mode, it is likely that this will be easily noticed by the player and give an unnatural impression. In this regard, in this configuration, since specific notification is not performed in the special gaming state, it is possible to interpose a period in which specific notification itself is not performed when changing the notification mode. As a result, changes in the notification mode are prevented from being noticeable, and unnaturalness can be alleviated. Further, since the specific notification is not executed, there is also the advantage that it becomes easier to attract the attention of the player to the performance for the special game state.

Note that for each configuration of the features F1 to F12, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B14, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G15, and features It is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configurations of any one of H1 to H11 and features I1 to I12 individually, or it is possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. is also possible. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. an information acquisition unit (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main controller 162) that acquires special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
an attachment determination means (a function for executing validity determination processing, etc. in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
Granting a benefit that allows the player to receive a benefit based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being a granting response result in which the special information to be determined corresponds to the granting information. means (a function of executing the big prize opening opening/closing process in the main controller 162);
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, information corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information is subject to the provision determination, rather than the special information being subject to the provision determination. A destination specifying means for executing a destination specifying process to be specified at a previous timing (a function of executing a pending prefetch process in the main controller 162);
A first specific notification means (for a reservation notice in the production control device 143) that causes a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 75) to execute a specific notification (pending notice production) based on the result of the destination specification process. a function to execute the setting process and the first execution process of the pending notice);
Equipped with
The first specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to one of multiple types of notification modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe). It is equipped with a first notification mode setting means (a function of executing a setting process for a pending notice in the production control device 143), and is configured to execute the specific notification based on the setting result of the first notification mode setting means. Ori,
If a predetermined abnormality (power outage state) occurs during the execution of the specific notification, a second specific notification means (in the sixth embodiment, the second specific notification means) re-executes the specific notification after the predetermined abnormality is resolved. A function of executing a process for returning a suspended notice by the control device 143, a function of executing a production setting process by the production control device 143 in the seventh embodiment),
The second specific notification means may set the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed after the predetermined abnormality is resolved to the notification mode of the specific notification before the predetermined abnormality occurs, and the notification mode of the specific notification before the predetermined abnormality occurs. A second notification mode setting means (in the sixth and seventh embodiments, the production control A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a function for executing display mode setting processing by the device 143.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed based on the result of so-called look-ahead processing, the specific notification can indicate the level of expectation for the result corresponding to the grant, and suitably arouse the player's sense of expectation. I can do it. At that time, multiple types of notification modes are set as the notification mode of the specific notification, so by setting one of these multiple types of notification and executing the specific notification, the above expectation degree is assigned a magnitude and suggested. be able to. Under such a configuration, if a predetermined abnormality occurs in a situation where specific notification is being performed, and the abnormality is subsequently resolved, the specific notification that was being executed before the abnormality occurred will be re-executed. . Thereby, the specific notification can be restored after the abnormality is resolved, and it is suppressed that the specific notification disappears due to the occurrence of the abnormality. At that time, the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed is set based on the notification mode before the abnormality occurrence, the look-ahead result performed before the fault occurrence, or the look-ahead result performed anew after the fault occurrence. It becomes possible to suitably restore the specific notification that was being performed.

Feature G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, characterized in that, if the predetermined abnormality occurs during execution of specific notification, the specific notification is not executed.

In a configuration in which a specific notification is not executed due to the occurrence of an abnormality, the player is likely to feel anxious that not only the specific notification but also the level of expectation attached to the specific notification has disappeared. By applying the configuration of feature G1 to such a configuration, the feature can be made to function effectively and the above effects can be suitably exhibited.

Feature G3. The second notification mode setting means performs the setting at a predetermined timing during a period from when the predetermined abnormality is resolved until the special information that triggered the specific notification becomes subject to the provision determination by the provision determination means. The gaming machine according to feature G1 or feature G2, which performs the following.

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed is set in the period from the resolution of the abnormality to the start of the game round of the special information that triggered the specific notification. Therefore, it is possible to restore the notification mode of the specific information to the mode before the occurrence of the abnormality before the start of the game round of special information, and it becomes possible to suggest the level of expectation before the game round.

Feature G4. The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed based on the notification mode of the specific notification before a predetermined abnormality occurs,
The configuration is such that information corresponding to the notification mode of the specific notification (information regarding the pending image) can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (backup RAM 345),
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to retain information stored in the predetermined storage section when the predetermined abnormality occurs.

In the above configuration, information corresponding to the notification mode of the specific notification is stored in a predetermined storage unit, and the information stored in the storage unit is retained without being lost when an abnormality occurs. Therefore, after the abnormality is resolved, the notification mode of the specific notification can be determined based on the information in the storage section, and it becomes possible to suitably perform the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved.

Feature G5. The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed based on the notification mode of the specific notification before a predetermined abnormality occurs,
In the specific notification, the plurality of types of notification modes are set such that the degree of expectation for the provision corresponding result is different,
If the notification mode of the specific notification before the predetermined abnormality occurs is a notification mode higher than a predetermined predetermined mode (green display mode HMc), the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed is set to the predetermined notification mode. The notification mode is set to the following notification mode (a function to execute the process of step S5407), or the specific notification is not executed (a function to not execute a suspended notice performance after the abnormality is resolved). The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4.

For example, if there is a change in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means due to the influence of an abnormality, there will be an inconsistency between the pre-reading results performed before the abnormality occurrence and the results of the attachment determination performed after the abnormality is resolved. . In such a case, the specific notification indicates a high level of expectation before the abnormality occurs, and if it is re-executed even after the abnormality is resolved, the notification result (result of grant judgment) in the game round and the execution in the game round will be different. There is a concern that the game presentation presented will not match the level of expectation suggested by the specific notification, giving an unpleasant impression to the player. In this regard, in the above configuration, if the notification mode of the specific notification performed at the time of the occurrence of an abnormality is in a mode higher than the predetermined level, indicating a certain degree of expectation, the specific notification is limited to a lower level notification mode. Either re-execute or disable specific notification itself. As a result, it is possible to prevent the specific notification from suggesting an expectation level that does not match the notification results etc. in the game round, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature G6. When the predetermined abnormality occurs, the special information stored in the acquired information storage means can be retained,
If the special information that triggered the specific notification is subject to the provision determination by the provision determination means after the predetermined abnormality has been resolved, the notification mode is set to a notification mode below the predetermined mode by the identification device. A setting means (a function for executing a fourth execution process of a pending notice in the production control device 143) for setting a notification mode of a specific notification or a specific notification determined to be non-execution based on the determination result of the provision determination unit. The gaming machine according to feature G5.

In the above configuration, even if the specific notification is restricted to a lower notification mode and is re-executed after the predetermined resolution, or if the specific notification is not executed, the special information that triggered the specific notification is subject to addition determination. As a result, the notification mode of the specific notification may be reset, or the specific notification that was set to be non-executable may be executed. For this reason, it is avoided that the suggested level of expectation remains low or that the specific notification completely disappears. At this time, since the notification mode is reset based on the result of the grant determination, it is possible to execute the specific notification in an appropriate mode that matches the notification result etc. in the game round.

Feature G7. The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed based on the result of the destination specifying process executed before a predetermined abnormality occurs;
It is configured such that information (fluctuation patterns, etc.) corresponding to the result of the destination identification process can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (RAM 344),
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to retain information stored in the predetermined storage section when the predetermined abnormality occurs.

In the above configuration, information corresponding to the prefetch result is stored in a predetermined storage unit, and the information stored in the storage unit is retained without being lost when an abnormality occurs. Therefore, after the abnormality is resolved, the notification mode of the specific notification can be determined based on the information in the storage section, and it becomes possible to suitably perform the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved.

Feature G8. The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed based on the result of the destination specifying process executed before a predetermined abnormality occurs;
In the specific notification, the plurality of types of notification modes are set such that the degree of expectation for the provision corresponding result is different,
If the identification result of the destination identification means is a predetermined result (win result) before the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality, the notification mode of the specific notification is changed to a higher notification mode (red display mode) than the predetermined mode (green display mode HMc). mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) is allowed,
Either the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed is set to be limited to the notification mode below the predetermined mode (a function that executes the process of step S6303), or the notification mode of the specific notification that is executed before the predetermined abnormality occurs. Features G1 to G7 characterized by comprising a specifying means for not executing the specific notification when the result of the destination specifying process is a predetermined result (a function of not executing the suspended notice performance after the abnormality is resolved). A gaming machine described in any of the above.

For example, if there is a change in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means due to the influence of an abnormality, there will be an inconsistency between the pre-reading results performed before the abnormality occurrence and the results of the attachment determination performed after the abnormality is resolved. . In such a case, the specific notification indicates a high level of expectation before the abnormality occurs, and if it is re-executed even after the abnormality is resolved, the notification result (result of grant judgment) in the game round and the execution in the game round will be different. There is a concern that the game presentation presented will not match the level of expectation suggested by the specific notification, giving an unpleasant impression to the player. In this regard, in the above configuration, the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved is limited to a predetermined form or less, or the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved is not executed if the look-ahead result before the abnormality occurs is the predetermined result. , it is possible to prevent the specific notification from suggesting an expectation level that does not match the notification results, etc. in the game round, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature G9. When the predetermined abnormality occurs, the special information stored in the acquired information storage means can be retained,
If the special information that triggered the specific notification is subject to the provision determination by the provision determination means after the predetermined abnormality has been resolved, the notification mode is set to a notification mode equal to or less than the predetermined mode by the identification means. A setting means (a function for executing a fourth execution process of a pending notice in the production control device 143) for setting a notification mode of a specific notification or a specific notification that is determined to be non-execution based on the determination result of the provision determination unit. The gaming machine according to feature G8.

In the above configuration, even if the specific notification is restricted to a lower notification mode and is re-executed after the predetermined resolution, or if the specific notification is not executed, the special information that triggered the specific notification is subject to addition determination. As a result, the notification mode of the specific notification may be reset, or the specific notification that was set to be non-executable may be executed. For this reason, it is avoided that the suggested level of expectation remains low or that the specific notification completely disappears. At this time, since the notification mode is reset based on the result of the grant determination, it is possible to execute the specific notification in an appropriate mode that matches the notification result etc. in the game round.

Feature G10. If a predetermined abnormality occurs during the execution of the specific notification, and the result of the destination identification process performed before the abnormality occurs cannot be determined after the predetermined abnormality is resolved, the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G9, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a means for restricting execution of (a function that moves to step S6311 when a negative determination is made in step S6308).

In the above configuration, when an abnormality occurs during the execution of a specific notification, if the look-ahead result that is the basis of the notification cannot be identified after the abnormality is resolved, the execution of the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved, so that false expectations It is possible to suppress the suggestion of degree.

Feature G11. The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed based on the result of the destination identification process performed after the predetermined abnormality is resolved,
A game repeat operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means that the game repeat operation is terminated once in the game round. , comprising a game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the main control device 162) for controlling the game time operation to be performed,
It is equipped with a suspension notification means (a function for executing a suspension command corresponding process in the production control device 143) that issues a suspension notification (a suspension image) in accordance with the number of games whose execution is suspended,
The first specific notification means sets the notification mode of the suspension notification as the specific notification in a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode),
In a situation where a plurality of the suspension notifications are being performed, specific information (change location information) that makes it possible to grasp the suspension notification for which the specific notification is being performed is stored in a predetermined storage unit (RAM 314, RAM 344, backup It is configured so that it can be stored in RAM345),
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G10, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to retain information stored in the predetermined storage section when the predetermined abnormality occurs.

In the above configuration, which hold notification is being used for specific notification is stored in a predetermined storage unit, and this information is backed up when an abnormality occurs. It is possible to suitably grasp whether a specific notification has been made in the specific notification.

Feature G12. After the predetermined abnormality is resolved, based on the specific information held in the predetermined storage unit, grasp the suspension notification for which the specific notification was made before the predetermined abnormality occurred; The gaming machine according to feature G11, wherein the specific process is executed for the pending notification that has been received.

In the above configuration, the target identification process is executed after the abnormality is resolved for the pending notifications for which the specific notification was performed before the abnormality occurred, so even the pending notifications for which the specific notification was not performed before the abnormality occurred. Specific notification is performed after the abnormality is resolved, and it is possible to suppress giving an unnatural impression to the player. Furthermore, compared to the case where destination identification processing is performed for all pending notifications that are performed after an error has been resolved, the number of executions of destination identification processing can be reduced, making it possible to reduce the processing load upon recovery. .

Feature G13. After the predetermined abnormality is resolved, based on the specific information held in the predetermined storage unit, grasp the pending notification for which the specific notification was not made before the predetermined abnormality occurred, and The gaming machine according to feature G11 or feature G12, further comprising means for setting a notification mode of the grasped notification for suspension to a normal mode.

According to the above configuration, specific notification is suppressed from being performed after the abnormality is resolved for pending notifications for which specific notification was not performed before the abnormality occurs, and it is possible to match the notification mode before and after the abnormality occurs. Become.

Feature G14. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G13, wherein the predetermined abnormality is a power outage state.

If a power outage occurs during execution of a specific notification, the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, resulting in a situation in which the specific notification that was being performed until then suddenly disappears. In this case, after the player returns from the power outage state, it is assumed that the player becomes anxious as to whether the level of expectation suggested before the power outage will remain even after the power is restored. By applying any one of the features G1 to G113 to such a structure, it is possible to suitably re-execute specific notification after power is restored, and to make each of these features function effectively. I can do it.

Note that the "power-off state" of this feature can also be expressed as "a power-off state in which power is not supplied to the gaming machine from an external power source (commercial power source)."

Feature G15. A game repeat operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means that the game repeat operation is terminated once in the game round. , comprising a game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the main control device 162) for controlling the game time operation to be performed,
It is equipped with a suspension notifying means (a function of executing a process corresponding to a pending command in the production control device 143) that issues a pending notification (a pending image) so that the player can at least recognize the number of pending games before execution;
The specific notification is such that the notification mode of the suspension notification is a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode),
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G14, wherein the plurality of types of notification modes are set in the specific mode.

When a specific notification is performed using a pending notification, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, and an abnormality is likely to occur during the execution of the specific notification. In addition, since it becomes clear which special information is the target of the expectation level etc. suggested by the specific notification, it is assumed that the impact will be large if the specific notification cannot be continued due to the occurrence of an abnormality. By applying any one of the features G1 to G14 to such a structure, each of the features can be made to function effectively, and each of the effects described above can be suitably exhibited.

Note that for each configuration of the features G1 to G15, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B14, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G15, and features It is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configurations of any one of H1 to H11 and features I1 to I12 individually, or it is possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. is also possible. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. an information acquisition unit (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main controller 162) that acquires special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
an attachment determination means (a function for executing validity determination processing, etc. in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
Granting a benefit that allows the player to receive a benefit based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being a granting response result in which the special information to be determined corresponds to the granting information. means (a function of executing the big prize opening opening/closing process in the main controller 162);
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, information corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information is subject to the provision determination, rather than the special information being subject to the provision determination. A destination specifying means for executing a destination specifying process to be specified at a previous timing (a function of executing a pending prefetch process in the main controller 162);
Specific notification means (pending notice in the performance control device 143) that can execute a specific notification (pending notice performance) on a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 75, reservation lamp section) based on the result of the destination specifying process. function to execute the setting process for the first execution of the pending notice),
If a predetermined condition is met (in the case where the first mode switching lottery is won in the eighth embodiment), one of the multiple types of performance states (performance mode A, performance mode B) is selected. A production state switching means (a function for executing production mode switching processing by the production control device 143 in the eighth embodiment) for executing processing for switching from to another production state;
Switching restriction means (mode switching determination by the production control device 143 in the eighth embodiment) that is capable of restricting switching of production states by the production state switching unit when specific notification is being executed. functions) and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed based on the result of so-called look-ahead processing, the specific notification can indicate the level of expectation for the result corresponding to the grant, and suitably arouse the player's sense of expectation. I can do it. Further, since a plurality of types of performance states are provided and switching between these performance states is performed, it is possible to change the player's mood during the game and prevent him from getting bored with the game. In such a configuration, for example, if the presentation state is switched while a specific notification is being executed, the attention to the specific notification may decrease due to being distracted by the change in the presentation state, or conversely, the user may not be able to concentrate on the specific notification. As a result, there is a concern that the performance state may be changed without the player noticing, causing confusion.

In this regard, in this configuration, since the switching of the performance state is restricted when the specific notification is being executed, it is possible to suppress the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the performance state from overlapping. Thereby, the specific notification and the switching of the performance state can be executed in such a way that it is easy for the player to pay attention to each of them, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience. In addition, if the performance state after switching is not suitable for the specific notification being executed, advance adjustment is required to make the two compatible when designing the performance, but with this configuration, such adjustment is not necessary. This has the advantage of reducing the burden during design.

Feature H2. The plurality of types of performance states include a first performance state (performance mode A) and a second performance state (performance mode B) in which the ease with which a specific notification is executed differs from the first performance state. ,
The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the switching restriction means includes means for restricting switching to the second performance state when specific notification is being executed in the first performance state.

In the case of a configuration in which the ease with which a specific notification is executed differs depending on the performance state, if the performance state is switched while the specific notification is being executed, the level of expectation suggested by the specific notification will be different before and after the performance state is switched. There is a risk. In this case, there is a concern that the level of expectation suggested by the specific notification and the actually notified result of the award determination in the performance state after switching may be different, giving an unpleasant impression to the player. By applying the configuration of feature H1 to such a configuration, the occurrence of the discrepancy can be avoided, and it is possible to suitably suppress giving an unpleasant impression to the player.

In addition, in this feature, "a second presentation state in which the ease of execution of specific notification is different from the first presentation state" includes only a configuration in which the second presentation state is set as a presentation state in which specific notification can be executed. It can be understood that this also includes a configuration in which the second state is set as a production state in which specific notification is not performed.

Feature H3. The gaming machine according to feature H2, wherein the second performance state is a performance state set so that specific notification is more difficult to execute than the first performance state.

If the likelihood of execution of the specific notification in the second presentation state is lower than that in the first presentation state, if you switch from the first presentation state to the second presentation state while the specific notification is still being executed, the apparent expectation level There is a concern that this will increase the player's expectations and show the player a higher level of expectation than the actual level. In this regard, in this configuration, from the first performance state where the ease of execution of the specific notification is relatively high (the degree of expectation to which the specific notification corresponds is relatively low), the likelihood of execution of the specific notification is low (the degree of expectation corresponding to the specific notification is relatively low). When switching to the second performance state (where the corresponding expectation level is relatively high), if a specific notification is being executed, the execution of the switching is restricted, so it is preferable that a higher expectation level than the actual one is suggested. It becomes possible to suppress the

In addition, in this feature, "the second performance state is a performance state set so that specific notification is less likely to be executed than the first performance state" means the probability that the specific notification will be executed in the second performance state. It can be understood that this includes a configuration in which the second performance state is set to be lower than that in the first performance state, as well as a configuration in which the second performance state is set as a performance state in which specific notification is not executed.

Feature H4. A feature characterized in that the switching restriction means includes means for restricting the switching of the production state based on the result of the destination specifying process that triggered the specific notification (a function of executing the process of step S7207). The gaming machine according to any one of H1 to H3.

In the above configuration, switching of the production state is restricted based on the result of the prefetch process that triggered the specific notification. For example, when there is a high possibility that a specific notification will be given, such as when a jackpot has been pre-read, based on the pre-reading, the performance state will be maintained until the end of the game of the special information for which the pre-reading was performed. It is possible to adopt a configuration that limits switching between the two. In this case, the switching can be quickly restricted, and it is possible to suitably prevent the execution of the specific notification from overlapping with the switching of the presentation state. Further, with this configuration, the following effects can be expected. If the pre-reading result is a jackpot or the like, it is assumed that an inciting performance such as a preview performance that arouses the player's expectations will be performed even before the special information is subject to award determination. If the performance state is switched during execution of the promotion performance, there is a risk that the promotion performance may become difficult to understand from the player's perspective. At this time, by restricting the switching of the performance state based on the prediction of a jackpot, etc., it is possible to prevent the performance state from switching during the promotion performance, and it is possible to suitably suppress the performance from becoming difficult to understand. Become.

Further, for example, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which switching of the performance state is basically not allowed during execution of specific notification, but switching of the performance state is allowed in special cases such as when a jackpot is predicted in advance. In this case, even though the switching of the production state is not normally performed, the switching occurs, which causes a break in the rules from the player's perspective, and can suggest a jackpot or the like. In other words, it becomes possible to utilize the switching of the presentation state as one of the presentations suggesting the degree of expectation.

Note that the "means for restricting switching" of this feature can also be expressed as "means for varying whether or not to restrict switching."

Feature H5. The switching restriction means sets a predetermined degree of expectation that the result of the destination specifying process that triggered the specific notification will be a predetermined first result (pre-reading result of a jackpot) corresponding to the award corresponding result or the award corresponding result. It is noted that the system is equipped with a means (a function to execute the process of step S7207) for restricting the switching of the performance state based on whether or not it is a predetermined second result (pre-read result of SPSP reach performance) corresponding to the degree of expectation. The gaming machine described in feature H4.

Each of the above effects of feature H4 can be achieved by restricting or allowing switching of the performance state when the look-ahead result is a jackpot result (first result) or a highly expected result (second result). It becomes possible to perform the function suitably.

Feature H6. The specific notification includes a plurality of types of notification modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) so that the degree of expectation for the provision corresponding result is different. is set,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5, wherein the switching restriction means includes means (step S7211) for restricting switching of the performance state based on the notification mode of the specific notification.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which switching of production states is uniformly restricted while specific notifications are being executed, there is a risk that switching of production states may be excessively restricted or the frequency of execution of specific notifications may be suppressed. There is a concern that the significance of providing multiple types of performance states and the significance of having a function to execute specific notifications will be diminished. In this regard, in the above configuration, since the switching of the presentation state is restricted based on the notification mode of the specific notification being executed, for example, in the case of a specific notification that corresponds to an expectation level below a certain level, the switching of the presentation state is not restricted. , it becomes possible to allow such switching. As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive restrictions on switching the performance state and executing specific notification, and it is possible to suitably secure such opportunities.

Feature H7. The limiting means restricts switching of the production state when the notification mode of the specific notification is a notification mode higher than the predetermined mode (green display mode HMc), and the notification mode of the specific notification is a mode below the predetermined mode. The gaming machine according to feature H6, wherein the gaming machine allows switching of presentation states.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to restrict switching of the production state only when specific notification of a predetermined mode or more is being executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive restrictions on switching the performance state and executing specific notification, and it is possible to suitably secure such opportunities.

Feature H8. The plurality of types of performance states include a first performance state (performance mode A) and a second performance state (performance mode B) that is set so that the execution frequency of specific notification is lower than the first performance state. It is
The specific notification includes a plurality of types of notification modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) so that the degree of expectation for the provision corresponding result is different. is set,
The switching restriction means is
When a specific notification is being executed in the first presentation state, a first means for restricting switching to the second presentation state (executes a process when an affirmative determination is made in step S7206) regardless of the notification mode of the specific notification. function) and
If a specific notification is being executed in the second presentation state, a second means for restricting switching to the first presentation state based on the notification mode of the specific notification (a negative determination is made in step S7206, and the processing in step S7211 is function) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H7, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, switching from a performance state (first performance state) in which the level of expectation corresponding to the specific notification is relatively low to a performance state (second performance state) in which the level of expectation corresponding to the specific notification is relatively high In this case, since the switching of the performance state is uniformly restricted, it is possible to suitably suppress the suggestion of a higher level of expectation than the actual level. Conversely, switching from a performance state (second performance state) in which the degree of expectation corresponding to a specific notification is relatively high to a performance state (first performance state) in which the degree of expectation corresponding to a specific notification is relatively low. In this case, since the switching of the presentation state is restricted to only some notification modes, the switching of the presentation state is prevented from being excessively restricted, and it is possible to suitably secure the opportunity for the switching. .

Feature H9. The performance state switching means is
A switching determination means (a function that executes the process of step S7102) that determines whether or not to switch the presentation state based on a predetermined opportunity (switching lottery timing);
a switching execution unit (a function of executing the process of step S7106) that executes the switching of the production state when the switching determination unit determines that the switching is to be performed;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H8, wherein the switching restriction means restricts at least one of the determination by the switching determination means and the execution by the switching execution means.

In the above configuration, when the switching of the presentation state is restricted, at least one of the switching determination of whether to switch the presentation state and the execution process of whether or not to execute the switching is restricted. It becomes possible to limit the amount appropriately.

Feature H10. A game repeat operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means that the game repeat operation is terminated once in the game round. , comprising a game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the main control device 162) for controlling the game time operation to be performed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H9, wherein the specific notification means is configured to be able to execute the specific notification across game rounds.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed over a relatively long period of time, the effect state is likely to change while the specific notification is being executed. By applying any one of the features H1 to H9 to such a structure, each feature can be made to function effectively and each of the above effects can be suitably exhibited.

Feature H11. A game repeat operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means that the game repeat operation is terminated once in the game round. , comprising a game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the main control device 162) for controlling the game time operation to be performed,
It is equipped with a suspension notifying means (a function of executing a process corresponding to a pending command in the production control device 143) that issues a pending notification (a pending image) so that the player can at least recognize the number of pending games before execution;
The specific notification is characterized in that the notification mode of the suspension notification is a specific mode (specific display mode) different from the normal mode (normal display mode), according to any one of features H1 to H10. Game machine.

When a specific notification is performed using a hold notification, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, and the effect state is likely to change while the specific notification is being executed. In addition, because it becomes clear which special information is targeted by the level of expectation suggested by a specific notification, it is expected that the impact of changes in the level of expectation suggested by changes in production status will be large. . By applying any one of the features H1 to H10 to such a structure, each of the features can be made to function effectively, and each of the effects described above can be suitably exhibited.

Note that for each configuration of the features H1 to H11, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B14, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G15, and features It is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configurations of any one of H1 to H11 and features I1 to I12 individually, or it is possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. is also possible. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristics Group I>
Feature I1. an information acquisition unit (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main controller 162) that acquires special information based on the fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 314b) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
an attachment determination means (a function for executing validity determination processing, etc. in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
Granting a benefit that allows the player to receive a benefit based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being a granting response result in which the special information to be determined corresponds to the granting information. means (a function of executing the big prize opening opening/closing process in the main controller 162);
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, information corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information is subject to the provision determination, rather than the special information being subject to the provision determination. A destination specifying means for executing a destination specifying process to be specified at a previous timing (a function of executing a pending prefetch process in the main controller 162);
Specific notification means (pending notice in the performance control device 143) that can execute a specific notification (pending notice performance) on a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 75, reservation lamp section) based on the result of the destination specifying process. function to execute the setting process for the first execution of the pending notice),
Performance state switching means (performance control device 143 in the ninth embodiment) that switches the performance state from one performance state to another performance state among a plurality of types of performance states (performance mode A, performance mode B) function to perform the production mode switching process),
Equipped with
The performance state switching means is
If a predetermined first condition is satisfied (if an affirmative determination is made in the determination process of step S8109 in the ninth embodiment), a specific state (standby state) in which it is known that the production state will be switched thereafter ) (a function of executing the process of step S8111 in the ninth embodiment);
If a predetermined second condition different from the predetermined first condition is satisfied in the specific state (if an affirmative determination is made in the determination process of step S8115 in the ninth embodiment), the effect state is switched. a second means for executing (a function for executing the process of step S8117 in the ninth embodiment);
Equipped with
The present invention is characterized by comprising a restriction means (a function of executing the process of step S8203 in the ninth embodiment) capable of restricting execution of the specific notification when the specific state is present. Game machine.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed based on the result of so-called look-ahead processing, the specific notification can indicate the level of expectation for the result corresponding to the grant, and suitably arouse the player's sense of expectation. I can do it. Further, since a plurality of types of performance states are provided and switching between these performance states is performed, it is possible to change the player's mood during the game and prevent him from getting bored with the game. In such a configuration, for example, if the presentation state is switched while a specific notification is being executed, the user may be distracted by the change in presentation state and pay less attention to the specific notification, or conversely, the user may not be concentrating on the specific notification. As a result, there is a concern that the performance state may be changed without the player noticing, causing confusion.

In this regard, according to the present configuration, execution of the specific notification is restricted in a specific state in which it is known that the presentation state will be switched thereafter, so it is possible to suppress switching of the presentation state while the specific notification is being executed. Thereby, the specific notification and the switching of the performance state can be executed in such a way that it is easy for the player to pay attention to each of them, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience. In addition, if the performance state after switching is not suitable for the specific notification being executed, advance adjustment is required to make the two compatible when designing the performance, but with this configuration, such adjustment is not necessary. This has the advantage of reducing the burden during design.

Feature I2. The limiting means is characterized by comprising means (a function of executing processing corresponding to a suspended command in the production control device 143) capable of restricting the execution of specific notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the specific state. The gaming machine according to feature I1.

With the above configuration, execution of specific notification can be restricted to special information acquired during a period in a specific state where switching of the production state is waited. As a result, the range of special information subject to specific notification restrictions is widened, and it is possible to prevent the opportunities for specific notification from being excessively restricted.

Feature I3. Feature I1 or feature characterized in that the limiting means is capable of limiting the execution of specific notification corresponding to the special information, regardless of the result of the previous specifying process for the special information acquired during the specific state. The gaming machine described in I2.

According to the above configuration, execution of specific notification can be forcibly restricted regardless of the result of the prefetch process. Thereby, it is possible to suitably suppress the effect state from switching during execution of specific notification. Further, since the execution restriction of specific notification is not affected by the result of the prefetch process, even in the specific state (during the standby period for specific notification), the prefetch process can proceed in the same way as in the non-specific state. That is, since there is no need to change the configuration of the prefetch process (destination identification process), it is possible to restrict specific notification during the specific state while suppressing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature I4. The plurality of types of performance states include a first performance state (performance mode A) and a second performance state (performance mode B) in which the ease with which a specific notification is executed differs from the first performance state. ,
Any of features I1 to I3, characterized in that the limiting means is capable of restricting execution of specific notification when the switching from the first presentation state to the second presentation state is in the specified state. A gaming machine described in Crab.

In the case of a configuration in which the ease with which a specific notification is executed differs depending on the performance state, if the performance state is switched while the specific notification is being executed, the level of expectation suggested by the specific notification will be different before and after the performance state is switched. There is a risk. In this case, there is a concern that the level of expectation suggested by the specific notification and the actually notified result of the award determination in the performance state after switching may be different, giving an unpleasant impression to the player. By applying any one of the features I1 to I3 to such a structure, the occurrence of the discrepancy can be avoided, and it is possible to suitably suppress giving an unpleasant impression to the player.

In addition, in this feature, "a second presentation state in which the ease of execution of specific notification is different from the first presentation state" includes only a configuration in which the second presentation state is set as a presentation state in which specific notification can be executed. It can be understood that this also includes a configuration in which the second presentation state is set as a presentation state in which specific notification is not performed.

Feature I5. The gaming machine according to feature I4, wherein the second performance state is a performance state set so that specific notification is more difficult to execute than the first performance state.

If the likelihood of execution of the specific notification in the second presentation state is lower than that in the first presentation state, if you switch from the first presentation state to the second presentation state while the specific notification is still being executed, the apparent expectation level There is a concern that this will increase the player's expectations and show the player a higher level of expectation than the actual level. In this regard, in this configuration, from the first performance state where the ease of execution of the specific notification is relatively high (the degree of expectation to which the specific notification corresponds is relatively low), the likelihood of execution of the specific notification is low (the degree of expectation corresponding to the specific notification is relatively low). Execution of the specific notification is restricted when the specific state is for switching to the second performance state (with which the corresponding expectation level is relatively high). Thereby, switching from the first presentation state to the second presentation state during execution of specific notification is suppressed, and it becomes possible to suitably suppress the suggestion of a higher level of expectation than the actual one.

In addition, in this feature, "the second performance state is a performance state set so that specific notification is less likely to be executed than the first performance state" means the probability that the specific notification will be executed in the second performance state. It can be understood that this includes a configuration in which the second performance state is set to be lower than that in the first performance state, as well as a configuration in which the second performance state is set as a performance state in which specific notification is not executed.

Feature I6. When the specific notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the specific state is restricted by the limiting means, the specific means (production control) executes the specific notification corresponding to the special information after the specific state or after the production state is switched. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing a second setting process for a pending notice in the device 143 and a first execution process for the pending notice.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification whose execution is restricted due to the specific state is executed after the specific state or after the production state is switched, the execution of the specific notification regarding the special information acquired during the specific state remains restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the expectation level from being suggested.

Feature I7. The specifying means is configured to perform specific notification after a specific state or after a change in presentation state based on the result of the previous specifying process performed during the specific state, regarding the special information whose execution of specific notification is restricted by the limiting means. The gaming machine according to feature I6, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with means for executing the process (a function of executing the process of step S8302).

According to the above configuration, the specific notification after the production state is switched is performed based on the prefetch results performed during the specific state, so the specific notification can be performed without having to perform the prefetch process again after the production state is switched. be able to. Thereby, the existing configuration can be used as is for the prefetch process (previous identification process), and it is possible to suppress the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature I8. The specifying means is configured to perform specific notification after the specific state or after the production state is switched, based on the result of the previous specifying process performed during the specific state, regarding the special information for which execution of specific notification is restricted by the limiting means. is provided with a specific determination means (a function of executing the process of step S8307) for determining whether or not to execute the process, and is configured to execute a specific notification when the specific determination means determines to execute the process,
The gaming machine according to feature I6 or feature I7, wherein the specific determination means makes the determination by applying a determination condition (execution winning probability) that is set corresponding to the performance state after switching.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not to perform a specific notification after the specific state or after the switching of the production state, and when it is determined to perform the specific notification, the specific notification is executed. At that time, the above judgment is based on the judgment condition set in accordance with the production state after the switch, rather than the judgment condition when the special information was acquired (the judgment condition set in correspondence with the production state before the switch). Terms and conditions apply. Thereby, even if the performance state before switching and the performance state after switching are different in the ease with which specific notification is executed, specific notification can be suitably performed after the specific state or after the performance state is switched.

Feature I9. The notification mode of the specific notification includes a plurality of types of modes (blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow color display mode HMe) so that the degree of expectation for the provision corresponding result is different. ) is set and
When performing a specific notification after a specific state or after a change in production state, the specifying means applies lottery conditions (scenario lottery table, etc.) set in correspondence to the production state after the change, and selects the plurality of types. The gaming machine according to any one of features I6 to I8, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with means for randomly selecting one of the modes (a function of executing the processing of steps S8310 to S8313).

In the above configuration, since a plurality of types of notification modes are set as the notification mode of the specific notification, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation by assigning a degree of magnitude, and it is possible to more appropriately arouse the player's sense of expectation. Under such a configuration, in order to perform a specific notification after a specific state or after a change in performance state, a notification mode is selected by lottery by applying lottery conditions set in correspondence with the performance state after switching. Even when the expectation level corresponding to each notification mode is different between the performance state before switching and the performance state after switching, it is possible to appropriately perform specific notification after a specific state or after switching of a performance state.

Feature I10. When special information is acquired during the specific state, predetermined information (standby occurrence information) is provided so that it can be understood after the specific state that the acquired special information was acquired during the specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of features I6 to I9, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to store the following information in a predetermined storage unit (reservation storage area 344c of the RAM 344).

According to the above configuration, after the specific state or after the performance state is switched, even if the special information acquired before the specific state and the special information acquired during the specific state are mixed, the special information is stored in the predetermined storage section. Special information acquired during a particular state can be identified based on the stored predetermined information. This makes it possible to distinguish between special information acquired during a specific state and special information that is not, and to process only the special information acquired during a specific state.

Feature I11. A game repeat operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means that the game repeat operation is terminated once in the game round. , comprising a game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the main control device 162) for controlling the game time operation to be performed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I10, wherein the specific notification means is configured to be able to execute the specific notification over multiple game rounds.

In the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed over a relatively long period of time, the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the presentation state tend to overlap. By applying any one of the features I1 to I10 to such a structure, each of the features can be made to function effectively, and each of the effects described above can be suitably exhibited.

Feature I12. A game repeat operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means that the game repeat operation is terminated once in the game round. , comprising a game time control means (a function for executing game time control processing in the main control device 162) for controlling the game time operation to be performed,
It is equipped with a suspension notifying means (a function of executing a process corresponding to a pending command in the production control device 143) that issues a pending notification (a pending image) so that the player can at least recognize the number of pending games before execution;
The specific notification is characterized in that the notification mode of the suspension notification is a specific mode (specific display mode) that is different from the normal mode (normal display mode). Game machine.

When specific notification is performed using the hold notification, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, and the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the presentation state tend to overlap. In addition, because it becomes clear which special information is targeted by the level of expectation suggested by a specific notification, it is expected that the impact of changes in the level of expectation suggested by changes in production status will be large. . By applying any one of the features I1 to I11 to such a structure, each of the features can be made to function effectively, and each of the effects described above can be suitably exhibited.

Note that for each configuration of the features I1 to I12, features A1 to A14, features B1 to B14, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E19, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G15, and features It is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configurations of any one of H1 to H11 and features I1 to I12 individually, or it is possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. is also possible. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

Note that it is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the respective configurations of other feature A groups to feature I groups to each structure of feature A group to feature I group detailed above. However, it is also possible to apply the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball firing means that fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball path that guides the fired game ball to a predetermined gaming area, A game machine comprising game parts arranged within a region, and giving a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage part of each game part.

Reel-type gaming machines such as slot machines: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row at a final stop, and the symbols begin to fluctuate due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Belt-type game machine using a ball (reel-type game machine using a ball): Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row at a final stop, The game is played with the necessary condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is started, and the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to a player is generated, and the invention further includes a throwing device that is provided with a ball tray and performs a loading process for taking in game balls from the ball tray, and a feeding device that performs a loading process for taking in game balls from the ball tray, and dispensing game balls into the ball tray. 1. A gaming machine comprising a payout device that performs the start operation, and configured such that the operation of the starting operating means becomes effective when game balls are thrown in by the throwing device.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine, 62... First operating port, 63... Second operating port, 63a... General electric accessory, 65... Variable winning device, 75... Symbol display device, 143... Performance control device, 162... Main control device, 200... Hold display area, 314b... Hold ball storage area, 344f... Area for return, D... Execution display area, Ga... First hold display area, Gb... Second hold display area, HW... Image for target hold.

Claims (1)

information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
an attachment determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
Granting a benefit that allows the player to receive a benefit based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being a granting response result in which the special information to be determined corresponds to the granting information. means and
A game repeat operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means that the game repeat operation is terminated once in the game round. a game cycle control means for controlling a predetermined notification means so that the game cycle operation is performed;
a suspension notification means for making a reservation notification using the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means so that the player can at least recognize the number of pending games before execution;
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, information corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information is subject to the provision determination, rather than the special information being subject to the provision determination. a means for identifying a destination at a previous timing;
a specific mode means capable of making the notification mode of the suspension notification different from the normal mode based on the specific result of the destination specifying means;
Equipped with
In the specific mode, a plurality of types of modes are set such that the degree of expectation for the grant corresponding result is different,
Means for determining which of the plurality of types of modes the notification mode of the suspension notification should be based on the identification result of the destination specifying means;
means for storing in a predetermined storage area predetermined information that can specify which of the plurality of types of modes the suspension notification is in the specific mode;
Equipped with
In a situation where the notification mode of the predetermined suspension notification is set to the specific mode in the first effect state, the second notification in which the suspension notification or the suspension notification in the specific mode is not executed for at least the predetermined suspension notification. It is configured so that it can be in a performance state,
After the end of the second performance state, at least the predetermined suspension notification is determined based on the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage area without making the determination based on the identification result of the destination specifying means. Means for causing suspension notification to be performed in the same notification mode as the notification mode before entering the second performance state among the plurality of types of modes;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine is configured such that a transition from the first performance state to the second performance state can be executed during execution of a game round.

Images